Pent ay fy oe GLB BA aw more \ PRO SCIENT/7 > ——% = / \ \ / \ Zz 7 5 \\4 7 /\ \\ \ Vy} Ae ENN ee —yeuy \ \ LA — t | | Pet | - = % % ry sy | 2 NE SN \ /, Os y q \ \ \ is V pora ~~ | \\~ A Af / Zz {i= \\\ | | ACH \\ } 1 /fe | Were) \ \ — \ \ O}l/ 4 2. = = ) q et | C | — 3 i} ‘, 1 It > | } \ : 1 tt i } }] \ A Ex - / ie: \ | Ee / YH} / \ \/ / ye | YZ / ; = | Y Vw SALUTE \ SY// y - \ / { .N j y, if ~< \ | / A WZ / \ \ SL AWN ’/ } \ { y al WA — x \ exactly like Stauwros in Greek. It is so even in the Persian language; and so it was among the Romans, according to SENECA ;* crucifixion signified both empaling and extending the arms upon a cross bar; for these two modes of punishment were equally 1 in use among them: a cir- cumstance very little known. Then the holy man was stretched upon the ‘Suda, amidst the lamentations of the surrounding multi- tude, to whom he observed, that he came for that purpose, (to atone with his life for the sins of others). The Sula was suddenly changed into a -Sdla, or tree loaded with flowers ; a pushpa-carsha took place, as usual on such occasions; that is to say, it rained flowers from on high; a celestial car, with divine choristers, came down. to translate into heaven the holy man, who, taking the thief by the hand, said, “thou shalt also be with me in Caildsa ot paradise.” Thus they went to Cai/dsa in the presence of an im- mense crowd, who with uplifted hands, loud huzzas, and tears of joy, testified their satisfaction, at the sudden change. ‘The AZuselmans, and the Mani- cheans, with many other sectaries, will not allow that Curisr was ‘really crucified. Some say, that it was a mere illusion; others allege, that he ‘7 ¢ * SENECA de Consol. ad Marcium, p. ¢. 20. 62 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE disappeared, and went to heaven. The Manicheans, who spread their errors at a very early period, not only in the northern parts of Jndia, but also.in the Pen- insula, always represented Cuuist crucified upon a tree, among its foliage and flowers. Though this legend is not applied to Sa‘ti-va‘HAN, or SA’LA-vA~ HAN, as it is pronounced in the Dekhin ; yet, when the good Peishé-car Brahmen was stretched upon the ‘Sula or Suli, he was really ‘Suli-odhana, or cross borne: and when the Su/a was changed into a Séda or tree, he was certainly ‘Sdla-vahan, or Sali-cahan, he was exalted, or borne upon the tree. Though the pu- nishment of the cross be unknown to the Hindus, yet the followers of Bupp’ua have some knowledge of it, when they represent Deva-Tar, crucified by order of Bupp’HA upon an instrument somewhat re- sembling a cross, according to the account of several travellers to Stam, and other countries. We read in Sanscrit lexicons, that Sa’LIVA‘HAN Was also called Ha’ta a plough: it should be Ha ta-va- HANA, or in composition, Ha‘Li-va'Hana; he who was borne, or crucified upon a plough. The old Indian plough had originally the shape of the letter Y, like the old Latzan Furca, or bifurcated stump of a tree. Toone branch the plough-share was fixed ; and the other branch served as ahandle. In the sta- tues of Visunu, and Bara-ra‘ma, the plough in their hands is represented nearly in that manner; and, from that circumstance, BALA-RAMA is called also Hata, and Has, or he with the plough. The legend of the good Peishé-car Brahmen, 1s found in Major Mackenzie's historical sketches of the ancient kings of Varangola, otherwise I should CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 63 not have presumed to insert it here. It is inter- woven can the history of the first Kings of that country, and of course the compilers by no means entertained.an idea, that it was anterior to the Chrzs- tian Era. As I was mentioning this traditionary legend to some learned Pandits, they informed me, that the same, or one at least very much like it, was to be found in the MJaha-Bharata, the Sahyddri-chanda a section of the Scanda-purdna, and in the Bhagavata also. I produced the books, and they pointed out, the respective pages immediately. I read the whole, and found it illustrated with circumstances of a most extraordinary nature. In the Bhagavata, and its commentary, this legend is only alluded to. In the Alahé-Bharata there is a short account of the transaction ; but in the Sahyddri- chanda the legend is drawn to a very great length,* and. the principal features, and circumstances in these legends, which in reality are but one, are the follow- ing. . _» There appeared, in the Dekhin, a most holy Brah- men, of those called Petshé-caras, Tacshacas, ‘Sdbacas, or handicraftmen, and whose name was Manpa-, vyaH. He proclaimed, that he came for the sole purpose of relieving the distressed ; and that what- ever men claimed his protection, he would readily grant it to them, and even lay down his own life for them. Very many of all descriptions came accord- * Bhagavata; Section 1.p.13. Mah4-Bh4rata; Section 1. 64 CRIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE ingly; and among them a thief, who being pursued by the officers of justice, claimed his protection, which he readily granted, and was really crucified in his room. He then ascended into heaven, and took the thief along with him. This circumstance is otherwise related in the above Puranas. A numerous banditti had taken shelter near the holy man, thinking themselves safe: but the officers of justice arriving, they were seized, and immediately crucified. The holy man was supposed to be a thief, numbered among them, and crucified also. He did not open his mouth, but remained ab- sorbed in holy contemplation, imwardly repeating sacred names, with his aris extended, and uplifted. Whilst on the cross, all the Rishis crowded from all parts of the world, in the shape of birds, to see him, and comfort him. A certain thief, who was also covered with leprosy, and, in consequence of it, deprived of the use of his limbs, was accidentally dropped at the foot of the cross, wrapped up like a _. child in his swaddling clothes. The man, after re- maining there some time, was perfectly cured; and, being irradiated, repented, lived to a good old age, and obtained eternal bliss. A thick darkness over- spread the face of the world; and the animated | creation was in the utmost distress, and consterna- tion. The holy man, being afterwards taken down from the cross, descendedin to hell, and there encoun- tered, and overcame, death, or Yama. . Thena ge- neral renovation of the world took place, under the inspection of BranMa. The holy man, from his having been crucified, was ever since called SuLAs- rua, or the cross-borne, which is synonymous with CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 65 ‘Sativa Hana. If we prefix to this abstract the legends concerning the infancy of Sa‘Liva‘HANA, and the era of his manifestation, we shall have the principal circumstances of the life of our Saviour, either from the true Gospels, or from the Apocryphal ones. There are two singular circumstances in these le- gends: the first is that it was decreed, that the iron should pierce the body of Manp’avyau as well as that of Crisuna, because both were accursed, though guiltless. The second is, that neither Crisuxa nor Manpavyan died, the first in consequence of his wound, nor the second after being crucified; and both are represented as contemporaries. The Christian sectaries in the first ages, and Mu- HAMED himself with the AMJuslemans to this day, highly reprobated the idea of Curist dying upon the cross, and even considered it almost a blasphemy. Crisuna, though guiltless, was involved in the ge- neral curse denounced against his whole tribe, ‘by which all the Vadus were doomed to be pierced with iron, and to die. Neither Crisona nor Manpa- vyau could die; but they were to be breught, as near as possible, to the point of death, that the words of the Muni should not be done away. Besides, Yama, as King of death, has a claim upon every in- dividual, and with regard to some exalted characters, he must be satisfied, and a compromise must take place. But another difficulty arises; Yama cannot condemn a man to die, without some reason; it would be unjust in him, who is also King of justice. All incarnations of the deity, however dignified and exalted, such as that of Crisuna, which is ‘considered as the first in rank, and the most perfect of all; all F 66 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE manifestations of the deity, I say, on becoming flesh, are more or less subjected to the infirmities, and even the weakness of human nature, being Cer- tainly involved, in some measure, in the gloom of maya, or worldly illusion. In this case, YAMA is always sure to find some taint of negative guilt, in consequence of which he can at least bring them to death’s door: and it was found that MANDAVYAuH, in his infancy, had destroyed a feeble and innocent insect, by piercing him either with a needle or witha - blade of grass. This fatal needle was the only thing that Curist ever possessed in this world; yet, how- ever insignificant in itself, it was certainly a worldly implement, and it prevented his admission into hea- ven, according to Aduselmans in India ; neither will: he ever be admitted till after his second manifesta- tion, at the end of the world. Others say, that he was admitted into the fourth. only, instead of the highest heaven, on that account. We read in the Maha-Bharata, that there was a most holy and pious Brahmen called Manp‘avyau, who was making tapasya with his arms uplifted, ab- sorbed in holy contemplation. Some /éptras, lifters or thieves, placed themselves near him, with thetr stolen goods, thinking to be safe; but the King of that place, who was in pursuit of them, ordered them to be crucified, and as the holy man gave no answer, he was numbered among them, and crucified with _ the rest. In the night-time, all the Rishzs, hearing of his misfortune, flocked from all quarters, in the shape of birds, to comfort him. In the mean time the thieves died on the cross; but the holy man te- mained meditating, without uttering a word, with his arms uplifted. The King hearing this, immedi- ately saw that Manp’vyAu was a Rishi, and hastened < ‘CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 67 to take him down from the cross; and then falling at his feet, humbly begged his forgiveness. Imme- diately the Rishi descended into hell, and asked the King of death, and of justice, how he could allow him to be crucified, as he was guiltless, Yama an- swered, that in his infancy he had pierced an inno- cent insect with a blade of grass. The Rishi said, that at that age he could not incur guilt of any kind, and of course drove him out of the infernal king- dom; and willed, that he should be born of the womb of a woman. of the ‘Sudra tribe. This was effected in the house of VicuitTravirya, who was dead; but Dwarpa’yana, or Vya’sa, raised seed to him, through his wife and a handmaid. Yama was born of the latter under the name of Vipu’ra, and remained on earth 100 years, during which the go- vernment of the infernal regions was committed to Aryama’, according to the Bhdgavata. In the Sahyadri-chanda, we have a most prolix account of this momentous event, which I shall give in ab- * stract. ‘ Whatever man listens with due attention to this legend, his sins shall be remitted. In the forest of Dandaca, in the Sahyddri mountains in the Dekhin, on the banks of the river Pranitad, was the hermit- age of Manpavyan, a most holy Rishz, most bene- volent, and no accepter of persons. There he re- mained, between five fires, entirely taken up with holy contemplation, and inwardly repeating sacred names. A numerous banditti, with the goods they had stolen, being pursued by the King at the head of a strong party, took shelter near the holy man. _ As soon as the King came, he ordered them all to be crucified immediately ; and the holy man was num- bered among them, and from his being crucified, he F 2 68 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE was, from that time, surnamed Sulastha, or the cross- borne. “There lived in the adjacent village a most vir- tuous and faithful wife, who was married to a thief, and a debauchee, whose whole body was covered with leprosy: some of his limbs had dropped, and others were deprived of motion. He was very fond of gambling, and his faithful wife used to carry him, wrapped up like a child im swaddling clothes, to a gambling house, where he spent'a great part of the night, when she carried him back im the same man- ner. It was midnight, and the night very dark, she passed near the cross, and stumbling against it, she shook it violently, aa let her husband fall at the foot of it. The holy man being put to great pain, said to her, at the rising of the sun, thy husband shall die. Such are the powers of a virtuous and faithful wife, that she forbade the sun to rise. A thick darkness covered the face of the world, and | lasted 10,000 years, during which the gods and the created beings were in the utmost distress and con- ster nation. ‘ All the gods, with ‘Srva and Brauma, went to Visunu the preserver, who resides on the northern shores of the Vhite Sea, that is to say, in the sacred isles in the west. Wisunu was very much embar- rassed, as he did not wish to reverse the decrees of either of two such exalted characters. After some consideration, he said to the gods, “ ANasuya’, the wife of ATri, 1s most virtuous and faithful; go to her, and prevail upon her to go and speak to the wife of the thief, when they will together come to “some arrangement.” Anasvu’ya’ consented, and after having discussed the matter with her, every thing was CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 69 settled. In her character of a virtuous and faithful wife, she ordered that the husband should live; and Guw’‘avati, the thief’s wife, ordered the sun to rise. Still it was necessary to satisfy the holy Manp‘a- vyan, whose words could not be done away. They agreed, that in future all married women, when it is dark, or night, should remain as in a state of widow- hood, taking off their nuptial dress and ornaments. The benevolent Manp’avyau was easily pacified, the sun rose as usual, darkness was dispelled; the holy man, who had remained all the while absorbed in contemplation, with his arms uplifted, descended from the cross; the leper, at the foot of it, was cured of his disease, lived to a good old age, and obtained eternal bliss; and the two virtuous and faithful wives were crowned with honor and glory. The air was filled with numberless choirs of celestial minstrels, singing heavenly strains, and the whole concluded with a shower of flowers from on high. In the mean time, the animated beings had all pe- rished ; and BrauMa’ was directed to proceed imme- diately to a new creation, and a general renovation of the world took place. II. Christianity certainly had made a great pro- gress in the Peninsula, even at a very early period. The venerable Panranus of Alerandria visited India, about the year 189, and there found Christians, who had a copy of the Gospel of St. Marrxuew in He- brew, which he carried to Alexandria, where it existed in the time of JERomE. Frumerntius, the Apostle of Abyssinia, who had resided a long time in Jndia, and spoke the language remarkably well, preached the Gospel in the southern parts, where he had great influence, and was highly respected, having been for many years prime minister, and regep* of one F"3 70 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE of the Kings, during his minority. There he con- verted many Hindus, and built many churches, and then went to Abyssinia. He came to India with his brother Apesius, along with their paternal uncle, a native of Tyre, who was a Christian, and a very learned man. He travelled into the interior parts of India as a philosopher, and having satisfied his cu- riosity, he re-embarked on his way back with his two nephews; but, happening to put into a certain harbour, in order to get a supply of water, they were, at their landing, suddenly attacked by the na- tives. Many perished, and the rest were carried ito captivity. Among the former was the uncle; but his two nephews were presented to the King, who took particular notice of them, and they were afterward raised by him to the first dignities of the state. ‘They obtained leave to revisit their native country, when Frumenrius was ordained a bishop; and m that character went back to Jndia. At the council of Nice, in the year 325, the Primate of India was present, and subscribed his name. ‘In the year followmg, Frumentivus was consecrated P7i- mate of India, by Atuanasivus, at Alevandria. ‘He resided in the Peninsula, and the Christians there had always a bishop, called the Primate of India. The Christian religion made also some progress in the north of India. Musmus, bishop of dAdul, on the Abyssinian shores, visited the northern parts of India im the latter end of the fourth century, in com- pany with the famous Pattaprus, a Goth from Galatia. When they arrived on the borders of Jn- dia, they were both disgusted with the climate. PaxLLapius went back, but Muszus proceeded to the lesser Bochara; where, it seems, he was more - successful. Yet there was at Sirhind, or Serinda, a seminary for Christians, in the sixth century: for, in ~ CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 71 the year 636, two Monks, who had long resided there, returned to their native country; and being at Constantinople, the Emperor Justintan sent for them, to inquire into the nature and origin of silk, and he prevailed upon them to go back to Sirhind, in order to bring from thence the eggs of the real . silk butterfly. Tuerorurtus, the famous Arian bishop,* was a native of Dicus, now Diu in Gurdét; and, as he was remarkably black, he was sirnamed the Blacka- moor. His Hindu name was probably Deo-pa’‘t, perfectly synonymous with THxorniius in Greek, He flourished in the times of the great Constan- TINE, and of his sons; and he had been sent to Constantinople with others as hostages. T'rom this circumstance it appears, that the inhabitants of Gujrat, who have been always famous as pirates, had ill used the Roman traders. There was a great trade carried on at that time to India, by the Ro- mans; and there was an annual fair held at Batné, for the vent of Indian and Chinese commodities, and there was. a great concourse of merchants, many of whom were settled there. It was situated at some distance from the eastern bank of the Euphrates, and nearly in the same latitude with Antioch. He was very young when he was sent to Constantinople, where he studied, became a Christian, and embraced a monastic life. He was afterwards ordained a bishop, and sent to Arabia by Constantius, in order to promote the interests of the Christian reli- gion. He met with great opposition from the Jews, ~ * See Philistorgius, Sozomenes, &c. } F 4 72, ORIGIN AND DECLINE of THE who Were very numerous in'that country; but stc- ceeded at last, and built three churches, for the be- nefit chiefly of the Roman traders. One was at Taphar or Tapharon, now Dafar, and the metropolis of that country ; the second was at Aden, near the straits of Babelmandel, and the third near the entrance of the Persian Gulf. From thence he went by sea to Diu, his native country, visited several parts of India, comforting the Christians, introducing wholesome regulations, and spreading the errors of Arius. He thence returned to Antioch, according to Suipas, where he lived a long time, highly respected. He accompanied afterwards Consrantius GALLus into Germany, as far as Petavium, now Pettaw in Stiria, in the year 354. . Marutna, a Hindu, and a bishop of Suphara, now Sufferdam, assisted at the Synod of Sides, in Pamphy- lia, in the year 383. He was afterward translated to the bishoprick of JZeyaferkin, on the borders of Mesopotamia, when Yezprsixp I., King of Persia, charmed with his piety, was very near becoming a Christian; and Curysostom speaks highly in favour* of our bishop. According to the Notitia of NiLus Doxopatrius, the Greek Patriarch of Antioch, or- dained a certain Ramocyris Metropolitan of India ; and, from his name, there is every reason to believe that he was also a native of India, where the appella- tion of Ra’Ma-Gir is by no means uncommon. Cosmas INDICO-PLEUSTES, who visited Jndia about the year 522, says, that there were churches and priests, with the whole liturgy, in Ceylon: also on * Photi Biblioth. p. 38, &c. CHRISTIAN RELIGION. IN INDIA. 73 the Afalabar Coast, and in the north west of Jndia. In these countries, says he, there are a vast number of churches. The Mission of St. Tuomas to India, with the surprising progress of the Christzan religion, are facts, m my humble opinion, suthciently ‘authenticated. Jerome, who died in the year 420, speaks of the Mis- sion of St. THoatas to India, as a fact universally ac- knowledged in his time : but I must refer the sceptic reader to the works of Fapricius, and AssEMANNI, unfortunately not to be procured in. this country. But the learned history of the Anglo-Saxons by Mr. Turwer will abundantly make up for this deficiency, in his dissertation on the embassy of the bishop of Shireburn, sent by the great ALrRED, to the tomb of St. Tuomas in India. That the holy Apostle suf-— fered martyrdom in Jrdia, is sufficiently proved: but, at the same time, it is certain also, that his body was afterwards carried back, and deposited at Edessa, as attested by Rurinus, who went to Syrza in the year 371, and remained there twenty-five years. The place, however, where he was first entombed, became a famous place of pilgrimage, where probably, they kept some particles of his body, either true or false: but the chief relic was his blood; which had impreg- nated’ the spot, where he suffered mar tyrdom. This earth was carried, in small quantities, all over the Peninsula ; and, being drank with water, proved most efficacious, in all sorts of diseases, and complaints. His tomb at Edessa was probably destroyed, during the wars of the Emperors of the west with the Per- slans ; or afterwards by the AZuselmans. In the sixth century, Grecory of Tours, the fa- ther of French history, became acquainted with a 74 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE respectable man, called ‘T11z0poRus, who had visited | the tomb of St. Tuomas in Zvdia. In the ninth cen- tury, S1GHELM bishop of Shireburn was sent there also by ALFRED, in consequence of a vow. Now, these two clergymen were too orthodox to worship the tombs and relics of an heretic, a Nestorian of the name of THomas, as has been supposed by many; and they were too near the time, in which he lived, to have been imposed upon. The two Jduselmans, who visited that place soon after SiGHELM, mertion the church of Tuomas, on the Coast of Coromandel, as well as Marco Pozo about the year 1292, long be- fore the Portugueze had found their way to éndia, M. Poto says, that Christians and Afuselmans were very numerous in the Peninsula. The place where he suffered martyrdom, that is to say, the country about J/adras, was seldom visited _ by merchants, as there was no trade. — His body, or tomb at least, was in a small city of that ceun- try, and the native AZuselmans, and Christians, held it in great veneration. Pilgrims, from distant coun- tries, came to visit this holy place; and the earth impregnated with his blood, was given in some beve- rage, to sick and infirm people; and miracles were often performed there. In speaking of Aden in Arabia, he informs us, that “ St. THomas was. said to have preached there, before he went to Maabar in India, where he suffered for Curis, and there reposes to this day his most holy body. In that country _ (Maabar ) the Christians are good soldiers, and re- markable for their honesty.” The inhabitants say, that the holy Apostle was a great prophet, and they call him Avariia, which in their language signifies a holy and pious man, As $ CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 75 Marco Poto has given us the meaning of the word Avariia, it is very easy to reascend to its pure and original form, which is 4v-Aryya in Sanscrit ; and, as he says, that the Christians there were highly respected, being good soldiers, and above all, good and holy men, remarkable for their integrity, they were certainly 4v-Aryyas, or ‘Aryyas, as well as their holy Apostle. The word Avaria is derived from the Sanscrit compound Av-Aryya, from two words per- fectly synonymous, dva, and Aryya. The first is rendered in lexicons, by ‘Sudd*ha, or Pavitra, equally implying holiness, and purity. It js often used in composition, where it enhances the sense. One of the titles of Bupp’ua is Ava-Lécrrta, or Ava-Léca- wa‘, the holy sovereign of the world: Ava-réHa or A-roHA, well seated: This word is very often pronounced Axa, and more particularly so, in the S. W. parts of Jvdia: and the same M. Poto men- tions in the country of Laé, arace of most pious men called Abraiani and Abraiam in the M.S.S. But the editors thought proper to write that word, Abraja- mim; because they conceived that they were Bréh- mens. But itis much more probable, that it is the same word with Avariiam, or Avariia, which he mentioned before. Ab-Aryya in the objective case, im the singular number, makes 4b-Aryyam, and Ab- ‘Aryyan in the plural, in the first case. These Abraia- nt, says he, have in abhorrence lying, theft,- and cheating. «They marry but one wite, and abstain from intoxicating liquors, and flesh. They eat mo- derately, and their fasts are long, and most severe: otherwise, says he, they are idolaters.. He then mentions other idolaters in that country; but from the context, entirely different from the 4é-Aryyas : who it seems, were only degenerated Christians, who 76 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE had in great measure relapsed into the errors of their ancestors, and of their contemporaries. From the situation, assigned to the country of Laé, by M. Potro, these wood “people, with the most au- stere manners, called ‘Ary ‘yyas, seem to be the same with the holy and rigid penitents, and anchorets mentioned in the third century by Protemy in the country of Aridca, a derivative form from ‘Aryya, un- der the name of Ty, abassi Magi, from the Sanscrit Ta- paswi, pronounced Tabdasa in the Tamuli Dialect; and which signifies contemplators, and by inyplication men performing austere penances, like the anchorets in the wilds of Thebes, and Tabenna in Egypt ; which denominations are probably derived from Tapa, aus- terities, and 7apé-van, the wilderness of austerities. The Aryyas are mentioned in the Brahman da-puréd- na* as a powerful tribe of foreigners (Mdléch’ha) liv- ing among the mountains of the Dekhin. ProteMy says, that Ariaca belonged to the Sa- dinci, a strange name certainly for a tribe. I suspect howev er, that it is derived from the Sanscrit Sda’- hana, and that the ‘Aryyas were thus denominated by the native Hindus, in the same manner, that the Por- tugueze were styled is Bengal, T’hachurs, rulers or lords, and the English all over India are called Saheb- locas, or Sahéb- logues, and the most apposite Sanscrit expression for the above epithets is Sadhana: the En- glish ave often styled by learned Pandits, Sadhana- “‘Engriz : and the famous Budsa is often called Sad- hana Bhéja. M. Poto mentions also Abraians on the * Section of the Earth. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 77 Pearl-Fishery Coast ; these were consulted by the fishermen; but, he says that they were bad men, and great sorcerers: and their descendants, to this day, are not much better, According to the acts of St. Tuomas, and other notices, the holy Apostle em- barked at dden in Arabia, in his way to India, where he landed at a place called Halabor, and afterwards Salo-patan, synonymous with ‘Sdlo-pur, or ‘Sdla-bu- ram, Hdla-buram; and now Cranganor. He was well received by Maspevus, called also Srcamus, King of that country, whose son Zuzawn he convert- ed, and afterwards ordained him a Deacon. The Apostle, long after, suffered martyrdom, at a place called Calamina, known afterwards by the name of Maliar-pur, or the city of Pea-cocks, from the Sdns- crit Meytr-pura; and the same which is called Mahar-pha by Protemy. Its present name is St. THOME, salted: by the Arabs, during the middle ages, Betuma, or Beit-Thoma, the house or church of Tuomas. . Maspeus, the name of the King, who kindly re- ceived St. Tuomas, Zuzawn that of his son, and Secamus his own surname, are all Hind? denomina- tions. Muspeus is for Baspeo, the usual pronunci- ation of Vasu-peva in the spoken dialects. Sxrca- mus is for SuGAMa, synonymous with SuGat, and shews that he was a follower of Bupp’Ha: and San- GAMA, even now, is not an uncommon name in India, particularly i in the Penmsula. Zuzawn is for SAJANA, or SEZAN, as written by Father Grorer. It is the name of the father of Bupp’Ha, called also Asana, by the Purdnics ; and the disciple and suc- cessor of Manes, who pretended to be an incarnation of Bupp’ua, was called Sistnivs. 78 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE The place of his martyrdom is called Calamina by Hippotytus, according to Mr. Turner. Calamina is a Tamuli denomination, and literaily signifies earth, and stones, alluding to the nature of the soil. It is synonymous with ” Mana-para, which -signifies the same thing, according to F. BartroLemMeo, a mis- slonary acquainted with both the Sanscrit and Tamuli languages: but I by no means conceive them to be the same place. Célé or Célu in Tamuli signifies a stone, or Callow in French, and Mana earth. “Thus, point Calymere, the true name of which is Cald-me'du, signifies the stony hill. There were two bishops of the name of Hirrotytus, one of whom resided in Arabia, and they were contemporaries. ‘The latter probably wrote the treatise concerning the pere- grinations of the Apostles, and died, A. D. 230.* DonotHeus, another bishop, born in the year 254, wrote also on the same subject ; and some fragments of his work are to be found at the end of the Chroni- con Paschale. There he asserts, that St. Tuomas died at Calamita (Cala-me du, ) which is synonymous with Calamina, or nearly so. Some MManicheans, at a very early period, went to the Malabar Coast: for, according to La Crozr, in his history of Christianism in India, the Christians of that country said, that, before they had sub- mitted to the jurisdic tion of the C atholicos, ov Nesto- rian Patriarch, and of course, before iis arrival of Mar-Tuome’,, there came into their country a cer- tain Mawnacavassar, who preached a new doctrine, seduced the people by his prestiges, and introduced his errors. La Crozer did not understand the mean- * Series Patrum, p. 62. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 79 ing of the word Mannacavassar; but suspected that he was a Manichean. He was called, by the people of the Dekhin, Mani-Cavissar, which signi- fies the bard, the prophet Manz. Cavissar is de- rived from the Sanscrit Cavi, poetry, songs, and Is'wara, lord, chief: Cavrs’aAr, for Cavyrs'wara, signifies the lord of the song, or the chief bard, and is used in that sense in the Peninsula, according to Major MacKkENZIE. The two Afuselman travellers in the ninth centu- ry, and the Nubian Geographer, probably on their authority, declare, that there were many Christians, Manicheans, Jews, and Muselmans in Ceylon: and that the King encouraged their public meetings, and that the learned Hindus of that country used to fre- quent them; and that the King kept secretaries ta write down their respective histories, and the exposition of their doctrines and laws. ‘These two travellers were in Ceylon, at that time; and these meetings, as well as the places at which they were held, are called Charchita by the Purdn'ics, and appointed for the pur- pose of making Charchd, search or investigation, into new dogmas, and opinions, which began to disturb the peace of the country. The Muhamedans in India acknowledge the early establishment of the Christians in that country. Fer- RisuTa, in his general history of Hindostan, says: “ Formerly, before the rise of the religion of Islam, ‘a company of Jews and Christians came by sea into the country (Malabar) and settled as merchants or Pishcéras. ‘They continued to live there: until the rise of the Muselman religion.”* * Asiat. Reg. Miscell. p. 151. 80 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE Ill. The deciine of the Christian religion in India, must be attributed, in a great measure, to the pro- gress, equally rapid and astonishing, of Zslamism, in Syria, Persia, Egypt and Arabia. ‘The Christians in these countries, being in a state of distraction, no longer sent pastors to India; as we are informed in a letter written in the seventh century, and_ still extant, according to Mr. Turner. There we see the Nestorian Patriarch Jususasus of Abiabene, re- proaching the Metropolitan of Persia, with having shut the doors of the episcopal imposition of hands, before many people of Jndia: that the sacerdotai succession had been interrupted, from the maritime borders of Persia, down to Colon, or Coilan, a space of above 1200 Farsangs. This agrees with what is related by AZuselman writers, who say, that in the reion of the Carre AppuLMALEc, in the latter end of the seventh century, the Christians of India sent to Simon, the Syrian and Jacobite Patriarch of Alex- andria, requesting that he would send them a bishop.* The bulk.of the Christians of St. Thomé, according to Mr. Wrepvr, like the ‘Aryyas, consisted of con- verts from the higher classes ; and they were nearly upon the same footing with the Brahmens, and Nairs or nobles. They were originally much respected by the Hindus, and native princes ; and they considered themselves equal in rank with the Brahmens and Nairs, and claimed the same exemptions and priyi- leges, which were granted to them. Many amongst them, preserve till now the manners, and mode of life of. the Brahmens, as to personal-cleanliness, and abstaining from animal food: and the Roman missiona- * See D’HERBELOT’s Biblioth, Orient. v. Hend. u. Sind p- 415. ? CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. $i ries, in general, adopt the same regimen, in order to gain credit among.them. ’ These Christians were then very properly deno- minated “4ryyas and Tacshacas, or Peishcdra Brvh- mens, ‘shese and their Kings probably introduced the Christian Era into their country: but, in the same manner, that their sanctity, and their power in Incia are foretold in the Puran‘as, their fall is equally mentioned. When, says the compiler of the Vayu- Purana, their time is come, the ‘Aryyas will pass away, like the rest. These good ‘Aryyas are called ‘Sdlwas, ‘Sdlavas and ‘Salyas in the Cumdarica-chan'da. These three forms are regular, but the last, according to Mr. Jo1n- VILLF, prevails in the Dekhin, and Ceylon; where they are called ‘Sdlé, Sdlyas, and Chdllyas, because, I suppose, they were the followers of ‘Sa’ta. ‘They are called also in that country, ‘Saca-R@ja-vansas, and. Sdla-cdnsas in the western parts of India. They are now followers-of Bupn’Ha; and in the Penmsula the Christians are included in the general denomination of Bauddhists, and their divine legislator is considered as a form of Bupp’Ha. The chief of the Sdlyas, or Aryyas, is called ‘Aryya@ ‘stra by the followers of Bupp'ua, a Sanscrit com- pound implying as much. He was overthrown by Bupp ua, and yet he is called Pra~Aryya-sira, or Pra-Aria-seria, the venerable Sire, or chief of the “Aryyas. -The Manicheans, and the Muselmans, on the au- thority of the Apocryphal Gospel of the childhood of Curist, and that of St. Barnasas, of which 82 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE they have copies in Arabic, Persian, and even in the western languages of Africa, represent Curisr, as the most complete Tacshaca, that ever existed. He was not only an excellent carpenter and statuary; but he was deeply skilled in the combination of all sorts of colours. For this reason, the ingenious H. Sykr, who has given us a translation of the Gospel of Curisi’s childhood, from the Arabic, and some frag- ments of the original in Greek, says, that dyers in Persia, consider Curist as their patron. It seems indeed, that the greatest part of. the Christians, in Arabia and Persia, were handicraftmen: and that they were accordingly called Peishe-cdras, both be- cause they were really so, and because they were the followers of the great Tacshaca or Peishe-cara. . According to D’Hergetor, the disciptes of Curist were called in Persian and Arabic, Kassarins or Kas- sdruns, and Havdryuns, that is to say, fullers and bleachers: and the priests of the Christians of St. Tuomas are called Kassanars to this day, perhaps for Kassdruns. - Mr. Jornvittr, in his account of Ceylon,* men- tions the arrival of numerous families of these Peishe- ciras, Peish-cdrs, into that island; and declares, that they were all artificers, and handicraftmen, as im- plied by their name, which is truly of Perszan origin ; though used all over Jvdia, in the northern parts of which, it is gencrally pronounced Peishe-Rdz. Ac- cording to T. Hyper, the Pdrsis in India, are all arti- ficers, and those in Karman deal chiefly in woollens, There were formerly Brdhmens in India, says the * As. Res. vol. vii, ps 433, 443. CHRISTIAN RELIGION 1N INDIA. 83 same gentleman, who were handicraftmen, such as weavers, weaving stuffs variegated with gold and silver, and of divers colours. These were called, from that circumstance, Peish-céri-Brdhmens. But they could not be followers of Branma’; for the employ- ments of weavers, and dyers, are absolutely incom- patible with the sacerdotal class: in extreme distress a Brahmen may sell stuffs, but even then, under very peculiar restrictions. They might however have called themselves Brdkmens, at least their priests, without any impropriety ; for every priest is really a Brahmen in his own religion. A few individuals might have become weavers; but then, they would lose their cast, and it is impossible that a numerous body. of Brdhmens should follow that profession. It is then much more probable, that they were not, strictly speaking, Brahmens of Hindu extraction; but the followers of a new religion, introduced. by foreigners, the disciples of a Petsh-cara, and them- selves Peish-caras, or at least many of them. - Their first arrival in Ceylon, happened nearly about 1845, after the famous war between Ra‘wa and Ra’vana, called the Ravana-Yudd@ha. Rama lived thirteen generations before the Cali-yuga, an- swering to about 400 years; and the Cati-yuga be- gan 1370 years before Curist. The completion of the 1845 years will then fall about 77 years after Curist. Visaya, according to Captain Manowy, was the first King of Ceylon, after this period of 1845; during which, the island was desolate, and overrun by Demons. Then, says the same gentleman, the Christian natives insist, that this King Visgaya was crowned 77 years after the birth of our Saviour. This King Visaya was not a Bauddhist: for the. ~ ninth King after him ran the first who embraced 12 : 84 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE that religion; and his name was Deveni-patr. Alt the missionaries to China, were really Tacshacas, or Peish-cara-Brahmens, in the strictest sense of the word, as well as the pious Moravians: and Paut the Apostle was a Tacshaca, and a Peish-cira-Brahmen: and, by the account of Mr. Wrepe in his narrative of the Christians of St. Thomé, they were formerly Peish-caras: for, says he, they were in fact the only, or at least, the principal merchants in the country, tili the arrival of the Arabs. The ingenious Mr. Jornviirr, on the authority of several treatises in the Afagad‘hi language, the names of which he rientions, says, that there were even. Kings among these Persh-cara-Brahmens, in the Pen= insula, to the trumber thirty-five :* from the context, it appears, that some were in a collateral, and others in a successive line. The names of their kingdoms, . or rather their Metropolitan Cities, were Solo-patan ; Maha-patan (now Patan, the Baitana of ProLemy in the Dekhin, on the banks of the Géddveri, to the southward of Dowletabad); Curu (now Cauri, or: Coyr); Gadahare (Gauda); Macanda, (now Mahé- cunda-pillt); and Cés't. This is confirmed in the Bhégavat, Vayu, and Brahman da-purdas, in which it is declared { that Aryyd, or Saca, and ‘Sdlava was the name of a dynasty of Kings in India; and who were to be immediately followed by the mvasion of numerous swarms of other foreign tribes; and of the dynasty of these ‘Sacas, there were five and twenty Kings, according to the Purdn'‘as in the chapters on futurity. Solo-pdtan was a sea-port town, according to Cos-: ft As. Res. vol. vii, p. 443. ¢ In the Sections on Futurity. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 85 mAs InpoPLEusTES, about the middle of the sixth century, on the Pepper or Malabar Coast. There were, says he, five sea-ports famous for trade, Parts, Mangarouth, Salou-patna, Nalo-patana, and Poudu-pa- tana; and all these names are truly Indian. There are several places in the Peninsula, called Parti-guddy, or fort of Parti. Mangarouth seems.to be Alanga- lore, and Nalo-patana, Nali-suram; Salou-patana is called Sooloo-patonow by the people of Ceylon, and had Kings of its own of the Peishe-caré-Brahmen tribe, or Christians. ‘Salo-patan, otherwise ‘Sdlo-buram, and ‘Sdlo-pur, is the same with Héla-bor where St. Tuomas landed, and its present name is Cranganore. There he con- verted ‘Sayawna son of the King of that country. We read in the history of the Christians of St. Tuomas, that they had Christian Kings of ther own ; the first of whom, was called Batrartre, from the Sanscrit Bali-arhat. After several successions, one of these Christian Kings dying without male issue, adopted the King of Dzamper for his son, according to the custom of the country, though he was a hea- then, and appointed him his successor, That a society of Peishé-caras, weavers, and handi- craftmen, however numerous, should have Kings of their own, is inadmissible; unless they were upon such a footing, as the Christians were tormerly in the Peninsula. St. Tuomas converted the son of the King of some country on the coast of Malabar ; and the Puranas declare, that there was a dynasty of ‘Aryya Kings. The name of Avdryya is not totally unknown in G3 : 86 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE the Peninsula: they have still in great veneration, a cer‘ain Sibyl of divine origin, most pious, and good, called ‘Avya‘r; and who lived in the ninth century. A translation of some of her moral sentences, is in- serted in the seventh vol. of the Asiatic Researches, It seems she was conversant with the Christians of that country ; for among her proverbs, there are some, that are far from being in the usual style ot the Hindus. | The descendants, or followers, of ‘Sa’LAVA‘HANA are mentioned in the commentary upon the Cadpa- druma. In religious matters, and particularly in the east, they generally call the followers of any reformer, or legislator, his descendants. In the above com- mentary '‘Sa’rAva’HANA is declared to be a Jaina, meaning, either a follower, or aform of Jina. He is called there also, a ‘Srdvaca, or ‘Sévaca; that is to say a Peish-cara. In the western parts of India, as in Gurjar‘dt, they call all tradesmen, banyans, &c. ‘Sd- wacas, or Sabacas. The famous Carica’cHa‘RyA is supposed to have visited ‘Sa’Lava'Hana, at Pratish- tanain the Dekhin; and, according to the above com- mentary, he was born 993 years after the ascension of Jina, or 43 years B.C. “He travelled all over the Peninsula, teaching, and explaining the doctrine of INA; and particularly among the ‘Sdbacas. He is supposed to have taught ‘Sa’Lava’ HANA some pecu-_ liar rites, to be observed at the full, and new moon ; which, he promised, he would enjoin his descendants, or followers to observe. The posterity of a ‘Sébaca, or Peish-cdra, particularly in India, were necessarily Peish-caras, and ‘Sdbacas. A patronymic denomina- tion was also given to them; for they are called ‘Sé/- was, Sdlavas, aud ‘Sélbas in the Cumarica-c’handa, an- swering to the Arabic expression, of Ashab-al-Salib, CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 87 or Salb, the followers of the cross, or of him, who was crucified. According to A. RoceEr, there is still in the Dekhin a considerable tribe of men called ‘Sa- lavadis, trom the Sauscrit ‘Sdlavadicas, the Sdélavas or followers of Sa’‘La. In the Véyu-purdn‘a, they are called Sacas, and in that passage, this name is used in the room of ‘Aryya te be found in other Puranas; and it is declared there, that they would appear with the dnd’hras and Pulindas ; the dynasty of the first began in the year 191 after Curis: -and it is obvious from the context, that the dynasty of the Sacas, ‘Aryyés, or Salcas was contemporary with those of the dnd’hras, and Pu- lindas ; though we cannot fix precisely the time when it began. By Pulindas, they understand dynasties of Kings from the lowest and vilest classes in India, The descendants, or followers of King Saca, are called by Mr. JornvitLE, and Captain Manony, ‘Saca-Raja-Vansas, a true Sanscrit expression, imply- ing as much: and we have seen, that there are still in the Dekhin, and Ceylon, some families or tribes so called to this day. I was greatly surprised, sometime ago, to hear from most respectable Pandits, that there was in the district of Benares, and in the province of Oude, a tribe of Rajaputras, who boasted of their de- scent from Sa’Lava’HANA; and that the chief of that tribe was considered as a living hereditary deity, and a form of Visunu, like their Sire Sa‘Lava‘Ha- wa. What is still more surprising, is, that this chief does what he can to conceal his divinity, and to make people believe, that itis not so. But in despite of his endeavours, some peculiar circumstances will occasionally betray him; and such an instance, it is said, happened last century. They are descended 88 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE more probably from the followers of another SA‘LA- VA'HANA, a Manichean, or Maw es’himself, as T ob- served before. . 1O83 rere " ‘ < ‘ - As these Rajaputs call themselves Vais'yas, syno-— hymous with Sravaca or tradesman, it seems, that they orginally followed that protession. Probably some will say, that if the ‘Saca-Réaja-Cumdras, had been once Christians, they wust of course have lost their cast. This might be the case now: but; 1 do not believe it was'so formerly; aud then, the Pu rdwas afford us immediate remedy, for in the chap- ters on futurity, it is declared, that the Kines of Magad’ha would raise men of the lowest classes to the rank of Brahmens, and other superior casts; ex- actly like Jrrozoam, and other Kings of Ysrael. This prophecy was to take place, after the fall of the Andhra dynasty in the seventh century.* Besides, a whole district, a whole tribe, might em- brace another religion, without losing cast; the full exercise of its privileges being always confined to theinselves. For we must not think, that persons of the same cast, will communicate one with another all over dndia, and eat together, or of food dressed by another. The communication is confined to a few families in their neighbourhood, whom they know to be strict observers of the rules relative to their cast. The rest of the tribe are in a great measure outcasts to them. This almost incredible adherence to the punctilio of casts, was in a great measure ow- ing probably to the rapid increase of the religion of Bopp’, then afterwards of that of Curist, and i * See Brahman'da and Véyu-purdn'as, Section on Futurity. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA, 89 Muuamen, and of the heresy of Manes, in the N, W. parts of Jndia, and also on the coast of Malébar, ' and Ceylon. Among the Christians in the Peninsula, be they Protestants, Roman Catholics, or Nestorians, there are Braéhmens, who are neatly upon tne same footing with the other Brdhmens: and, when ac- quainted with them, such civilities, as are usual amon well bred people, are never omitted. The Christian Brdhmens most rigorously abstain from beef, and animal food, though they say they can eat ofit. The greatest part of the Bradhmens in Persia, - Turan, and near Baku, eat beef, but never of the flesh of the cow, like many of the L:gyptians of old. There are several of these Brahmens settled at Benares ; and they are acknowledged as such, though not much respected, being nick-named V’éda brash'tas, or break- ers of the Védas; for a Brahmen si.ay be a heretic Without losing his cast, which is not so much con- nécted with his creed as might be supposed. In short, the Hindus acknowledge themselves, and it appears from their sacred books, that they ate beef formerly; but. they took care to inform me, at the same time, that they never ate of the flesh of the cow. Tt is deciared, that there are no Cshettris now, or in other words, that the second class no longer exists. Yet those, who have been raised to that rank from the lowest classes, are treated as such by every Brahmen. We read in the institutes of Menu, that all the C’hasyas, or those who inhabit the snowy mountains, have lost their cast, Yet they must have recovered it; for there are numerous families of Brahmens in. those countries, particularly in Almorah or Comanh, and much respected at Benares, who by no means consider the bulk of the inhahitants, who are Chasyas, 90 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE as gutcasts. They assured me on the contrary, that they considered them as belonging to the second class, and that they are treated as such by every Brahmen, in despite of Menu and of the Purdnicas. Let us suppose some extensive district in India solely inhabited by Europeans, and that these were entirely willing to conform, in every thing, to the re- higion of BrRauma, and the manners of the Hindus. Their resolution would be highly approved. of by every Bréhmen; and they would soon find many to . officiate, and pray for them, on their being of course paid for their trouble. Let us add to this, numerous grants of land, villages, honours, privileges, and an entire submission to their will, they would soon treat them as Cshettris, as they do the present Raputs. It is true, they could neither intermarry, nor eat with the other Hindus, but the four great classes ne- ver intermarry, nor eat, but with particular families of the same tribe in their own class. After a few _ generations, they would say of these Europeans, what they say of the present Rayputs and Méhrattas, that they were not originally Cshettris nor Brdhmens, and are a spurious race. This would not do, it is true, for a single individual, who would find himself insulated, and lost entirely, unless he assumed the character of an anchoret or penitent. I had long conversations with learned Pandits, on the subject, and this was their opinion, and that even. they might have Brdhmens of their own, by studying their sa- cred books, and obtaining the necessary knowledge, which would not be attended with iuch difficulty.. With regard to their ancestors having ate beef, this could be no objection, as there is nota Hindu, whose ancestors, at some remote period, it is true, did not eat beef, and every sort of animal food, except CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN: INDIA. 91 perhaps a few unclean sorts. Whatever man, say the learned, performs the duties (Carma) of a Cshet- tri, him you must consider as a Cshettr?. But what should put an end to the controversy, at least in my humble opinion, is that the M/dhrdttas, a numerous and respectable tribe of Brahmens, and Cshettris, axe acknowledged, all over India, to be foreigners from the western parts of Persia, who left their native country not 1200 years ago, as I shall shew in the appendix. Even though this alleged origin of the Mocirdttas should prove untrue, yet the universal acknowledgment of it 1s very much in favour of my assertion. The followers of Brauma’, and those of Bupm’na, were by no means indifferent to the progress of fo- reign creeds. ‘They often ordered conferences to be held, where the principles of these religions were inquired into, the history of their legislators, &c. This was practised in Ceylon in the ninth century, according to Renaupor’s two Muselman travellers ; and Bréhmens unanimously acknowledge, that this was their practice formerly, with regard to the Baudd’- hists ; and that these conferences were called Charché, or investigation, search, Cherche in French; and that towns appointed for that purpose, were called Charchita-nagari, one of which is mentioned in the Cumarica-chanda. ‘In the year 3291 of the Cali- yuga (or 191 after Curisr) King ‘Supraca will reign in the town of Cua‘RcHITA NAGARA, and destroy the workers of iniquity.” ‘This pomts out a persecution in religious matters, at a very early period. These conferences ended in bloodshed, and the most cruel and rancorous persecution of the followers of Bun- DHA, even from the confession of the Brédhmens themselves. They were tied hand and foot, aad 92 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE thus thrown into rivers, lakes, ponds, and sometimes whole strings of them. Be this as it may, the fol- lowers of Bupp’Ha did not fail to retaliate whenever jt was in their power; for Dr. F. Bucnanan informs me, that m the Dekhin the Jainas make their boast of the cruelties that they exercised at different times — upon the Brdhmens, and that there are even inscrip- tions still extant in which they are recorded. ‘This general persecution was begun bya Brahmen called CuMA’RILLA-BHATTA CHA’RYA, and carried on after- wards by Sancara’cua Rys, who nearly extirpated the whole race. It is difficult to say when this took place; but as there were vast mumbers of Baud@hists in the Peninsula, in the Gangetic Provinces, and Gujar@t, in the ninth, tenth, and eleventh centuries, this general proscription could not of course have taken place at these pe- tiods. It is very probable that the Christians were occasionally involved in these persecutions, as the Christians of St. Tuomas are considered as Baud- dhists inthe Dekhin, and either their divine legisla- tor, or his apostle Tuomas, is asserted to be a form of Bupp Ha. The Hindus, and more particularly the followers of Bupp’Ha and Jina, fancy, that there are hidden ~ mysteries in certain numbers. It was so formerly in the west, among the heathens, the Jews, and the Christians. All over the world, the numbers one and three were considered as radical; and their combina- — tion was subject to whimsical rules. They are by no means to be added together, for ome and three, jn a mystical sense, are but one and the same thing. “We might suppose, that the square, and cube of three would be sacred numbers; but it is by no- means the case, Light is the mystical number, and —— t= * mae se ee, ‘ CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 93 three times eight, or twenty-four, is a sacred num- ber; and being multiplied by ‘¢hree, the product is mystical also, and the number of years of Jina’s life. The reason is, that one stands in the centre “representing Jrna, who is three and one. Light forms sprang from this toward the eight corners of the world, and each of these is three and one: but we cannot say, that these eight forms, with the original oze in the center, make either niné, or twenty-seven; for though each collateral form is per- fectly distinct from each other, yet it is individually the same with the original one. Sectaries, at an early period entertained accordingly strange notions concerning the number of years that Curtstr lived concealed, performed the duties of his ministry, and lastly about the length of his life. They conceived that every circumstance relating to so’ exalted a character, was mysterious. Some insisted that he lived thirty, thirty-three, forty, and others nearly, but not quite fifty years. StTerpHanus Gosarus has collected many of these idle notions, in the extracts -made of his works by Puortivs. Iy is not obvious at first, why ‘Sa‘tIva‘HANA is made to have lived eighty-four years; but it appears’ to me, that this number was in some measure a sacred period among the first Christians, and also the Jews, and introduced in order to regulate Easter- day; and it is the opinion of the learned, that’ it began five years before the Christian Era, and the fifth year of that cycle was really the fifth of Cunis?, but the first only of his manifestation to the world, according to the Apocryphal Gospels; and it was also the first of the Christian Era. In this manner~ the cycle of eighty-four years ended on the 79th of the Christian, which was the first of ‘Sa’tiva- ‘ 94 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE HANA’S Era, and was probably mistaken for the pe- riod of his life. It is mentioned by St. EprpHantus, who lived about the middle of the fourth century.* IV. The followers of Bupp’Ha, in Siam and the Burman Empire, mention the wars of their legislator with Deve-Ta’t, who, they say, is the legislator of the Christians. He is the same who is called a Tac- shaca also by the Hindus, and who manifested him- self in the first year of the Christean Era. They say that he was either a brother, or a relation of Bupp’Ha; or in other words, he was a collateral form of Buppn’Ha. They acknowledge some confor- mity between his doctrine and theirs; because, as they say, his disciples borrowed many things from Bupp’HA. He allowed them, however, to kill and eat all sorts of animals, and seduced very many of the disciples of Bupp'Ha; and, aspiring to sove- reignty, he waged war against Samawn‘a-Gau- taMa. He appeared at the head of a new sect, and engaged several kings and nations to join him. He. had the gift of miracles, and asserted that he was a. god. Dr'vz-Tar being several times worsted in this war, made overtures of peace, and Saman’a-Gav- TAMA consented, on condition that he would sub-. scribe to three articles which he was going to pro- pose. These were to worship, first, God; then his. word; and thirdly, the person who imitates di-. vine perfection, or,- in other words, to worship Bupp ua. This last article was rejected by Dr'vE- Ta’r or his disciples, and they went to war again; when De've-Ta’t was defeated in the forest of ‘Salatiyah in the Peninsulat He was taken pri- eS * See BASNAGE’s History of the Jews, page 436. English translation. i 4 This is noticed also in the As, Res. vol, vis p. 269. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 95 soner, and empaled alive, with his limbs trussed up, - upon a double cross; and in that state hurled into the infernal regions. Saman’a-Gaurama, however, foretold, that in the end he would really become a god. Bupp’Ha, or Gautama is also represented waging war with Pra-Arra-Serta, for Pra-Aryya- ‘Stra, the venerable chief, or Sire of the Aryyds or Christians ; and another chief of them, called Pra- Swane, or Pra-Swana, from his loudly preaching against the doctrine of Gauramua. Bupp’Ha and De'va-Twasu1'a’ are made contemporaries in this romance: but this can be no objection ; for it is only in allusion to the wars of their followers in subse- quent times. The learned are very well acquainted, that this mode of writing history once prevailed in the west at a very early period. The beginning of the seventh century is remark- able for the introduction of new eras among the civilized nations of the world. The Christian Era was introduced at Constantinople in the year 526; but, as the learned observe, it was a hundred years before it was generally adopted, and this was in the beginning of the seventh century. 7 In Persia, the era of YezDEGIRD began in the year 632; that of the Hera was introduced by Omar in the year 638. Those of Siam with the Burmdhs have an era beginning in the year 638; but as they borrowed every thing relating, either to their religion or their astronomy, from Ceylon, and the Peninsula of India, this period must have origi- nated there. The Japanese consider the ascension of the latter Bupp'Ha, under the name of Guso-sosaTz, as a memorable epocha; and it happened in the year 631, because they say that he lived only fifty-nine 96 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE years, and he was born in the year 572. According to the ‘Satrujaya-mahatmya, tne translation into heaven of Guso-Bosatz or Gasa-Vastsuta, that is to say, he who abides in the mortal frame of an elephant, and called in the above treatise Ski-HASTI-S'ENA, 2 compound nearly of the same import, happened three years, eight months and fifteen days before the time of the Panchmaras, or Mvnamep and his four asso- ciates; that is to say, he died in November 617. But if we suppose with the Pawran‘ics, that he lived sixty-six years, his ascension will fall in the year 638, according to the computation of the Burmans and Siamese. This Bupp ua was born in the year 500, and reigned sixty-six years, according to the Cumdrica-chanda, in some copies of which we read 62 and 64; but he appears to be the same with Gasa-VasisutA, both being represented as the last" incarnation of Bupn’Ha; the Japanese having mis- taken the era of his manifestation as a god, or his death, for that of his manifestation as a man. Thus the Jainas in India say, that their legislator died in the year 1036 B.C. which the divines of Tibet consider as the year of his birth. The Christians of India, in the seventh century, were actuated by the same principles, and chose the supposed yeat of Curist’s ascension for the first of their new era. They were at that time in Jndia in the most. profound ignorance, through the want of — pastors, as we observed before; aud their religion was a strange medley of the Chrisizan, and of that of. Bupp’Ha, which prevailed at that time in the Peninsula ; insomuch, that M. Poxo considered some of the ‘Aryyas, in despite of their virtues, as idolaters. ‘SALI-VA’HANA, or De'va-Tat, was considered as a brother or relation of Bupp’uA. » CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 97 Our blessed Saviour entered on his mission when thirty years of age, like Bupp’Ha ; and like him, he was born of a virgin: the additional years were introduced from their mistaking the ecclesiastical cycle of 84 years for the period of his life ; and like them, the Christians made a point of reckoning their era from this supposed year of his ascension. This was not peculiar to the Hindus; the Christians of Egypt chose the various manifestations of Curisr, during his ministry, and the different events of his life, in preference to that of his birth. According to the appendix to the Agni-purama, the era of ‘Saca, or ‘SA‘LAVA‘HANA, was introduced into India, or began to prevail, in the year corresponding to that of Canisr 676, exactly 135 years after the death of a certain VicramaDitya. The bloody wars be- tween these two exalted characters, are supposed to have been only about their respective eras; and ViI- cRA MADITY4, in his dying moments, thought of no- thing but his era; whilst it is the general opinion, that it began at his death, and of course he could not be the author of it. One would imagine that ‘Sa’LAVA/HANA’S era would have begun the moment that he became a ‘Saca, by putting to death another ‘Saca, such as VicraMA’DITYA was; but it happened otherwise: ‘Sa’‘LAvAHANA thought no more of his own era, which was introduced after his death, by his followers, or adherents in the Dekhin; for it never was used in any other part of India except Bengal. It is therefore my humble opinion, that the Chris- tian Era was introduced, and new modelied in India by the Christians, and the Aryya, or Salacva, Kings, on the decline of the Christian religion; and used by them and other Hindus in their intercourse with them. 3 q H 98 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE It is supposed, that the Braéhmens are too proud to borrow any thing from their neighbours ; but this is by no means the case; and whenever they are ac- quainted with the circumstance, they will most can- didly acknowledge it, particularly astronomers and hysicians. . J After the conquests of ALexanper, and for many centuries after, there seems to have been an eager desire in India for foreign arts and sciences, curiosi- ties, instruments of music, wine, and even beautiful damsels from Greece. According to Eran and Dio Curysosrom, the Hindus, as well as the Persians, had the works of Homer translated into their native languages: and Puitostratus says, that they were well acquainted with the ancient heroes of Greece ; and that they had statues made by Grecian artists. And this is very possible, as the Greeks of Bactriana were in possession of the Panjab for more than a hundred and iwenty years. The Kings of Magad’ha repeatedly wrote to the successors of ALEXANDER for sophists, or learned men, from Greece ; and lately the famous Jaya-Srnua, Rdja of Jaypur, wrote to the King of Portugal for learned men, and he had several sent to him; and the King of France sent him also an astronomer, P. Bouprer. He had the elements of Evuciip translated into Sanscrit, part of which fell into the hands of Mr. Davis. There, it is said, that this valuable book, originally written by Vis‘vacarMa, or Twasur'a’, the artist god, had been lost for many thousand years; but was rescued from obscurity by the extraordinary efforts of Jaya- SINHA. He had also another voluminous treatise, called the Sidd@’hanta-Samrat, on geometry and astronomy, en- CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 99 tirely compiled from various authors from the west. The greatest part of it is now in my possession, and was procured at Jaypur by Colonel Cotutns, resi- dent with Srnpra. Mr. Davis informs me also, that at the same time the work of THEropostus, on the sphere was translated into Sanscrit. As these thefts are not recorded, the circumstance is hardly known now to any of the natives. JAya-sINH’A had also an extract made of all the constellations in SENEx’s celestial planisphere, and instead of 72 aste- risms, he had 144 made out, by splitting all those that would admit of it into two or three new ones. The royal oak of course has found its way there, under the name of Jula-vricsha, the radical or primeval tree; and the Jndian is called ‘Sarendra, or the chief of archers; and as the Aindus have no altars, the constellation of that name has been con- verted into a footstool. There is a famous astronomer, whose works, or at least part of them, are still extant, well known all over India, and declared to have been a foreigner, as implied by his name of Yavana‘cua’RyA, or the Grecian philosopher, and who lived, according to tra- dition, a little before the time of Munamep. The Hindus give the name of Yavanas, or Greeks, to the inhabitants of the countries to the west of India, probably because the Greeks were once masters of Persia, and afterwards the seat of empire was fixed at Constantinople. From the account they give of him, it does not appear that he was a native of Greece, but only deeply skilled in the learning of the Greeks, having probably attended the university at Alevanaria. They say that he was a Bréhmen, born in Arabia, H 2 100 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE the inhabitants of which country were at that time followers of Branuma’, and that the Sanscrit lan- guage was studied and well understood there by the learned. He came to Jndia, where he resided for a long time, and in his old age he returned to his na- tive country, in order to end his days at Mécshés- wara-sthan, or Mecca, in the performance of reli- gious duties. Dr. Buchanan informs me, that he saw in the Dekhin several tribes of Jainas, who in- sisted that they came originally from Zecca or Ara- bia ; and that they were expelled by Munamep, or his successors. There are certainly followers of Brauma’ and Brdahmens to this day in Arabia ; and I am credibly informed, by natives of that country, that in the inte- rior parts there are still many idolaters, whom they suppose to be followers of Brauma’, or Hindus, as they call them. The greatest part of the old names of places in Arabia are either Sanscri¢t or Hindi: and PLiny mentions two celebrated islands on the south- ern coasts of Arabia, in which there were pillars with inscriptions in characters unknown, I suppose, to the Greek merchants who traded there: but these were probably Sanscrit ; as one of these two islands was called Jsura or Is'‘wara’s island, and the other Rinnea, from the Sanscrit Hriniyd, or the island of the merciful goddess. The Hindus claim Mecca as a place of worship be- longing to them, and certainly with good reason. They say, that they were allowed to go and worship there for several centuries after the introduction of the religion of Munamep; -but were afterwards positively forbidden even to approach this sacred place. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 101i I always conceived, that there was only one sage of the name of YavaANacHARYa, Who was consi- dered as a foreigner; but having consulted lately several learned astronomers, they informed me, that there were no less than five who are considered as foreigners. Their names are C’natta, C’xutta, Romaca, Hitxa’sa, and Disuawa ; these, it is said, were Vévanas or Greeks. They certainly have very little resemblance with any Greek proper names, which we are acquainted with. Be this as it may, they are all supposed to have returned to their na- tive country, with an intention to end their days at Mecca. From this circumstance, I suspect that they were Greeks from the famous university of Aleran- dria, and Mecca was at a very early period a famous place of wotship.. Guy Partin mentions a medal of ANTONINUS, in which it is called Adoca the sacred, the inviolable, and using its own laws: and of this I took notice in my essay on Semiramis. . The: uni- versity at Alevandria was in a flourishing state, from the time of the Protemirs to the fourth and fifth centuries, and even till the time of MunameEp. Hindus often visited that famous city ; for Pronemy conversed with several in the third century, who ap- pear to have been well-informed men. These five foreign astronomers. wrote many books, but few remain; and the reason, inthe very words of my learned friends, is, that the substance of these treatises having been incorporated into more jrecent tracts, they were of course neglected, and afterwards lost. This acknowledgment from .b7dhmens surprised me not a little; but I find that astronomers in gene- ral, and learned physicians, are much more tractable and conversable than the other Hindus. H 3 102 CRIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE Whatever may be our opinion about these five strangers, their names, and their country; yet from such an acknowledgment, and more particularly so from Hindus, we may rest assured, that there is some truth in it. The Hindus reckon three and twen- ty famous astronomers, eighteen of whom were na- tives of India ; and the five others, foreigners. These they insist were natives of Arabia: and if so, they were called Yavanacharyas, not because they were of Grecian extraction: but because they were skilled in the learning of the Greeks. Indeed their names, or rather surnames, appear to be Arabic. HALiacE, and CaTHANn are names well known to Arabian’ writers: and Esn-Drissawn is the name of a famous impostor born at dessus. Of Romaca or the MrecwHa’vata’ra, I took particular notice before, and DisHan is the name of Omar in several copies of RaGuu-na’THA’s list; and it was he who first established’ the era of MuHAmMeEp in the year of Curist 638, and for this reason, they supposed him also to be a great astronomer, as well as Romaca. There is another astronomer, called Cancua or Caweuam, and Cancuen, whom the Hindus sup- pose to have been a foreigner; yet Muselman writers say, that he was a Hindu, and perhaps he lived on the western frontiers of India. By D’Herse ort he is called Cancan-alt-Hinpi, KenKrErR, Krencar and Cancua. He wrotea treatise on astrology, in Hindi or rather Sanscrit, which was translated into Arabic, -and is said to be extant. He is perhaps the same with Mancuen, who, according to D’HERSsrxLo7, made so conspicuous a figure at the court of Harun- at-Rasnip, about the year 808, asa physician. The famous Danpamis or Dama-Damis is unknown to CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 103 the Hindus; but the Muselmans in India call him Tumtum, and D’Herserot Tuomrxom-ar-Henpt, He is noticed by Aput-Fazix in his preface to tne third volume of the Ayin-Acberi. He was probably thus called, because he lived upon a Dumdum, or Dumdumé, which is a platform of earth, now more generally called a Chebootra or Thand, trom Sthana a stand. As the names, or rather the surnames of these fo- reigners, are in great part derivable from the Arabie, and from no other language, it is not improbable, but that several, if not all of them, were from Ara- bia, whatever their religious tenets might have been. The first of them, according to tradition, lived a little before Munamep, when the schools of Aler- andria, and Berytus in Phenice, were still flourishing. From that period, learning began to revive among the followers of MunaMmep; and of course this learn- ed man flourished, from the latter end of the sixth, or from the beginning of the seventh century to the time of At-Mamun, who reigned at Balkh in the tenth, and till the invasion of India by the Musel- Mans. The Hindus, at an early period, were famous for their knowledge of astronomy and astrology. The Jatter is entirely grounded upon the former ; and the accuracy of the decisions, and predictions, depends entirely upon the precision, with which the conjunc- tions, oppositions, and the various aspects of the hea- venly bodies are ascertained. In the first century, Hindu astrologers were in high estimation and repute’ at Rome, and none but the richest men could afford to H 4 104 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE employ them. It appears, from Arrraw on the au- thority of MreastuEners,* that in the time of ALEx- ANDER, they had almanacks, with predictions con- cerning the weather, and impending calamities, such as they have at present, but more particularly son the Peninsula. STRABO says, that the Bréhmens pro- fessed astronomy ;} and he extols, at the same time, the attention they paid to learning. Q. Currivs ‘tes tifies, that they skilfully observed the motions of the heavenly bodies.t | Eusressus, who lived in - the third and the beginning of the fourth-century, says that it was a Hindu, who first delineated schemes of the heavens, or the principal constellations. His name was AnpuBartus, and he was considered as the founder of astronomy in India, and was famous for his skill and wisdom. According to Eusrsivus, he lived soon after the flood, in the western parts of Jn- dia ; and this famous astronomer probably formed, and delineated the twenty-seven lunar mansions,’ which seem to be the exclusive property of the Hindus. The opinion of Eusrsivs, and the other learned au- thors whom I have mentioned, was certainly that of the age in which they lived; and Srzaso says, that the no- tions of the Hindus concerning the universe, and the sphericity of the earth, were the same with those of the Greeks. They had a code of laws in the time of ALEx- ANDER, and they wrote upon a sort of paper; for thus I understand the words # ewer vas nexgornutvers, UP= on cloth well beaten.{ Srrazo takes notice, that in his time some asserted, that the Hindus were ac- quainted with the use of letters, whilst others denied it. He adduces the above passage from Ne‘arcuus in = ARRIAN de Indicis, + Lib. 15. t Lib. 8. § SrrRABo, lib. 15. p. 717. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 105 proof of the former assertion; but the passage against it from MrcasTHENES 1s by no means conclusive; and seems to me, on the coutrary, to prove that they were acquainted with the use of letters; for it 1m- plies only that they used no writing in their courts of justice m camp, where every thing was settled in a summary way; and it is even so to this‘day. Be- sides, says our author, such is the probity of the Hindus, that all the time ‘he was in the camp of San- prRocuPtros, which consisted of 400,000 men, none ‘but petty thefts were ever brought before these courts, and they (the judges) even could not write. Under such circumstances, neither any code of laws, nor much learning, or any writing, were necessary ; common sense and integrity were the only requisites on the'part of the judges.* During ‘the first centuries of ‘the Christian Era, the Hindus were very fond of ‘travelling. Their King’s sent frequent embassies to the Roman and Greek mperors: and some of these Embassadors \went as far as Spain. Others visited. Alevandria and Egypt, where Proxemy, in the third century, saw them, and conversed with them. Some of these Embassadors had long conferences, at Babylon, or rather Seleucia, with the famous. BAaRDESANEs:: and ‘pilgrimages to the Sthan-of Mahd-Bhaga, now Mabog, or Bambyke in Syria, were very common, according to Lucran, as cited by the authors of the ancient Universal His- tory. Evento this day, pilgrims from India go to Persia, Georgia, Moscow, and Arabia, Bootan, China, and even Siberia. ‘ ss * STRABO, lib, 15. p. 609. 106 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE We are not to suppose, that there never was any intercourse between India and the more western countries of the old continent. ‘There were diviners and soothsayers in Syria and Palestine, from beyond the east, that is to say from beyond Persia, and of course from Jndia, 700 years before Curist, accord- ing to Isarau; and these, long after, found their way even to Rome; and, according to some, it was a Hindu, that had been shipwrecked in the Red Sea, who first pointed out the way to India by sea.* Xerxes, when he invaded Greece in the year 480 B. C. had a large body of Hindus with him, whose officers were men of respectability, and there is little doubt but that they had Brdahmens with them. Three hundred years before our era, the Carthagi- nians had numerous elephants from India, and their mahots or drivers were Hindus. They seldom used the African elephants, which, says Puiny, were timo- rous, and could not bear the sight of the elephants from India.t The Carthaginians had no proper name for an elephant, and from the mahots they adopted the Hindu name Gaja, which they pronounc- ed Gaisa. Till that time, they, as well as the Phe- nicians their ancestors, called them Elaph or Alpha, beeves or oxen :{ and the Romans, when they saw Pyrruus’s elephants, called them also Luce Boves, and this was in the year 280 B. C. Porystvs || informs us, that in the year answering re * STRABO, p. 98 and 100. Sautmas. Exercitat. Plinian. p. 217. t HeEsycu. under the word Alpha. i} Poxys. Lib. 1. p. 42. and Lib. 8, p. 200. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 107 to 251 B.C. Mererius defeated Asprusar in Sicily, killed six and twenty of his elephants, took one hun- dred and four, and sent them to Rome, with their drivers, who were Hindus. According to the same author, when Hannrspat crossed the Rhone 218 years B. C. the drivers of his elephants were also Hindus ; and after this period, we find a Hindi word for an elephant introduced into J¢taly; for till that time, they called them large oxen. This name was Barrus, or Baro, as it is written by Istporus,* who says, that it was a Hindu denomination: Baro and Baronem in the objective case, are from the Sanscrit Baran'a and Baéran'am. From Barrus or Baro, the Latins made barritus, to express a noise like that made by an elephant, and also the verb barrire ; and probably the word Edur is derived from it. When Mantivs marched, at the head of an army, through Caria and Pamphylia, 189 years B.C. he came to the banks of a river, near the fort of Thabu- sion, called the river Indus, or of the Hindu; trom a Hindu mahot, who fell into it from his elephant, and was drowned ;f and this was on the borders of the greater Phrygia. Sometime before this, we read in Axcrpuron’s letters, that Hindus of both sexes, in the ‘capacity of servants, were not uncommon in Greece. Several emiyrations took place from India, and we find some tribes of Hindus settled in Colchis, where are Hindus to this day; and Hesycutus as- serts, that the Simdi of T'hrace came originally from India.t~ When Q. Merectius Crier was proconsul of Gaul, 59 years B. C. the famous Arrovisr king of * Isrpor. de origin. + Tit. liv. lib. xxxviti. C. 14. $ Bryant’s Mythol. Vol. 3d. p. 217. 108 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE the Swevt made a present to him of some Hindus, who had been shipwrecked on the German shores. They were merchants, who had ventured thus far from their native country.* In the Vrihatecatha we read of several Hindu merchants, who visited the Sacred Isles in the west, and being shipwrecked, they were made slaves; and some of them were so fortu- nate, as to obtain their liberty, and to revisit their native country. It is declared there, that they went a great part of the way by land, and then embarked ata place called Jtanca:~ another harbour is men- tioned also under the name of Pauta-pur, and this subject I shall resume when I come to treat of the Sacred Isles. SvRAHLENBERG saw a Hindu at To- bolsk, who went from India to that place, through China. Brut saw another Hindu. from Madras, on the banks of the Argoné ; and Mr. Duncan, Gover- nor of Bombay, introduced another to my acquaint- ance, who had been there also. The distance from the Indus to England is one fourth less than that -from Madras to Tobolsk through China ;t and the embassadors of Porus travelled as far as Spain 24 years B. C. The constant embassies, sent from India to the Emperors of Rome and Constantinople, are well known to the learned, even as late as the sixth cen- tury ; but in the seventh, the growmg power of the Muhamedans became an insurmountable obstacle to any further intercourse. Besides, the present state of society, manners and politics in the west, make it impossible for Hindu pilgrims to travel through E£u- * Cornel. Nepos apud PLiIn. SUETON. CicERo in Vatin. c. 10. PuiuTarcu, &c. + Vrihat-cat’hé Lambace or Section the 5th called also Cha- turddrica. ; } STRAHLENBERG p. 103. Asiat. Researches vol. vi. 483. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 109 rope. ‘They would be stopped at every step, and oc- casionally confined; and instead of alms, they would receive insults only from the lower classes. But the most famous of all, was the embassy sent by Porus to Aucustus: the embassadors went to Spain, where he was at that time, 24 years B. C. ac- cording to Orosrus; and the purport of their com- mission was to enter into an alliance with him. But, as some time was spent before any progress could be made in this affair, other embassadors were sent by Porus, some years after, when they found the Em- peror at Samos. This Poxus in his letter boasted, that he was lord paramount over 600 kings; and, in the supplement to the Bhavishya-purdna, it is de- clared, that no less than 800 kings were the vassals of the famous Vicrama’pirya. With them were. also embassadors from Panpion, king of the south- ern parts of the Peninsula; and they had in their train a Brahmen, a native of Brigugosha (now Ba- roach) called Cuanca the Sarmana, ZarManos Cuacas. He chose to remain behind, and attached himself to Aucustus, in whose service he remained for some time, in the capacity, it seems, of an augur or soothsayer.* When the Emperor was at Athens, Can‘ca the Sarmana caused himself to be initiated into the sa- cred mysteries, though it was not the usual time; and soon after he voluntarily ended his days on a funeral pile. Catanus followed ALtexanpeER of his own accord, and ascended likewise the funeral pile at Pasargada. There was even a large detachment of * Srraso. Dio, PLuTARCH and NicoL. DAMASCEN. 110 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE Hindus, who followed ALExaNnDER into Persia, and which we find on the borders of Media, with Eume- Nes, eight years after the death of the former. It was commanded by the brave Ketrus, probably Kevru, or the fiery meteor of war; and there was cer- tainly little, or no compulsion used by the Greeks, for they took even their wives and families along with them. Kererus died fighting valiantly, and his two wives insisted upon burning themselves with the dead body; but it was found that the eldest was with child, and therefore she was prevented from fol- lowing her husband. The youngest went triumphant- ly, and was led by her brother, and other relatives, and servants, to the funeral pile.* CrLauptius received also an embassy from a king of Ceylon: and when Trasan was marching against the Parthians in the year 103, some princes of India sent embassadors to him, requesting him to settle some disputes between them and their neighbours, | robably the Parthians. It is remarkable, that dur- ing this expedition, Trasan was constantly rode with oysters from Great Britain; and which were preserved fresh, by a particular process, discovered by one of the first epicures of the age. There were embassadors from India sent to Anronrnus Prous, to DiocreTIAN, and Maximian; to ‘THEODOSIUS, | Heracrivs, and Justixran; and we read ft of two Hindu kings, putting themselves under the protection of DiocteTrianw and Maxrmian, and their names were Gennoton and Esatecu. In the year 274, Auretian took Palnyra, and made Queen ZenoBra * Pyopor. Sic. lib. xix. C. 2. ¢ Anc. Univ. Hist. vol. xviii. p. 78. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 111 prisoner. There he found a body of Hindus, whom he carried to Rome, to grace his triumph. Damas- cius, who was contemporary with JusTInIAN, in his life of Istporus, relates several curious anecdotes of Severus, a Roman, but by birth an African, and who lived in the time of the Emperor ANTHEMIUs. SEvERus was a philosopher of most austere manners, and great learning, and fond of the society of learned men. After the death of that Emperor in 473, he retired to Alerandria, where he received at his house several Braéhmens from India, and whom he treated with the greatest hospitality and respect. Dates and rice were their food, and water their beverage, and they shewed not the least curiosity, refusing to go and see the most superb fabrics and palaces, with which that famous city was adorned.* It is remarkable, that ancient travellers make no mention of the monstrous statues of the Hindus. The historians of ALEXANDER take notice of the Sibe, carrying among their standards the image of Hercutes, whoever he was. The Suraseni round Muttra on the Jumnd, had also a statue of Hercu- LES,f or BaLa-DEVA. PuiLosrrarus takes notice of some figures cut out of the rock beyond Hardwar ; but these statues had nothing monstrous in them, no more than those made by Grecian artists in the Pan- jab, according to the same author. It is not improba- ble then, that at that time the Hindus had not yet at- tempted to represent, either in stone or wood, their monstrous deities. “They were first introduced to our * Photii Bibliotheca, p. 1040 and SurpAs v. SEVERUS. + Asiat, Researches, vol, v. p. 294. 112, ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE knowledge by Jews, according to CLaupian, who wrote in the fifth century, and who says: Jam frugibus aptum FEquor, et assuetuim sylvis delphina videbo : Jam cochleis homines junctos, et quidquid inane Nutrit JUDAICIS, qua pingitur India, velis. From this it appears, that in his time the Romans adorned their houses with tapestries, worked by Jews, and representing all the wild and monstrous figures of Hindu mythology, such as men growing out of shells. This is an obvious allusion. to ‘San- c’Ha’surA, and his tribe living in shells, and peeping eut of them in ‘Shancha-dwipa or Zangh-Bar. In the year 529, a king of the Hemiarites in dra- bia, called At-Mon par, a general name for the kings of that tribe, and generally residing at Hirah, invaded Syria; and the Roman exarchs, or Governors, were obliged to fly to India for shelter, and certainly by sea, as the Romans were at war with the Persians,* and probably they found no other means of escaping, but by getting on board of some ship just going to sail for Lndia. There were at Rome augurs, and diviners from all nations, but mostly from Chaldea. ‘There were some from Armenia, Egypt, and even a few Jews, and particularly women from that nation. There were also astrologers, says JuvENatL,{ from Phrugia and India; and none but very rich people employed these, and this was about the middle of the first — ; peed he ee * Dv Fresnoy Chronolog, A, D. 529. + Sat. vi. v. 584 and 549. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 1138 century. There were many /Zindus at Alexandria, according to Proremy, who lived in the beginning of the third century. The inhabitants of Europe, at an early period, did by no means show so much readiness in leaving their native homes to visit dis- tant countries, and particularly Jndia. We are told that PyrHacoras and Democritus visited the Hindu sages ; but these accounts are delivered in too vague a manner, to deserve any credit. The first European upon record, who visited India, is ScyLax, a Greek and experienced seaman, sent by Darius Hysraspes above 500 years B. C. to explore India. For this purpose he went to Caspatyrus or Caspapyrus, now Coshabpoor upon the Hydaspes, called also Indus, and by the Hindus the lesser Stndhu or Sindh. Waving made the necessary arrangements, he sailed down a large river, which flowed toward the east, and then he entered the ocean, and re- turned by the way of the Red Sea,, and sailed to the bottom of it, where his voyage ended, after a circum- navigation, ‘both on the river and by sea, of two and thirty months. ‘This river is unfortunately called the Indus by Hrrovotus; otherwise, from the particu- lars, such as the course of that river, and the time that his circumnavigation lasted, one would suppose that it was the Ganges; and indeed many learned men are of that opinicn. The next European who visited India was the phi- losopher Pua#pow, about 430 years B. C. but it was not an act of his own. He is said to have been an Elean, probably because he was a native of E/ea in the ‘ae Asia. It is recorded of him, that he was taken, and detained by Jndians and afterwards sold by them asa slave. It is probable, that he had been 7 J 114 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE sold first to some Persian nobleman, sometime after appointed to the government of some district in India, where Puapon was carried away by a party of Hindus. Be this as it may, we find him afterwards at Athens, as a slave again, to a man, who kept wo- men and handsome young men, for the purpose of prostitution. He was redeemed by ALciBiaDEs at the request of Socrates, whose disciple he became. He founded the Hiac school, called Hretrian after- wards, from its having been transferred to Eretria in Eubea, by Menepemus his successor.* There was a regular trade carried on, to India, from the accesson of the Protemres to the throne of Egypt, to the conquest of that country by the Ro- mans, which did not cease till the middle of the se- venth century, when the growing power of the Mu- hamedans put an insurmountable obstacle to a regular intercourse. The Grecks-under the ProLtemisgs, had settlements at Callan near Bombay; but they were © driven out of them by the native kings. It seems also from the Peutingerian Tables, that the Romans had a considerable settlement near Muziris now Mirjee, where they had erected a temple in honour of Aveustus ;f and they had also two cohorts, or 1200 men, to protect their trade. The imports and ex- ports were the same as they are to this day, as it ap- pears from Arrian’s Periplus, and the Justinian code. | | The Greek Kings of Bactriana ruled over all the countries on the banks of the Jndus, even as far as Sirhind, during a period of 129 years, that is to * See Suipas, Hzsycutus de illustrib; and LAERTIUS. + See Peutingerian Tabies. | CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 115 say from the year 255 to 126 B. C. Even some of them were in possession of the western parts of the Gangetic provinces: and DemeErrivs is mentioned as one of them; and according to Sig. Bayer, he never was King of Buctriana or Balk, but of some inland part of India, extending beyond the Ganges, about the year 195 B.C. According to Strago, his predecessor Mrenanver conquered the countries to the east of the Hypanis, as far as the Jumnd.* His _ empire extended from Pattalena, to Zizerus, which I take to be the small, but famous lake called Jid-jer, or the spring of Jid, noticed by Cresras, under the name of Sid, and a little to the westward of the Jumnd and Dilli.t ms To these conquests Demetrius added some mari- time countries to the eastward of Patalene, such as Sigertis, and the kingdom of Tessariostus, now the countries of Cachha and Gujjar dt, as I shall show in the appendix. . There are now numerous Hindus roving all over Arabia and Persia, as far as Astrachan, or settled in some places of trade for a few years only, when they return to India.{t for I take no notice here of nu- merous tribes of Hindus, who are considered as na- tives of Persia, Turan and Colchis or Georgia: they are called Hindi all over these countries, and have been settled there from time immemorial.§ * Srraso, Lib. 11. p. 516. “+ See Maurice’s Modern History of Hindoston, vol. 1. p. 95. It is called erroneously Bhedar in the Ayin-Acberi, vol. 2. p. 107. t Forster's Travels, vol. 2. ~ § According to the late Nabob Meupi-Aui-KuHAn, a native of Mesched, See Essay on the origin of Mecca, Asiatic Researches, vol. 6. re ‘ 116 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE From the Malabar Coast they go to Mosambique, where they have agents, who generally reside there seven or eight years; and STRAHLENBERG takes no- tice of a merchant from the Malabar Coast, at Astra- chan.* From Surat and Gujjarat, they go to Mascat and other trading places in Arabia, where Brah- mens are to be found also, according to N1zBUHR. Arrtan in his Periplus says, that the inhabitants of the island of Dioscoridis (now Socotora,) consisted of Arabs and Hindus, with a few Greeks, settled there on account of the trade to India. ‘The famous Pra‘n-purt told me, that when he was at Baha- rein on the Persian Gulf, he was informed by the Hindus, whom he found settled there, that they used to go formerly to Egypt, where they had houses of agency, but that they had left off going there for - about two or three generations. This shows, that there was between the Greeks, Romans, Carthaginians and the Hindus, a constant and reciprocal intércourse (which is by no means the case now) for a period of 1200 years at least: and to which nothing, but the overgrowing power of the Muselmans, could put a stop. In visiting the sages of Babylonia and Egypt, the Hindus must have been greatly surprised, and their vanity humbled, when they heard them talk of their remote antiquity. Then, and not before, in my opinion, they resolved not to be behind hand with any of them; and cer- tainly they have succeeded wonderfully. Neither the Greeks and Romans, nor the Turdetani, a Galic nation, though settled in Spain, according to STRABO, carried history, and the beginning of things, beyond CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 117 a period of 6000 years, exactly like the Jews, and Hindus formerly, according to Mecasruenrs. ‘The Gothic tribes entertained also the same nations, as peneets from the cosmogony of OrpHEus, who was a roth.* The Hindus had the system of the Yugas long be- fore; but this was not peculiar to them, for it pre- vailed all over the west, and Hestop, who lived be- tween 900 and 1000 years before Curist, declares that Cali-yuga was just beginning; and the Jainas assert that it began about that time. Though the Yugas are of a very great antiquity all over the world, yet the Hindus did not think of stretching their du- ration to such an enormous length, till a period com- paratively modern ; and the Yugas in the west were also the component of their grand Calpa, which con- sisted equally of 12,000 years, but with this differ- ence, that in the west these were considered as na- tural years, which is not the case in the east, at least now. The first time we heard, in the west, of this extra- vagant system of chronology, was about the middle of the ninth century; when we were informed by Axpu-Mazar, a famous astronomer, who lived at the court of Ar-Mamuwn at Balkh, that the Hindus rec} _koned from the flood or the beginning of the Cal- yuga, to the Hejra, 720,634,442,715 days, or 3725 years. There is obviously a mistake, originating either with the transcriber or translator: but it may be ea- * See GESNER’s notes on the fragments of ORPHEUS, also FapRricius Cod, Pseudepigr. 118 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE sily rectified. There is exactly that number of years, from the beginning of the Cali-yuga to the Hejra: but that immense number of days are reckoned from the creation to the Cali-yuga, according to BRawMaA- Gupra’s system. Mr. Davis, after reading this pas- sage in my manuscript, kindly undertook to examine it more particularly, and I beg leave to refer to his learned note on the subject, in the appendix at the end of the essay on VickaMma’pitya and SaLiva- HANA,” Till that time, the extravagant numbers of the Hindus. were unknown to the Greeks and Romans, with whom they kept up a constant intercourse, That the Hindus concealed the whole from them, is inadmissible: for it is natural to suppose, that they were equally vain with the rest of mankind. Weare well acquainted with the pretensions of the Egyptians and Chaldeans to antiquity: and surely they did not take the trouble of mventing fables to conceal them. On the contrary, MEGAsTHENES, a man of no ordinary abilities,; who had spent the greatest part of his life in India, ina public character, and was well acquainted with the chronological systems of the Egyptians, Chaldeans and Jews, made particular inquiries into their history, and declares, according to Cremens of Alexandria, that the Hindus and Jews were the only people, who had a true idea of the création of the world, and the beginning of things: and we learn from him, that the history of the Hindus did not go back above 5042 years, from the invasion of Zndia by ALExanpeR. Manuscripts differ; some have 5042, or 6042: others have 5402 > tc nh ec i cn ON * As. Res. v. 9. p. 242. _ + See Asiatic Researches, vol. 5. p. 290. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 119 years, and three months; for he calculated even the months; but the difference is immaterial in the pre- sent case. This period of the Hindus was adopted afterwards by the Persians, or was common .to both: and the latter reckoned, from the creation to the era of Mz- LIC-sHAH, in the year 1079 of Curist, 6,586 years ;* that. is, they placed the creation 5507 years before Curist. It appears also from Grorce of Trebizond, that the Persians reckoned, from the flood to the year of Curist 632, or eraof YEzpEJIRD, 3,735 years, ten months, and twenty-three days, conform- ably to the ideas of Apu-mazar: and this is again the period of the Cal-yuga of the Hindus. From ALEXANDER’s entering Jndia, to the same era of Mz- LIc-sHAu, there are 1408 years, which deducted from 6,586; there remains 5178; and this I believe was originally the true reading in MreasTHENes’s ac- count of India. Be this as it may, the difference, re- latively speaking, is not very considerable, and is im- material in the present case. Curist was the son of a carpenter, and himself a carpenter, or Zacshaca in Sanscrit. The Persians called him a Peishé-cara, handicraftman and _ trades- ‘man. In the Calpa-druma-Cailicd, a treatise of the Jainas, and in my possession, ‘Sa’La-va‘Hana, Called by the Hindus a Tucshaca, and said to be also the son of a Tacshaca, Tash'td, or Twashta, is declared to have been a ‘S?’avaca or ‘Sdvaca, a tradesman :-and in the western parts of Jndia, as in Gurzar‘dt, all ban- yans and tradesmen are called ‘S@vacas. The words of the Calica are, ‘Sa‘Lava’uana Ndma Raja Jaina; Parama ‘Sravaca-pati. The King. called ‘Saava’- 7 \) * BAILLI’s Astronom. Ind. p 251. 14 120 CRIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE HANA Was a Jaina, and the lord and master of thé ‘Sriacacas,” or ‘Sdbacas, as more generally written and pronounced. Even the name of ‘Sa’ti-vaA‘HAN, ‘Sa‘LiBAN, and ‘Sa’LBAN, as he is called in the spoken dialects, seems to be of Persian and Arabic origin, as well as Petsheh- -car, the name of his followers. Salib, or Sulib, signi- .fies a stake, a cross, a gibbet, the Roman Furca-; like the Greek Eravgec, Salib or Salb signifies also crucified, and in the plural form, it becomes Sdlub, and Salban, Ashab-al-Salib, means the Christians in Arabic, that is to say, the followers of the crucified. The best Sanscrit expression for this is ‘Suliva, ‘Sdlava, or Sawa in a derivative form, and these are indif- ferently pronounced Sdlaba, or ‘Salba, and in the plural number ‘Sdlabdn, and Sdlban. In the Cumé- rica-c handa, these ‘Sdlavas, or Salbans, are mentioned, in the same page with ‘Saca, or Sa’LA-VAHANA, and as existing at the time this Purana was written. The copy of that section of the Scanda-purén'a in my possession, was written about 230 years ago in Gur- jarat: and the writer or transcriber, well knowing, that ‘Sdvaca was a title of ‘Saca, or Sa‘Liva’HANA, wrote first ‘Sévaca, instead of ‘Saca; but recollecting himself, and finding that there was a redundant syl- lable in the verse, he drew two small strokes with the pen across the middle syllable, showing, that it was to be left out, and the whole word to be read ‘Saca. In the Lucknow copies of this section, no mention is made of Saca, and the whole verse is omitted. The copies from Chitra-cuita, have the whole verse; but the name of ‘Saca is variously written, sometimes ‘Sacra, Sraca, &c. These readings are obviously erroneous, There were no other copies of that sec- q CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 191 tion at Benares but those procured from Chitra-cita, and Lucknow, till I was lately presented with a neat copy 230 years old, from Gujarat, by a Pandit of that country. The Lucknow copies are tolerably ac- curate; but those from Chitra-ciéita are miserably mangled, through the carelessness of transcribers. The passage relating to ‘Saca, is in the following words; Tatah trishu sahasrésh ‘sate chapyadhicéshi cha; ‘Sacd° nama bhavishyas'cha yétidaridra haracah = and whether we read ‘Saca or ‘Savaca, it points to the same individual. , The idea that Sa1tiva’HANA was borne on a tree, eross, or furca, they might have borrowed from the Manicheans, who represented Curist stretched upon a tree. Véhana, béhana, and vaha or baha, are nouns derived from the verb vah, veho, to carry; and used both im an active and passive sense. ‘Thus Havya- wahana is one of the titles of dgnz, or fire. InpDRa is called Mégha-vaéhana, or the cloud borne; Gand’- ha-vdha is the wind, from its being the vehicle of perfumes. The clouds loaded with water are called Vari-vaha. Thus Sdl-bah, Hal-bah, ‘Sal-bahana, &c. may signify either he who carries his cross, or who was borne, or exalted upon the cross. Crue ifer is one of the titles of Curist, perfectly answering to “Sala-baha. _ The Hindus are very fond of forms or emanations, which they consider to be the same with the original from which those emanations sprang; and disciples are very often considered as so many forms of their masters. It is then very possible, that they should have considered. the Apostle and disciple, who first preached the Gospel in Jndia, as a form of Curist, or as Curist_ himself, after several centuries had elapsed; and thus possibly have mistaken the year p 199 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE of the death of the form, or disciple, for that of his principal. Now some of the Apostles lived. to a great age; and St. Tuomas, for instance, is sup- posed to have lived seventy-three years, and to have suffered martyrdom about the seventy-fourth or se- venty-fifth year of the Christian Era, The year of the death of Vicrama‘rca, and that of the manifestation of ‘Sat-pa’HAN, are acknow- ledged to be but one and the same; and they are obviously so, according to the Cumdrica-chawda, that remarkable year was the 3101st of the Cak- . yuga, and the first of the Christian Era, thus coin- ciding also with the Samaritan text, which is a re- markable circumstance. __ Some learned Pandits, from the western parts of India, are of opinion, that the era of Vicrama’pI- TYA was originally reckoned from the first year of his reign, in the year 3044; and that, after a reign of fifty-six years, his death happened in the year 3101. ; This was certainly the opinion of the author of the Cumaricd-chand'a, and of the Pandits who assisted Apu Fazit, who says, in his summary of the his+ tory of the Kings of A/é/ava, that Vicrama’DITYA’s era began the first year of his reign;, and this makes this legend more consistent and probable. In the Vrihat-Cathad, ‘Saviva‘Hana is called Nri- sinha, or the man-lion, answering to the lion of the tribe of Jupa; and one of the forms of Bupp’Ha is called Nri-sinha, both by the Pauran‘ics and the Baudd’has. “Sacti-sinha, or the energetic lion, is also the name of ‘Sa’Liva’HANnaA in the appendix to the Agn-puran'a. According to the Vrihat-catha, Vi- ‘ CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 123 crAMa’DiItya marched from his capital city Pdtali- putra, or Patna, to wage war against Nri-sinna, King of Pratisht‘hana. VI. The cross, though not an chject of worship among the Baudd’has, is a favourite emblem and de- vice with them. It is exactly the cross of the A/ani- cheans, with leaves and flowers springing from it, and placed upon a mount Calvary, as among the Roman Catholics. They represent it various ways; but the shaft with the cross bar, and the Calvary remain the same. The tree of life and knowledge, or the Jambu tree, in their maps of the world, is always represented in the shape of a A/anichean cross, eighty-four Ydjanas (answering to the eighty- four years of the life of him who was exalted upon the cross), or 423 miles high, including the three steps of the Calvary. This cross, putting forth leaves and flowers, (and fruit also, as I am told) is called the divine tree, the tree of the gods, the tree of life and knowiedge, © and productive of whatever is good and desirable, and is placed in the terrestrial Paradise. Acaptus, ac- cording to Puortius,* maintained, that this divihe tree in Paradise, was Curist himself. In their de- lineations of the heavens, the globe of the earth is filled up with this cross and its Calvary. ‘The divines of Tibet place it to the S$. W. of Meru, towards the source of the Ganges. The Manicheans always re- presented Curist crucified upon a tree among the foliage. The Christians of India, and of St. Tuomas, though they did not admit of images, still enter- tained the greatest veneration for the cross. They * Phot. Biblioth. p. 403. 184 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE placed it on a Calvary, in public places, and at the meeting of cross roads ; and it is said, that even the heathen Hindus in these parts paid also great regard toit. Ihave annexed the drawings of two crosses, ~ from a book entitled the Cshétra-samasa, lately given to me by a learned Baudd@’ha, who is visiting the holy places in the countries bordering upon the Ganges.* There are various representations of this mystical symbol, which my friend the Jati could not explain to me; but says, that the shaft and the two arms of the cross remain invariably the same, and that the Calvary is sometimes omitted. It becomes then a cross, with four points, sometimes altered into across - eramponné, as used in heraldry. In the second figure there are two instruments de- picted, the meaning of which my learned friend, the Jati, could not explain. Neither did he know what they were intended to represent ; but, says he, they look like two spears: and indeed they look very much like the spear and reed, often represented with the cross. The third figure represents the same tree, but somewhat nearer toits natural shape. When it is represented as a trunk without branches, as in Japan, it is then said to be the seat of the supreme One. When two arms are added, as in our cross, the 7rimurti is said to be seated there. When with five branches, the five Sugats, or grand forms of Bupp'HA, are said to reside upon them. Be this as it may, I cannot believe the resemblance of this cross and Calvary, with the sign of our redemption, to be merely accidental. I have written this ac- count of the progress of the Christian religion in India, with the impartiality of an historian, fully SE * Plate 2. apm Jo SSOUNSD MD WM oures oy st qoOTM. SVHeMaaAV Ee 9 FO VHS OLMA~Va'TV D eULL ‘SNVOUROINVAL WN Ss EZ 2D | eS CE ‘ SIVA, yy S U 2 MMT XIN | Wa \ —- bn = = wA4l\h CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 1°25 persuaded that our holy religion cannot possibly re- ceive any additional lustre from it. The word Miéch’ha in Sanscrit, does not signify literally a foreigner; but it is generally understood in that sense by the Paurdniics, when announcing, in a prophetical style, the different powers who were to tule over India. Hear now, says the author of the Vishnu-purdnia, hear now what will come to pass in these times: powerful Kings among the ‘Aryya- Mléclhas will appear ; they will subvert the reigning religion, spoil and deceive the Prajas, or the people. In the Bhdgavata, they are called Abrahmavar- chasah in the piural, and Abrahmavarchah in the sin- gular; because, as they understood not the funda- mental tenets of their own religion, through their spiritual blindness, and the hardness of their hearts, they gave it up to embrace a new one. In the Brahman'da we read, then will come the Aryya-Mléch’has, who will seduce the people; they will be proud, and-at the same time distrustful, as of constantly alarmed. In the Vayu-purdna it is declared, that generations of Kings will rise, and set like the sun. Then will come the Aryya-Mlécl’has, who will forsake the Dharma, religious creed, Carma worship, Virtha the places of pilgrimage of their ancestors; they will seduce the people with their new doctrine, and will grow worse and worse every day. After them Sarva Mléclvha, all sorés of foreign and impure tribes will overrun the country. Such is the character given of these good Aryyas, ealled Avariiam, and Abraiam, as well as their 126 ORIGIN AND DECLINE, &c.\ Apostle, even as low as the times of Mé Potro in the ‘13th century. From Abaryyam, the Paurdnics pro- bably made 4-Brahma, in order to shew their con- tempt of them, but more particularly in the latter times, when they grew worse and worse; and M. Poto speaks of some of the Abraiam, or Abramiam, nearly in the same terms. Yet in his time the deno- mination of Avariiam, in Sanscrit Avdryyam, and Abdryyam, was applied to them; and he was told that it signified good and pious men. I had, for a long time past, particularly inquired from the Baudd’has whether they knew any thing of the wars of Bupp’Ha with Treverar;* but I was always answered in the negative. It was my fault in some measure; I did not make use of the other synonymous names of that enemy of the religion of Bupp'ua. I mentioned before, that I supposed that TEVETAT was a corruption from De’va-Tasuta, sy- nonymous with Dre'va-Twasuta’, or Der'va-Siupi, the divine artist, or carpenter, who is more generally known under the name of Visva-carmMa, or the universal artist. Under this last appellation, TE’vE- TA’T is known to tliem. Soon after a learned Jate presented me with a book called the Budd’ha-cha- ritra, with leave to take a copy, in which the wars of Bupp’HA, with Visva-carma, or Dr'va- Twasut'a’, are related. It is a most voluminous work, and still it is incomplete, and the seat of war was in India. * In the Lalita vistéra purdna, which was brought by Major Knox from Népdél, the name of Budd ’ha’s kinsman and rival is DEVADATTA (answering to Deodatus). It is probable, that La- LOUBERE'S Tevetat is a corruption of the name of DE’‘VADATTA, H. T. C. ESSAY VI. PART I.--CHAPTER I. Of the two Tri-Cu’r'a’p’r1, or Mountains with three Peaks; one in the N. W. and the other in the S. E. Quarters of the Old ConTINENT. I. TRI-CUTADRI, the mountain (4dri) with three peaks (77ri-Cuta,) answers to Tpmopypos and Tpwaxpios in Greek: for in that language xp» signifies properly a peak, summit, and implicitly a headland, or promontory. Poryanus calls Mount Méru or Meros, Tri--coryphus: it is true, that he bestows improperly that epithet on Mount Méru near Cabul, which is inadmissible. éru, with its three peaks on the summit, and its seven steps, includes and en- compasses really the whole world, according to the notions of the Hindus and other nations, previously to their being acquainted with the globular shape of the earth. I mentioned in the first part, that the Jews were acquainted with the seven stages, Zones or Dwipas of the Hindus; but I have since disco- vered a curious passage from the Zohar-Manassé on the creation, as cited by Basnace, in his history of the Jews.* “There are, says the author, “ seven earths, whereof one is higher than the other; for the holy-land is situated upon the highest earth, and Mount Moriah (or Méru) is in the middle of that holyland. This is the hill of Gop, so often men- * See English Translation, p. 247. _ 198 ESSAY ON tioned in the Old Testament, the mount of the con- gregation, where the mighty King sits in the sides of the north, according to Isaran, and there is the city of our Gop.”* The Méru of the Hindus has the name of Sabha, or the congregation, and the gods are seated upon it in the sides of the north. There is the holy city of Bréhmd-puri, where resides Brauma’ with his court, in the most pure and holy land of Llavratta. Thus MZéru is the worldly temple of the supreme being, in an embodied state, and of the Tr1-Mu’rrrr, or sacred 7riad, which resides on its summit, either in a single, or three-fold temple, or rather in both: for it is all one, as they are one and three. They are three, only with regard to men involved in the gloom of worldly illusion; but to men who have emerged out of it, they are but one; and their three- fold temple, and mountain with its three peaks, be- come one equally. Mythologists in the west called the world, or A/éru, with its appendages, the temple of Gop, according to Macrosius. Hence this most sacred temple of the supreme being, as generally typified by a cone or pyramid, with either a single chapel on its summit, or with three; either with, or without steps. This worldly temple is also considered, by the followers of Bupp’Ha, as the tomb of the son of the spirit of heaven, whom. I con- ceive to be the first man, re-emerging in every Calpa, or the first lawgiver, often confounded with the.first man. His bones, or limbs were scat- * ISATAH, ¢. 14. ¥. 13, Psalm 48, &c. - -— THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 129 tered all over the face of the earth, like those of Os1- risand Juprrer Zacreus. Tocollect them was the first duty of his descendants and followers, and then to entomb them. Out of filial piety, the remembrance of this mournful search was yearly kept up by a fic- titious one, with all possible marks of grief and sorrow, till a priest announced, that the sacred relics were at last found, This is practised to this day by several Tartarian tribes of the religion of Bup- p HA; and the expression of the bones of the son of the spirit of heaven is peculiar to the Chinese, and some tribes in Zartary. The Baudd’hists in this country are so close, re- served, aud ignorant, in general, that hardly any information can be obtained on this subject. Besides, they acknowledge that it is so awful a theme, that they really av aa to make it a subject of conversa- tion. They confess that the pyramids, in which the sacred relics are deposited, be their shape what it will, are an imitation of the worldly temple of the supreme being, and which is really the tomb of the first of his embodied forms ; or of his son, in the language of the Chinese, Tar turs, and of the Greeks also, who were little acquainted with the system of emanations and incarnations. They also declare, that many of these pyramids do not really contain the bones of the Thdcur, or Lord: and though they. are to be supposed, and asserted to contain them, the real place where they are deposited, should re- main unknown, in order to prevent profanation ; exactly like the various tombs of Osrris. For this reason, the sacred relics, mstead of being deposited in the pyramid, are alw ays placed in a small vault deep under eround, at some distance from it, as at Sdrndt ha, near Benares. 130 ESSAY ON This monument is about fifty feet high, of a cylin- drical form, with its top shaped like a dome. Similar monuments, but never more than three or four feet high, are often erected by Hindus, upon the spot where a married woman ‘burned herself with her husband. ‘These’ monuments are in general called Sat? ; and the enormous one at Sarnath is a sort of Sati over the bones of Bupp’Ha. According to tradi- tion, it was erected over the ashes of those who fell there in battle, im the invasion of the A/uslemans. But this is impossible ; as this monument is the chief and principal piece of that sacred fabric, which was begun many years before the said invasion. The only part that was finished is the tomb of Bupp’Ha ; all the others, which were intended for the splendor of the place, and the convenience of the royal inha- bitants and priests, remaining in an unfinished state. The secret vault, in which these relics are depo- sited in general, is called the Thdcur’s Citi, the room or cell of the Lord; and in the inscription found amongst the ruins above this cell, it is de- clared that SjTuirpa’La and VasanTa, sons of a King of Gaur, in Bengal, built this C@ti. It fol- lows from hence, that these were the persons who deposited there the Thdcur’s bones. In the above inscription it is declared, that this happened in the year of Vicrama’DiTYA 1089, or of our Lord either 1017 or 1027.*. In the inscription found at Jsldma- bad,} these relics, consisting of a few bones, are said to have been deposited in two brass vessels in a Cuti, or room under ground. In the account of the ere ce «ee et * As. Res. v. 5. p, 193. + As. Res. v. 2. THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 131 discovery of two urns at Sarndtha, it is men- tioned that the Céti was eighteen cubits, or twenty- seven feet, under oround.* There the relics were deposited in an urn, enclosed in a_ vessel of marble, in the shape, and of the size of the famous Barberini monument. ‘There were a few bones only, with various trinkets, which consisted of pieces of coloured glass, all of them perforated, with thin leaves of gold, and some coarse pearls. These orna- ments are “by no means a proof that these bones were those of a female. It is more probable, that they formed a chaplet used by devout people, or rosaries and bracelets, with which the statues of Bupp’Ha are generally decorated. .The marble vessel, which contained the urn, is more highly finished than that of the Barberini monument. The urn itself is of a more elegant form than that in the above monument. It is in the shape and of the size of a chalice; it has no carved figures, but elegant mouldings, exquisitely finished, and is of green marble. . I suspect the whole to be of foreign : workmanship ; ; for it is totally different, both in shape and workmanship, from vases in use among the Hindus, either at this day or in former times. PurLostratus informs us, that sta- tues, by Grecian artists, were by no means uncom- "mon in the N. W. parts of Jndia. Srrazo says also, that altars of Grecian workmanship were often found in the western parts of India; and Arrtan, in his Pi ie? takes notice of altars and of small temples in the Grecian taste, near Barygaza or Baroach. The practice of thus preserving the bones of Bup- p'ua is of great antiquity ; for it 1s expressly men- tioned by Cremens of stlaven ges, who says, that * As. Res. vol. v. p. 181. K 2 132 ESSAY ON they were deposited under a pyramid. In the his- tory of China we read, that in the year 335, a bone of Fo was «sent from India to the Emperor of that country, who was highly pleased with this precious relic: though his minister Hawyu made a very spi- rited remonstrance against this innovation ; and which is to be found in Du Haupx’s China. The followers of Brauma are not addicted to the worship of dead men’s bones, and I know: but one instance to the contrary. At Jagan-nat’ha they have a bone of Curisuna, which is considered as a most precious and venerable relic; so much so, that few people are allowed to see it: and Hindus are not fond of making it the subject of conversation, any more than the Baudd’has. The shape of these monuments is always either that of a pyramid or of a cone, with some trifling deviations occasionally. Thus the cone assumes the shape of a trump-roof: sometimes it is formed by the revolution of a cymatium, or Ogive round an axis; and these two forms are generally said to be in the shape of a bell. .A/ount Méru, and the seven stories, are represented in the shape of a trump by the divines of Ceylon, according to Mr. JornviLLE’s delineation in the seventh volume of the Asiatic Re- searches. The pyramid is equally subject to the same variations, the hips, or angles, being sometimes in the shape of a cymatium. As Mount Méru is also represented of a, cylindrical form, the tombs of the Thacur are equally made in that shape, as that of Sarndtha. Sacrifices and offerings are never made m Tibet, without placing before the devotees a cone or pyramid, the image of Adéré and of the worldly Linga. Brdéhmens, instead of either, make a cylinder THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 1383 of earth, and for the same purpose. This they call the primeval Linga; which was represented in the west, and to this day in the Dekhin, by a cone, ac- cording to Arnosivs and other authors. The steps, stories, and retreats are always omitted in India: but I was told, that it was considered as immaterial. The seven stories, however, are marked by lines, in a delineation of the worldly temple and tomb of Bupp’Ha, ina large map of the world, ac- companying the Cshétra-samasa, a geographical trea- tise in my possession. ‘This representation of the mountain of Gop struck me forcibly, and was the occasion of further inquiries into this subject. It is of the same shape with the pyramids’of Egypt: the base only is a little shorter, with a small flat top, with a chapel in honour of Bupp’Hs. The sides are smooth, as in the pyramids; but the seven stories are repre- sented by lines, which brings it still nearer to the tower of Babel. The pyramids of Egypt are not all alike: some are in the shape of a cone; one with recesses is mentioned by DE Non, who notices also anvther with a circular base. The square base of this worldly temple is peculiar to the Baudd’hists of Tibet ; for in India the Brdhmens, and the Jainas, always give it a circular form. In the representation of it in the Cshétra-samasa, it is a square. Though _ the dimensions are much neglected, yet in.all these monuments at Benares, the most modern, and of course the most perfect, are of a conical figure; the perpendicular section of which, through the center, is an equilateral triangle. There is always a small temple on the summit, except one near Benares, at a place called Camow'y. Such of these monu- ments as belong to the Baudd’has are called the 3 134 | ESSAY ON temples of Bupp’Ha: they might also be called the temples of Bata or Batas, one of the titles of Bupp ua, but little known now, and more particu- larly so to the vulgar. The word Baias, properly pronounced, sounds exactly like Betos in Greek, and Betvus in Latin. May we not then reasonably suppose, that the temple and tomb of Brzus at Ba- bylon, was precisely a similar monument, and caleu- lated for the very same purpose. On the summit of it was a chapel, dedicated to Betus, according to Heropotus. Droporus, the Sicilian, says there were three; but this is immate- tial: for Baras is three and one. Besides, the temple of Hrxopotus probably consisted of three chapels. About the center of the tower, im the middle, was the tomb of Baas, and near it, in the body of the pyramid also, another chapel, exactly as in the great pyramid of Giza in Egypt. It is pro- pable, however, that the bones of BKexus were not deposited in the ostensible tomb, but were concealed in a secret vault, in some other part of the pyramid or tower. It appears then, that the pyramids were similar fabrics, and intended for the very same pur- pose. For the Egyptians, the Phenicians likewise, had their Betvus, as well as the Babylonians and Hin- dus: and this Bretus, it is probable, was originally the same through these different countries. ‘In the eastern parts of Bengal, particularly toward the Sw- derbunds, there is, almost in every village, a repre- sentation of this worldly temple, of earth with steps. The whole is neatly plastered with a whitish clay; and on stated festivals, the statue of some favourite deity is placed on the summit, in a small, but handsome portable temple. Some of these fabrics THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 135 are from five to twenty feet high, according to the circumstances and zeal of the villagers. These are considered as a representation of mount Meéru ; and, in the inscription of Sarnath, the conical mount, near the sacred repository, is called Méru. : Like all the temples and tombs of Betus in Jndia, the pyramids had no opening whatever, except one or two. It is however pretty certain, that all the pytamids were not intended for the reception of the bones of Betus. Many were probably intended for the burial of a very few exalted and sacred charac- ters, like the grand Lamas of Tibet, with a few others, who are always buried under pyramids : but these are acknowledged to be forms of Bupp’Ha, though of an inferior “yank. As the Le Zyptians con- cealed most carefully the real place where their BeLus was entombed, it is not unlikely that the great pyramid was only an ostensible one, and of course allowed to remain open. For we are told, that the body of him for whom it was intended, never was deposited there; or if deposited, it was not into the ostensible tomb, but into some secret place under the pyramid. The limbs of Osiris were buried separately, and on the very spot where Isis found them: and he was torn into fourteen pieces ; others say six-and-twenty. The general opinion is, _ that Isis collected all the pe in a cothn, like’ which she made many others, and presented them to _ several cities through Egypt ; assuring privately every one, that they possessed the real one. It is supposed, that Osiris was entombed near Memphis, though the spot never was known. © The tower of Babel seems then to have been the wordly temple of the spirit of heaven, and the tomb K 4 136 ESSAY ON of his son, either the first man of the Calpa, ot the most ancient king and legislator of the country. There were four Adams, and four Budd*has also; and we are now under the fourth, according to the traditions of the A/uselmans, and of the. Baudd ‘has. Apaw’s body was, at his own request, entombed in a cave or vault, called Alconuz, in a mountain in the center of the world; and of course the A/éru of the Hindus, and represented by artificial hills, either of stone or earth, and of various shapes, like J/érw. His descendants removed to that holy mountain ; the wicked offspring of Cain were allowed only to dwell at the foot of it, whilst that of SerH were ‘seated higher up, as far as the top; where they lived in great sanctity and purity of manners, every day worshipping Gop on the summit of the mountain, and visiting the body of Apam in his vault, as the means of procuring the divine blessing.* This mountain, in the center of the earth, with seven steps or stories, or mount JAZéeru, was really the mountain of Gop, the worldly temple of the spirit of heaven, and the tomb of his son. Coinrvus of Smyrna says, that this holy mountain was de- picted upon the shield of AcHitLEs; and that on its summit resided the efficacy or ‘Sacti of the world, or of the supreme being, towering to the skies: and he adds, that this most sacred place was very difficult of access. The limbs, or bones, of this son of the spirit of - heaven, Pusencu in Chinese, Bupp’Ha, Osiris, Dio- NysIus, or ADAM, were dispersed all over the * Anc. Univ. Hist. vol. I. éc. THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 157 world. Apam’s remains, after the flood, were divi- ded among his posterity, and his scw/! fell to the share of Suem, who deposited it in a vault on mount Catcary, near the holy hill of Moriah or Moreh. The inhabitants of Ceylon showed formerly one of his teeth; and they have now one of his tusks: for their last Apam or Bupp’Ha, was incarnate in the shape of an elephant; and ascended into heaven, from the summit of the peak of Apam. Muselmans, who were settled in the Peninsula, and in that island, at a very early period, concluded, and not without some plausible ground, that this Bupp’aa must have been Apam: and accordingly, Persian writers gravely in- form us, that Apam was’ banished to Ceylon, and thence translated into heaven, from the summit of the peak, which was denominated after him. Za- RADES, ZOROADES or ZanratT was the name given, by the Chaldeans, to the eldest Zoroaster, claimed equally by the Persians. Some say that Brus taught the Chaldeans astronomy, whilst others in- sist, that it was Zaraprs or ZoOROASTER, whom several learned men consider as the same with Mizraim, the son of Ham. Be this as it may, the eldest ZakADEs was the son of OromazeEs, the spirit of heaven, according to Surpas. Like Apam, he - directed that his bones should be carefully preserved: his precepts for a long time were complied with; and his relics, carefully and secretly entombed, like those of Baia or Bupp’na, like the limbs of Ostris, - and like those of Baccuus at Delphi, became an object of worship. The eldest Zoroaster, called Zaraves, ZoroavEs and Zaratts by the Chaldeans, is probably the same with Betus and the Saurip of Arabian writers: and the Goddess ZareTIs was probably his consort. Several learned oriental wri- ters insist that ZoroaprEs, or ZoROASTER assisted at ~ 138 ESSAY ON the building of the tower of Babel; and that he is the same with Zouac or Nimrop, and that under the name of Saurip he built the great pyramid in Egypt. The Parsis in Jndia say, that he was a native of China; but I suppose that they originally meant Bactria, seemingly the native country of the Chinas, according to'the Puran‘as, and the eailiest Perscan and Arabian authors, who say that formerly the country about Samarcand was called Chinistan, and its inhabitants Chinas *. II. The three peaks of A/éru are, one of gold, the other of silver, and the third of iron, stone or earth, which is considered as the same. Thus, the iron age is generally called the age of stone or earth in India. In the west, mankind was produced from stones, thrown by Drucation and Pyrrua behind ‘their backs, in the beginning of the iron age ; and from them sprang the present stony or stone-hearted race, In consequence of this, some powerful princes are declared, in the Puranas and other books, to have erected three mountains, of gold, silver, and stone; or three pyramids or conical hills, like the three peaks of Jéru, though the materials they were built with were only stone or clay. PoLtyanus has given us the names of these three peaks, AZenon, Candaské, and Corasibé; which, however distorted and dis- figured, may be still traced back to their original standard. For this purpose let us suppose, that a traveller asked a Hindu the names of these three peaks, the Hindu probably answered Mana, Cunt hachya, Cailasépi, or literally in Enghsh, Mana, * D’HERBELOT's Biblioth. Orient. voce Tarikh and Tabari, Sir W. OvsELEY’s Translat. of Ebn Haucal in the Appendix. THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 139 Cun'rna’ thus called, Caita’sa also. The first peak, it is true, is not known under that name; but it is described as such, and this appears tu be its real mame. Upon it Brauma’ resides, and his seat is called Brahmd-purt, or the town of Brauma’: it is also Mana-puri, the town of Mana, or of his heart, or the delight of his heart, near the famous lake of Mana or Maénasa, the waters of which, proceeding from heaven, are the delight of his heart likewise. They are otherwise said to proceed from his heart, and indeed every thing there is from his heart. The obvious meaning of Afana is mind, (mens, ) but it is always rendered here heart, because the mind pro- ceeds from the heart, according to the Hindus, who even are able to trace its track through the body to the head. The radical name of Vai-Cuntha 1s Cuntha, an ideot. The name of Visunv’s mother, in one of his incarnations, during the fifth Manwan- tara, was Cun‘Tua or the ideot; and as she was very much so, she was called Vi Cun Ha Visunu, since that time, is surnamed Var Con vrHa: and after him, the peak on which he resides is deno- minated likewise. In Cazlasdpi, api signifies also. This Tri-caétadri, or mountain with three summits, is declared to be the lord of mountains; and of course the other 7'ri-coryphean hills, for there are many, are considered as inferior to it. The next in rank is the three-peak-land in the N. W. emphatically called the Wauire island, the island of the Moon, a celestial earth ot region, a terrestrial heaven or paradise. The next to this is the 7vi-cé‘ta mountain in the south-east, including the peninsula of A¢dlaca, Sumé- tra, and Ceylon. These two Tri-ci'tddris are declared to correspond to each other, in their respective quarters, and their 7éja, Cirn‘n‘a, or splendor, are the 140 - ESSAY ON constant theme of the Pauwranitcs and other Hindu writers. These two Tri-cétas, or three-peaked- islands may probably be the two islands of Cerne, east and west, of the ancients. When speaking in general terms, the Paurdnics sometimes place them, one in the east, and the other in the west. But numerous and explicit passages show, that they are situated in the N. W. and S. E. quarters of the old continent. There are however, some few passages, which place them north and south of Aéru; and Lanca is now considered as situated on the equator, exactly to the south of Ujjayini, Méru, and opposite to the island of the moon. The last assigned situation was the first I hit upon, on my first ac- quaintance with the Puranas, and perplexed me very much; as the Pandits, I was acquainted with, insisted that the Wuire island, one of the peaks of the western 77i-cwta, was in the N. W. quarter, that is to say, it occupied the whole space between the N. W. and N. points: and that likewise the eastern Tri-cétédri was between the S. and S. E. points. Unfortunately, they could not then produce the necessary vouchers from their sacred books; but in the mean time, they exhibited the accompanying map of Jambu, in order tu illustrate the subject. In the plate, the map of Jambu is represented under three different projections. The first is ac- ‘cording to the ideas of the Pawran‘ics, in which one half of the equator is obviously combined with another half of the meridian, on the plain of which the map is projected. I have marked the degrees of longitude upon the equator, and the degrees of lati- tude north, upon an arch of the first meridian. No notice is ever taken of these particulars by the Pau- rénics ; but a little reflection will show the original -——_—— =~ ") tds > ‘ ‘ 4 Len ‘ ; Se eer , AS ° > * 4 Ld F % , 2 ae ve | ty \ ‘ ™ ¢ Gp Valk. Plate 3. Se @ O-_ Romaca pattan ov/ Rome : qhe 1? ase “ue % sh sor Ho. 0 Nee | ole he papy - 7 oe ° 40 3 jo \ \ 0 MERU 180 THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 141 design of this diagram, though. the projection be ever so disfigured *. The true projection of it should be in the shape of what the ancients called the bottom part of a sling: and this was admitted by Dionysius PertieGRres. Postpontius before him admitted of it also: but he insisted, that the greatest length of this projection was in a north and south direction. This sort of projection is represented in the third number of the same plate. Number IT. represents the same portion of the globe, that is to say, the northern part of the old continent, as projected in the usual form, upon the plain of the first meridian. In the first and second numbers, the two T7i-cé ta- dris, or islands, abounding with Curzn‘a or resplen- dence, are represented diametrically opposite, with all due symmetrical arrangement in every part, to which the Hindus will always sacrifice truth. There are, however, some general outlines, which are strictly true. There are really three islands, or dwt- pas in the south east, and as many in the north west quarter of the old continent, corresponding exactly, or nearly so, to each other; and they have also the same names. The rest of the superstructure owes its origin to the fertile and inventive genius of the Hindus, The idea, however, is by no means a modern one; nor was it confined to Jndia: for ancient writers in the west acknowledged two islands, called Cerne, one in the east, and the other in the west: the latter, called also Cyrene, was placed near the straits of Hercules ; and was said to consist equally * Plate III, 142 ESSAY ON of three islands. The eastern Cerne, it is true, was said to be near the eastern shores of Africa. ‘This mistaken notion arose, through the information of the Hindus, who will have it that the dwipa of Eancé really joins the shores of ‘Sanc’ha, Zeng, or Africa. The Nubian geographer adopted this idea, as well as Arabian writers in general. The Gods are represented as travelling from one Tri-chta to the other; and the grand depot for souls after death, 1s at Yama-purit, mn the Peninsula of Mialacd ; from which, on certain days fixed for that purpose, they set off together for D’harma-purt in the north west, which they reach after a painful march of twelve months. These three islands in the south east, are in general called Lanca ; and in every one of them is supposed to bea city called a Lancé-puri, and there is actually a place of that name in Sumatra, according to Mr. Marspen. The walls of these three cities are of the same metal with the soil of their respective islands: of course the walls and palaces of Lancd-purt in the Gold-Island, ave of that metal; and of silver in the Silver-Island. In the island of iron, brass, stone, or clay, the walls are of these materials: but more generally they are said to be either of iron or brass, The Gold-Island, or Suvarna, is also called Maha- Lancé and Mé-Lancé; from which is probably derived its modern name of A4¢dlécaé ; which 1s alse called Malachya in the Dévi-puraia. These islands were well known to the ancients, un- der the appellations of Chryse, Argyrea, and Taprobané. That of Taprobané, though generally understood of. Ceylon, was also extended to the three islands; for THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 145 SrePHaNus of Byzantium says, that Argyrea, the Stlver-Island, or Sumatra, made part of Taprobané, and very properly too: for Taprobané is obviously derived from the Hind: Tapu-Rdvana, the island, or islands of Ra’vana, who was the lord of them, and whose name, in the spoken dialects, particularly in the Dekhin, is always pronounced Ra*san. Their Sanscrit names are Canchana or the Gold-Island ; Rajata the silver one, and Sinhala is Ceylon. On the latter the epithet of Zron-Lsland is never bestowed in any book which I have seen: but it is understood as a matter of course: it was called also the brass country by Proremy, though strangely misplaced by him. From various documents, through different chan- nels, he ‘has introduced twice in his map of that country, this 7ri-c@tddri, first, as three islands or Peninsulas, and also as three countries on the main- land, ‘under the names of gold, silver, and ‘brass countries. Mr. Danvitte has proved that the Peninsula of Malacd, with most of the places belong- ing to it, are ¢wice repeated, and made contiguous by him. In the Gold-Istand, or Afd-Lanca, is the abode of Yama, called Yama-puri, or in the spoken dialects Jam-cote, a place well known to Arabian and Persian writers, It is also called Lancd-purt, Lancd-nagara, the town of Zancdé; and the straits of J7dldca are called, in the Purdn'as, Lanca-dwdra, or the gates of Lancé*, as we shall see in the course of this work.’ Canca is another name of Yama or Prurto; and as _the place of his abode is in AZdlancé, according to the Pe ENE SR ca I a ENE EA iat Leal * Scanda-pur dna, section of TAPI-C’HAND’A. - 144 ESSAY ON Purénas, the Lancd-dwéra or gates of Lanca, the straits of M4laca might be called also with propriety the gates of Canca, Pruto, or Canca-dwara. This denomination is never used now by the Pauranies ; but there is no doubt, that it was so formerly ; for the Cancador of Au1-Cosue1, and other early Musel- man writers, is obviously derived from Canca-dwara, Canca’s door or gate. It is true, that they make a town of it, which they call also more correctly Can- cdnor for Caned-nur, which last is acknowledged to. be the same with Canca nagara, the town of Canca; and in the Dekhin they always say nur or nuru, instead of nagar. This town is obviously the same, which is called Cocco-nagara or Conco-nagara by Protemy. The country of Canea is Cancades‘a in Sanscrit; hence Muselman writers call it also Gung-diz. Cancapuri or Canca nagara is then the same with Fama-puri or Jamcote, called also in the Puranas Maha-Lanca-puri, or Ma-Lanca: aud it is probably the same with that called Balanca by Protemy, and placed by him in Leng. 162° and in 4° 40’ Lat. North. It appears, however, that MJuselman writers under- stood by it the town of Saba or Zaba: for Yama-purt or Jam-cote is a mythological city and never existed. We observed before that Protemy has introduced into his map the golden country, island or penin- sula, not only twice; but that he has likewise introduced twice, most of the places belonging to that country. Accordingly Conco nagara is again . noticed under the name of Coccoro nagara, or Cocco nagara; from which A/uselman writers have- made Caracor for Canca-rai-ghur, the house or place of abode of Canca-ra‘'ya’ or Yama: but they con- sider it as the same with Cancanor. ‘This town THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 145 they call also Canacor, which is some place inthe Gan- getic provinces : but I have shown before, that Cana- cor or Cancar, was the capital city of the country of Gancar-deha, or of the Gangaride in Bengal. Jum-cote or Lanca-puri, which D’Herse or writes Giamcout, they place, with the Hindus, in the cen- ter of the Peninsula, in five degrees of Lat. North, and in Long. 176 or 175, according to ApuL-Fazin and others; and Protemy places Balonca, or Ma- Lancé-puri in Lat. 4° 40’ North, and in Long.’ 162. The Longitude of Lancd or Ma-Lanca may be ascer- tained from the Purawas ; a circumstance very un- usual. YVama-puri is declared in these sacred hooks. to be the general rendezvous of the departed from all parts of the world, and from which they proceed in a body with a proper guard, composed of the ser- vants of Yama, to D’harma-puri, which I shall show hereafter to be the purgatory of St. Parricx in Hiran'ya or Suvarn'eya, the gold island in the west. The days and distances are accurately described, which summed up amount to 81,554 Yojanas.* The breadth of the world is 100,000 Yéjanas, equal to 180° of longitude: and these 81,554 Yéjanas answer of course to 146°48, which subtracted from 180 degrees, leave 33; the half of which 16’ 30’ is the longitude of Dharma-puri, and added to 146° 50’ will place Add-Lancaé or Jum-cote in long. 162° 20. For these two places are at the furthermost extremities of the earth, which forms a perfect circle, sur- rounded bya sea, every where of the,same breadth. This singuiar route of the departed will be thesubject of a separate paragraph. It passes through Jndia, in .* Ganiesa Purana, L 146 ESSAY ON the direction of the first range of snowy mountains. The Pandits, whom Anut-Fazit consulted, placed Cancador 1265 YVojanas from Lancd, or the peak of Apam, which is in 90° of longitude, according to them. Yama-puri is accordingly 12054 Yéjanas from Lanca ; some reckon 1242, which will place Yama-puri in long. 178°. 29%. The commentator on the Sarya-Siddhanta, has re- duced that distance very much; for he says that Lanca, or the three islands, occupy a space of 30 degrees along the equator; and this will bring their assumed longitude of the easternmost shores of Jdd- Lanca nearer to “its real one. As Protemy places Md-Lancdé-puri in the same longitude with the Pauranics, he must have used the same data, and which he had probably received from the Hindus whom he conversed with at dleran- dria. Ma-Lancad being, according to the Pauraniics, in the center of the Peninsula, it must be of course m about five degrees of Latitude North: and there it is placed by Axput-Faztr: and in 4020’ by Pro.emry. » Mé Lancé is called in the Puranas Yamala and Ma- laya ; which last denomination it still retains. It is styled also Canchana-pada, or with the golden skirts. It may be'translated the country of the golden feet, a title assumed by the Emperors of Ava, and other Kings of that part of the world: and the /alayan breeze is as famous in the east, as the Sabgan in the west, and its capital was also called Saba or Zaba. In the beginning of the Brahmdnda-puran’a, it is de- clared, that the strong hold of Yama in T77-cuta, that is to say the Peninsula of Malaca, is 100 Yojanas long, and 30 broad, which is sufficiently accurate. THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 147 ProtemMy mentions there a place called MJalaiou- colon, probably from the Sanscrit -Malaya-cilam, which implies a place on the borders or shores of Ma- laya: the same is called Maletur by Marcc-Poto; Malaya-tir and Malaya-cilam ave synonymous. Peri- mula in Protemy, I suppose to be derived from the Sanscrit Pari-Malaya, which implies the same thing. For it is probable, that they were acquainted only with the ¢iram, tir or culam of the Peninsula: and Canchana-pada may also signify the foot, skirts of the golden mountain, or Peninsula. __ The next island is Sumatra, called in the Pur‘an‘as Rajata, or silver island, the Argyre of the western geographers, In the Vrihat-catha itis called Naircéla or Nalicéra and Srimat, ior the fortunate, and syno- nymous with S77 imatra. That famous island is called now Sumatra, and a former European travellers Symotta. In the same book, and in the [7itépades‘a, it is called Carpura, or camphire island. In the spoken dialects, that word is pronounced Ca‘pur and Cafur. Marco-Poto gives the name of Fan/ur to one of its provinces, pro- bably for Canfur or Campar, as it is now called. A beautiful lake on the island, is mentioned in the Ai- topades'a under. the name of Padma-nilaya, or the abode of Papma’-DE’VI. It is also called AJandara in the Purdn'as: and as it is represented as a most delightful country, it may be denominated Su-J4andara; and it was called Saman- der by former geographers, But it seems, that. this appellation is derived from Samander in the spoken dialects of India, from the Sanscrit Samudra, which signifies the ocean. The author of the Periplus men- Sons an island near the Ganges called Oceanis and I 37 2 148 - ESSAY ON E1-Eprissr says that the island of Samandar is near the Ganges. Probably the author of the Periplus confounded it with Ségara island, a name of the same import, at the mouth of the Ganges and called also Oceanis by Diovorus the Sicilian. The context, however of this author, and of more modern geo- graphers, show that it cannot be the same island. Satmasrus and others improperly laugh at the idea of an island at sea being called Oceanis. This Oceanis was probably the place of abode of old Samunpra, the old man of the sea, often mentioned in romances in the east. The word Samudra, or Samundur, are pronounced, ~ Sumundu, and Mundu in the dialects of Ceylon; and there is an island of that name mentioned by. an- cient geographers in the eastern seas, and supposed by them to be the same with Zuprobané or Ceylon ; but SrepHanus of Byzantium says that the silver island made part of Yaprobané, which is really the case. It isalso called by them Palai-Simundu, which I take to be a corruption from Pulo-Simundu, Pulo- Symotta, the island of Simundu, or Symotta._ 'The de- scription of that island, under the name of Simondu, does by no means agree with Ceylon: but is easily re- conciled with Sumatra, though we know but little of the interior parts. The large lake called A/egisba, with the metropolis, does not exist in Ceylon, but is probably that exten- sive lake to the south of Menangcabow, mentioned by Mr. Marspen in his map of Sumatra, from which several large rivers seem to issue. The harbour of Hippuros or [pporus in Pulo-Simundu is called Aypoor by DanviLLe, and Jppu by Mr. Marspen from the Sanscrit and Hindi ‘J-pura or ‘J-pu, and in a deriva- tive from Ai pura, the town of the goddess ‘I or THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 149 Buava’ni. From this lake issues the river Andra- guerii or Indergeree, in Sanscrit Indra-giri ; because its source is in the giri, or mountain of Inna, or Maghabé; from whom probably the lake in the plains below was denominated Maghaba or Megisba, accord- ing to Puiny, and Padmd-nilaya or the place of abode of Papma’-pe’vi the consort of VisHnu, in the Hitopades‘a. From this lake issued two rivers, according to Puiiny; one called Palesimundus flowed towards the south, and towards a town of the same name (perhaps the modern Palembang) which was the metropolis of the island, and had a famous harbour. The river di- vided then into three streams, the smallest of which was five furlongs broad, and the largest two miles nearly. Thus I translate this passage of Priny : for itis impossible that three such large arms of a river should fall into a harbour. According to Mr, Mars- DEN, this lake communicates with the river of Palem-— bang : for, says he, the inhabitants avail themselves of this lake in transporting their goods to, and from Palembang.* The other river, toward the north, and supposed to issue’ from that lake, was called Cydara ; probably because it flowed through the country of Ru or Aru, called Daru by former European travellers: the capi- tal of which, on its banks, was probably called Cota- Ru, or the town and fort “of Ru. his is the largest river in the island, and of course its source far remote into the interior parts of the country. ‘The river Szac seems to be a branch of it: and the Campar is sup- posed to communicate with the river Jndra-giri. Op- * History of Sumatra, p. 9. L3 150 ESSAY ON posite to this, toward the west, another river flows from the Anountdin’ of Indra-giri, and is called “An- drapour or Snamupoter from the Sunscrit Indra-pura : and I believe that the town is the same whichis ealled Andra-Simundu by Protemy, and foisted into Cey- lon by him, on a supposition that it was the same island with Pulo: Simundu; and ¥ believe that this is not the only place in apr obane, that belongs to Pulo-Simunda. The mountains of Iwpra, or Mazhabé in the island of Sumatra, are fentioned 3 in the V’rihat-cat ha, wider the name of Baldéhaca, which is synonymous ‘ with Mésha, from its summit being capped with clouds: and Inpra, who presides over rain, resides above'the clouds: heiée he is called Me'Guava‘Hana, M¥ GHA- BA‘HANA, and in conversation’ Mx’ GHABA‘’N; or the cloud borne. Thé other mountains in Sumatra; mens tioned'in the Vrihat-catha, are Maindca Vrishabha: and Chacra. Upon thése’ ‘four mountains, as ‘thany' gods are, in the'saiie book, declared to reside and to travel occasionally 1 im their self-moving cars to the’ Wate Island in the west, in order to pay their respects to Visunu, and his consort ABDHITANAYA, or the daughter Ge the Ocean. . Naricéla, another name for this ‘sland, implies its abounding with cocoa-nut trees, the leaties of which being agitated by the winds strike against each other, and seem to repeat the words Boe-boc or Vac-vac: or the continual noise whieh they make is compared by the Hindus to what is_ called in Hindi Boc-boc or constant chattering. Su- matra is then the island of Boc-boc, Vac-vac or Wace- wac of Arabian authors ; who say that the leaves of. these trees striking against each other seem to. repeat © the word /Vac. ; ‘ Sumatra appears to me to be the same island, in which JamBuLus is supposed to have resided seven years, and from which ty went to ‘Palibothra. The , 4 THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 151 inhabitants, says he, have two tongues, or languages; their own first; and probably the J/alay was the other, which they spoke fluently, but 1 suppose only in the districts bordering upon the sea. JamBy ius takes notice, that this island abounded with hot springs, which is true of Sumatra, but not of Ceylon. They had also an alphabet, consisting of twenty-eight letters, divided into seven classes, each of four let- ters. There were seven original characters, which, after undergoing four different variations each, con- stituted these seven classes. They wrote also from top to bottom: and that this was the case formerly in Sumatra is my opinion.* For the manners of the natives of the P/ilippine islands, correspond in so many striking particulars, with those of the Sva- transt that no doubt can be entertained, says Mr. Marsp:in, if not of a sameness of origin, at least of an intercourse and connexion, in former times, which no longer exists. ‘Shey used to write from top to bottom, till the Spaniards taught them to write from left to right. The Zagada alphabet in these islands, has certainly great affinity with those of Sumatra. The two alphabets of the Sumatrans consist only, one of twenty-three, and the other of nineteen letters: but it is probable that there were two sorts of ‘them formerly, as in India, and which. were .origi- nally the same. One was used by the more civilized * Dr. LEYDEN. who had been lately engaged in inquiries concern- ing the tribes inhabiting the islands of the eastern Archipelago, partly confirms this conjecture by the information, that the mode of writing, practised by one of the tribes in Sumatra (the Battes), is perpendi- cular: but instead of commencing at the top of the line, the writing begins at the bottom. MaRrspDEN’s Batta alphabet is stated to be correct, provided the plate be turned in a perpendicular instead of a horizontal direction. H.T. C. + History of ‘Sumatra, p. 255. L4 152 ESSAY ON and learned classes, and at court; the other was current among the lowerclasses, whose poor and barren dialect had fewer sounds to express. Be this as it may, the ele- ments of their alphabets have an obvious affinity with those of the Sanscrit. The Sanscrit alphabet, after strik- ing off the double: letters, and such as are used to express sounds peculiar to that language, has a sur- prising affinity with the old alphabets used in Europe ; and they seem to have been originally the same. This subject I intend to resume hereafter. The Em- perors of Sematra, when endeavouring to introduce civilization into their country, opened an intercourse with India, but more particularly with the kingdom of Magad’ha, and Pahbothra ; for as Mr. Marspen judiciously observes*, the Afalay language has re- ceived no improvement from the dialects of the Pe- ninsula in India. All the Hindi and Sanscrit words in that language are such as were in use at the court of the Emperors of Jndia, residing in Bahar, and among . the better sort of the inhabitants of that country, The Kings of Sumatra call themselves Maha-rajas to this day ; their prime ministers are called Mantri:} which are both Sanscrit terms. In their language ‘Dewa and Dewata are derived from Déva and Dévaté in Sanserit; the first of which signifies God, and the other a deity. Among the names of places in Swmatra, very few are Sanscrit, but the following are undoubt- -edly such; viz. dndragiri, Indrapura, Ipura or Aipura, Sinha-pura, Singa-pour, or Sincdpour. JAmeuLus.says that this tract of islands, or Lanca, consisted of seven principal ones; and to this day in * As. Res. v. iy. p. 233. , + Hist. of Sumatra, p. 285, and from Mantri the Portuguese wade Mandarin. THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST, 155 the Peninsula, Lanca is often called Vail-Lanca or the seven Lancds; because it consisted of seven islands. This information I owe to Mr. Duncan, Governor of Bombay. From Yail-Lanca former tra- vellers made Vlanca. Sumatra is perhaps the island of Sabala mentioned in one of the Puranas; and it is the same which is called ‘Saivala or ‘Satbala in the Vayu purda, section of the earth, and represented as a mountainous region in the skirts of Bhadras'va, or that part of the old continent between the N. E. and S. E. quarters. From ‘Saibala, Apuvetus and AristoTLe* probably made Phebol or Psebol, as some learned men are inclined to read it. The former says, that in the eastern seas, there are two large islands, Zaprobane and Phebol: ArIstTotLe places the latter opposite to Arabia, and we have seen before that the Paurdnics, Arabian and Persian authors insist, that Sumatra is close to the _continent of Africa. The island of Sabala is probably the Samil or Shamel of Ex-Eprisst and other eastern geographers, who call it also Sabi. The country of Cephala is noticed by former European travel- lers; and in the year 1543, adventurers from that country plundered and ravaged part of the island of Sumatra. : III. ‘Let us now pass to the third island, or Sin- hala, now Ceylon, Its. Sanscrit. name is a derivative form from Sinha; a lion, and it was given to it on account of its being inhabited by Szvhalas, or the * AriIsToT- de Mundo. + Hist. of Sumatra, p. 6, 154 ESSAY ON offspring of a lion.* It is, however, more generally called Lanca in the Purdivas, and is represented there as the country of Ravana, or Raban, the brother of Cuvéra ; and both were born at the extremities of the world, in the N. W. As he was contemporary with Ra MAcHANDRA, if there ever was such a being, he must have lived about .1800 years before Curisrt. The wars of Ra’vana in Lancd, and the adjacent countries, are famous all over Jndia, and make an era in the history of Ceylon. Traditionary legends in that island say, that in consequence of this bloody war, the island was depopulated, and remained in that state for 18435 years, being only inhabited by Daityas, or rather savage tribes. Ceylon was afterwards called Salava, or sSdlavam aceording to F. BartTHoLomeEo, from the ‘Séeyas, a certain tribe in Jndia, called also in the Purdn'as Sdlaeas. The famous peak of ddam was called \Sdé/mala, or the mountain of ‘Sdla. It is mentioned in the commentary on the Sérya-Sidd’hanta; in which it is said, that Maya the offspring of the Sun, by the daughter of the divme 7washta in the west, came from Rémaca-nagara, or Rome to the mountain of Sd/mala in Lancd, to make tapasya in honour of the sun, in order to obtain astronomical knowledge from him. Another name. for it is Sama- nala from Saumya-Nala another son of Twashta, who built Ra’ma’s bridge. Twashtd is the chief engineer of the gods, and his grand-son Maya of the Daityas. The appellation of ‘Sedca, or Salice, as it. was called by ancient geograghers of the second century, is also a regular derivative form in Saascri¢, from Sali or Sas: this denomination was unknown to Pury. According to F. BarTHoLoMeEo, and former | | * As, Res, v. vil. p. 48. THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 155 travellers, Ceylon was called Ilam, and HHad-ndd, La- nar; the country of Ilda, which signifies the earth in general. Tra-ndd, or Trandté, another nathe for it, sigmfies the three countries, meaning I suppose the three islands of Laned. The Hleniites reckon the longitude ew po meridian eg with the title of ‘Ramon Avanti or € yam, Meru, and the mountain of Vutsa in Curu or Siberia, which last is most probably an imaginary place in that country. The place of Rama was called Arima by Muselman writers; and they said that it was un- der the equator, and exactly half way between the straits of Alevander or Malaca, aud those of Her- cules or Gades in the west: and théy gave the name ot Gadtr or Gades to these two straits, both leading into. two vast. AVediterrancan staag and throug i Arima the Hindus, and even some 4rabian authors, itis said, made their first meridian to pass. Axt- Cosiici a Persian astronomer, who lived about 350 years ago, says, thatin his time some indus placed their first meridian at Cancador ‘a, or Jum-cote in the east.* [I believe that some of them did so formerly, and this of course occastoned afterwards some con- fusion. Their first meridian them passed through the | eastern Cerne, and the last through the westeriz_one, the several islands of which tract were the original islands of the blessed. When this mode of reckoning was altered; the meridian was placed in the middle of the world, yet it still passed throuh the eastern: Cerne ; though through a different part of it. This =f * Abuitede S Choraania, &e. dese iit. ‘Geach, min, vol, iii, p. 9. 156 ESSAY ON induced them also to bring one extremity of the western Cerne under the same meridian, probably for the sake of symmetry, which was certainly a sufficient reason with them. . Thus the iron peaks of the two Tri-cutadris fell in the same meridian, and the northern one might be about Nova-Zembla. This made me suppose, on my first acquaintance with the Puranas, that the White Island was an Utopian land, and I resolved of course to give myself no further trouble about it. The ingenious Mr, Baitty would not have failed, to have considered this projection of the northern 777-ci/ta, as a confir- mation of hisown system. There is another instance of the fondness of the AZindus for a symmetrical ar- rangement, and noticed by Srraso, as we have seen — in the first part. The mountains to the north of Jndia are in an oblique direction, and the first range of the snowy mountains is in the same line with Romaca- pattan or Rome, and Yamapuri or Jumcote, as placed by the Hindus, one at the furthest extremities of the west, and the other in the same manner toward the east, as represented in the second number of the ac- companying plate. But as this oblique direction of the mountains to the north of Jndia, does not look so well in the mode of projection adopted by the Hindus, they have represented them in a parallel direction with the equator; and with them Jumcote and Rome. Strazo highly reprobates that alteration in the direc- tion of the mountains to the north of Jndia; and which in his time, had been adopted by geopraphers in the west. The two Gadirs, called the eastern and western gates, by Arab and Persian authors, are in an oblique direction, and may be called the terrestrial gates ; THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 157 for in heaven there are also two gateways, one in the west in the tropic of Cancer and the other in the east in the other tropic. These were called the gates of the sun: the southern one was denominated the water gate, and the fire gate was in the north. The souls of the departed ascend through one gate, and those who are to be born again descend through the other, according to western mythologists. The Hin- dus have also two roads, one in the north or left, and the other in the south. Those who follow the left path, ascend through the northern road; and those, who follow the right one, ascend through the southern path. * { iil. On the Laxcuaces and Literature of the Inpo- CuinuseE Nations. BY J. LEYDEN, M. D. THE inhabitants of the regions which lie betweew India and China, and the greater part of the islanders of the eastern sea, though divided into numerous tribes, and equally dissimilar in their languages and manners, may yet with propriety be characterized by the term Indo-Chinese. Situated between India and China, each of which proudly styles itself the most ancient among the nations of the earth, they have contented themselves with more modest claims to an- tiquity, and professed to borrow from one or other of their neighbours the principal features of their reli- \ gion, la\ys and manners. The different periods, how- ever, at which these were adopted in different coun- tries, the various degrees of civilization, and the pre- existing habits on which they were engrafted, have produced a diversity of national characteristics, by which they are not only distinguished from the Jndian and Chinese nations, but also from one another, not- withstanding their common mixed origin. . The intercourse of Europeans with the Indo-Chinese nations, though, for the first two centuries after the arrival of the Portuguese in the east, scarcely inferior to that which was carried on with India or China, was not of such a kind as to furnish us with a very accu- rate or extensive knowledge of their laws, manners or literature; and for more thana century it has been rather declining than increasing. Neither, since our ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE, &c. 159 late rapid acquisitions in Indian languages and litera- ture, have we obtained any important accessions to our information in this quarter; though both political and literary reasons seem to require them. The materials of this imperfect sketch were chiefly collected in the course of a voyage, which the state of my health caused me to take to the eastern isles, in 1805, during which I resided some time at Penang, and visted Achi, with some other places on the coast of Sumatra and the Malayan peninsula. Cultivating an intercourse with a variety of individuals of diffe- rent eastern tribes, I availed myself of the facilities which the situation presented, to correct the vague ideas which I had previously entertained, concerning their laneuages, literature and the filiation of their tribes. Though my information was chiefly collected from native sources, yet it sometimes happened, that these were not exactly such as I should have preferred, had better been attainab!e; and some times too, from the indifferent state of my health and other causes, I was no table to avail myself of these sources of infor- mation to the extent I could have wished. Feeling myself equally embarrassed by the extent of the sub- ject, the difficulty of the research, and, perhaps I may add, in some instances, by the novelty of the investi- gation, I should have hesitated to lay before the Asiatic Society these imperfect results, had I had any immediate prospect of pursuing the diseusssion. I do not however despair of being able, at no very dis- tant period, to offer some more minute and correct views of several of the subjects treated here in a cur- sory manner; and, at all events, I trust this attempt to introduce order and arrangement into a subject at once so extensive and intricate, and to disentangle it from a degree of confusion which seemed almost in- 160 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE extricable, may not be altogether without its use; but may, even where I have failed, serve to point out the proper method of investigation. | The Jndo-Chinese nations, at a very early period, seem to have generally embraced the system of Bupp xa. From the want of original historical do- cuments, we can only conjecture the period at which this eveut took place, in the different regions over which it has extended; but at present it is chiefly confined to the continent. "The coasts of the Malayan peninsula, and of the greater part of the eastern isles, are chiefly occupied by the A/oslems. ‘The original inhabitants, therefore, being for the most part con- fined to the interior of these islands, are still very im- perfectly known to Europeans ; so that it is often im- possible to determine, whether their religious insti- tutions are most connected with the tenets of Brau- mA or Bunn Ha, and often to reduce them to any known system. From the names and epithets, how- ever, of some of their deities, even as given in the vulgar and incurious manner of common navigators, it is often easy to discover their connexion with the grand features of Hindu superstition; but our notices concerning them are generally too scanty, and our narratives too erroneous, to enable us to classify them with absolute certainty. Such is the difference of oriental and European manners, that the simplest nar- tator is apt to mingle conjecture with observation ; while an absurd affectation of superior sagacity anda disdain of vulgar superstitions and prejudices, often prevent those who have had the opportunity of obser~ vation, from detailing the most useful pieces of in- formation, or induce them to reject, as anile and use- less fables, the mythological narratives which would enable us to determine the origin of a nation ora tribe. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 161 With the exception of the Malays, and perhaps some rude tribes of; mountaineers, the ‘nations. who occupy the gountites which, extend from India to China, provess only one religion, and adhere almost solely to the system of Bupp'ua. In so vast an extent of country some diversity of local institutions is always to beexpected ; but the spirit of the system and its influence, on. the manners of the people,, in the, same state of civilization, is essentially the same from Chatigan to China. This system in its grand features identifies itself with that which prevails 10 Nepal, Butan, and Tibét, and has extended itself over the immense regions of Chin, Cham, and Japuén, or China, Tartary, and Japan....Though it does not appear that all the nations who occupy this pro- digious extent of territory employ the same learned language i in. the preservation of their sacred books and. religious tracts, yet this is the case with the Indo-Chinese nations, who, with the Stnghalese, or inhabitants of Ceylon, uniformly employ the Bali or Pali,,.in the,sacred compositions of the Buddhist sect. This language does not exist as a vernacular tongue, but is the language of religion, learning, and science, and appears to have exerted an influence over the vernacular languages of the Indo-Chinese nations, similar to that which the Sanscrit has exhi- bited among the popular languages of Hindostan and Dek hin. The Malayu language, and the more original lan- guages of the eastern isles, seem in their original formation, to haye been polysyllabic, like Sanscrit, Pali, and ‘the spoken dialects of India. The modifi- cations which these languages have received from a foreign source, seem for the most part, to have been effected, rather by the immediate agency of San- M 162 on THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE scrit than of Pali? though the influence of this latter is not to be entirely excluded. But several of them have been a second time modified, by the imtro- duction of ‘rabic, ‘as the language of religion and learning, aftet the conversion ‘of several of these tribes to the AZahummedan faith. The vernacular’ Zndo-Chinese languages on the con- tinent, seem all to be, in their origmal. structure, either purely monosyllabic, like the spoken languages of China, or they incline so much to this class, that it may be strongly suspected, that the few original polysyllables which they contain, have ‘either been itnmeédiately derived from the Pali, ‘or formed of coalescing monosyllables.' These languages are’ all prodigiously varied by accentuation, like the spoken languages of China; and every foreign modification which they have received seems to have been imme- diately derived from the Pali. dit In the paucity of existing monuments, relative ‘to the Indo-Chinese wations, no better'method' presented itself, either for classing their tribes, or laying a foundation. for historical researches, than by €x- aminiig the mutual relation of the several languages which are current among them. This method, when applied on an extensive scale, is always the surest clue for developing the origin of a nation, and indi- cating the revolutions to which it may have been subjected, either by foreign conquest or colonization. After the relations of the language itself, the ancient monuments and compositions, preserved in it, claim our regard; and I have therefore noted, under their respective heads, such as have come to my knowledge ; premising that my opportunities of procuring this species of information have’ been very unfavourable, ‘and of examining them, very limited. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 163 The Indo-Chinese languages may be considered in the following order. Polysyllabic languages. Monosyllabic languages. 1 Malayu, ' 7 Rukhéng, 2 Jawa, $8 Barma, 3 Bagis, 9 Mén, 4 Bima, 10 Thay, 5 Batta, 11 Khodhmén; 6 Gala, or Tagala. 12 Law, 13 Anam. The learned language. 14 Pah. I. Matayu.—The Malayu language, sO pro- nounced in the AZalaya peninsula, but by Europeans generally denominated A/alay,.1s used by, the, nume- rous, and enterprising nation of that name, who are termed Khék bythe Siamese, and Masi by the Bar- mas. ‘This language, which from its sweetness, has been termed the Jzalian, and from its widely extended use, the Hindostani of the Last, though it coincides with the monosyllabic languages in its general con- struction and analogies, 1s properly polysyllabic in its form. Having spread. itself over a.great extent of country, not ‘only i in the Adalaya peninsula, but far among the eastern isles; and having been propa- gated by : a race more skilled in arms than in letters, it has branched out into almost as many dialects as states, by mixing in different proportions with the native languages ‘of the aboriginal races. ‘This is the circumstance which renders the investigation of the origin and relations of the AZalayu language a matter of difficulty, as it becomes necessary to examine the history of the nation, as well as the structure and composition of the language itself. Though used by a nation of compar a late origin, at least with 3) ¢ 164 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE respect to the principal features which it at present presents, the history of this nation is still very ob- scure, rather, it may be presumed, from the want of investigation, than from the want of materials for its illustration. The history of the origin and progress of the Malayu tongue, of course partakes of this obscurity; but notwithstanding the great diversity which occurs in the spoken dialects, in the bazar jargon, or as the Malays term it, the Basa Dagang, of the several Malay states, the Basa Jawi or written language of composition, is nearly the same in all; and the popular, or vernacular languages; are reck- oned pure, in proportion as they approximate to the written language. Assuming therefore the Basa Jawi as the standard of comparison, the J/alayu language, m its present state, consists of three principal component parts. The first of these, which is rather the most copious and current in the language of conversation, may, perhaps, in the present state of our knowledge, be regarded as original, though it is not only connected with the insular ianguages, but with some of the mono- syllabiv, as Barma and T’hay. The second, which is obviously derived from the Sanscrit, is rather inferior in the number of vocables* to the first, though as far as regards general use,. greatly superior to the third part, which is derived from the Arabic. As a spoken language, the MJalayu exists in the greatest purity in the tin countries, or the peninsula of Malaya, which is-obviously the Temala of Protemy. Temata is a regular derivative from the VJalay vocable tema, which signifies ¢7z, and from this, among other cir- cumstances, we may be permitted to infer the high antiquity of the basis of the AMJalay language, from its giving name to the Cassiterides of the east. The 1 > ae OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 165 Malayu language is spoken in its greatest purity in the states of Kzddeh or Tanna Say, Perak, Salangér, Killung, Johor, Tringgano, Pahang, and as far as Patani, where it meets the Siamese. Among the western JZalays in general, it is spoken with more purity than among the more easterly isles, but on the coast of Sumatra, or Puléw Purichu, it is inter- mixed with the Batta and other original languages. The Menangkabow race, who seem at an early period to have ruled the whole island of Sumatra, whose chief assumes the name of Mana’ Ra’‘sa’ of Raya’s, and derives his origin from Lankapura, speak a dialect ef Malayu, which differs considerably from that of the peninsula; but which seems, as far as I can judge, to coincide in many respects with the Jawa or Javanese language. The race have probably de- rived their origin from Lankdpira in Java. |The Malayu dialects of Riyéw and Linga seem to be ~ mixed with Javanese, as are those of the Malay states on the island of Java. The dialect of Pantiana and Sambas, is purer than that of Borneo or of Banjar ; but that of Passir, on the east coast of Borneo, is greatly mixed with the original language of Celebes, or the Bugis. The Malays of fitakes speak a dialect greatly mixed with Bzgis, while those of the Moluccas and the more eastern isles have adopted such a multitude of foreign words, that their dialect sometimes seems to be quite a different language. The simplicity of structure which the Adalayu language possesses, in common with those of the monosyllabic class, greatly facili- tates this adoption of foreign terms ; and the practice is so prevalent in the more easterly isles, that the term Basa Timor, or the eastern language, is currently applied to every kind eee 3 M3 166 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE As the Malayu language, from its wide extent and the adventurous spirit of the nation, seems to have exerted, im the eastern isles, a modifyi ing influence, similar to that of the Sanscrit in Hindostan and Dekhin, and of the Pah among the Indo-Chinese nations; it becomes necessary to examine it somewhat more particularly ; especially as some of the opinions I have been led to adopt concerning it, are somewhat different from those which have been entertained by names of great authority. . The Malay language, according to Marspen, whose opinion has been rather admitted than con- firmed by Sir W. Jones, is “a branch or dialect of the widely extended language, prevailing throughout the islands of the dr chipelago, to which it gives name, (which may be understood to comprehend the Sunda, Philippine, and Molucca islands) and those of the South Sea; comprehending, between Madagascar on the one hand, and aster Island on the other, both inclusive, the space of full 200 degrees of lon- gitude. ‘This consideration alone,” adds that able author, “is sufficient to give it claim to the highest degree of antiquity, and to originality, as far as that term cau be applied. The varions dialects of this speech, though they have a wonderful accordance in many essential properties, have experienced those changes which separation, time, and aecident pro- duce; and, in respect to the purposes of intercourse, may be classed mto severai languages, differing con- siuerably from each other*.” In another paper, publishes in the Archxologia, vol. VI. this able author has successfully exhibited ia variety of in- stances of coincidence, both in sound and: nh: * Asiat. Research, Vol. 1V. , OF THE INDO-CHINESE. N ATIONS,, 9467 cation, between the Jfalay and several of the eastern dialects. By attempting to prove, too, much, how- ever, I apprehend, that he has Failed essentially. He has pointed out a few coincidences, ,but has left the mass of the language totally, unaccounted for; and as the few coinciding words may all have been derived from a common source, it is perhaps a mote natural inference to conclude that they have all been modified by some general language, than with Sir W. Jones, to determine that the parent of them all has been the Sanscrit. The same author, in his history of Swmatra, seems inclined to think that the Malay \anguage was indigenous in the Malay penin- sula, from which it extended itself among the eastern isles, till it became the lingua franca of that part of the globe. The author of the description of Sram, in the modern part of the Universal. History, not only assigns a very different origin to the language, but accounts in a very different manner for its un- common extent. Describing A/alacea, he observes, “The Malayan tongue is formed out of the languages of the different nations which resort hither, by selecting the choicest words in’each. Hence it is reckoned the most: agreeabie and elegant in all the Indies, which quality, joined to its use in_ trade, causes it to be learned by the remotest eastern people,” A language, formed according to this ingenious idea of selection, might probably be remarkably agreeable and elegant, but it would be stil more remarkable, as a new phenomenon in the history of nations. It would certainly be a very uncommon occurence in the history of mankind, to discover a nation.so choice in matters of abstract sound, and,so refined in their organs of hearing, as. to take the trouble to learn a copious and unknown language, tor the mere abstract pleasure of gratifying this deligate sense or appetite RAMS) oT pee a Peary 1; 168 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE for sweet vocalic sounds. Nevertheless, though the author is a little unfortunate in his doctrine of causes, the fact to which he alludes is worthy of attention ; for it is not necessary to possess a very minute know- ledge of the AMalayu language, to be able to call its originality in question. It may be safely affirmed, that neither the Malay lingua franca of commerce, nor any of the maritime dialects of Malayu existed previous to the era of MauUMMED, In a state similar to that in which they appear at present; and these dialects seem to comprehend all that are usually included under the denomination of the Malayu language. ) The Malayu language, in this limited sense, is obviously indebted to two foreign sources, for the majority of the vocables which compose it, and these are the Sanscrit and the Arabic. The connection between the Sanscrit and Malayu was first remarked by Sir W. Jones, and Mr. Maxspen has confirmed the fact, by about fifteen examples, selected, as he says, with little pains, from a Malay dictionary, which had he been acquainted with the Sanscrit language, he might with very little labour, have extended to fifteen hundred, or perhaps five thousand. Many of the Sanscrit words in the - Malayu, as he observes, are such as the progress of civilization must soon have rendered necessary, being frequently expressive of mental feelings, or such modes of thinking as naturally result from the social habits of mankind, or from the evils which tend to interrupt them. Many of the names of the common objects of sensation are also of Sanscrit origin; never- theless, the simplest part of the JZal/ayu language, and that which is most indispensable to its existence -f OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 169 as a distinct tongue, is certainly not derived from the Sanscrit. With respect to the connection between drabie and VWalayu, Marsven observes, that the latter lan- guage abounds with Arabic words, which writers affect to introduce, because this display of literary skill is, at the same time, a proof of their religious knowledge. He adds, that these words are generally legal or metaphysical terms, borrowed from the Koran or its commentaries, that they are never expressive of simple ideas, are rarely used in conversation, and, with few exceptions, seem never to have been thoroughly incorporated into the language. This account of the introduction of Arabic into Maiayu is unexceptionably just, excepting with respect to the use of Arabic terms in conversation, which is affected by all AZalays who have any pretensions to literature. The number of Arabic vocables too, that have been introduced into Malay compositions, though certainly inferior to those of Sanscrit origin, are con- siderably more numerous than might be supposed from this statement; or rather, as in Persic and Turki, it is difficult to assign any bounds to their imtroduction, but the pleasure of the writer. It may also be observed here, that in the AMJalayu language, Arabic plurals are very commonly used as singulars, as often happens in 7'urki, and other dialects which admit of a mixture of Arabic. Marspen has men- tioned another peculiarity, in which Arabic vocables, adopted by the Malayu, differ from adopted Sanscrit terms. While the 4radic words retain their peculiar and harsh pronunciation, those of Sanscrit origin are softened down, and assimilated with the rest of the language. This observation must likewise be taken with many limitations; for numerous words, of dra- 170 N THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE bic origin, are so completely: assimilated to, the Ma- layu pronunciation, that they aré no longer capable of being recognized, even by a native drab, unless by attention to their radicals; the aiz and ghain, in particular, excepting in religious terms, ane very gencrally conyerted into di/fand Gf, both in writing aud pronunciation. Itis certain; however, that Arabic words are naturally untractable, and are apt to have a foreign appearance When. assuined into any, other language, in spite of all, modifications. .The Arabic is a language so complete in itself, and so peculiar in its structure, that.it is as little capable of coalescing neatly with any other language, as a curved line with a straight one. sega Re Pg i Marspen has likewise hazarded an opinion, that the polish, which the Malayu has derived from Sanscrit or Hinduvi, has been obtained immediately fiom the natives of Guzerat, previous to the debase- ment of the genuine Hinduvi of the northern pro- vinces, by the mixture of Arabic nouns, and the abuse of verbal auxiliaries. The resort of the people of Guzerat to Malacca, he adds, ‘‘is particularly noticed by Dr Barros and other authentic writers; and it is well known that the Hindu, language has been preserved with more purity in that, than in any other maritime province of Judia.” ‘To this, it 1s sufficient to answer, that the Sgzscri¢ ‘vocables, adopted in Afalayu and Guzerdti, are generally pre- served purer. in the former than, in the latter; that — the Guzerdti has no pretensions to be considered as _ a pure dialect of Hinduvi, but on the contrary, is one of the very first that was corrupted by a.mixture of Arabic, and that long prior to the period mentioned by De Barros. The Bengali language itself, cor- Tupted in pronunciation, as it certaily is, might haye Te ne OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS; - 171 been more safely adopted, as the medium for the introduction of Sanscrit vocables into Malayu. Many Sanscrit words that are in current use in Bengali, likewise occur in Malayu, with:almost the very same pronunciation. Of this it is easy to produce a mul- titude of imstances.» The following are such as: pre- sent themselves spontaneously: | Beng. * Malay. Tot’hapi---.-- oe eces ceever ee Tatapi+eeecess but, however. Punahs sve cccccrccessvee sere Pisce essevcs farther, again. "Futkalé) . sce ccs csc ccvccsccss utkadla «2-oe% then. Bongsh tere ecererereeeseces Bangs seseer a raceorfamily, Kichhu or Kichhi +--+. -+-+++ Kichi +++«++++ a little, Inggit, a signal «+++++++++e+++ Ingat ++++++++ notice,memory, Barung, a gift, a thing, a quality. Barang-barang, any thing. But it is needless to adduce further instances; as the Malay history and the language itself, exhibit traces sufficiently clear, to direct us to the’ region, with which the J/alays had the most frequent inter. course, at an early period, and from which their lan- guage seems to have received the most considerable modifications, and that is the ancient kingdom of Kalinga. Here I am again under the necessity of dissenting from Marspex’s opinion. He says, “It -is evident, that from the Telinga, or the Tt “moo! the’ Malayan has not received any portion of its improve- ment.” I apprehend that the express reverse of this opinion is evident; for the JZalays, at this very pe- riod, know the Coromandel coast by no other name than Tanna Keling, the land of Keling or Kalinga: a multitude of compositions, current among them, profess to be translations from the Basa-Keling, ‘or Kalinga language; and the Afalayu lancuage contains a gr eat number of words that are Tamul, Malaydlam, and Telinga ; though neither Sznscrit, Hinidusi, nor Guzerati ; and a variety that are only to be found in Telnga, the vernacular language of the Kalinga Desa. ‘ 172 OWN THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE For ‘the same reasons that I infer an ancient inter- course to have subsisted between the Malays and Kalingas, 1 am induced to think that a very intimate connection subsisted, at avery early period, between the Malays and Javanese. Not only the proximity of the island of Java, and the constant intercourse between the Malays and Javanese, point to this con- nection, but the whole of Malay literature, the state of the language, and the whole series of Malay his-. tory, confirm it. It is from the Javanese that the Malays profess to have received all their earlier mythological fables; and a great variety of their books profess to be translations from that language: even in compositions professedly translated from the Keling language, the Javanese name of the story is often mentioned: and almost every Sanscrit term, that occurs in Malaya, is likewise to be found in the Basa Dalam Jawa, the high language of Java, or rather the language of the interior; though a mul- titude of Sanscrit words, current in the Javanese language, are not to be found in the M/alayu. Besides many of the Malay states, and those of the greatest antiquity, are known to have been founded by Javanese adventurers, anterior to the arrival of the Arabs: and if the historical traditions of the Malays were better known, there are many reasons for sup- . posing, that more of them would be found to claim the same origin. The greater part of the words of Sanscri¢ origin, found in A/alayu, do not appear to have been intro- duced through the medium of the Bai. In many instances, the Malayu form approaches nearer the pure Sanscrit than even the Bali itself; and many mythological stories exist in Aalayu, and mytholo- gical characters are introduced in them, that as far as I have been able to learn, do not occur in Bak ~ , 173 OF THE iNDO-CHINESE) NATIONS. iv compositions at all, nor in any of the Jndo-Chinese languages of the continent. | But after assioning the Arabic and Sanscrit voca- bles to their proper sources, a large proportion of words in the language will still. remain unaccounted for; and these ‘words too, expressive of the most simple class of our ideas, and the most remarkable objects innature. This part of the language, which in comparison of the rest, may be termed native vr original, Marspen attributes to what he reckons the original insular language of the South Seas ; and this original language, again Sir W. Jones pronounces a derivative from the Sanscrit. That it is not Sanscriz, a very slender knowledge of the two languages. is sufficient to evince ; and if this original part should itself turn out to be derived, as I apprehend, from different'sources, the idea of an original insular lan- guage will fall to the ground. Now there are a variety of reasons for supposing that this part of the Malayu language, which might be imagined the most simple and original, is in reality, more corrupted and mixed, than those parts which are confessedly de- rived from a foreign source. Several of the Alalayu terms, which express the most simple and remarkable objects in nature, appear to be only gross auricular corruptions of true regular terms in the more ancient eastern languages, as Jawa, Bagis, T’hay, and Barma; and many of the simplest objects are not distinguished in Afalayu by simple words, but by compound meta- phorical and significant terms. ‘The omission: of the first syllable, in words derived from a foreign language, whether ancient or modern, is a frequent practice in the MJalayu language: thus the Saxscrit Avatara becomes Bitara, and thus rumbilum, the - moon, in Javanese, becomes Bidun in Malayu—and Méputi, which signifies white, in Bugis, becomes puri 174 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE in’ Malayu. Again the metaphorical term mata-hari, which literally signifies the eye ot day, is the only native term for the sun; though Chinkerwala, a cor- ruption of the Bak term Chakrawala, has been adopted m the higher dialect, or poetical. style, termed the Basa Dalam. Yhe ALatay term tuhin which signifies the aged, is used as synonymous. with dllahtaala, which they have adopted from the drabic. A number of 7°hay vocables occur in Malayu ; but, for the most part, they are neither expressive of our simplest ideas, nor of the most remarkable objects in nature, ex- cepting perhaps su, the contracted term of Aku, I, in Malayu, which 1s the same in 7°hay or Siamese. A variety, however, of important words seem to have been adopted from the Barma language, especially in the verbal auxiliaries ; and in mostof these instances, it may be observed, that the Ma/ayu pronounciation coincides better. with that of Javay, or Tinnau, than with that of the Barmas propet. Thus the substan- tive verbal auxiliary of the present, adda, seems to be only a modification of the more simple da or déof the Barma \anguage. The past: suda of the Barma sy dé, the auxiliary of the future jadi of the Barma ra- de, pronounced ya-dé or ja-dé, maw, willor may, is a modification of the Barma Mi, or minh’, and the per- missive auxiliary /éh of the Barma lé. Of the con- nection of the A/alayu withany of the spoken dialects of China, it is more difficult to speak with accuracy, in the present state of our knowledge. Barrow, and some other authors of reputation, are inclined to attribute the origin of the Ma/ay tribes to the nations of China; and that author observes, that many words, in the languages of Sumatra, are similar in sound to Chinese vocables; and that the corresponding words generally express the same idea in both languages. Of the value of this opinion it is not easy to speak in correct terms, for the proper Chinese languages, are i OFTHE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 175 at least ‘ten in number, andthe dialects of Swmatra, vary almost as much, on asmiall scale, as the dialects of the Chinese; and te jumble together a number of corresponding words'in all those‘dialects, may there- fore ‘be no very difficult task. Some coincidences there certainly are, between the Aalayu and the Chinese-Mandarin language ; thus in tlre first personal pronoun, saya and gua, which both signify Zin Afa- layu,: very: nearly coincide with the Chinese seaé and neo, Which. have the same signification; but, on the whole, these coincidencesscem neither very numerous not important. . reek Ya hs: C 4 The' Malaya lancuave is extremely well fitted for being a Lingua Franca, or general medium of com- munication among the eastern isles, by the smooth- ness and sweetness of its tone, and the simplicity of its structure and construction. Its simple pronouns indicate rank and situation, and are almost as nume- rous asin Chinese ;' but the different dialects of. the Malayu vary considerably, both in the use: of the pronouns and of the verbal auxiliaries." It may also be observed, that the more mixed and impure any dialectof Alatayu is, it is more verbose, more indefi- nite in its expressions, and more loaded with useless auxiharies and epithets, which encumber the lan- guage, without adding either elegance, force, or dig- nity. The beauty and elegance of the JAfalayu is its simplicity ; and the purity of its minor dialects may » often be ascertained by this criterion alone. __ The literature of the Malays, though the language is well adapted for poetry, is not distinguished by many features of originality. A degree of monotony and repetition occurs in ali the compositions of the monosyllabic languages, which has a great tendency 176 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE to damp the ardour of composition, and extinguish poetical fire. The construction of the Malay is ana- logous to that of the monosyllabic languages, and there is also considerable similarity in the character of its compositions. ‘The most favourite species of composition among the AMJalays, is the Pantin, a ° word which is generally translated song, but which perhaps might with more propriety be rendered simile or proverb, as it consists of a simile, proverb, or apophthegm versified, and its application. A Pantin is a rhyming quatrain, and is always restricted to four lines; hence it affects a kind of oracular brevity, which is very difficult to be comprehended by Euro- peans, who can seldom perceive any connection be- tween the similitude and the application. The Ma- lays allege, that the application of the image, maxim, or similitude, is always accurate; but it may be sus- pected that if one half of the verse be for the sense, it often happens that the other is only for the rhyme, as in the ancient /Velsh triads or triplets, in which there is professedly no connection between the na- tural image and the moral maxim. These Pantuns the Malays often recite, in alternate contest, for several hours; the preceding Pantin always fur- nishing the catch-word to that which follows, until one of the parties be silenced or vanquished, or as the Malays express it, be dead, suda mati. Many of these Pantins bear no inconsiderable resemblances to the Dohras and Kubitas in the ancient Hinduvi and Vruja dialects of Hindostan. 7 The Sayer is another species of composition, which is analogous to the Persic Musnevi. Moral poems, re- sembling the Pundnaméhs of the Persians, didactic works, or descriptive compositions and legendary or heraic narratives, are composed in this measure. The OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 177 Cheritra:or Hikaiat; also denominated Chitra and Kuggawin; from the Javanese, is more generally writ- ten in prose, but frequently intermixed with verse, both in the measures of the Sdyer and Pantin. These Cheritras contain the mythological stories current among the Malay tribes, and also fragments of their history, embellished in a poetical manner.. The three great sources of all the JZalay legends are the Java- nese, Keling and Arabic languages, but in the com- positions of latter date, the characters and incidents are so mixed, that it is not always easy to determine to which of these sources they ought to be referred. There is also one class of stories which the learned Malays term Susupin, 1 imagine from an ancient dy- nasty of Javanese princes to whom they relate. Some of these legends also. coincide in the general story with those of the Siamese, as the AZLalay Selimbari with the Siamese Khinp’hen; and the Hikaiat Shah Murdan with the Siamese Lin-téing. When characters familiar in Sanscrit mythology are introduced into the Malay \egends, their adventures are generally trans- ferred by the Malays to the interior of Java; and even Arabian characters are. often represented as per- forming their adventures in the Jalay countries.— Many of these narratives exist both in prose and verse, and of several there seem to be two edi- tions; one’ derived immediately from the Javanese language, and which commonly contains a consider- able numberof Javanese vocables; the other from the Keling, which often contains.a certain proportion of words more immediately derived from the Sanscrit and Telinga. | | ‘Of this latter class are probably the narratives termed Hikaiat ototuvag or Pandu stories, which 178 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE seem popular versions, or tather abridgements, of the different parts of the Adahabh’drata; some of which, in reality, give the outline of the story, as faithfully as the popular abridgements of it, which Ihave perused in Mahrata, Tamut-or Telinga. 1 am only acquainted with the following Malay —Hi- kaiats of this class: Pindawa Lima, the stony. of the five Pandus ; Pindawa Jaya, the victory of the Pan- dis; Pindawa Berjuddi, the gaming of the Pandis; Pindawa Pinjam bali, the Pandis borrowing a ‘Pa- lace; Pindawa berjewal kapur, the Pandis selling lime. The Jithacat Alaha Raja Buma of Purichu Nikassan, or account of the contest between Brauma and VisHNnu, professes to be translated from the Keling of the dramatist MuncaxartTa Niga‘Ra. The Sah-Sipundia, or history of a Keling Rasau, “is pro- bably derived from the same source. The Aihkaiat Sri Rama is reckoned a Susupun story,’as ‘are the Kusoma Indra or history of Inpra, the Balinta Sena, the Sah Kobut, or history of the war with the Apes, the Rajah ular Ninggawong, the Hikaiat Bida Sari, the Hikaiat Raja Pikermadi or VicramMApirya Cuerirra, the Hikaiat Derma Rayan, and the: Hi- kaiat Kahlo Damna or Malay version of the Kalil e Dumana. 7 | The following are Javanese relations, the Hikaiat Chikkil Wunnungputti Rasan of Kirripin, in the in- terior of Java, the Hikaiat Jarana Tamasa, or the love of adventures of a chieftain of AZinjapahit, in Java, composed by AnpiKa, the Kildna Perbujaya Cheritra, or story of a prince of Kirripin, the Misa Perbujaya Cheritra, the Misa Kiamong Cheritra, or history of a Princess of Daha, in Java, carried ofPby Timunoune Barane Cuaxan Brmayand rescued by ( ,OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, , W9 Bie Kara; the Jaran Kilinang Cheritra; the Ratu Bader Kisna Cheritra; the Panga Witin, or history of Inu Kurrapurtt; the Gambar Wira- Putra; the Gambar Sri Ratu Anim-Ani Malayu, or.history of Gampar Spi, Princess of Daha and Raga Anou’m of Jdalaya ; the Naga Bisaru, or his- tory of a Princess of Daha, who was transformed into a snake, and confined in a lake, the Putti Kola Bisnu or.history of Visunu, the Kinta-Buhin, or history of a,chief of Banja skulin in Java, the Kilana Jayang Sittru, or history of Ravi JARAN Tinancxu, the Angling Dermavi Raja-Cheritra, and the Hikaiat Parang Piting, or history of the hatchet. without the handle. . To the same source are probably to he referred the following, if they are not purely of Malay composition ; the Hikaiat Pelandik Jinaka, or history of the sagacious hogdeer. The Hikaiab Biring Pinggey, or history of a wonderful bird.— The Deva Mandi Cheritra, the Sayer Sri Batin, the Fitkaiat Bian andthe Hikasat Rajah Boodah. eRe: following ar € ¢ modifications of Arabic narratives, danaumudatcsl however, to the peculiarities. of the Malayu manners and customs. The Hikaiat Anur HHumda.. The Hikaiat Rajah. Kheiber, the chief of the Jewish tribe of Kipeliat in Arabia. 'The.Hikaiat Rajah Hinduk, the Hikaiat Mahummed Hanifah, the Aikaiat Khajeh Maimin, the Hikait Eblis, the Hi kaiat. Rajah Shah Murdan, the Hikaiat ididin Ibra- him-ibn- Adhem, the Hikaiat Sekunder Dulkharneini. The Koran is also translated into Malayu in the s same par aphrastic manner as into Persie. . There are many Malayu compositions of a. histori- cal nature, though they are not so common as the 180 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE classes that have been enumerated: such as the Hi- kaiat Rajah-bangsu, which I have not seen, but which has been described to me as a genealogical his- tory of the Afalay Rasaus. The Hikaat Malaka, which relates the founding of that city by a Javanese adventurer, the arrival of the Portuguese and the combats of the Malays, with ALBUQUERQUE and the other Portuguese commanders. The Hekaiat Pitra- jaya-Putti, or history of an ancient Rajah of Malacca, the Hikaiat Achi, or history of Achi or Achin in’ Su- matra and the Hikaiat Hang-Tuha, or the adventures of a Malay chief during the reign of the last’ Rajah of Malacca, and the account of a Malay embassy sent to Mekka and Constantinople, to request assistance against the Portuguese. Such historical narratives are extremely numerous; indeed there is reason to believe that there is one of every state or tribe; and though occasionally embellished by fiction, it is only from them that we can obtain any outline of the Malay history, and of the progress of the nation, The juridical customs or traditions of the AZalays have likewise been collected into codes of different antiquity and authority. Among those of the great- est authority are the Undang Undang, and the dddat Malayu. ‘The imost ancient of these regulations, however, appear to have been adopted from the Ja- wanese and Bugis. Particular’states have at different periods composed peculiar regulations; as the 4ddat Kiddeh, which were compiled by Rajah Sua ALum, in An. Heg. 1151. | No dramatic compositions, in the AZadyu language, have fallen, as yet, into my hands, though many of them are said to exist. Scenic exhibitions termed “ /ayang-wayang, were till lately, very com- = OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 181 mon in the peninsula of AZalayu, but are now repre- sented as less frequently exhibited. The subjects of the Malayu dramas are the same as those of their histories and romances, from which, like the dra- matic compositions of the Siamese and Chinese, they only differ in assuming the form of dialogue and soliloquy, the progress of the incidents being gene- rally the same. | The following specimens of the Afalayu Pantin and Sayer will exhibit the measure of the verse and the style of the composition. ‘The first Pantin is a challenge to engage in a poetical contest. ‘The rest exhibit the peculiar images introduced, and the man- “ner of presenting them in the Pantin. Tuan bulu, saya tumiang Marileh kita berkiler taji Tuan sapulu, saya smbilan Marileh kita bersindir nyani. You are a bamboo and I am but a slender twig; Yet come on, let us sharpen’ our weapons :’ You are as ten, and I am only as‘nine; Yet come, let us contend‘in ironical verse.’ ’ Boah dilama ber pangsu pangsu or Samajuga bijinya merah », Jangamtuan berpilis bangsu _. Samajuga daranya merah. . The pomegranate has many partitions, _. . But the-seed is equally red in them all : mai he) Do ‘not give’an undue preference to:a race of men, od For the blood is equally red in them all. - Boah mamplum deri Patané = 9? Masa sabiji de kulum risa N 3 182 ON THE LANGUAGES) AND LITERATURE _. Tuan Islam saya Nasrahi,\ |’ fcoreiepSer gel Pee . Sama sara’ manangung dusa. §)) Of all the’ Mangoes of Patani : A ripe gne is’ but a mouthful toa stag; “You area Moslem ‘and I am a Christian, ‘But we must equally bear our own faults. Tso CIAO DIOIT Dra: Batang padi jangan de rariit mire SF YB _ Kalu de rardt risa batangnya ‘Hati mutla janga de tarat’ 8 i oomy aft to otidessur ot diaitacoud AWD, DAE ‘ Kalu de turdt ‘rasa’ badiiiya. De eee H, a wih Jean of L.., woilieacigd 9hh to Sevie Ons Shake not the rige stalk, gj 6 0. 179 OF OSs tev sis \ Lo . Ifyou shake itthestalkiisruimed: |! er) me? 8 Do not yield td, youthfulsinclination, | oil oue 1 10 89 If you yield your person is ruined. Siri kining deri Patant Pinang muda deri Malaka, |: Pati kining ana’k Nasrani ,; i)! sd suid lolinpi Itu membawa badin chilaka. The yellow. betel leaf of Patanz, The fresh betel-nut of AZulacea; | A white yellow christian \danjsel,);..) ou e Bring a person to total ruin. Gendack ‘zat reli The following passage of the Sédmbari:is given as a specimen of the Sayer verse, in which: theeMalay romances and moral poems are generally composed. In both measure* and style they exhibit con- siderable resemblaiice ‘to the ancient English and . French romances} ‘there is little variety of ‘pause or accent, and the lite consists indifferently of eight or nine syllables, one long syHable being reckoned equi- valent to two short. sain teufel ol I bers . tes OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, _ Tutkala tuan;lunkah de natang Mata mamandang sepurti bintang, Chahianya,limpah gilang gumilang, Teadaléh abang dapat mamandang Pipinya bagei paii de lalang Bersambut dangan lehernya jinjang Paras separti gumbar dan wayang, Barang de makan berbayang bayang Dahinya bagei sahari balun Kinningnya bintah bagei detillang Lalu de ambil jadikan talun Mamaki chinchin permata S¢lun Changgeynya panjang ber kilat kilat , Sepurti mutiara suda tericat Pinggangnya ramping terlalu chantils §| | Leher laksana gumbar delarik - Mungluarkan’ kata yang patah chirdik -Bibirnya bagei, patey chicharik ‘Teada mama laku_her saja Giginya itam bukkus ber baja ; Chartik moilik gilang de Raja #4 - Bersinting, katum byinga Seraja, Parasnya elok bukun kapalang ; Jar Intahkan jiwa garangan hilang \.-,, Kapada matasuda terpandang Fi ats (, Teadaléh dapat kumbali pulang. When my mistress looks forth from her window, ‘ ; (Her eye sparkling tee a star, _ Its brilliant ays glancing and glittering Her elder brother cannot support its lustre ;, » Like | the red mangoe is the hue of her cheek, “Becoming her tapering neck, _ Traversed with shadows whenever she swallows : . Her features like those of a statue or scenic figure, .. Her forehead like the new moon in its first day, N 4 186, 184 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Her eye-brows curved, so fair I could devour her, Long has she been chosen to be my mistress. Wearing a ring set with gems of Ceylon, Her long nails shining like lightning, Transparent as a string of pearls, Her waist slender and extremely elegant, Her neck turned like a polished statue, Eloquent in the enunciation of her words, © Her parting lips like the crimson red wood Not by dress, but by herself adorned ; Black are her teeth stained with baja powder, -' Graceful, slender, appearing like a queen, Her locks adorned with the Seraja flowers, Her features beautiful with no defect of symmetry, My soul is often fluttering ready to depart, Glancing eagerly forth from my eyes, And quite unable to return to its station: | The character generally used by the AJalays, is a modification of the Arabic; and, in addition to the proper Arabic alphabet, the AZalayu uses six letters, of which one is the Persic ché, a second the slurred dal, of the Hindostani, two more ‘correspond in power to the Persic and Hindostani pa and ga, but are writ- ten of a different form, and the remaining two, nga and nya, are peculiar in form, but correspond to the nasals of the first and second series of the Deva-Na- gari alphabet. The Malays of Java, hawever, often use the Javanese character, to express their own lan- guage, as those of Celebes do the Bugis. In the Ado- luccas, the Latin character has obtained some degree of currency, even among the Malays, and is some- times used by them to express the Aalayu language. The Malayu language was one of the first cultivated in the east by Europeans. The first attempt to form a erammar or dictionary of it, as far as I know, was OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 185 made by Davip Haex, who published in Malayu and Dutch, a vocabulary with some grammatical observa- tions. At the request of Cardinal Barsertnr, the Dutch was rendered into Latin, and published with the Propaganda types at Rome, 1631, under the title of “ Dictionarium Malaico-Latinum et Latino-Malai- cum, operd et studio Davipis Hatx.” This ‘is a work of some merit, but seems to have been composed in the Moluccas, and inclines to the Basa Timor, or eastern dialect of the AZalayu. The author has given a-short list of Zarnata and Por- tuguese words, that have been adopted into AMJa/ayu, ' and some uséful observations on the phraseology. Professor TuunBERG, probably by mistake, mentions this work as published in 1707. It seems to have served among the Dutch, as a basis for similar compi= lations. The ‘‘ Malaica Collectanea Vocabularia,” or collection of vocabularies, was printed at Batavia in 1707-8, in 2 vols.'4to. and the ‘ Dictionarium of te WVoord ende Spraak bock in de Dutsche en de Maleysche Tale,” at the same place in 1708, in 4to, A “ Ma- leische. Spraak-kunst” or Malay. Grammar, was pub- lished by Groner HeEnprRIc WERNDLY, at Amsterdam, im 1726, &vo. A ‘ Nieuwe Woordenschaft in Neder- Duitsch, Maleisch en Portugeesch, was also published at Batavia in 8v0..1780. The English have also con- tributed their share'to the cultivation of this language, Bowrey’s Grammarand: Dictionary of the Malay lans guage were published at London in 1701, in 4to. after _ the author had passed nineteen years in trading among the eastern isles. This is a work of great merit and labour, and though the English character only is used, yet the pronunciation and the signification of words are generally given with great accuracy. Bowrey, however, had the assistance of the two eminent orfen- talists,, Hype and MarsHALL, in its composition, 186 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE. both of whom were excellently skilled, m the lan- guage. In 1801 was pubiished at London,, “ A Dic- tionary of the Away) tongue, to, which is; prefixed; a Grammar of that langage, by James Howson, M.D.” .The.authe: tounds his claims ona ten years acquaintance with the Malays, and thew lenguege, From. the scarcity ‘ot Bowrzw’s work, Lhaye not been able to: compare it, with the publication of Dr. Howe son, but I suspect the additions of the, latter to be neither numerous nor important. .OQne improvement he has attempted, and it is the following. _ * In giv- ing the Malay words. in the dnabic chaxacter,” says he, “ we have followed. the excellent. example:, of RicwHarpson and Giucurisz, in their Persian and Hinioostance Dictionaries, and it is, in fact, the char racter used, by. the Jfalays themselves.” . But, had Dr. Hawtson been acquainted with the Afalay-ortho- graphy, he-would;have perceived that this barbarous mode of converting the English character) intothe Persie, could be‘of no possible, utility, either to an European, or an Asiatic. » The Malayu has an esta- blished. orthography,,.like the dradic, Persie, and Hindostani ; and this /established orthography: of Malay MSS. he has. violated, repeatedly, im-every page, not only. by spelling the dlalay words ini a mode never used\among: the Adalays themsélves, but by, omitting all theinpeculiar,characters, and by using some Persic characters, as pa and: ga, with» which the Malays are wnacquainted : altogether.‘ A short Vocabulary, Laghsh, and Malayo, with , grammar yules for the attainment.of the JZalayo language,” — was published at Calcutta in 1798.:'The rules, differ little from. those which appear in) Howison’s.Gram- mar, prefixed to bis Dictionary, and .the|vocabulary generally coincides, with it im.the explanation, of words, which are not very numerous, Besides these OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 187 works which have been printed, many Vocabularies and Dictionaries existin MSS. in Dutch, English and Portuguese ; and of these several are inmy possession. Revanp, in ‘his “ Dissertatio de linguis Insularum Orientalium;? mentions a large ‘MS. Dictionary which he had consulted, composed by LeipEK«KeEr, a Dutch clergyman in Batavia, from which: he has selected a specimen of the language. Several smaller Vocabularies ot Malayu have been published, chiefly by voyagers and travellers, with various degrees of accuracy. Being generally constructed in a very hurried manner, by persons devoid of a radical know- ledge of the language, and often, as maybe pre- sumed, under the necessity of expressing their questions by a mixture of signs, they. generally abound in very ludicrous errors «and risible mistakes. Of this kind, many instances might easily be selected from’ Lasittarptiere’s Malay Vocabulary, nor is: that published by Professor TounBeEre, in his travels, entirely free from them. © Besides they are generally mixed with a variety of lingua franca, and other eastern words that..are never received in correct Malay. : wel ont The sacred scriptures, at an early period, began to be translated into the Malayu language. The gospels of Matriew and Marx were first published in the Malayu language and Arabic character at Enchusa, in 1629, in 4to.'according to the version of ALB. Corn. Ruy, and accompanied with the Dutch ver- sion. A second edition was published at Amsterdam in 1638. The gospels of Luxe and Joun were pub- lished at Amsterdam, in 1646, according to the ’ver-: sion of Joun Van Hasex and Just. Heury; in 1648, published ““ Psalmi guinquaginta priores, Mataicé et _Belgicé.” The four gospels were republished, more Iss. ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE correctly, with a version of the Acts of the Apostles, by Just. Heurn, at Amsterdam, in 4to. 1651. Ge- nesis was published in Afalay, at Amsterdam, im 1662, according: to the version of Dan. Brouwer, and the New Testament, by the same author, in 1668. A se- cond edition of Genesis was published in 1687. |The four Evangelists and the Acts of :the Apostles were: published *‘ in the Malayan tongue,” at Oxford, Ine 1677, in 4to. and reprinted in 1704. Both editions are in the Roman character, and though Hreurn’s ver-. sion was followed, yet the first edition had. the ad- vantage of being superintended by the learned Hype, who has prefixed to it, a dissertation on the’ dialects of the Malay, and the method to be employed in studying the language. ‘The Psalms, or “ Psal- ferium lingua Malaca et Belgica,” was published by: Van Hasert and Heurn at Amsterdam in. 1689. The “:Psaltertum Malatce” was published at Amster-- dam in 1735, with musical notes. A complete. ver- sion of the Bible was published at Amsterdam, in Ro- man characters, in 1733, and this version was again blished in the Arabic character, with the addition of the A/alay peculiar letters, at Batavia, m 5 vols: 8vo. 1758, under the direction of Jacop Mossr1, Governor General of ‘the Dutch possessions in the ‘East Indies. 'The persons who superintended the: edition were Jonan. Maurttz Monr, and Herm. Prerrus Van DE WerrH. A Malay catechism was_ also composed by Gusravus Witti1am Baron Van Imuorr, and printed at Batavia in 1746. ‘This ver- sion of the Bible, is composed in the idiom of Batavia ‘and Malacca, and I have heard it objected, that it is not very intelligible in Sumatra, and: other Malay countries ; but I regard it as quite impossible to form » a\Malayu version which would: be approved ‘in point: of style, in every Afa/ay country :at the same time, OF THE INDO-CHINESF NATIONS. 189 for so great is the diversity in point of style be- tween the Javanese-Malayu and the Arabic- Malayu, that even in the same country, those who are pro- ficients in the one, are often scarcely able to under- stand the other. II. Jawa.—The Jawa, or Javanese lang guage, is admitted by the MJadays to be that of a more ancient nation than themselves, and at no very distant period seems to have been current through the whole ex- tent of Java. The island of Java was formerly sub- ject to a single sovereign, bearing the title of Ratu Acone or SusuHuNnANG, of the Susuptin race, who generally held his court at A7rripun or Suryakan ‘td. The nation was brave, enterprising and populous, and before the introduction of the A/ahummedan religion, about the year A. C. 1400, their power was supreme in the eastern seas, and they extended their conquests to Sumatra, Borneo, aud even as far as the Moluccas. Their voyages often rivalled the celebrated Argo- nautic expedition in the spirit of adventure. ‘They became known to Europeans only in the decline of their power; yet it was still so formidable as repeat- edly to shake the authority of the Portuguese in Malacca itself; and one of the dependent princes of Java was able to fit out a fleet of thirty large vessels, the admiral of which was so strongly built, as to be reckoned, at that period, cannon-proof. The Jawa language is subdivided into a great number of dia- lects, all of which may be respectively classed. under the heads of Basa-dalam and Basa-luar, the interior or high language, and the exterior or vulgar lan- guage of the coasts. Both of these differ consider- ably from the Malayu, which has adopted a multitude of terms from the Basa-léiar Jawa, or coast language of Jawa, compared even witli which the Malayu lan- 190 ON. THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE guage appears to be a corrupt derivative. The lan- guage of the interior, however, or the Basa-dalam Jawa; has a close and intimate connection with San- scrit, and expresses the simplest objects and ideas by vocables which seem to differ no farther from the — Sanscrit than in the correct pronunciation necessarily produced by the use of a less perfect alphabet. The only Javanese that I have met, who could speak the Basa-dalam Jawa, was not able to write the charac- ter; yet I perceived, in forming a short radical vocabulary, that he used many Sanscrit words for common objects, which are not in any dialect of Malayu. | The alphabet of Jawa, is peculiar, and has no re- semblance in the order of position to the Deva nagari. The number of characters are twenty, and these are varied by four vowels, e, 1, u, 0, but the real num- ber of vocalic sounds is considerably greater. ‘The Javanese character is written from right to left. The alphabet has been exhibited with considerable accu- racy by Lx Brun, and also by RELaND; and it ap- pears to have attracted the attention of the learned Hype, as an “ Alphabetum Bantamense” was found amongst his Posthumous papers, which had been written for him by the Ambassador of the king of Bantam. Various ancient inscriptions and monuments are said to exist in the interior of Java, one of which was seen by Tuunsere, at Paditilis, near the blue moun- tains in the interior of the island, which consisted of. eight lines and a half, engraved ona stone pillar, about two feet in breadth. The characters seemed, to him, to be written from right to left, and no per- son had ‘been able to decypher them. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 191 The dialects of ‘Bugélenand Stindo, in Jaca, ‘are said to be very distinct from ‘the Javancse proper; and, from the first of them, the language of Siu is supposed to be derived. This point, however, I have not been able ‘to investigate in a-satisfactory maaner. Ga f ant The literature of the Javanese is similar to that of the AZalays, to whith it seems to have given origin. Their Kuggawins or Cheritras, contain their mytho- logy, and the adventures of their ancient heroes, and exhibit them ina style whtch has no inconsiderable resemblanee to that of the Hindu ‘Puranas. The Javanese laws ate ‘atranged in codes of considerable antiquity, and eclebratedl among all ‘the eastern islands. The Jawa or Javanese language does not appear to have been reguiarly cultivated by Europeans, though some of the outlines of their mythological stories‘have been published in the'transactions of the AsiaticSo- ciety in Batavia, as well as some vocabularies of the Jawa language. In the Dutch work, entitled “ Bevin en voortgang du Oostind Compan.” or the rise‘and pro- gress of the Hast India company,’a comparative view isrexhibited of the Javanese and Malayu languages. The AMahkummedans have translated the Koran into Javanese. . The Beli and Madura languages, spoken ‘by the “inhabitants of the isles of the same name, appear from the best information‘I could procure, to ‘be dia- lects of Javanese. The greater part of ‘the inhabi- tants profess the ancient religion of their ancestors, resemble ‘the Hindus in their appearance, wear the fTindu marks on their forehead, and the women burn themselves with their deceased husbands, .according 192 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE to. the practice of the Hindus. _ Like the unconverted Javanese, they are peculiarly addicted to the worship of Inpra, Surya and Visunu; but being neither in possession of their original religious books, nor of the extracts from them which have been adduced in the Transactions of the Batavian Society, I forbear to dilate on this subject at present. III. Bu’cis.—The Bugis may be reckoned the ori- ginal language of the island Celebes, in the same manner as the Javanese is that of the island of Java. This ancient, brave, and martial nation, also, be- came known to the Europeans only in their decline, but there are a variety of circumstances, relative to them, which incline me to regard them as probably more ancient, in the eastern seas, than even the Javanese. —In courage, enterprize, fidelity, and even fair dealing in commerce, they are placed at the head of all the orang timor, or eastern men, even by the tes- timony of the J/alays and Javanese themselves, and to compare to them, either the Chinese, or the conti- nental Jndo-Chinese nations, were to compare an ass, caparisoned in stiff and gilded trappings, to a gene- rous courser. The nation, to which the Bigis exhi- bit the greatest resemblance, is the Japanese, but I have not been able to discover that the same si- milarity exists between their respective languages, which appears in their natural characters. Theisland of Celebes was formerly divided intoseven principalities, which were all united under an elective and limited sovereign. In this state, the island was the centie of eastern commerce, and extended its con- quests, on the one hand, as far the island of Bal, and gn the other, beyond the Moluccas. The Bugis language was assiduously cultivated. and their ancient my- thology, traditions, laws and history, preserved if OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 193 books, the: greater part of which are still extant, especially in the interior, among the tribes who still’ adhere to their ancient religion. On. the sea coast, the AZahummedan religion prevails, and their books resemble more the later Cheritras of the Malays. In 1603, the Mungkdsar Rajah, with the whole Mung- kasar nation, by one of the most singular revolutions on record, renounced their ancient religion, and not only adopted Islamism, but compelled a number of the inferior states to imitate their example. . The Bugis language, on the coasts, is much mixed with the eastern Aalayu, and is found pure only'in the ancient books, and in the interior of Celebes... It exhibits strong features of originality in.its vocables, but resembles the Adalayu and Tagdéla in. its construction. With Malayu, Javanese and Tagala it exhibits many. coincidences, but it contains, in its original state, almost no words of Sanscrit ori- gin. With the ancient Tarnata, or Molucca lan- guage, it also exhibits some coincidences, but as I have had no favourable opportunity of studying the Bugis, and none at all of examining the Tar- nata, with any degree of accuracy, I cannot pretend to determine the nature of this connection. Com- pared with the alayu or Javanese, it has certainly more the air of an original than of a derivative tongue. The Bigis alphabet consists of twenty-two letters, which are varied by the six -vocalic sounds a, u; i, e, o, ing. The form of the character is peculiar, though it appears to belong to the same class as the Batta. and Tagald. The power of -the characters coincides nearly with that of the Javanese letters, though they differ a little both in number and in, the ' | O 194 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE order of arrangement. The form of the Bugis cha- racter seems not only to ditfer considerably, - in dif- feret states, but the alphabet also varies in the num- ber and order of the letters. This proceeds from the adoption or rejection of the double consonants, which, though used in ancient and classical compo- sitions, are seldom or never employed in letter-wri- tine or common business; and hence, when a Bigis writes down his alphabet, it may vary, in the num- ber of the characters, from seventeen to twenty-two. The only Bégis alphabet, printed or engraved, with which I am acquainted, is that which is given by Forest, in a corner of one of the maps of his “ Voy- age to the Mergui Archipelago.” The letters are not formed according to the common round Bégis hand, but sharp angled, like the Rajang and Batta cha- racter ; but in other respects it is sufficiently correct. The Bégis character is also employed frequently im Writing Afalayu compositions. | The language of the ancient Bigis compositions displays little diversity of dialect, but considerable variety exists in the language of conversation, in the different Bigis states. The dialect of Mungkdsar or - Macassar, the bravest and most renowned of the Bigis tribes, differs considerably from the Bzgis proper; but the dialects of Zubu, Enrékang, Man- dar, and especially Té-Rajja, seem almost to be dif ferent languages. The Bigis larguage has never been regularly culti- vated by Huropeans, though the Dutch have formed abridgements of some of the historical relations in. which it abounds. I have.formed a short radical vocabulary of both the Bugis and Mungkasar, but cannot consider it as pure and unmixed, being ce= 195 tived from inhabitants of the coast, though some of them were very intelligent, and tincturéd with their peculiar learning. From the same source I obtained the following list of the most popular Ba- OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. gis Compositions: _ 1. Nama Sagimi, 28. Rotun-risosi, 2. Batara Guru, 29. Laga-ligo, 3. Guru De Sillang, 30. Tobala Onji, 4. Tojorisimpa, 31. Radaéng Labeh, 5. Lasini Léléh, 32. Lamada Romang, 6. Batdra Latoh, 33. Palawago, 7. Oputolaga, 34, Lawaju-Langi, 8. Araulangi, 35. Lamapa-puli, 9. Panori Tawgéb, 36. Datu-Mowunléh, 10. Lajiri-hoi, 37. Lalimpang Méga, 11. Jamuri China, 38. Lasawing-Langi, 12. Laurupoysi, 39. Rotan di Papang, 13. Rotun Nari-Tatta, Datu Nagima, 40. Aji Lédéh, 14, Lamaputoda-Turipo, 41. Lamapang Aniro, 15. Latum Mullurung, 42. Latan-nari-jivi, 16. Lauhdun-Re6, 43. Bayapdagili, 17. Lapa Bichara LariSindénaré, 44, Latupu Sallau, 18. Gutupatalotopalaguna, 5. Latapagulla, 19. Lappang Ngarisang, 46. Latan nari Pulang, 20. Opu-Sangmuda, 47, Satya-bonga, 21. Opula-Maru-Datu-na-Sopéng, 48. Lasating-pugé, 22. Latu-gétana Paju Limpoy, 49. Laga-lego Tokolinghéng, 23. Sawira Gading, 50. Latan narodgi, 24. Adewata, 51. Datula-Kila, 25. Rotun Diliwung, 52. Lapanadora, 26. Data Pamiusu, 53. Rotan di timang toan lanit. 27. Lanaga Ladung, ‘ The greater part of the compositions here enu- merated, celebrate the ceeds of their national heroes. But besides these, the “ Addat,” or codes of Bigis law are of considerable antiquity, particularly those of Gua, Waju, Boni and Mandar ; and of great re- pute, among the eastern tribes. Several of them are translated into Malayu and Javanese. The Koran is also translated into the Bugis language. : O Q- 196 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE The Bugis songs and romances are famous among all the islands of the East; and, as far as I can judge, from a very limited knowledge of them, equally ex- cel, in force of thought and fluency ef versification. The use of rhyme is much less frequent than among the Malays. The melody of the verse depends on the rhythm, and the measure, in the historical peems, has often considerable similarity to some of the spe- cies of Sanscrit verse. The following lines are given as a Specimen from the ‘‘ /Vépalétei,” the only Bugis story in my possession. Narétélangi napapabaja natokunruna Wépalétet Lalo saliwang pasisi aji rito matindro sésimpangt Rittomapiddang sisulingi matduadua mua kakana Wemapamai natijinruna Jalu saliwang ratapanimpa Lakunatillum tirrimakudda Wullirijawa t6 Sopengt Jillokasawa kakapamai lampuna China tujuna Sabang Naranrukié Lajutenio sesumangutnah Passatingé _Mabaliada wemapamai richinaruna kuém mua Megama katu tudangpaliuna linna samanna tuributili ! Lolangungé turipasabi ujutanai tadillerlé Muarinili ailaiin patalutuna lolangungé. “ In the morning twilight, when the day began to dawn, awaked /V’épalétei, and went out of the pa- lace, stepping carefully over those who were sleeping in regular rows, and those who were reposing irregu- larly, where her elder brothers were sleeping two by two, and along with her went out Pamat, her nurse and attendant. WuLiirisawa of Sopéng, went forth, and having opened the beautifully, formed window, began to express her grief, “ O! my elder sister Pamar, point out to me the situation of China (a district in Celebes) and show me in what direction Sabang lies, where Passaiingé dwells, the brother of Lajit Tenib.” Pawar answered, “ see how beauti- fully, the floating clouds rest on the stately trees of. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 197 China, as if they had been arranged by art. How beautiful are the lawns, which seem as it the earth had of her own accord accommodated herself to the request of man. How graceful wave the trees, with their foliage to the view, and the golden bamboos which enclose the lawns.” The Bugis songs are very numerous. Some of them are short proverbial maxims versified, and dis- play considerable force of both thought and lan- guage, but I have not met with any which exhibit the peculiar character of the Malayw Pantun. ‘They however exhibit many traits of the peculiar manners of the Bugis tribes. In the following specimens, the first alludes to a very common mode of punish- ing cowardice in Celebes, the second to the practice of poisoning weapons, and the last is a brief dia- logue between a lover, going to battle, and his mis- tress, who presents him with her betel-box as a part- ing token. Tikkungi talaséi joa maliai Tapasilaséi andraguru maliai Corripe militem segnem, castra, Immo ducem timidum castrato. Tillu ritumati balubalu rilléléang Ria paserakané lanru tojizru Tamera ritirilébu dadi aju ta Sangala. There are three articles exposed to sale the temper of the lance———~ and the gum of the poison tree of Sungala. Tn the clash of combat The form of the bullet Fja ripalinrang ajamu marakka silla Rik6i biritta poli ridlapi sia Raja-Tampa rikapéku muinappa rinnawating+— Tilla returona salina lopalopaku Sapahna rikko otdko tindria pauwa Timmanrod paraparing tindria kampulajangang, O03 198 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Eja! object of my secret affection, be not easily moved to grieve, Whatever news arrive from the battle, till you see My kris Raja Tumpa taken from my girdle, but then grieve for the dead— ——There are three probibitions in my betel-box, with which you must conform : They are wrapt up in the folds of the betel leaf,—talk not in the time of action Loiter not idly within your tent—skulk not as you advance on the foe. The Mungkasar poetry is characterized by the same features as the Bugis, and their national wars with the Dutch is said to be a favourite topic among the poets of that race. The following specimen, which is a poetical challenge, alludes to the diver- sion of cock-fighting, the favourite amusement of the nation. _ Keérimi jangang riwaya bija jangang sundawa Niamiunné bangasa tinumbukkéya—— Bukki tonja kontasilla pana innukké nurdntu Tinumbukkéya bara éyapin nisillung. Where is that courageous cock, that true game-cock, trained to combat— For here is his match, full of youthful spirit, yet unconquered— Let him then enter the lists with me, if he would be conquered ; Hitherto invincible, if I am ever conquered, it will be now-—— IV. Brmaa.—The Bima language is used in the in- dependent state of Bima, which includes the eastern part of Sumbawa, and the western part of the island Lindé, which was childishly denominated Fieres, by the early Portugueze navigators; and, after them, by succeeding voyagers and geographers. If my infor- mation is correct, the Buma language extends over . the greater part of the island Endé. The Bima lan- guage is related in some respects to Bugis and Java- nese, and on the coast is mixed with Jalayu ; but nevertheless it has strong pretensions to originality in its pronouns, verbal auxiliaries, and simple names of OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 199 objects. In those instances, in which it exhibits a relation to the Bugis, it seems to be more closely con- nected with the Mungkdsar than the Bigis proper, and yet, in sentences, the difference is striking, as in the following example. ‘‘ Where is the house of the Rajah?” Bikey kuassi rumata sangngaji. (Bima) Kéré tujyuna embana kérayéng. (Mungk.) Vhe sun, in Bima is termed JLata-liro; in Munghkasar, Matulo; in Bigis, Mataso. Aman, i Malay, orang, is, in Munghkdsar and Bugis, tai ; and in Bima, do. ‘The dialect of Sum- bawa, which prevails in the districts of the island of that name, which are not subject to the Sultan of : Bima, is of a more mixed character, and though it appears to contain many original vocables, yet the mass of the language seems derived from other sources, as Bima, Javanese and Bigis. Neither the Bima nor Sumbawa have any peculiar character, but use, indifferently, the Bugis or Malayu. 1 attempted to investigate the relations of both these languages, by forming comparati¥e vocabularies of radical \ words; : but not being able to procure any compositions in either of them, Ido not flatter myself with having been able to obtain the purest native terms in every instance. Specimen of the Bugis, Mungkasar, Bima and Sum- bawa languages. Bugis. Munghdsar. Bima. Sumbawa. ié inukké nahu- uk, kaji Odes y ‘ iyo _ iyo lamada déya we idi ikaté ita kita thou -mu ikau angomi mu you iko ikau-ngdsing gomi kau he ea nea yenjo sea iya they edmaning —yangasing do édé jija tatinan this iaé yeinne aké ta that yero, yetu = anjoreng édé ai te O4 200 who what where when which is will can sun moon star wind rain day night morning evening “year earth water sea Yiver waye sand mountain fire stone gold silver salt iron lead brass white Bugis. iga, niga aga pegi siana kéga unka mélo makuléh mataso ulang vitéing, anging bosi aso wunnl élé arawéng tating tana uwal tasi salok bomba kasi baluk api batt ulawung salaka pajé bissi tamera taumbaga . maputi Mungkasar. inal apa kemi ungapana kerayéng nia eroko kulégi matalo balun bintoéng angi bosi alo bung? beribasa karvéng taung butta jeéné tamparang binanga bombang kasi monchong pépé bata bulayeng salaka chéla basi, tambéra tambaga kébok Bima, choété au benchi bunééi mabé wara né vau mataliro wira tara angi ura liro aimangadi aimasidi aimumbiyang baa dana ol moti nanga balaumba sarel doro afi wati masanganga salaka siya besi tumbinga romba lanta ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Surwbawe. saz komépo mépo pidan sangmeépo |! adda matahart bulun bintang angin Ujin ano anopotang anosiop anoravi terd bumi aik let pungbijrang omak garsék olat api batt bulayéng salaka sira | bosi tima tomaga puti OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 901 Bugis. Mnngkdsar.. Bima. Sumbawa. black malétong leling meé pisak red machillah eja kala » mera yellow mauni kuni moncha kuning green monchombulo ijow awa iow blue maga gau kolabu kolau fish balé juku londé ampa fowl manu jangang janga ayam bird manu-manu jangang-jan- nasi piye gang tiger machang machang machan machan serpent ula ulara sawa ula sheep bembé bembé beé badésa This specimen of a comparative vocabulary, will convey some idea of the actual state of these languages, and ot the actual variety which subsists in the lans guage of conversation, especially on the coasts and maritime districts. Many of the words which occur in one language, are also found in others, though ge- nerally with some difference of pronunciation, and sometimes in an oblique sense. Frequently too, besides the terms which | have selected, whichare only those of current use, several other words of the same signi- fication might be found within the compass of the lan- guage. ‘Thus, instead of anging, wind, in the high Bugis, salaring occurs in this signification; and in- stead of salaka, silver, bulémata occurs in the ‘high Mungkasar dialect. In the same manner, the personal pronouns in Bugis terminate their plurals in manung, and in Mungkasar in ngasing, both of which signify all, Thus, ( Bug.) idimanung, (Mung, ) ihuttengasing, we all. ( Bug.) ikomanung, ( Mung.) tkaiingdsing, you all. ( Bug.) edmanung, ( Mung.) yenjo yang-ngasing, they all. . It is worthy of observation, that the Udia language spoken in Orissa, forms the plural of its per- sonal pronouns by the addition of the particle mané, 802 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE or manang, like the Bugis. Thus, in Udia, umbhémane, zumbhemani, sémané or émané, signify we, ye, they. V. Barra.—The Barta language, which I regard as the most ancient language of Swmatra, is used by the Batta tribes, who chiefly occupy the centre of that island. The singularity of their manners, and in par- ticular the horrid custom of anthropophagy, practised by a nation in other respects more civilized than the Malays by whom they are surrounded, has attracted the attention of Europeans from the time of the ear- liest voyagers to our own times, but no very satisfae- tory account has ever been given of them, as a nation. The best description of them is certainly given by Marsbey, in his history of Swmatra, but even that is very imperfect and superficial, and at variance, in some respects, with the information I received from individuals of the nation. Marspen confines their cannibalism to two cases ; that of persons condemned for crimes, and that of prisoners of war; but they themselves declare, that they frequently eat their own relations, when aged and infirm, and that, not so much to gratify their appetite, as to perform a pious ceremony. Thus, when a man becomes infirm and weary of the world, he is said to invite his own children to eat him, in the season when salt and limes are cheapest. He then ascends a tree, round which his friends aud offspring assemble, and as they shake the tree, join in a funeral dirge, the import of which is, ‘“‘ The season is come, the fruit is ripe, and it must descend.” The victim descends, and those that are nearest and dearest to him, deprive him of life, and devour his remains in a solemn banquet. This ac- count is certainly more likely to excite incredulity than the account of Marspen, but it is the account of some of the Battas themselves, as well as that of the Afalays in their vicinity. This inhuman custom is not, however, without a precedent in history, for Hr- ~ ' : GF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 203 nODOTUS positively asserts, that the. Paday or Padaioi, about 500 years before our era, were-not only addict- ed to the eating of raw flesh, but accustomed to kill and eat their relations when they grew old. Now it is curious that Batia or Batay, for the name is writ- ten both ways, seems to be the very word which, in Greek, is rendered Padaioi, the letter pbeing almost al- ways pronounced 6 among several of the Indo-Chinese nations, as in the word Pali, which is almost always pronounced Bak. The following is the account which Heropotus gives us of the Paday, or Padaici. “ Ano- ther Jndian nation, who dwell to the eastward of these, (the Indian Ichthyophagi) ave of nomadic. ha- bits, and eat raw flesh. They are called Paday, and are said to practise such customs as the following. Whoever of the community, be it man or woman, happens to fall sick, his most familiar friends, if it is aman, kill him: saying, that by his pining in sick- ness, his flesh will te spoiled for them ; and though he deny that he is sick, they do not attend to him, but put him to death, and feast on him. When a woman falls sick, she is treated m like manner by her most intimate female associates. ‘Yhey also sa- crifice and feast on him who arrives at old age, and this is the reason that so few of them ever attain it, for they kill every one who falls sick, before that period.” * This account of Hrronorus certainly cor- responds very minutely with the customs attributed to the Batta race, and renders it probable that this modern nation derive their origin trom the ancient Paday or Batay. Neither is it more incredible that the Battas should eat human flesh as a religious cere- mony, than that anthropophagy should be practised by the class of mendicants termed Agérah Punt’h, in * Herobot. Lib, III. s. 99. 904 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Bengal, and other parts of India, which isa fact that cannot easily be called in question. It is surprizing that this singular custom has received so little inves- tigation. The names of the different Bafta tribes, of whom I have been able to hear, are the following — f Batta Toru, Batta Bila, - Batta Kurilang, Batta Sipagabu, 1. Batta Sebaliingu, 2. Batta Padembanin, 3. Batta Kwalu, 4. Batta Pannay, PND? ier In many of the Batta customs, considerable simi- larity to those of the Nairsof Malabar may be traced, as in the law of inheritance, according to which it is not the son, but the nephew, that succeeds. © HAL The Batta language has considerable claims to ori- ginality, though it is not only connected with the Matayu, but also with the Bégis and Bima languages. In point of construction it is equally simple as the Malayu, but it is with the Bugis that it seems to have the most intimate connection. Indeed, the manners of the aboriginal Bugis are supposed to have exhibited no small resemblance to the peculiar cus- toms of the Ba¢ta nation; for the Rajja or T. di-Raj ja tribe, in the central parts of the island Celebes, are said still to eat their prisoners of war. The Batta language is the chief source of that diversity of dia- lect which is discoverable in the languages of Swma- tra. The Rdjang or Rgjang dialect is formed by the mixture of the Batta and Matayu; the Lamping, by mixing Malay and Batta with a proportion of Java- nese. ‘lhe Karrows, who are subject to Achi or Achin,. use only a slight variation of the Batta language, while the language of Achi proper consists of a mix- ture of Malayu and Bafta, with all the jargons used OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 905 by the Aoslems of the east, whether Hindostani, Arab-Tamul or Mapilla. The Achinese resemble the Mapillas of Malabar more than any other tribe of Malays: they have long been connected with them as a people, and use many J/dpilla terms currently in their language. The dialects of Néas and the Poggy islands, the inhabitants of the latter of which are termed Mantaway, by the Malays, have perhaps greater pretensions to originality than any of the dialects of Swmatra, but resemble the Batta more than any other dialect. Hence it may be suspected, that if we were acquainted with the books of the Battas, and knew the full extent of their language, in all its variety of expression, elliptic phrases, aud obsolete words, the comcidence would be still more striking. Thereis probably, too, some diversity of expression in these dialects, even in their present state, for in forming a short radical vocabulary of the Néas language, I found it differed considerably, in some instances, from the specimen published by: Marspen, in the sixth volume of the 4rchéologia. The Satta language has been cultivated by writ- ing, from the earliest times, and numerous books are said to exist in it. Ihave only been able, however, » - to procure the names of the following— 1. Siva Marangaja, 3. Raja Isiri, 2 Siva-Jarang-Mundopa, 4. Malamdeva. The Bata alphabet is peculiar, both in the form of its characters, and in the order of their arrangement. It consists of nineteen letters, each of which is va- riable by six’ vocalic sounds like the Bugis. In the power of the letters, it nearly corresponds with the Bugis and Javanese alphabets, the difference between all these being extremely trifling, consisting solely in #06 oN THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE one of them expressing two cognate sounds by oné character, or adding a new character, or the modifica- tion of a character, to express a double consonant of frequent recurrence. But the Batta character has another peculiarity ; 1€ is written neither from right to left, nor from left to right, nor from top to bot- tom, but, in a manner directly opposite to that of the Chinese, fron the bottom to the top of the line, as the Mexicans are said to have arranged their hiero- glyphics. The material for writing is a bamboo, or the branch of a tree, and the instrument for writing the point of a kris, consequently their native forests always furnish them with materials in abundance, and instead of our pages and volumes, they have their bamboos and literary faggots. Manrspen has given a tolerably correct Batta alphabet, in his his- tory of Sumatra, but instead of placing the charac- ters in a perpendicular line, he has arranged them horizontally, which conveys an erroneous idea of their natural form. The Battas, sometimes, read their bamboos horizontally instead of perpendicular- ly, as the Chinese and Japanese do their books, but the Chinese consider the correct mode of reading to be from the top to the bottom of the page, and the Battas from the bottom to the'top. The lines-at the top of a Chinese page are always regular, and if a line terminates in the middle of the page, the blank space is towards the bottom; now the Battas sometimes write on growing trees; and in this case, if a blank space occurs, it is towards the top of the division, a circumstance which determines what they consider as the natural position of their characters. The Batta characters, when arranged in their proper po- sition, have considerable analogy to the Biégis and Tagala. The Lamping and Rajang characters, coim- cide in power with those of the Batéa, though the ar- OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 207 rangement is different, and so far from being consi- dered as original alphabets, they are only regarded, as far as I could learn, by the Bettas, as different forms of the same character. Indeed, the greater part of the differences they exhibit in form, may be fairly attributed to the different materials on which they write, and the different manner of writing; while the diversity in the number and arrangement of the letters may be referred tothe same causes which have produced a similar variety in the Bigis alphabet. eee” VI. Tacata.—The Tagala or rather Ta-Gadla or the Gala language is among the Phillipines, what the Afalayu is in the Malay islands or the Hindostani in Hindostan proper. A Spanish missionary, who pos- sessed a minute knowledge of this language, has de- celared, that ‘The 7égala possesses the combined ad- vantages of the four principal languages in the world. It is mysterious as the Hebrew; it has articles for nouns, both appellative and proper, like the Greek ; it is elegant and copious as the Latim; and equal to the Italian, as the language of compliment or busi- ness.” To examine rigorously the justness of this eulogium, is foreign to my purpose; it is necessary only to state, that it is considered by those who have studied it with most attention, as the radical lan- guage, from which the greater part, if not all, the dialects of the Philippines are derived. A mis- sionary, who had resided eighteen years. in these islands, and whose account of them has been trans- dated from the Spanish, and printed by THEVENor in the second part of his “ Relations de divers Voyages Curieuses. Paris 1664,” declares, that though every district has its particular dialect, yet that these have all some relation to each other, such as subsists among the Lombard, Sicilian, and Tuscan dialects. There-are six dialects of this kind,.in the island of 208 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Manila, and two in Ofon. Some of these are cur~ rent in several islands, but the most general are the Tagala and Bisaya, the last.of which is very gross and barbarous; but the other more refined and po- lished. The opinion of this missionary is confirmed by Fra. Gaspar DE San Avcustin, who asserts, that all these particular tongues are dialects of one general language, in the same manner as the Aftic, Tonic, and Avolic, are all dialects of Greek, or as the Ttalian, Spanish, Portugueze, and French, are all de- rivatives from the Latin. The Zégdla language has been cultivated only by the Spanish missionaries. The Tagdala grammar of Fra. Gaspar DE SAN Aucustin, which has passed through two editions, was printed im 1703, and again in 1787. In his preface, he requests those who are desirous of more numerous examples in the language, to have recourse to other grammars, e3pe- cially to that of Fra. Francisco pE San Josupu; who is elsewhere called the DumostHENnes of thé Tigala language. A confessional, by the. same au- thor, in Spanish and Tagala,, was published in 1713; and republished with the. second edition of » his grammar. In 1627, Pra. Atpnonso d@ St. ANNA published his “ Hplicacion de la Doctrina Christiana en lingua Tégala,” and, besides these, many other re- ligious compositions, both in prose and verse, have 5 : eaarere been published by the missionaries. The Tagdla alphabet consists of seventeen letters, three of which are vowels, and fourteen consonants, It is of the same class as the Bugis and Batta alpha- bets, and resembles them much in form; and, it 1s probably from some idea of this similarity, that Fra. Gaspar DE San AvucustTin asserts that the ‘Tigdla characters were derived from the Malays. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 209 The Tagdla character is as difficult to read as it is éasy to write. It is written with an iron style on bamboos and palm leaves, and the Spanish missiona- ries assert, that the ancient mode of writing was from top to bottom, like the Chinese. From the cir- cumstance of their writing with an iron style on bamboos, and from the resemblance of the letters to the Batta character, I should rather imagine that the ancient 7agala mode of writing was from the bottom to the top.’ The Tagala characters are still used in Comintan, and in general among the 7é¢dlas who have hot embraced chiristianity; and-even by the Christian converts, they are still preferred in epistolary corres- pondence, though the contrary has been insinuated by some of the missionaries, who alledge that the roman alphabet was eagerly adopted, on account of its being more easily read. The Végdla language, with a considerable number of peculiar vocables, and great singularity of idiom, is nevertheless to be considered as a cognate language with Malayu, Bugis and Javanese. Few languages, on 2 cursory examination, present a greater appear- ance of originality than the Ta@gd/a. ‘Though a mul- titude of its térms agree precisely with those of the languages just enumerated, though the more simple idioms are precisely the same, and though the nouns have neither, properly speaking, genders, numbers nor cases, nor the verbs, moods, tenses or persons, yet the idioms are rendered so complex, and the sim- ple’'terms are so much metamorphosed, by a variety of the most simple artifices, that it becomes quite impossible for a person who understands all the ori- - ginal words in a sentence, either to recognize them individually, or comprehend the meaning of thé Whole. In illustrating, aro the mechanism of ra 210 ON- THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE language, few languages aremore instructive than the Tagala. The. artifices which, it chiefly, employs, are the prefixing or, postfixing to simple vocables, cer- tain particles, which are again combined, and coalesce with others; and the complete or partial: repetition of terms, in this reduplication,.may ‘again be com- bined with other particles. is soba’ _ The Zagdla forms the plurals of nouns by the word manga, as the Malays by bany@k, both of which sig- nify many,.and seem to be the very same word; as the m and, are often pronounced. in such an indis- tinct manner, in the Jndo-Chinese languages, , that they seem neither to correspond exactly to our m nor our 4, but to an intermediate sound. ; To proper names, the 7dgdla prefixes the particle ‘s¢, and. ang to appellative nouns. The first. of these corresponds to the Malayu sa, and the latter to yang, both of which are frequently used in Adalayu in the same manner; but the Zdgdla combines both. these, with the particles nya and ka, the first of which signifies of z¢, and the latter fo ; and thus they form, sta, kana, nina, nang, which (except the last, which is only a diffe- rent mode of writing the Malayu nyang, of these, who,) scarcely occur in Malayu. ‘The plural of nouns,, in Malayu, is sometimes formed by the repetition,,o the singular, and sometimes this repetition is not coms plete, but consists only of the first syllable or syllables. This also occurs in the Ta@gdé/a, in which language banal, the Malayu banar, signifies just, true; and tavo signifies 4 man, corresponding with the Bigis tau. A just man, in Tagdla, is therefore, ang banal na taco, or by the addition of another particle, and altering the position of the words, ang tauong banal.. Now if we substitute the J/a/ayu word orang, for the Bugis and Tagdla term tau or tavo, we may render both these sentences thus; yang orang yang isjone, Jacuba, OF THE IND@CHINESE NATIONS. 911 benar, and yang benarnya. orang. In the plural;,to signify, just men} the Tagdla gives, ang manga tauong babanal, to which the corresponding ; Aalayw phrase is, yang banydk orang, yang babenar ;; or again in Tagéla, ang babanalna.manga tavo, to which thecor- responding Malayu is, yang babenarnya banyak orang. The simple pronouns, which vary so much. in all the dialects of the eastern seas, are nearly the same in Tagdla,and Malayu, though it is not very easy to recognize |them .in, the former, language when com- bined with particles. Thus :in the Aust person ako, -ko, kita, kami are pure Malayu ; and in the second person, mu corresponds equally with mo, whilekao ane. iyo seem to, be only. trivial variations, of, the: Mulayu ung kau and, ayo. In the third person s/ya is ;only a wariety, of sa yea like sappa for, sa-appa;, who,,in Ma- layu ; - while niya, of him, his, is pure, Malayu, as are itu, that, and sun 'of this, while yan, this; and yan, | that, correspond to ini and anu. It is however chiefly i in the yerb that the peculiar character of the Tagd/a lan- guage displays itself... ‘The substantive verb is gene- zally omitted, altogether, and its meaning is denoted by.implication,, or r the position of the words in a sen- tence. Sometimes, however, it is expressed, by the article ay, the contraction of the Malayu adda, as Sino ang masipag ? Who.is diligent: 2 or rather, Who i is he who.is,.diligent?, dag musipag ay St. Jacuna, it \2s J AGULA that i is diligent, or literally, he who is diligent on eur The. Tigéla tone a ae only names of action’ or states of existence, they cannot properly be said to-be either active or passive, neither have they any per- sons, numbers, or moods: all these being expressed by: particles, prefixed or postfixed to the radical word. Pg 412 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE The principal particles employed in modifying the Tigala verbs are also common to the Malayu language. The Tagala particles are na, nag, mag, pag, ungm, Y, an, in: those which correspond to them in Malayu are na, nyang, meng er _mé, Peng, yangmeng, yang, an, ahi. Their significations are radically the same, nor do they differ essentially in their simple application; but in the variety of modes according to which these parti- cles may be combined with the verb, in its simple form, in its reduplicate form, in its semi-reduplicate form, and the variety of transpositions of letters and the changes of one letter for another, ewphome gratia, which all these combinations give occasion to; in all these, the 7agala is infinitely superior to the Dfalayu, if there is any merit in a superiority which consists ia greater intricacy. The changes which oecur in Jfa- fuyu are few and obvious, in 7agdla they are digested into an extensive and complex system, m whiclr per- fect familiarity with every form that the word ean assume, not only by the addition of particles, but ‘by the interchange of letters, is necessary to enablea per- son to detect the radical, which is often more disguised than in the most complex drabic derivatives. ‘Fhus in Tagala the root, tolog signifies to sleep, natalogi ako slept, natotolog ako, 1 am sleeping, matalog, - sleep, matotolog ako, I will sleep, katolog, pagkatolog and paghukatolog, sleeping, natotelogpa ako, slept or was sleeping, ang natotolog the sleeper, ang matotolog, the person who is to sleep, nakatolog ako, Y had slept: natologan, the having been asleep, natotologan, the being asleep, katologan and katotologan, the bemg asleep, or act of sleeping, or the sleeping place: and for the plural nangatologan, nangatotologan, pangato- logan, pangatotologan, &c. the particles na, ma and pa, coming nanga, manga and panga, in the plural.— This is an instance in which the changes of the radical OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 918 word are very obvious; in the following they are less 80, buhat to lift; bungmuhat, bungmubuhat, bumuhat, bubuhat, pagbuhat, nakabuhat, nabuhat, binuhat, bi- nubuhat, buhatin, bubuhatin, nagpabuhat, nagpapabuhat, magpabuhat, magpapabuhat, pagpabuhat, pagpapabu- hat, pinabuhat, pinababuhat, muhat, namuhat, namu- mahat, mamuhat, mamumuhat, pinamuhat, pinamamu- hat, pamuhatin, pamumuhatin. The addition of a greater number of particles would still produce a con- siderable number of additional metamorphoses, in which it would be very difficult to recognize the ori- pinal radical buhat ; but these may suffice to shew the genius of the language; and they will also tend to shew the extreme danger thatany ety mologist or gram- marian incurs, who presumes to treat of one of the eastern languages without a radical knowledge of it, and even, in some degree, of its cognate dialects. The greatest defects of Fra. Gaspar DE S. Au- éusTin’s Tagdla grammar proceed from his not hay- > ing comprehended sutficiently the original simplicity of the dialect, nor even the simple artifice by which the greater part of these changes have been effected; and from having composed his grammar on European — principles, without attending uniformly to the pecu- liar character of the language. With respect to the original literature of. the 7a- galas, the accounts of the Spanish missionaries are ra- ther discordant. Sometimes they represent them as - totally devoid of histories, and books of science; and sometimes they represent them as in possession of many historical poems; not considering that almost the whole body of the eastern history must be gleaned from poetical tradition. It however appears, clearly ‘enough, from their own waits: that the ansgient nt ae 914 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE religious traditions of the Tagdla race, their genealo- gies, and the feats of their gods and heroes, are care- fully preserved in historical poems and songs, which, in their youth, they carefully commit to memory, and are accustomed to recite during labour and long voyages, but particularly at’ their festivals and so- lemn lamentations for the dead. ‘These original me- morials of the race, the missionaries have, with pious care, attempted to extirpate, and have employed themselves sedulously in composing religious tracts, both in prose and verse, in the 7dgala, with the hope of supplanting the remains of national and pagan antiquitv. Many psalms and hymns, and even some of the Greek dramas composed by Dionysius AREo- PAGITA, have in this manner been translated into the Tégala language. Among this brood of Tagala poets, the names of Fra. Antonio DE S, Gre- Gor1o, of Fra. Atonso bE S. Awa, and of Fra. Pasro Crain, the translator of Kempis, into Tagala, are celebrated, but the most illustrious of them all, says the reverend father Gaspar DE S. Au- GUSTIN, is Fra. PEpro pr Herrera, the very Ho- RACE of the 7agala language, as appears by his book of ‘‘ Postrimerias.” With the original Tagala poetry I am unacquainted, and I believe no specimen of it has been hitherto published. S. Aucustrn, in his grammar, treats, indeed, of Tagdla poetry, but he pilously confines his examples to the works of his ghostly brethren. He observes, that the Tagdld yerse, is regulated by the rhythm of the syllables, aud the similarity of the vowels in the close. This ‘similarity of the terminating vowels does not amount to regular rhyme, for the consonants may be totally different, though the vowels are similar, as in the Spanish rhymes termed Asonantes. Thus laglag and taltal sut and cahuy, silip and bukkir, however imper- fect as rhymes, are all that is required in the termi- OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 215 nations of Tagdla verse. The Tagdla metres, adds the same author, are rather lyric than heroic, atid he adduces specimens of several Latin and Castilian mea- sures, imitated in that language, besides a legitimate sonnet addressed to himself, on publishing his 7 agala grammar by Fra. Joseph pr ex Variz. The “fol- lowing specimen from the 7dgdla version of one of the dramas of Dionystus AREOPAGITA, is an imita- tion of the comic verse of TERENCE. Dito sa dakkilang kaharian nang Grecia Ay itong bayannang Athenas lalo, at mona Sa ibang manga bayang na sasakop baga Hangan saona, at magpangayon pa, BesrpEs the 7a@gdla nation, there are several other races, which inhabit these islands, who differ consi- derably from each other in features, language, and the various relations of the social state; but concern- ing them, it is more difficult to speak with any de- gree of certainty. Such are the Pampangos, who re- side to the north of Manilla; the Bisayas, who are generally diffused over the Philippines ; ,and the painted | race, termed, by the Spaniards, Pintados, who are, _ by some, reckoned a branch of the. Bisdya nation, and allied to the Tagadla and Bugis races; while, by others, they are supposed to be of the same origin as the Haraforas. Of the Bisdya language, I have seen some lists of words. It appears to be either mixed with Tdagala, or derived from the same source; but it is seldom possible to judge of any of the eastern languages from a few straggling specimens, formed in the hurried, inaccurate and incurious manner in which these are generally collected. For this reason, I shall offer no observations on the Pampango language, of which I have also seen specimens ; on ‘the Biaju, Tirin, or P4 216 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Idén languages of Borneo ; nor on the Harafora, or the Papua languages of the eastern isles. The Sadi tongue is a very mixed dialect, but is derived chiefly from the Malayu, Javanese and Tagdla. Forxest, however, is inclined to refer its peculiarities to the Bisaya. The language of Adehndenow, or Magin- dano, which nearly coincides with the Land dialect, is also a compound of Malayu, Bugis and Tagdla, with a certain proportion of the ancient Tarnata or Molucca language, which seems to have been an ori- ginal tongue. The Braju language is reckoned ori-— ginal, but it has no written character. The Biajus are of two races; the one is settled on Borneo, and are a rude, but warlike and industrious nation, who reckon themselves the original possessors of the island of Borneo. ‘The other is a species of sea-gypsies, or itinerant fishermen, who live in small covered boats, and enjoy a perpetual summer on the eastern ocean, shifting to leeward, from island to island, with the variations of the monsoon. In some of their customs, this singular race resemble the natives of the AZaldive islands. The Maldivians annually launch a small bark, loaded with perfumes, gums, flowers and odo- riferous wood, and turn it adrift at the merey of the winds and waves, as an offering to the Spirit of the winds; and sometimes similar offerings are made to the spirit whom they term the King of the Sea. In like manner the Biajus perform their offering to the god of evil, launching a small bark, loaded with all the sins and misfortunes of the nation, which are imagined to fall on the unhappy crew that may be so ‘unlucky as first to meet with it. The Tirim or Tedong tribes live chiefly on the north east coast of Borneo, and are reckoned % savage and piratical race, addicted to eating OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 2°17 the flesh of their enemies. With their language I am totally unacquainted, but it is reckoned peculiar. It is very probable, however, that they are only a tribe of Idan, whom, again, I imagine to be only a race of Haraforas or Alfoérs, as they are termed by the Dutch, who seem to be the most original race of all the eastern islands, excepting perhaps, the Papuas. The Idan are sometimes termed Marit; they are certainly the original inhabitants of Borneo, and resemble the Haraforas equally in stature, agility, - colour,and manners. The Haraforas are indigenous in almost all the eastern isles, and are sometimes found on the same island with the Papuas or oriental negroes. They are often lighter in colour than the Muhammedan races, and generally excel them in strength and activity. They are universally rude and unlettered, and where they have not been reduced to the state of slaves of the soil, their manners have a general resemblance. In their manners, the most singular feature is, the necessity imposed on every person, of some time in his life, embruing his hands in human blood; and in general among all their. tribes, as well as the Jddn, no person is permitted to marry till he can shew the skull of a man whom he has slaughtered. They eat the flesh of their enemies, like the Battas, and drink out of their skulls; and the ornaments of their houses are human skulls and teeth, which are, consequently, in great request among them, as formerly in Sumatra, the ancient inhabitants of which are said to have originally had no other money than the skulls of their enemies. The Haraforas are found in all the Moluccas, in Ce- lebes, the Philippines, and Magindano, where they are termed Subano or Manubo; and the ferocious race mentioned by Marspen, who live inland from Sa- manka in Sumatra, and are accustomed ‘to atone ther 218 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE own faults by offering the heads of strangers to the chiefs of their villages, are probably of the same description. , | The Papuas, termed by themselves Igoloté, but by the Spaniards of the Philippines, negritos del monté, from their colour and. woolly hair, are the second race of aborigines, in the eastern isles ; in several of which they are still to be found, and in all of which they seem to have originally existed. Some of their divisions have formed small savage states, and made some advances towards civilization; but the greater part of them, even with the example of more civil- ized races before their eyes, have betrayed no symp- toms, either of a taste or capacity for improvement, and continue in their primitive state of nakedness, sleeping on trees, devoid of houses or cloathing, and subsisting on the spontaneous products of the forest, -or the precarious success of their hunting and fishing. ‘The natives of the Andaman isles seem to be of this race, as also the black mountaineer tribes of the Malay peninsula, termed at Kiddeh, Samang ; at Perak, and in the Malay countries to the N. W. of Kiddeh, Bila; while to the southward of Perak, and through the straits of Malacca, to the eastward, they are termed Dayak. .The Papuas, or oriental negroes, seem to be all divided into very small states or rather societies, very little connected with each other. Hence their language is broken into a mul- \titude of dialects, which in process of time, by sepa- ration, accident, and oral corruption, have nearly lost ll resemblance. The Aadays of the peninsula, con- sider the language of the blacks of the hills as a mere jargon, which can only be compared to the chattering of large birds; and the Papua dialects, in many of the . eastern isles, are generally viewed in the same light, OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 219 The Arabs, in their early voyages, appear to have frequently encountered the Papuas, whom they describe in the most frightful colours, and constantly represent as cannibals. ‘They are mentioned by the travellers Isny Wauas and Asvu Zeip, in the Si/silet- al-Tuarikh, translated by Renavunport, and nearly the same accounts seem to be repeated by Masvup1, Yaxorr, and Ign av Warpr. The following passage, which gives the name of one of the tribes, is adduced from the Persic treatise termed Sezr ul Aklim, the author ef which appears to have visited the eastern islands. After mentioning the great island of cam-- phor, probably Borneo, he adds, ‘‘ Beyond this are other islands of different sizes, among which there is one of considerable extent, inhabited by a race of blacks termed Kahdiut, who resemble brutes in form, and when they can seize on a person, they kill and eat him. Of this practice, I have had experience, having escaped only by throwing myself into the sea; as the saying is, ‘when you are going to be slain, throw yourself into the sea, and perhaps you may survive. Even so it happened to me, for getting on the trunk of a large tree, 1 kept my hold for three days, when I was thrown by the force of the winds and waves on a desert shore, and after enduring much hunger and thirst, reached at last an inhabited country.” The tribes of the. eastern islands exhibit a variety of singular and. interesting appearances, not only in the civil and political, but also in the natural and moral history of man. If some of them appear in a naked and primitive state of barbarism, in others the _ vestiges of ancient art and science indicate, that they have suffered a relapse from a prior state of civilization. This is particularly obvious among the Malay, Java- #90: ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE nese, Batta, and Bigts tribes, among whom the polished style, and elevated sentiments, of many of their compositions, and their dexterity in some of the arts, especially the compounding and working of metals form a singular contrast with the neglect of personal morality and the relaxation of all the bonds of society ; while ancient and wise regulations are in a great measure superseded by the most absurd and barbarous usages. Among the most barbarous of the Harafora and Papua races, there are some, who whether male or female, use no species of cloathing whatsoever, and consequently exhibit few trates of that modesty which is supposed to be innate in the human species. The same phenomenon, whether natural or produced by situation, is exhibited among _ the Biajus, the families of whom live constantly together, on the sea, in small boats. Vestiges of cannibalism appear to exist among the greater part of the rude tribes in the eastern isles, but the Battas of Sumatra, who are superior to the Malays in the knowledge of the arts and letters, have likewise pre- served it; as well as the Zabdénka tribe in Celebes. Of many of the most absurd, unnatural, and barba- rous of their usages, it is obviously impossible to form a just opinion in the present state of our knowledge, as we are totally ignorant of the spirit of them, and of the system of opinions with which they are con- nected. Some of them may find a parallel in India and China; and it may be observed, that both the Indian and the Indo-Chinese monuments contain mary allusions toa state of society and manners on the con- tinent, similar to that which subsists among the most babarous of the tribes of the eastern isles. Perhaps, too, we shall be disposed to regard, with some degree of complacency, the most absurd and the most illiberal portions of the religious systems:of Branma and OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 22 Bunn’, if we consider the dreadful superstitions that they probably supplanted, and the brutal state of savage existence which they exchanged for civil polity and social order. The Vanaras of Huniiman are reckoned a tribe of mountaineers, even by many of the Hindis. The barbarous, but brave and active Idan of Borneo, are termed ALaruét, which is the San- serit name of the forty-nine regents of the winds, and companions of Inpra. The standard of the Battas is a horse’s head with a owing mane, which seems to indicate a connection with the Hayagrivas of Sanscrit history. In the present state of our know- ledge of these tribes, however, it 1s not conjecture; but rigid and accurate description that is required’; and in the present instance, it is not my object to consider their civil, political, or moral relations, unless as far as these affect the philological investigation of their languages and literature. As the chief utility that results from the examination of some of these _ ruder dialects, is to enable us to ascertain the limits of languages, more interesting and important, per- haps it may be thought that great minuteness would be misapplied on objects of such secondary impor- tance. It must, however, be recollected, that success in important researches, often depends on the accu- racy with which inferior investigations have. been conducted; that in commencing an investigation it is not always easy to predict what will ultimately prove of ‘superior, or inferior importance; and that, at all events, it is, safer to bestow too much attention, than too little, on what must be the basis of historical investigation. In all such inquiries, I therefore do not hesitate to adopt the sentiment of the learned Lz Lone, that. “Truth is so interesting and satisfac- tory, when perceived, that no pains should be spared to discover it, even in the smallest matters.” 292 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE VIL. Ruxnene.—The Rukhéng is the first of that singular class of Jndo-Chinese languages, which may be properly termed monosyllabic, from the mass of their radical. words consisting of monosyllables, like the spoken dialects of China. These monosyllables are subjected to great variety of accent and imtona- tion, in almost every instance: and require an accu- racy of pronunciation and a delicacy of ear in speak~- ing and comprehending them, far beyond what is requisite in the languages of Europe, or even in the polysyllabic languages of Asia. The Indo-Chinese languages of the monosyllabic class, borrow a con- siderable variety of terms from the Pal or Bali, which exists among them, as the language of learning and.science; but. in adopting these polysyllables, they accommodate them to their peculiar enunciation, by. pronouncing every syllable as a distinct word. The Rukhéng is the language of the original inha- bitants of Arakan, who adhere to the. tenets, of Bupp’HA. Forming in ancient times a part of the empire of JAdagadha, from which they seem to have derived the name of Mug or Mauga, by which they are generally termed by the inhabitants of Bengal; and being from their situation, more immediately connected with Jndia ;, their language is by no means purely monosyllabic, but forms, as it were, the con- necting link between. the polysytlabie and mono; syllabic languages. "The Rukhéng race is admitted to be of the same radical stock as the Barmas or Bir- mans, and.is understood to have greatly preceded that nation in civilization. The Barmas, indeed, derive their own origin from the Rukhéng, whom they generally denominate Barmd kyi, or the great Bar- mas, and they consider the Rukhéng as the most ancient and original dialect of the Barma language. This idea is certainly correct, and it may be added, OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. © 993 that the Rukhéng orthography and pronunciation are neither so defective, nor so much corrupted as the Barma, and that consequently, in tracing the history of the language, the Rukhéng is of much greater utility to the philologist. In another respect the languageimay be considered as purer; until their late conquest by the Barmas, the tribes of Rukhéng seem for along period to have retained their independence, while the! proper’ Barma tribes have suffered various revolutions. Hence the Rukhéng retains ‘more of its ancient form, and is less corrupted by foreign mixtures. ‘The modifications, therefore, which it has received, are chiefly ‘derived from the Pali or Bali, which was cultivated in the country as the learned language, and contained all: their sacred books. The Rukhéng has accordingly adopted: Bali: words and phrases more copiously than the Barma, and has also preserved them in a greater state’ of: orthographical purity. The pronunciation of the Rukhéng is perhaps broader and grosser, but more articulate than the Barma; in-particular it strongly affects the use’ of the letter *, which the Barmas generally convert into y,\in. their, pronunciation. Such, however; is the difference of pronunciation between the two nations, that even in sentences, where the words .are nearly the same, they are not easily intelligible to each other. : ; p bias Belk The Rukhéng alphabet coincides accurately with the Deva-nagari system of characters in its arrange- ment, and very nearly in the power of the particular letters. The only variation of importance is, the expression of both the acute and erave accent of the vowels, as well as their common sound, in certain cases. This provision, however, does not ‘extend to 924 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE - all the vocalic sounds in the Rukhéng alphabet, but only to those sounds of this species, which are of most general use. A similar contrivance for the ex- pression of accent, occurs in all the alphabets of the monosyllabic languages, but varies, in extent, ac- cording to the exigencies of a particular language. Thus, in Rukhéng, after the simple aiphabet, follow the combinations of the simple letters, with wa, ya, ra, and of h preceding them. Then follow some triple combinations of the same letters, after which are exhibited the common forms of syllables which terminate in a consonant, as ak, ang, aich, at, ap, and others of a similar kind; and finally the varieties of accent, as acute and grave, are presented, in those vowels and nasals which are chiefly subject to be influenced by them. : The Rukhéng character has considerable similarity to the Barma, m the greater part of its letters. The following simple characters, however, g’ha, ja, pha, nya, ta, @ha, da, @ha, na, ‘Wha, ra, lla, as well as some of the more complex combinations, differ greatly from. the respective forms of these characters in the Barma alphabet, and exhibit considerable resemblance to some of tlie ancient Canara characters. The Rukhéng simple alphabet is exhibited with considera- ble correctness by Capt. J. Towzrs, in the fifth volume of the Asiatic Researches, though many of his particular observations, a8 well as general views, are far from being accurate; chiefly, it may be pre- sumed, from the novelty of the investigation. -. The Rukhéng language, in the simplicity of its structure and’ expression, has great analogy to the Malayu. It has properly no numbers, OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 925 cases, nor flections, in its nouns; nor conjugations, moods, tenses, or persons, inits verbs. Many words have asubstantive, adjective, or verbal signification, accord- ing to their position in a sentence; but in general, the names of objects, qualities, and actions, are sufficiently distinct from each other. The plurals of nouns are formed by numerals, or words expressive of plurality, as dé, a man; li-sing-rawk, three men ; lu-ikiing, many men; lu aking-ling, all men ; mimma, a@ woman; mimma aking-su, many women. Compa- risons are made by particies expressive of number or quantity, such as mya, or mrét-té, much; akré and hlaré, very; prét, less, under ; aking, many. Cases are expressed by particles equivalent to the prepo- sitions or postpositions of other languages, or by juxta-position, which has often the force of the genitive in the Rukhéng language. Thus, @ man’s hand, may be expressed indifferently by Li-lak, li hma-lak, or lia-chwa-lak. The simple pronouns are nga, I, ko, or, méng, thou; and yang-su, he; the plurals of which are formed by the addition of ro, as nga-ro, we ; mong-ro, ye ; yang- su-ro, they. But in addition to these simple pronouns, there are various others, which indicate rank and situation, as in Malayu, Chinese, and the monosyllabic languages in general, which have all of them paid peculiar attention to the language of ceremony, in addressing superiors, inferiors, and equals. These ceremonial forms in Rukhéng are sometimes formed by particles added to the simple pronouns, and some- times they are significant terms, such as servant, iord, highness, majesty, used pronominally, or rather in an absolute sense, without any expressed _pro- nominal adjuncts ; as in addressing a superior, when 296 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE the terms asydng, lord, sir; sak hang, highness ; khang- pard, majesty, are employed. The pronouns in common use in Rukhéng, according to this variety of ceremonial forms, may be thus exhibited. I, we; thou, ye, he, they, nga, ‘ko, dang, , nga-To, / mong, yang-su, nga-ro-hma, nang, yang-su-re, ky€wéng, awey, su-Tro. akyéwéng, mong-hma, akyéwéng-hma, mong-re, akyéwéng-ro, mong-ro-hma, akyéwéng-ro-hma, “nang-ro, akyéwéng-tza-ré, nang-hma, akyeweng tz’hang-ré-ro nang-ro-hma, z awey-ro, awey-hma, awey-ro-hma, To explain the particular instances in which each of these pronominal terms is used, is not consistent with my present object, which is only to present a general outline of the structure of the language. The moods and tenses of the verbs are in like manner expressed by means of particles, or significant words, like our auxiliary verbs. Such are si, hi, hi-ré and /e-bi, is; bri and lé ydkk, is, been; bri-ré and bri-kha-ré, was; miy, will; ra and ra-mé, may, can ; yaung, let, permit ; hi-sua, been. The position of these particles in a sentence, is often, however, a ‘matter of considerable difficulty, and is-one of the circumstances in which the elegance of style chiefly consists. The style chiefly affected in Rukhéng composition, isa species of measured prose, regulated by accent and the parallelism of the members of a OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 297 sentence. Rhyme, however, is not required, either in the terminating consonants or vowels, though it frequently occurs from the structure of the language. The general form of this measure seems to be four long syllables, each of which, however, is conversible into two short ones, or may have a short one inter- polated before or after it. Thus, the passage adduced by Captain Towers, from the JZanu Saingwan, as a specimen of his system of orthography in his “ Obdser- vations on the Alphabetical System of the Language of Awa and Rachain,” may be arranged. Maha s4mata, Tain-kha hnaik ch’haun, Man geri chak-krawal4, Khré so tachhé, San’khra prain brain, Shai’ch pa s6 T’h4m-ma-sit, Tain dain p? ta, Cha ga do go, &c. Sometimes, however, more complicated measures are employed in Rukhéng composition, in imitation of those which occur in Bali. Many interesting works are represented to exist in the Rukhéng lan- guage, but the greater part of them are translations from the Bali. The “ Yillawar Cherita,” is said to contain the historical traditions of the Rukhéng “nation: the “ Karzk,” composed by Ancuti-Mata, and the “ Z°hamma-sat or Dherma Sastra, contain their system of: religious observances, and code of laws. The following is a list of the most popular Rukhéng compositions : - Raja-bantza, 9. Sada-shyei’ch-chaung, ] 2. Raja-wongtza, 10.. Maho, 3. Témi, 1]. Uni-nga-gyaing, 4. Némi, 12. So’p-soung-gyéng, _ 45. Janaka, 13. Bhuridat-kapy4, 6. Suwanna-asyang, _ 14. Bo-thi-hmain-déi, 7. Bhuridat, 15. Wé-faing-dara, $. Tzaingdé-gangma 16. Saing-we-ra, #28 17. 18. 19. 20. vd oe 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. aie 28. 29. Logasara, 61. 30. Sa-bri-hla, 62. 31. Taing-t,hati, 63. 32. Radana-hrwé-khri, 64. 33. Radana-paing-ging, 65. 34. Rudana-paddaing, 66. 35. Radana-kweing-khya, 67. 36. Radana-powng-khyowk, 68. 37. Ba-na’t-sa, y 69. 88. Kraing-ma-tei’ch-p’hak-powng-wat’hu, 70. 39. Nga-tzi-sada-pring-do, tee § 2 40. Ga’p-p’ha-kyéng, 72. 41. Lakhana-di-ba, . ; Tas 42. Noma-kapya, 74. 43. Nga-chaing-braing, 75. 44. Rama-wut’hi-cha, 76. 45. Bramasara, de 46. Bud-dho-wa-da, - 78 47. Péda-sow’t, 79. 48. Mungala-sow’t, Krauk-ché, 49. Nara-cho, 50. Athi’k-bala, Sl; Abhi-dam-ma, 52. K’hunei’ch-kyéng, 53. Para-ma-saing-gou’k-kyéng, 54. Maha-Raga-t’ha-kyéng, Sapa-kyéng, 56, T’ham-ma-sat-kweing-khya, 57. T’ ham-ma-sat-kra’k-ru, 58. T’ham-ma-sat-Mant, 59. T’ham-ma-sat-krudaing, From this list, it is evident, that the subjects of ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Khunei’ch-ra’k, Khunei’ch-ra’k-parei’p, Patha-wi-jéya, Sa-gra-u-ch’ howng, Lé-keweng-u-ch’howng, Sit-ha-da-nd, 55. Sat-powng, Sat-yéng, Sat-hnéwaing, Sa-hrwé-k’hé, . Moé-td-krang-cha, 60. Gu-waing podimowng-cha Thi-to-padé-sa, Noma-ko-ga-tha, Tiché-hnei’ch-ra-si, Khowng-gri, Khowng-lap, Khowng-ngé, Ta-hnaung-gra, Mé-thaung-gra, Su-mé-t’ha, Rewatta-cha, Aswa-pida, Prowng-bra, Owng-pa-di-cha,_. Paing-pru-cha, Uga, Mowng-chwa-cha, Cho-ré, Ya’t-ré, a Ling-di-cha. some of these works are the adventures of characters well known in Sanscri¢ mythology, as the Rama Wut hu or history of Rama, the Budd’ho-wa-du or history of the Avatar Bupp’ua; others of them seem to be OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 229 only Rukhéng versions of well known Sanscrit com- positions, as the T°hi-to-pa-désa, or Hitopadesa, the T’ham-ma-sut-Manu, or Dherma-sastra of MeENUv. The Suwanna-Asyang, is the popular story of Suvur- NA SpRINGI, or the golden cow, formed by the Brahmen Sumpuxara Misra, and presented to Raja Mouxounpa Deva Casapati. The Buurtpar is the history of Raja Buuriparra of Jagadha, mention- edinthe Maha Bharata, and the Bhuridat-kapya, or Bhuridutta-kavya, is a poem on the same subject. The Raja-buntza is the Rukhéng edition of the Raa- Vumsavah, the Raja-Wontgza is a different work on the same subject, and the Patha-wiyéya seems to be the Prit’thu-vijgeya. Of the modifications they have received in the process of translation, I have hitherto had little opportunity of judging, but as far as I have been able to investigate the subject, not only the style, but the incidents and progress of the Sansecrit narration is generally altered, to render them more illustrative of the ascetic doctrines of the Budd fist sect; such as the guilt of killing animals, even acci- dentally ; and the perfection acquired by, Aéshzs in solitary retirement, by means of sublime penance and meditation. dee tis | The Rukhéng language has never been cultivated by Europeans ; the observations on its alphabetical system by Captain Towers, and the short specimen of its vocablesin Dr. Fr. Bucuanan’s, “ Comparative Vocabulary of some of the Languages spoken in the Burma Empire,” both in the 5th vol. of the Asiatic Researches, being all that has been published con- cerning it in any European language. The specimen given by Dr. Fr. Buchanan, only varies from the ~ Barma in seven words out of fifty, and these are ‘only varieties of pronunciation, excepting “ looshee,” 3 230 - ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE a child, which is also Barma, and mateinay, which seems to be an error, as it does not signify fo sit, either in Rukhéng or Barma, but literally “ does not stand,” the proper Rukhéng term being ra’t chowk. The words in the vocabulary certainly exist in Ruk- héng as well as in Barma; but in some instances different words are in more general use, in the former; as ahri, long, instead of shé, and po-mro-naing-grong, beast, instead of taraitzan. The Rukhéng pronun- Ciation, sometimes too, is modified by the Burma, and the letter 7 is almost always omitted in tlre spe- cimen, though it is a distinguishing characteristic of the Rukhéng pronunciation. Thus, the Rukhéng requires mri-gri, earth, instead of myegyee, in thé specimen; kri, great, instead of kyee ; kripamé, foot, instead of kigpamo; krow hk, six, instead of kiouk ; kri, a star, instead of kyay, and ni, the sun, instead of nay. These errors, however, are not to be attributed to Dr. Fr. Bucuanan, nor detract, in the least, from the merit of his exertions in commencing the inves- tigation ; they evidently proceed from the inaccuracy, hurry, and indistinct pronunciation of his Barma assistants, and in his situation were perhaps not to be avoided, unless by attending to the native ortho- graphy. Dr. F. Bucuanan has also exhibited comparative specimens of two mixed dialects, spoken in d7akan ; the first termed Ruinga, spoken by the Afoslems of the country, and consisting of a mixture of Arabic, Hindi, and Rukhéng ; the second, termed Rusdn, used by the Hindus of Arakan, who adhere to the system of Brauma, and formed by a large proportion of corrupted Sanscrit and Bengali, united to a compa- ratively small portion of Rukhéng. The dialect of the province of Yo, as it is pronounced by the. Barmas, and Ré as it is termed by the Rukhéng, is OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 231 only a slight variation of the Rukhéng, which it ap- proaches much nearer than the Barma, ‘The range of mountains to the north and east of Rukhéng is inhabited by a'race termed Khéng, by the Ruk’héng and Barma tribes, or as it is written by Dr. Fr. Bucuanan, Kiayn; but who term themselves Koln, and whose language is peculiar, having little or no affinity to either Rukhéng or Barma. From the two names, Rd and Khéng, the name of Rukhéng is gene- rally derived ; but the national name of the Rukhéng race is Ma-rum-ma, which seems to be only a cor- ruption of Maha-Vurma; Vurma being an epithet generally assumed by the tribes of Ashatriya ex- traction. The inhabitants of the mountains between Rukhéng and Chatigan are termed Sa-mowng-syang by the Rukhéng tribes, and are asserted to speak a different language. ~They are probabiy only a division of the Khéng or Kolin. Whether these are the same with the Kukis, who inhabit the high ranges of hills to the N. E. of Chatigan, I have not been able to determine. In the able and curious description of © this singular race, given by J. Macrag, Esq. in the seventh volume of the Asiatic Researches, the lan- guages of the Kuki and Mug, or Rukhéng races, are said to be so intimately connected as to be mutually intelligible. That the two adjacent. tribes should be mutually able to understand each other, is very probable; but that their respective languages are counected, in this instance, I apprehend to be very dubious ;. for in-a specimen of above 500 radical terms of the Kuki, which I owe to that gentleman’s polite- ness, I find very few which are similar to the cor- responding Rukhéng, or that were understood by an intellgent native of drakan. The subject, however, requires further investigation, and there seems to be no person better qualified than Mr. Macnrar, for Q 4 239 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE prosecuting the inquiry, both by his abilities, and his situation. VIII. ‘Barma.—tThe Barma language is used by the great and powerful nation of the Barmas. The name of this nation has been written differently, by almost as many authors as have mentioned it, while no person seems to have thought it worth his while to inquire how the Barmas wrote their own name. This they constantly write Barma, though from affecting an indistinct pronunciation, they often term themselves Byamma, Bomma, and Myamma, which are only vocal corruptions of the written name. Amavutius, however, in his preface to the ‘ Alpha- betum Barmanum seu Bomanum,” with equal igno- rance and confidence, denies flatly, that any nation, country, city, or language, exists, which by the natives themselves is denominated Barma. This name, he asserts to have been introduced solely by the ignorance and vicious pronunciation of Huropeans, since, says he, by the analogy of the language, the nation is denominated Bomah, the great nation, from bo, the head, a chief, and mah, aman. ‘This silly va- pouring etvmology is, however, entirely averse to the established orthography of the Barmas themselves, and only worthy of P. Pauxrnus, or a modern Frenchman. The Barma language, like the Rukhéng, m_ its original state appears to be purely monosyllabic, but it has borrowed freely from the alt, and in imitation apparently ef that language, it has some- times formed words of some length, by the coalescing of its original monosyllables. Bemg completely devoid of every species of flection, whether im nouns, pronouns, or verbs, its construction is extremely simple, and depends almost solely on the principle of juxta-position, like its cognate dialect, the \ OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 935 Rukhéng, which it resembles in structure. Its pro- nouns and j particles are peculiar, its idioms few and simple, and its metaphors of the most obvious kind; but it is copious in terms expressive of rank or dig- nity, and the rank of the speaker is characterized by the language he uses. The Barma alphabet corresponds to the Bali, and is regulated by the same principles of accentua ion. In point of form, it has considerable resemblance to the Canara, Singala, and Telinga alphabets, but is rather more simple in the formation of the character. Carpanius, in his ‘ Alphabetum Barmanum seu -Bomanum,” is inclined to derive the Barma character immediately from the square Bal?, used in Ava, and both of them from the Hebrez, through the medium of the Persic. AMApDuTIUs, improving on this idea, or rather adopting that of BAYER, seems to be desir- ous of deducing both, as well as the Malabar or Ma- layalam, from “the Armenian, a character to which they have scarcely the remotest resemblance, and the orgin of which, is itself involved in great obscurity. The character of the Barma language has a very considerable effect on the style of the compositions it contains. Repetitions of the same turn and ex- pression, are rather affected, than shunned; and:a kind of naked strength and simplicity of phrase, with short sentences, pregnant with meaning, are the greatest beauties which the language admits of. “ The Bomans,” says Carpanius, “in their poetry, are more careful of preserving similar terminations, than an equal number of syllables, and use this sty le, particularly in treating of religious subjects.” The fact, however, is, that the similarity of termination is neither sought, nor shunned; but recurs from the - genius of the language, very frequently. The 234 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE style of the principal Barma compositions is a species of measured prose, regulated almost solely by the ac- . cent, as in the Rukhéng, the diferent dialects of Chinese, and-the other monosyllabic languages. The tone of polished conversation requires an approxima- tion to this style of composition. The verb is gene- rally placed in the close of the sentence, and the de- fect of conjuctive particles, to connect the different members of a sentence, renders a considerable de- gree of repetition absolutely mecessary to prevent confusion. The Barma language has been highly cultivated in composition, and contains numerous works in reli- gion and science. Besides numerous books on astro- logy, mythology, medicine, and law, in the latter of which the most important 1s the Dam ma-Sat kyee, or great system of justice, with the Constitutions of the Barma princes. The Barmas are asserted, by Dr. Bucuanawn, to possess numerous historical works, re- lative to the different dynasties of their princes, the most celebrated of which is the Alaha-rajaJV ayngee. “* These people,” says he, “ have also translated his-. tories of the Chinese and Siamese, and of the king- doms of Kathee, Koshan-pyee, Pagoo, Saymmay and Laynzayn.” On the importance of such works, sup- posing them to be strictly of a historical nature, it 1s needless to dilate. It appears probable, however, that many of them may resemble the Hindu Cheritras. The Barmas possess numerous smaller poems and songs, and even naiakas, which may probably be de- rived from Sanscrit tradition, as the adventures of Rama in Lunka, are favourite topics m their dramas. The following are some of the most popular works in the Barma language, and several of them, 1 find, exist equally in Rukhéng, Siamese and Malayu, OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 235 Some of them are purely mythological, but others are Cheritrds of the historical class. 1. Jina~Mana, 21. Kinara-pyeu, or account of the 2. Nunda-Jina, celestial Kinara, 3. Nundaguma, 22. Malinméng Wut’hu, or history 4. Chundaguma, of Rajah Malin, 5. Narada, 43, Jinaka, or history or Rajzh Ji- 6. Temi, naka, denominated in Siamese 7. Nemi, Maha-Chinok, 8. D’hammapada, 24, Yuwaji, termed in Ruk’héng ‘9. Namagara, : Ruari, 10, Logasara, 25. Swipri-wéng-khan, 11. Longanit’hi, 26. To-twék-k’han, 12, Maho-Sut’ha, 27. Munigungsala, 13. Wesundura, or story of Rajah 28. Anusasana, Vesundara, 29. Suan-nashan, 14, Paramik’han, 30. Withora, 15. Chudongk’han, 31. Kagileinga, 16. Bungk’han, 32. Sada-syi’ch-chaung, “17. Kado-k’han, 35. Anaga-atwéng, 18. Chatu Damasara, 34, Ngare-khan or description ‘of 19. Sangwara, termed in Siamese, Naraka, the Sut’hon, 23. Attagatt-léenga, 20. Bhuridat, 36. Hmat-chew’ bon’g. The Barma language has some variety of pronun- ciation in the different provinces of that empire. The dialect of the Vé, situated on the east of ‘the Arakan mountains, has been already noticed. The Tanéngsari, or language of the inhabitants of the Ta- naserim district, denominated Tinnaw by the Siamese, also differs considerably from the common Barma. The Tanéngsari certainly have many peculiarities of expression, and many words in common use among 236 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE them, are at present obsolete among the Barmas of Ava, but the majority of them are to be found in the Barma writings, and the Tanéngsadri are therefore . reckoned to use an obsolete dialect, rather than a pe- culiar language. I have already mentioned in what respects the Barma and Rukhéng are related to each other. The following comparative list of terms will show more particularly the extent of their difference in current use. ; Rukhéng. Barma. Month khanang piyat back nau-king nad Knee pa-chhei’ch-ta du bone aro ayo heart aling na-towng seeing mrang-ré sa myang-su-ha smell kaing-ré chan-jan touch pait-té seing-su-ha, thi trouble - ma-ré khék strength akri akyan marriage maya-ni-cha’p-té lék-t’hat-gya, life ahrang asyang circle apawk akwéng storm mukri moseik hail mu-gyowk mo-si morning ma-sowk-tha, nyi-ga ma-neik, evening nya-ja nya-né, né-€ sea mreik péng-le dust mré-moh among, myé-mong mud ta-mai suin fire ming mi length hré shi ditch mroung kewng gold hrui sué silver mué ngoé horse mroung miyin . fowl krak . kyiuk cock krak-p’ha kyiuk-t’hi hen Krak-ma kyiuk-ma snake mrui myewé sail rowak yewek OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. * Rukhéng. bed ~ taylor white hard vegetable first second I we thou you he they this that who what which if though about many perhaps yes no is was has been I ought to do it 4 will do it saloéng ang-gi-dap apra kyang haung sei’ch ruakk ayenga akha hnei’ch-khu-chowng akyeweng-hma akyeweng-ro-hma _mong mong-ro yang-su yang-su-ro dé-ga tho-ga au jama asu Cho-shyang la-la’t-hléukk le’khi-gra’t-me aking, kaing-ra-bya how’t-payak ma-hi hi-yak akyeweng-louk-kowng- yak akyeweng-ro-hma louk- ra-ré 237 Barma. . kadeng khyowk-sama pyu ma heing-ewék ayeng-su-ha ayeng-da-ha hnei’ch-khu-su-ha kyewen-now’p kyewen-do méng méng-do su su-do di-ha ho-ha béla baha bésii, béha hléang phye’ch-hleang pat apéng kan-hné hou’t-ké ma-si si . Py si-bi kewen-now’p-louk-gowng- kewen-nou’p louk-ya-dé The Barma affects a more delicate, but at the same time inarticulate pronunciation than the Rwk- héng, and less conformable to the actual orthography of the language. This is particularly obvious in the conversion of ra into ya in Barma; but the Rukhéng itself is not devoid of its peculiarities, among which may be mentioned the conversion of sha into ha. 238 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Thus the word which is -written shvé, in both lan- guages, is in Barma pronounced syi, and in Rukhéng | hri. The specimens which Dr. Bucnawan has exhibited of the languages of the Kariéng or Karayn, as he writes it, and of the Kiayn (which seems to be the same word softened in the pronunciation,) the rude tribe which denominates itself Kolén, certainly show considerable analogy to exist between these dialects and the Barma proper. Some Barma words seem, likewise, to be discoverable, in the specimen he has given of the language of the JMoitay, or, inhabitants of Kassay, as mee, fire,nga, fish; and more copious and correct vocabularies, with a more exact orthography, would probably exhibit a more intimate connection ; but a certain degree of acquaintance with the gram- matical principles of every language, and with its al- phabet and orthography, if a written one, is abso- lutely necessary to give any philological value to a specimen of its words. The inhabitants of the Wiko- bar islands are sometimes represented by those who have visited them, as speaking a language which is radically Barma, while, by others, it is reckoned Malayu, Wf Fontana’s short vocabulary (Asiatick Researches, Vol. III.) can be depended on, the Nko- bar language seems to have very little connection with either the one or the other; as it does not ap- pear to contain above two or three words which can with certainty be referred to either of them, The Barma language has been little cultivated by Europeans, excepting the Catholic Missionaries. The “ Alphabetum Barmanum,” digested by CarPanivs, was published at Rome in 1776. Carpantus men- tions, in his preliminary dissertation, that, at that 2 OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 239 period, a grammar and vocabulary of the Barma lan- guage had been prepared by P. Jon. Marta Per. coro, Bishop of J4éssola, which seems never to have been published. In the preface to the same work, AmADutTIvus mentions, that the gospel of Sr. Ma- THEW, and the epistles of St. Pau, had been ren- dered into the Barma language, together with the “ Koangelia dierum omnium Dominicalium,” “ Epistola Dogmatica, et Dialogus inter Missionarium et Talapoi- num.’ .T. PauLrnus, also mentions among the Bor- gian MSS. a dialogue between a savage Khien and an E£x-Talapoin, written in the Italian language by D. Casetanus Manrecatius, the object of which is to expose the doctrine of the Talapoins, as contained in the books of the Barmas. Khien seems to be the name of the rude tribe termed Khéng by Moslem writers, and Kzayn by Dr. Bucuanan; and the work itself, the translation of a composition circu- lated among the:converted Barmas by the catholic missionaries. - The 7alapoins seem, however, to have retaliated on the missionaries; and Dr. Fr. Bucna- waw has printed VincentTius SANGERMANO’ trans- lation of “ 4 view of the Religion of Gopama,” com- posed by Aruxi Zarapo, for the express purpose of converting the Christians, in which the English, Dutch, Armenians, and other nations are exhorted to adore Gopama, thetrue Gop; toadore,also, his law and his priests, to be solicitous in the giving of alms and in the observance of Si/a, and in performing Bavana.. IX. Mén.—The én language is still used by the original inhabitants of Pegu, who denominate them- selves M6n, though by the Barmas they are termed Taleing, and, by the Siamese, Jding-mén. This lan- guage has never been cultivated by Huropeans, and the only specimen of it, known to me, is that printed by Dr. Fr. Bucnanan, (Asiatic Researches, Vol. V.) ~*~ G40 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE It seems to be quite original, and is said by the Bar- mas and Siamese to have no affinity with either of their languages. I have met no learned man of the race, nor have had any opportunity of cultivating the language, but I have been informed by a Tala- poin that they possess many ancient histories in this language; which is not impossible, as they seem to have attained civilization, at a more early period than the Barmas ; and, though now reduced, to have been formerly a great and potent nation. In the early Portuguese histories they are denominated the Pandalis of Mén; and they are supposed to have founded the ancient Kalaminham empire, at a very early period. The name Kalaminham, mentioned by the Portugueze, is probably connected with the Stamese name of the nation, Ming-mén. The Mén alphabet, if can depend on the specimens. of the character shown me by a Barman of some learning, is only a slight variety of the Barma-Bali, with which, it corresponds, in the power and arrangement, as well as the form of the characters. I have, however, had little opportunity of investigating this subject; and, expecting to have visited Pegu, did not avail my- self of that opportunity to the fullest extent. The examination of the AZén character and language, has no peculiar difficulty, and may be easily accomplished by the first literary inquirer who may visit Pegu; and I still indulge the hope that my future inquiries may be attended with success in investigating their rela- tions. X. Tuay.—The Thay language is that which is used by the Siamese, who, in their own tongue, assume this name as their national ap- ellation. By the Barmas, they are denomi- nated Syan, from whence the Portugueze seem to have borrowed their Siam and Staom, from whom OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 941 the other nations of Zurope have adopted the term. La Lovsere, who visited Siam in 1687-4, as Envoy Extraordinary from the French monarch, has given incomparably the most accurate account, that -has ever been exhibited, of this nation, formerly reckoned the most polished of eastern India. He divides them into two races, the 7ai and the Tai Yai. The latter nation, he adds, are reckoned savages, though the most ancient. ‘Theirname signifies literally the great Tai, and in order to distinguish themselves from this nation, the ruling race, in modern Siam, assume the name of Tai-noé, the little Tai. Dr. Fr. Bucuanan, however, on the authority of the information he re- ceived in the Barma dominions, divides the Siamese race into many states; and gives a specimen of the vocables of three dialects. This brief vocabulary, with La Lousere'’s observations on the Siamese lan- guage, and “ The maxims of the Talapeins,” translated out of Siamese by the catholic missionaries, which he has published in his “ Avstorical Relation of the King- dom of Siam,” constitute all that has been published, respecting the language or literature of this nation, in any European tongue. The result of- my own in- quiries certainly coincides more directly with La Louzere’s information, than with that received, by Dr. Fr. Bucnanayn. All the intelligent Sramese, whom I have met, and among these, there were Talapoins, both of the Tai and the Tai-yai race, agree in asserting, that the Szamese nation, properly so cal- led, consists of two tribes, the 7”hay and the T’hdy- jhay, for so the names are properly written. Ofthese the most ancient are the Z°hay-j hay, formerly famous for their learning, and the power of their empire. It is added, that many monuments of this ancient race exist in the kimgdom of Siam; and I was in- formed, in particular, that in the vicinity of Ligér, 942 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE about five days journey from Trang, there are various ancient inscriptions, on stone, among the ruins of a very ancient temple, which are attributed to the F°kayj hay, but which no person among the modern T’hay is able to decypher. The 7”hay language, or Siamese, as it is written by these two races, does not differ essentially ; but the spoken dialect among the T’hay phay, is much more strongly accented, than among the 7”hay proper, or the present ruling race of Siam. The T’hay phay inhabit the country be- tween the Me-nam and the Afe-kon, or river.of Cam- bodia ; but the T’hay, for the most part, inhabit on the west of the Me-nam, or between that river and the frontiers of the Tinnaw, Adén, and Barma nations. As to the Yai-loong, of whose vocabulary Dr. Bu- CHANAW has given a specimen, all the Svamese that T have met, though they admit that a district is de- nominated by this appellation, unanimously deny, that there is either a race of men, or a dialect of the Janeuage, which bears this name. ‘The words them- selves, which Dr. Fr. Bucnawaw adduces, as spe- eimens either of the Tai loong or the Tai-yay, are pure T’hay, whenever they are not auricular corruptions of pronunciation, or words of different meaning, in- troduced, apparently, by the interpreter’s misappre- hension of the seuse required to be expressed. Hay- ing myself been frequently exposed to similar misap- rehensions, and knowing, from experience, the dif- Beulty of avoiding it, especially in languages, in which not only the signification varies, with such de- licate shades of pronunciation, as are almost undis- tinguisnable to an European ear, but the train of ideas themselves, is regulated by such a subtile, and as it were hieoroglyphical set of principles, I am far from insinuating any carelessness in Dr. Fr. Bucna-_ NAN, whose comparative vocabulary is the first at-- OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 243 tempt to classify these languages ; but I am attempt- ing to account for the mistakes, into which he seems to have been inevitably led, by the misapprehension of his interpreters. Thus, moo signifies the hand, in TPhay, and paw-moo, which he exhibits as the Tui- loong variation, is only Fa-mi%, the palm of the hand, in the proper language: Kén, which he writes kayn, signifies the arm, in Thay or Siamese proper, and in the same language, komovee, which he gives as the Lai-yay synonime, signifies the lower part of the arm, from the elbow to the wrist, and moo, the Tailoong synoume, signifies the hand ; Tin, signifies the leg, in Bidigere 3 but naung, which he gives as the 7% al-nay, signifies the skin ; and koteen, the Tui-yay synonime, ‘the joints of the leg ; in the same manner langteen, which he gives as the Tai-nay, or common Siamese, for foot, signifies literally the upper part of the foot ; and Swateen, the Tai-nay synonime, appears to be a mispronunciation of Fatin, the under part of the foot. Satt signifies a beast, or animal, and nook, the Ti ai-yay synonime, is only a mispronunciation of ndk, a bird, as are noup and naut, the Tai-nay and Tai yay words, which are given to signify a bird; Pawk signifies the mouth, but tsop, given as the Tui-yay synonime, is a mispronunciation of ¢sot, to drink ; San signifies short, but lot, the Tai-yay synonime, signifies child, and un- fot, the Tatloong synonime, one child ; yoon signifies to stand, but loot-sook, the Tai-yay synonime mispro - nounced, signifies to rise up; and Peinung, the Tui- doong synonime, go sit ; seeza, the head, is not Stamese, but Bali, and the Tay-yay synonime ho and the Tai- loong, hoo, are only mispronunciations of the proper Thay term hud. It may be proper also to observe here, that Dr. Fr. Bocuawnaw has printed Tay-nay instead of the Tai-noé of La Lousrre, which signi- fies Litle Siamese; whereas Tay-nay cannot possibly 9) ~ S44 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE signify little Siamese, but only chief Siamese ; the true meaning of nay, being chief or head. It is a term of similar ‘import with nayen, nayer and nayenmar, used in Malabar, as the appellation of the military cast, or naya-ka, in Sanscrit. The T’hay or Stamese language appears to be in a great measure original ; and is more purely monosyl- labic, and more powerfully accented, than any of the Indo-Chinese languages, already mentioned. ‘Tt cer- tainly is connected, in some degree, with some of the Chinese dialects ; especially’ the Mandarin: or Court language, with which its numerals, as well as some other terms, coincide, but these are ‘not very numerous. It borrows words freely from the Baéi, but contracts and disguises more, the terms which if adopts, than either the Ruk'héng or the Barma. In its finely modulated intonations of sound, in its ex- pression of the rank of the speaker, by the simple pronouns, which he uses, in the copiousness of the language of civility, and the mode of expressing esteem and adulation, this language resembles the Chinese dialects, with which also, it coincides more 18 consonant to the Malayu, thou nearly in construction than either "Barma or Rukhéng. Its construction is simple and inartificial, depending almost solely on the principle of juxta-position. Re- lative pronouns are not in the language; the nomi- native regularly precedes the verb, “and the verb pre- ‘ cedes the case which it governs. When two sub- stantives come together, the last of them is for the most part supposed to be in the genitive. This idiom eh not to the Barma or Rukhéng, in which, as in English, the first sub- stantive ba a possessive signification, Thus, the phrase, ‘“ a man’s head,” is expressed 1 in Barma and Rul’héng, by liek’ haung 2, which is literally man- OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 245 head; but, in Siamese, it it is kudé-khon, and in Ma- layu, kapala orang, both of which are literally head- man A similar difference occurs in the position of the accusative with an active verb, which case, in Barma and Malayu, generally precedes the verb, as tummaing cha, literally rice eat ; but in Stamese fol- lows it, as kén kaw, literally eat rice, which corre- sponds to the Malayu, makan-nasi. The adjective generally follows the substantive, and the adverb the word which it modifies, whether adjective or verb. Whenever the name of an animal, and in general, when that of a species or class, is mentioned, the ge- neric, or more general name of the genus to which it belongs, is repeated with it, as often happens in the other monosyllabic languages, as well as in A/Za- layu. -In the position of the adverbial particle, the Malayu, often differs from the Stamese; as Mana pargi, literally where go, but, in Seamese, pai hnéi, go where. ‘The Siamese composition is also, like that of the Barma, a species of measured prose, regulated solely by the accent, and the parallelism of the members of the sentence; but, in the recitative, the Siamese approaches more nearly to the Chinese mode of recitation, and becomes a kind of chaunt, which different Brahméns have assured me is very similar to the mode of chaunting the Samaveda. The T°hay coincides occasionally, even in simple terms; both withthe Barma and Malayu; but these terms bear so small a proportion to the mass of the language, that they seem rather the effect of acci- dent or mixture, than of original connection. The following are some of these coincidences which pre- ‘sent themselves spontaneously. R$ 046 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE T’hay Barma T’hay Malayu river klong, kyéng or if ku, aku, and krong, ku, elephant, chang, ch’heng, this, ni, ini, saw, ltei, lua, that, nunn, inun, finger, nyew, nyo, lock, . kache, kunchi, to, ka, ga, dagger, _krit, kris, self, éng, éng, open, buk, buka, to, ka, ka, come, ma, mari. The 7’hay or Siamese alphabet, differs consider- ably in the power of its characters from the Badli ; though it not only has a general resemblace to it, in point of form, but also in the arrangement of the character. The vowels, which are twenty in num- ber, are not represented by separate characters, but by the character corresponding to the short dkar, va- riously accented; excepting the vocalic rw and l, which are only variations of the r and / consonants. The consonants are thirty-seven in number, and are not arranged by the series of five, like the Deva-na- gari and Bali, but the first series ka, consists of seven letters; the second series, cha, of six; the third se- ries, ta or da, of six; the fourth series, ba or pa, of eight; the fifth series, ja, of four; and the last se- ries, sa, of six, including the vocalic dkar, though two of them are not in common use. Each of these let- ters is varied by sixteen simple accentuations, and by thirty-six complex ones. ‘The letters ka, nga, ta or da, na, ma, ba or pa, are also final consonants. Hence it is easy to perceive the near approximation of the Siamese to the delicacy of the Chinese accen- tuation ; while in other respects, the alphabet is con- siderably more perfect, than in the dAdandarin or Court language of the Chinese, which has neither the same variety of consonants, nor admits so many, in the close of a syllable. The Stamese pronunciation, even of consonants, corresponds very imperfectly to OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. G47 the European mode: r and / are generally pro- nounced v, in the close of a syllable ; 4 is often pre- fixed to a consonant, but from the total suspension of voice, in pronouncing syllables which termmate in a consonant, no aspiration can be pronounced after them ; ma, and ba, tya, and chya, are often difficult to be distinguished in pronunciation, as are ya, and ja, kyé and chyé with other combinations. From this circumstance, many combinations of letters are pro- nounced in a manner somewhat different from that im which they are written. The first European who attempted the study of Stamese literature, was the learned Grervatsé, but his Jucubrations have never been published. The learned and indefatigable Hypr procured from the Siamese ambassador at London, an imperfect copy of the Sza- mese alphabet, which has been published by Gree. Suarpe, inthe ‘“ Syntagma Dissertationum,” 1767. It is inferior to La Lousere’s alphabet in accuracy, though it contains a ereater number of compound characters. La Lousere’s alphabet contains three forms of the sz, corresponding to the Nagar: ; but the sha and sivha bemg disused mr common pronun- ciation, are commonly omitted both im the alphabet and in modern MSS. The Siamese or T’hay language contains a great variety of compositions of every species. Their poems and songs are very numerous, as are their Cheritras, or historical and mythological fables. Many of the Siamese princes have been celebrated for their poetical powers, and several of their histo- rical and moral compositions, are still preserved. In all their compositions, they either affect a plain, simple narrative, or an uncontected and abrupt style R4 &- 948 - ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE of short, pithy sentences, of much meaning. Their books of medicine are reckoned of considerable an- tiquity. Both -in science and poetry, those who affect learning and elegance of composition, sprinkle their style copiously with Bali. The laws of Siam are celebrated all over the east, and La Lounere has mentioned three works of superior reputation, the Pra-Tam-non, rhe Pra-Tam-Ra, and the Pra-Raja- Kam-manot. Of these, the first is a collection of the institutions of the ancient kings of Scam ; the second _is the constitutional code of the kingdom, and con- tains the names, functions, and prerogatives ofall the officers; the third, which is about 150 years old, con- tains additional regulations. Of these, the first is the most celebrated and the most deserving the at- tention of uropeans. | ‘The Siamese histories of the J’hay dynasty, detail with much minuteness, and great exaggeration, the events which have occurred in Sram, and the adja- cent states and countries, during the last 1000 years. Tt also details the events of 400 years, previous to that period, with less precision, from the building of the city Maha Nakhon. The records, however, of the T’hay J’hay dynasty are supposed still to exist ; and, perhaps, it may yet be possible to glean a few grains of pure historic gold from the sands which eater in the long vallies of the Jdé-nam and Meé- on. The Cheritrds, or romantic fictions of the Sramese, are very numerous, and the personages introduced, with the exception of Rama and the characters of the Ramayan, have seldom much similarity to those of the Brahméns. The following are some of the most popular among the Thay, several of which OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 249 contain the same: stories and incidents as those which are current among the Rukhéng, Barma, and Malayu nations. . Rama-kién, Radin, Sum-mut-ta-k6-dém, . Wét-jasun-dén, . Worawoéng, D tr m WH > Un-nariut, . Mahé-sot, . Mélay, . Chatri, . Chalaw4n, . P-ham-hém, . Pra-thém, . Su-t?hon, . Pok’ha-wad-di, . Téng-6dn, . Lin-t’héng, . Nok-k’hum, . P*ha-non-son-paja, . Mak-kali-p’hon, 20. Sam-p’han-sit, ee ee oaonwD> ore WoO eK Oo CF ON [Ss — . Stian-na-hong, . Woraniut, . Chitra-kan, . Nang-uthay, . Maha-Chinok, . Mlék-vhong. . Prang-thong, . Nang-sip-song, . Rama, . Chumpé-t’hong, . Luk-stia-ko, P’him-swan, . Paja-phali, . T’haw-kriing-séa, . Khun-p’hen, . Trei-w6ng, . Chin-narat, . PPhowit’hat, . Su-t’hin, . HOi-sang, . Sang-sin-chay, a In the general characteristics of style and manner, these Cheritras resemble those of the Rukhéng, Bar- ma, and AMalayu tribes, and exhibit the peculiar man- ners of the Indo-Chinese nations, as well as the peculiar features of their mythology. The Rama-kien seems ‘to be a Siamese version of the Ramayan, and relates the adventures of Pra’w or Pra Ram, and his brother Pra-La’k or Laksumana, and their wars with Totsa-KaNn or DusHa-KantHa, (which is one of the names of Ravana,) who carried off Nance 950 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Sr’pa or Srta. This narrative corresponds as far as } have been able to learn, with the Sanserit poem, and almost ali its incidents have been converted into Natakas for representation by the Samese, in. the same manner as the Barmas have employed the incidents of the Vama-méng or Barma-Ramayan. Rédin is the Siamese translation of a Javanese story. Sum-mut-ta-ko-dom is the history of SomonaKopom, abridged from the Bali. he MWet-jd-sun-d6n is the history of a Rajah who becomes an ascetic of the forest, being struck with a fit of devotion at the sight of a withered mango-tree, as he was walking in his garden. MWorawéng is the history of an unfor- tunate Rajah, who fell in love with a lady, and was slain by an enchanted spear which guarded her, one night as he was escalading the window of his mis- tress. This is also a subject ot dramatic represen- tation. Mahé-sd¢ contains the wars of Mana-sor with Cuor-ny, and is the same as the Barma Maho- Sut’ha. Un-narat, narrates the story of AN’RUD HA, the grand-son of Krisuna. A/aldy relates the be- nefits of Matay, the being whose office is to relieve the torments of Naraka. Chaldwdn contains the history of a destructive alligator, who falls in love with a princess, whom he carries off to his recess in the ocean, and the account of her rescue. P’hum- hém is the history of another princess of whom an elephant was enamoured, and her rescue. Prathom is a mythological account of the origi of the universe, according to the principles of the Budd hist sect. Nok-khim is the mythological account of the celebra- ted Hamsa. Pokha-wad-di is the history of Bua- cavatt. P’ha-nén-sén-paja, contains the instructions of the sagacious ape P’ha-non. ‘The Mak-hal-p hon, the adventures of the son of a chief, who possessed a wonderful cow, résembling the Sanserit Kamad henu. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 251 Stim-phan-sit, a book of moral instructions. Prang- hong relates the adventures of the persons who went to the land of the Rakshasas in search of the fruit Prang thong, for which a certain princess had longed when pregnant, the obtaining of the fruit on condition that the child of which the princess was pregnant should be presented to the Rakshasa, the earrying off of the child by the Rakshasa, and her return to her parents when grown up. The Lih- sud-ké relates the friendship between the tyger and the bull, and their being afterwards metamorphosed into men by a certain Rishi. Paa-phal relates the adventures of Vart, the brother of Sucriva’. The Hoi Sang relates the adventures of the prince who was born 3 im achank shell, and remained in it till he arrived at maturity. The Sang-sin-chay is the account. of a hero who was born with a chank and an arrow in his hand, with which, and mounted on a lion, he accomplished many adventures among the Rakshasas and Girgasis, Yakshas or Vik, as they are termed by the Siamese. The /Voranit relates the adv entures of the twin brothers Woranur and Worane't. Nang- uthay relates the adventures of a Naga princess, who was carried off by a Rajah. Some of these fictions exhibit a wild and singular style of fabling, with which we are little acquainted, but the oreater part are obviously derived from the Saxscrit, through the Bali. The T°hay exhibits considerable variety of mea- sures, In composition, and frequently introduces seve~ ral of them in the same work, in the same manner as is frequently done m Brij’h, Pun yabi, and Sik’h com- positions. ‘The most frequent measure, however, among the 7”fay, as among the Ruk’héng and Barma, seems to be that denominated rap, which consists of / 252 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE four long syllables, but admits occasionally of one or more intercalary short ones: the Ja-ni which consists of five syllables, the Ché-bang of six, the Pat’*hamang of seven, the Jésunta of eight, are also frequently employed. The following specimen of 7”hay, is taken from the beginning of the Maka Chinok, a work in whic the greater part of these are introduced. DESCRIPTION OF MAIT HILA. Jang mi miung ning Lok’ha-ma k’hai Jay kwang trabing Wanit thang 1ai Chu Mit thin 14 Chai ria pai ma Thaw p’hu suwoi rat Bo mi satru Krop krong para Bibiin pracha Song nam maha Prat’het nana Chinok p’homt Jom ma thuk mitng Som det p’homi Chin, Cham, Pram, Law Krong se narat Ming-mén, ‘Tin-naw Pin ch nan ma Map mai nong nuung Bo mi an arai P’harang phang-ka Ké rat pracha Ma khat’hak mating T’haw krong para Kkék mon nong niting Pin chaw p’hen din Ma mitiing ka kai K’haw mak pla-t’hok Kala P’hrang-sét Bomi p’hai rok Chin Cham Pram-T’het Bibiin p’ho min Chong sakk Nalay Pinstik ka priam pri _ Jipan Chinho Maung Pra Narin Aw sin ma k’hai T’haw krong p’hen din Ni nun Jaa lay Soka sém pra cha «¢ There was a certain country, powerful and’ of great extent, termed Mithinla (Maithila). In this country « certain Rajah exercised the sovereign authority, named Mana Cuinok, (JANAKA), overshadowing his people like the spreading banian tree. For a long series of years, he ruled this country, while none was able to injure it, or subject it to foreign authority. Rice was abundant, and of a cheap price: no disease prevailed, and no discontent against the sovereign, and the inhabitants enjoyed every pleasure, as in the region of Pra-Narayen. The sovereign of the country diffused joy over the face of the land, among eo OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 253 the natives, wliue merchants resorted thither in fleets of ships, constantly going and coming; and asthere was no disturbance in the jand, the inhabitants of every country frequented it; the Chin, C arese ) the Cham, (the Chinese Tartars) the Pram, (Brahméns) the Ming-Mén, (Mons of Pegu) the Tinnaw, (Barmas of Tendserim) all of them in innumerable multitudes: also the Franks of Europe came thither to traffic; the Khék, (Malays) the Kula, (Chulzas) the Phrangset, (French) the Pram-?hét, (Kelings or Hindus of Kalinga) the Chong-sakk and Na-Lay, (Caffree tribes, with stained skins and tattoed faces), the Jipun, (Japanese) and the Chinho, (Tonkinese) resorted thither with goods, to buy and sell, constantly in great multitudes.” / The Mana Cuinox of the Stamese, seems to be a popular account of Raja Janaxa, of Jaithila, derived from the Ramayan; but it is evident, if the text can be considered as correct, that the work has been either interpolated or modernized, from the mention of the Franks and the French. The followmeg specimens of Ruk’heng and Barma, will indicate the similarity of style and measure which prevails in all the monosyllabic languages. The specimen of the Ruk’héng is taken from the Nega-chaing-braing : THE BIRTH OF GAUTAMA. O-lé lé sangkhyé hna O tzeng lé bri sd Kaing b’ha ta saing Dewa nat-tzei’ch “Two’k kying tsing bowng - Ahnei’ch mroung kr& Pri bri syowng-hina Tzaing bri chwa hma Para tz gd Sei’ch-tza 1é ba Lo rui towng thi Taratzu si _ Aldng sG mré’p Pri kha-ni-wé Syang: Theik-d’hat ga Pri gri sa bla Né hmiat pro ra Ka pila hnei’ch -Dowk thi da hnei’ch Khrei’ch pha Thowk té Khyaing sa sukha Méd6 boing bi Tzaing lé sa dé Siri maba 954 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Maya waing t’hé Ari thaing d’hé Tstiwé lé ti O thaing dé tstwé bri Mré gri kreit krak Aup thak akowng Lat lat towng ¢ O thaing dé tsuwé Pha Tsé la waing hneik Paik towng bri tho Piang é nan hmon Ahlueng tu pro Angarang to hneik Mi tso maya Uyein sa go Lé la tan di U yéng thé doang Ko wat krang rué Pra jang ron mra Ni ma hla ni Gotami hna Ma pri rat léat Lé krang shéat ruwé ’ Prang thak hnan moang Ahlueng tu pro Angarang to hneik Mi tso maya Thaing kha ngewéh khak Kéing hléak lék tsuwé Amré rat né | Thowng lu chwa go Phwa hléang le i. O 1é lat briso When one hundred thousand revolutions of the world were completed, each occupying four Sankhyas, then the devout worshipper obtained the object of earnest desire ; and the sublime Turk D’Hart, (Srpp’HaAR- THA) who is acquainted with the secrets of futurity, obtained supreme felicity, tranquillity devoid of care, and self absorption. After the pure Deva Nat’Ha had passed numerous ages in the possession of supreme felicity, meditating on the four laws of truth, when the period of the divine favour was nearly completed; in the excellent and populous region of Kapila, Sux-16 (Stpp’HOvANA) became his beloved father, and Szrr Mana Maya, his venerable mother, became pregnant of a perfect conception. When this conception took place, the strong earth was agitated upwards and downwards, trembling and shaking. After ten months pregnancy, supporting her swelling womb with her hand, his mother Maya was walking for recreation in a deep forest of Angarang trees, diffusing around an exquisite odour. Walking up and “down in a pleasant garden, reciting the divine names on her rosary, and radiating in brilliant beauty, and accompanied by two younger sisters of the same complexion, unable any longer to support the burden of Gorama, (Gautama) she leaned on the shoulders of her two younger sisters. Within a deep forest, in a grove of Angarang trees, which diffused around an exquisite odour; his mother Maya, firmly grasping the branches with her hands, and standing erect on her feet, brought forth the deity Gorama. ; OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 255 Taerk-Duar or Tuix-Duart, ts the Barma mode of pronouncing Stp'HaTa, ‘as it is written, which is the Bali corruption of Sipn HAR-T HA. According to this analogy, Bupp’Ha is pronounced Bu'apa, and Supp He, the contraction of Stan sopawna, SuK-To, and sometimes Suc-po. The following specimen of Barma verse is taken from the Chatu-Damasara, as it is termed in Pak, which is denominated the Ko-Khan in Barme. DESCRIPTION Baranasi Pyi gyi pyi hu Kyo-niy lu-bé We-niy kosi Nago k’haing-gaing Hwin hwan di Baranasi Chong jt pyo wa Tho pyi ma hneik Dana-ma-mé Chawng lé sadéng Meng i tang kntin Chain gyé han li Khyiuk suin pyo byo Hna myo mé hlyéang Hmya hné chéng éwé Wan diéng p’hyong tan Makouk ydin di Ta khéin ha ga Hnei’ch kwa maswé Myew chwé khyé’ch so Hloup shya maneyng / OF VARANASI. Ti di song ewé Hné Iéng makyan Kyéng dan mwé nyek Myek sék niba Peng ga néng thek Hoi’ch chek muishih Khan khi si nyin® P’*hyeang bé pyothu La ahwon bné Machar kyéang hme Leik hléo pyew sa Ché khu hneik chap Raja han diiéng Ta éng makhyo Kyé ju do gyowng Sépo pyéng gyéwin Myet 1é thuin sé Ku-san hlé deik Pyiuk la sokha Ko gwé ya hiien Hman chua chéng chei’ct Phyeit pé so la Néng ngan sa.do 256 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Kyan k’heng myé chéng Chéng yé hu-sa Yé€ tu khyan p’hyeng Tong lé khyéng hima Pyowk keng ché khyéng Myo baché ya Mito ketu Hmat takhu phyiéng Esukari Kyo hlueng nyi hliép Bowng mi kéng ewé Mwoi shéang lan-owng Sin myan chong si Swé tawng nan puéng Cho yan hlueng ga Meik myiang ko yo Sivé khyi ko sa- B’héng cheit ta hmu Khat sin lu-do Up’hyu u nék Sowng teik tweik si Hwan teik pyi byi Hlyéan hlyéan di Baranast (Benares) was a beautiful and extensive region, inhabited by a race superior to every other, whether far or near, living fortunate and happy. Baranast was, in every respect, an admirable country, possessing every thing desirable; for in that kingdom, prevailed the practice of charitable donation, and the performance of ascetic duties, So generous was the heart of the Rajah, that he gave, in charitable donations, the whole of his.revenue. Devoid of every selfish desire, ’ his mind was onefold, like the point of an arrow. Free from evil inclination, onefold and not double in his speech. Affectionate to all his relations, and beloved of them, remaining firm as a massy roof-beam, no one could prevent or shake his purpose; never deviating from veracity, undivided in heart, excellent in his whole conduct, and his heart devoid of angry passion. Under his sway existed no violence, restraining the desire of his own eyes. Such was his universal character. Performing no wicked action, and rendering all his people happy, he neglected none of the ten commandments in the practice of general benevolence. Like a bank of sand, which rises up into an island far at sea, and when the passing ships are wrecked, affording a sure and safe refuge to the mariner. Thus it was that he aided his subjects, who were sinking overwhelmed in misfortune ; and thus those who were shivering under the chilling cold, (of distress) were revived by approaching the genial flame of authority. Like the motion of a serpent, cautious in his conduct. His palace was splendid as a mountain of gold: in his pre- sence no enemy durst present himself. Srvakara Kasa Mirra Ke’tu, with his mind fixed on one object, YesuKarr far celebrated; such was his regal state, that the whole human race, whether white or black, _ in ten thousand regions, lived in joy and happiness under his sway. It is difficult to determine, from the Barma text, the true name of this sovereign of Benares ; but several names, in some degree similar, as OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 257 Mirre'ya and Kretumat, occur in a Pauranic list of the Rajas of Benares, descended from Divopasa, which was pointed out to me by Mr. CoLrsrooxer, of whose notices I have frequently had occasion to avail myself. | XI. K’n6ume'n.—The K’héhmén language is used by a nation of that name, who reside on the Mé-kén, or river of Kam-bi-chat or Camboja. It has never been cultivated by Luropeans, and I have had no Opportunity of examining it. The Stamese, from whom I received my information, assured me that it was entirely different from either the Z”hay or the Juan, or language of Cochin China. The K’héhmén are reckoned an ancient and learned people; and were formerly,subdued by the 7°hay-jhay, or ancient Stamese race. The modern T°hay, or Siamese, still denominate the Bak character, Nangsu Khém, or the IChéhmén letter, from this nation. They are not, however, supposed to have existed as a polished na- tion.so early as the Law, but are believed to derive their origin from the warlike race of mountaineers named. Ikhé, the Gueos of the early Portugueze historians, who are still represented as_ practising their ancient customs, of eating human flesh, and painting and tattooing their bodies. Dr Barros, however, seems to represent the language of the K’héhmén as different trom that of Camboja, though the Stamese do not distinguish them. ‘ There are two kingdoms,” says he, “ adjacent to each other, and both of them maritime, which have each a pecu- liar language; the first is termed Como, and the second Cambga.” ( Decad. iii. lib. 2. ¢. 5.) XII. Law.—The Law language is used by the inland nation of that name, who are generally termed, V #258 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE after the Portugueze writers, Ldo, and in the plural, Laos, from their consisting of different races. Their language, Dre Barros observes, is peculiar, and the Siamese assert that it is different from the Z°hay. It has never been cultivated by Europeans, very few of whom, besides ALEXANDER De Ruopes, have ever visited the country. According to Kamprrr, (History of Japan, p. 26,) the Law nation do not differ much from the Scamese, either in language or writing, except that they are unable to pronounce the letters 7 and r: and this opinion I am mucli inclined to adopt, though I have had no favourable opportunity of investigating the subject. If, how- ever, I may be allowed to judge from the specimens of the Zaw language, which I have been able to pro- cure from Siamese and Barmas, it appears to bear the same relation to the 7°hay or Siamese, that the Rikhéng does to the Barma. With the T°hayphay it accords more fully than with the Z”hay proper; and, in adopting Pal terms, it adheres more accu- rately to the Pali orthography than either of them. The following short list of words and phrases wilh. eonvey some idea of the difference which. subsists between the 7"hay and the Law. As the T’hay-hay approaches the Ldw more nearly than the 7”hay, when that dialect uses peculiar terms, I have pre- ferred adducing them, for the sake of comparison. Where the Zdw and the J’hay agree in the radical, an apparent diversity is often produced by the con- version of the / and r into h or d. } Liw. Thay. call, héng, riukk, talk, iy kc phet, warm, hén, ron, very warm, fon ala, Fon uk, 7 - OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 259 not know, Do you see? many, sea, waye, river, number, , matchlock, far off, handsome, weary, hated, sing, grieve, give, approach, market, shut, flesh, blood, fight, craft, stand, lamp, how is it done? how many? moon, woman, nian, country, house, who, what, go there, come here, fort, elder brother, Léw. bo-hu, chaw han meng, mésamat, peng, jia, Pap, sénat, kai, lau, it, cha, SO, hai, hin, hét, ka, kat, C tat, chin, hiit, hop, khilai, hiin, kat’hip, peng jang hidé, taw dai, p’ha chan, mé jing, pho-chay, _ wiyung, hiin, phai, basandé, pai-pan, ma-phé, tapp, ay, 54 T’ hay. mai ru, nai hén ra, mak, thalé, klin, -kiéng, rap, thong-kham, théng, takfia, tharfi, jia, sabut, pun, kiai, ngdim, jun, ta-kiang, ham jang ara, taw rai, pra-chan, pu-jing, ’ phu-chay, muang, Fh ruin, krai, or kai, arai, G pai-nin, ma-ni, k’hai, pi-pach-ay, 260 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Law. ; T’hay. elder sister, tei, pi-pu-jing, mother, tmé, me, I, ku, k’ha, I (honorific) kha, di-chan, we, how, : rau. It is from this nation that both Siamese and Bar- mas allege that they derive their religion, laws, and institutions. ‘It is in the country of Law that all the celebrated founders of the religion of Bupp’Ha are represented to have left their most remarkable vestiges. Ceylon boasts the sacred‘ traces of the left foot of Bupp #4 on the top of the mountain Amala- Sri-padi, or Adams Peak. Stam exhibits the traces of the right foot, on the top of the golden mountain Swa-na-bapato. Other traces of the sacred steps are sparingly scattered over Pegu, Ava, and Arakan; but it is among the Laos, that all the vestiges of the founders of this religion seem to be concentered, and whither devotees repair to worship at the traces of the sacred steps of Pra-Ku-ku-sin, Pra-Kén-na-kén, Pra-Put-tha-Kat-sop and Pra-Sa-mit-ta-ko-dom. These Siamese names of the four Bupp’Has seem to correspond to the Barma Kauxasan, GonaGom, Kasyapa, and Gorama, the Singhala, Kaxusa‘NDA, Kowacam, Kasyarpa, and Gaurama. There can be no doubt, however, from the order of the names, but that they are the four last’ Bupp’us in the list given by He/Macuanpra Acua’rya in the Abhid‘ha- na Chintdmeni, under the following Sanscrit appel- lations, from which all these Stamese, Barma, and Sing’hala names, seem to be only Bali corruptions. _ The Sanscrit names are Krukruch’hunda, Kan‘chana, OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 261 Kasyapa, and Sédkyasinha. The language of Law is represented as abounding in books, especially transla- tions from the Balt; and if the antiquity of the nation can be depended on, they must be extremely interesting, from the situation of the country be- tween China and the other IJndo-Chinese nations. The Zdw nation consists, like the Siamese, of two different races of people, denominated in Siamese, Chéng-mai and Lan-chang, which are said by Kamp- FER, to be the names of their chief cities. The first of these are termed, by the Barmas, Yin, and the second, ZLain-sain. De Barros adds a third tribe, which he denominates Chan-cray. In their general appearance the Law resemble the JJén. XIII. Anam.—The Anam language is that of Cochin-China and Tonkin. It is represented by the catholic missionaries to be likewise generally used in Champa and Kau-bang ; but their assertions must be taken with some limitation when they add, Law, Cambéja, and Siam. The Anam language, as well as the nation, is often denominated the Juan, by the Malays and Siamese. It has always been more cul- tivated by the catholic missionaries, than any other of the Jndo-Chinese languages, though these fathers may, with some degree of propriety, affect the title of “multiplicis idiomatis propagatores.” So early as 1651, the Propaganda Society published at Rome, the “ Dictionarium Annamiticum Lusitanum et Latinum,” compiled by the jesuit ALEXANDER DE RnuaopEs, after twelve years residence in Cochin-China and Tonkin, where he had studied under P. Francisco pE Pra, the first who acquired skill and facility in that language. In composing his dictionary, he had- also the advantage of employing the materials col- 8S 3 262 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE lected by P. Gaspar pe AmaraLand P, Antonio Barsosa, the first of whom had made some progress in preparing an Anam and Portugueze dictionary, and the second in compiling one in Portugueze and Anam. ‘This dictionary is printed wholly in the _ Latin character, as the author considered the Anam character as too. difficult to be useful. It is accom- panied by a short grammatical sketch of the Anam language, entitled “ Lingue Annamitice seu Tunchi- nénsis brevis Declaratio.” ‘though I have never met with a learned Cochin-Chinese, 1 have seen several persons who could speak the vulgar language by rote, and have paid sufficient attention to it to per- ceive, that the dictionary of Dr Ruopes is a work of very great merit, though certainly susceptible both of additions and emendations. A new edition of it, would be a work of great utility, if our relations with Cochin-China should ever become more intimate or important: a circumstance by no means unlikely, from the formidable aspect which that kingdom has lately assumed among the more easterly naticns. ‘Fhe principal defect of the work is, its representing, very imperfectly, the 4am pronunciation; a defect unfortunately very difficult to be remedied, as the Anam language contains many sounds which corres- pond very little to those of any European language, and respecting which a grammarian might be temp- ted to say, with the devout missionary Dipacus CoLtavo, when treating of the pronunciation of a Japanese \etter, “ guando in aliquo vocabulo fuerit, (quod est valde frequens) orare debet discipulus, Deum, ut ei venas pronuntiationis aperiat.’—( Prolog. in arte Grammat. Japonic. ling. p. 4.) De Ruopes also published at Rome, in 1652, a catechism, for the use of his Anam converts, in dram and Latin. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 263 From the vicinity of the Chinese to the Anam na- tion, and the intimate connection that has at different periods subsisted between their countries, the Chinese character, as well as literature, has been introduced into both Tonkin and Cochin-China. Chinese literature is greatly affected by all who pretend to distinction in learning, in these countries; and in the language of Anam, the Chinese characters are denominated Chiw. But besides this, another species of character is in general use, and commonly employed in matters of business and private affairs, which is constructed on a principie entirely different; and though its letters are numerous, they bear no proportion to the Chinese signs, and, according to Dre Ruopes, they are unfftelligible to the Chinese and those who are unacquainted with the Anam language. ‘These cha- racters, in the Anam language, are termed Ném. What relation they bear to the Bai characters I have ‘not been able to determine accurately, though I sus- pect they will be found to be connected with that, or the T’hay alphabet. It is perfectly certain, how- - ever, that they have no connection with the proper Chinese character. I have been informed, by an intelligent Chinese, who had resided some time in both Stam and Cochin-China, that the proper Anam character greatly resembles that of the Scamese. The missionary Borri says, that the Cochin-Chinese, in harangues, letters, memorials, petitions, ‘and such things as do not belong to printed books, for these, of necessity, must be in Chinese characters,” generally employ about three theusand characters, which they find sufficient to express their meaning. If the compound characters, and contractions of the Siamese, be included in their alphabet, they would nearly amount to this number. . S 4 264 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE The Chinese character forms, in reality, an abstract, philosophical language, such as has long been the theme of speculation in Europe, though it is generally regarded as an absurd and impossible reverie. It 1s not indicative of sounds, but of real objects and ideas; and consequently it is read and understood by at least twenty different nations, who would scarcely understand a word of one another’s oral language, and would all use different words to express the same meaning. The only Huropean characters, analogous to the Chinese symbolical written lan- guage, are our numeral, algebraical; astronomical, and chemical signs, which are constructed’ on the same abstract principles. ‘The Chinese, however, sometimes contrive to make these singular characters perform a double office, and express sounds, as well as ideas; as when they write down Lnglhsh names, which another person can pronounce with great ac- curacy. As. far as I have been able to learn, how- ever, this can only be accomplished by persons who use the same spoken language. : The Anam language is simple, original, and mono- syllabic. -What relations it may possibly bear to some of the spoken monosyllabic languages of China, to the JJan-chew Tartar, to the Korean, Formosan, Likyu, or rather Riu-kiu languages, I cannot possibly pretend to determine; but it certainly has- very little affinity to the AZandarin or court language of China, which is properly termed Khunn; to the Kéng-ting, or language of Canton ; to the copious polysyllabic and inflected Japanese; or to any of the other Indo-Chinese languages. It is certainly possible to find several Anam voca- bles which coincide both in sound and signification OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 265 with words in the Khunn or Mandarin-Chinese, and also in the Kéng-téng, as well as others, which closely resemble T°hay or Siamese vocables-; but nevertheless, all the essential parts of the 4xam lan- guage are original and unconnected with any of the other monosyllabic languages, of which I have any knowledge. Barrow, an authority of some weight, in his “Voyage to Cochin-China,” seems to consider the Anam as a derivative from the Chinese, “ because it is constructed on the same principle.” (p. 301.) “The spoken language,” he observes, “ has under- gone a very considerable change, which is the less surprising, as the inhabitants of the northern and southern provinces of China, are unintelligible to each other; but though it has been altered, it does not appear to have received any improvement, neither from additions of their own, nor from the introduc- tion of foreign words.” (p. 322.) The precise meaning of this sentence, I confess I do not under- stand. The mass of the Anam language, whether nouns, verbs, or significant particles, is totally dif- ferent from that spoken Chinese language with which he has compared it; and he himself admits, ‘“ That is is so much changed from the original, as to be nearly, if not wholly, unintelligible to a Chinese.” The Anam nation employ several sounds and letters . which are incapable of being pronounced by a Chinese, such as 6, d, andr. ‘The particles which form the cement, or construction of the language, -are also different; and in addition to all these, the Anam language has a peculiar character of its own, which is not understood by the Chinese. It is diffi- cult, after this, to conceive what similarity exists between the Chinese and dnam, unless that they are both monosyllabic languages, and that the signifi- cation of terms is regulated, in a great measure, by ©°66 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE their accentuation. But though the same mono- syllables occur, and though they are also accented frequently in a similar manner, yet even in this case, the signification of these monosyllables 1s, for the most part, totally different. In the syntax or con- struction of the two languages, there 1s also a very great difference, for in almost all the instances in which the Barma language differs in construction from the Malayu, Thay, and Anam, the Chinese aerees with the Barma, and differs from the three others. Thus, when two substantives follow each other, in Chinese and Barma, the first is in the gen- itive or oblique case; whereas, in Malayu, Thay, and Anam, the second is in the oblique case. Some- times, too, the Chinese order of arrangement differs equally from them all. Thus, in Chinese, the adjec- tive generally precedes the substantive, whereas it follows it in MJalayu, Barma, Thay, and Anam. It must be observed, however, that when the term Chinese is applied to the spoken languages of China, it is used in a very wide signification, unless some particular provinee be specified. The Chinese collo- quial languages appear to be more numerous than the dndo-Chinese tongues, and equally unconnected with each other. Barrow himself declares, that scarcely. two provinces in China have the same oral language. (Travels in China, p. 244.) While the nature of the _ Chinese character is still so imperfectly understood, it is not surprizing that the investigation of the spoken languages of China has been totally neglected. In the course of some.enquiries that I made among the Chinese of Penang, 1 tound that four or five lan- guages were current among them, which were totally distinct frem each other, and the names of several others were mentioned. I was informed that the principal Chinese languages were ten in number; but OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 267 I have found that considerable variety occurred in the enumeration of their names, and suspect that they are considerably more numerous, in reality. The following is one of the lists I received of these ten languages; but I have since been informed that it relates only to those which are spoken in the southern and western provinces. 1. Kéng, 6. Lui, 2. Way, 7. Limm, 3. Nam, 8. Khunn, 4, Chéw, 9. Siw, 5. Séw, ~ 10. Kunng. Of these, as has been stated, the first is represented as the language of Canton, and the eighth as the Mandarin \anguage, or that which prevails in Pekin. To this list may be added the following : 11. Hyong-san, 14, Pan-ngi, 12. Sun-tukk, 15. Tong-khin, 13, Nam-hdi, 16. Fo-khin, The last of these is denominated Chin-chew by the Chinese of Macao; but the language speken in Macao itself, is the Hyong-San. "This enumeration, however, is extremely imperfect; nor have I been able to determine which of them are to be accounted original languages, and which dialects. Neither, without particular investigation, is it possible to ascertain, whether the 4nam language may not be included in this enumeration, though I am rather inclined to the contrary opinion. The Anam language has neither genders, numbers, nor cases ; moods, tenses, nor conjugations ; all these are supplied by the use of particles and the juxta- position of words, as in the other monosyliabic lan- guages. The same word has often the signification 268 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE of both a noun and a verb, and its particular use, in such a case, is to be determined by the context, and the collocation of words in the sentence: The principles ‘of collocation in sentences. are’ equally simple as in the other monosyllabic languages. The adjective generally follows the substantive, as in Malayu, Barma, and T’hay ; but when two substan-: tives come together, the last of them is in the oblique case, as in Afdlayu and T’hay, but contrary to the Barma order of arrangement. Thus, the phrase “the master of the house,” is, in the Anam language chia nya; but nya chia signifies the house of the master. In Malayu, these two phrases are rendered by tuan ruma, and ruma tuan ; and in T’hay, by chan run, rin chan; but the Barma follows a different order, and renders them by in-sak’héng, sakhéng-in, where iz signifies house, and sak’héng, master. ‘The substantive verb is often omitted, as being reckoned inherent in adjectives, especially when preceded by the demonstrative pronouns. ‘Thus, ni nay kaw, this mountain high, i. e. is high, the assertion being implied. The nominative precedes the verb, the preposition the word which it presides over, the ad- verbadheres tothe word which it modifies, the relative is wanting altogether, copulative conjunctions are generally omitted, and the peculiar modes of ex- pression in the Anam idiom are chiefly such as result from the manners and habits of the people. The moods and tenses of verbs are formed by significant particles as in the other monosyllabic languages. As the Anam nation are equally formal and ceremo- nious as the Chinese, in their phrases of urbanity, and equally accurate in marking, with a minute and tedious precision, the degrees of respect and honour due. to every person, inthe several relations of stranger, acquaintance, neighbour, relation, parent, magistrate, and all the several degrees of magistracy OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 269 and office ; a great deal of the idiom of the language consists in the different modes of expressing the respective relations subsisting between the speaker and the person addressed: hence originates the number of personal pronouns, expressive of these relations, as well as numerous circumlocutory forms ef expression; the genius of both the Anam and the Chinese language requiring, that as often as possible, appellative nouns, and names of office, dignity, relationship, or consanguinity, should be substituted instead of the simple personal pronouns. ‘Thus, a husband addressing ‘his wife, and using the pronoun I, instead of saying tamu, ta; or gua, any of which has the signification of the simple pronoun J, ought to say anh, which signifies elder brother ; and his wife, . on the other hand, ought either to denominate her- self t62, handmaid, or éng, younger sister ; a woman, in like manner, addressing herself kindly to another, who is either younger in years, or inferior in rank, ought always to denominate herself elder sister; a husband addressing his wife, in polite terms, ought always to. term her younger sister; and, im general, speaking to a young woman, she should use the same expression, but an old woman he ought to term bau or aunt. A lover, addressing his mistress, terms her younger sister, while she, in return, terms him elder brother. A son, addressing his father, ought not even to term him cha, futher ; but anh, father's elder brother ; chu, father’s younger brother, or cau, mother’s brother: in a similar manner, addressing his’ mother, he ought not to term her. mé,; mother; but either cé, father’s sister, or di, mother’s sister, It is easy to perceive that this minute accuracy of phra- seology must have occasioned great trouble to the catholic missionaries in rendering portions of” scrip- ture into the Azam language; accordingly we find, : iJ o70 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE that they were extremely distressed about the pro- ptiety of the terms to be used, whenever Gop the Faruer, Jesus Curist, Tue Hoty Guost, or the Vircin Mary, were to be introduced as interlo- cutors, and dismally puzzled whether the Virein ought to denominate herself, 62, handmaid, or mé, mother, 11 addressing her son Jesus Curisr; as a very trivial change of phraseology, in a language so delicate in its shades and distinctions, might have given origin to the most dangerous heresy. The accents in the Avam tongue, are of such in- _ dispensable utility, that they have been very properly termed the soul of the language, while the primary monosyllables, varied by accent, have been made to represent its body. Conversaticn is a species of chaunt, or recitative, as in the Cainese dialects, and the other monosyllabic languages, which has, at first, a very ludicrous effect to an ear unaccustomed to it. The intonation or accent of the Anam, struck me as entirely similar to Chinese, though Boxart, the catholic missionary, to whom it was familiar, pro- nounces it softer and sweeter, more harmonious and . copious in both its tones and accents. He adds, that every word expresses a variety of significations, according to the diversity of accents with which it ‘ is pronounced ; so that, to converse in it correctly, a person ought to understand the grounds of music. That he ought to have an ear of the most delicate sensibility is imdisputable; and as this can never prevail very equally in a numerous nation, this variety of accent gives rise to such diversity of dialect, that through the whole Azam region, every considerable village or district has, as it were, a different language, and are often obliged to have recourse to the written character, for communication with the districts im their vicinity. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. o7% Borni affirms, that the sacred books of the Anam mation, are termed Sék King, while those relative to civil subjects are denominated Sék Chuw. He adds, - that the first treat of the creation of the world, the nature of mind, the different classes of intelligent beings, moral and metaphysical theology; but both these classes of books seem rather to refer to Chinese literature, than to that which is pecatliarly Anam ; for Sék signifies oaly book, Chiiw is the name applied to the Chinese character, and King is the name of the books first put into the hands of the students of Chinese literature. Numerous Tru-yen or Cheritras, however, are known to exist in the Aram language, and form the subject of their dramatic representa- tions, in which the 4nam nation are not inferior to the Chinese. : The ancient code of Tonkin laws, possessed great celebrity, and was highly venerated previous to the late conquest of that country by the Cochin-Chinese. It is represented, by the ‘Missionary Le Roy, as composed in the most elevated style of Chinese, and full of uncommoh modes of expression. He also mentions, that it was printed with an Anam transla- tion, composed by an ancient Lunkin Mandarin, The Anam style is sometimes highly bold and-figa- Tative, and attains a degree of animation which is not very common among the Jndo-Chinese nations of the continent. If the French version can be de- pended on, we need only refer, in proof of this, to the manifesto issued by the usurper QUANG-TRUNG, in 1790, to quiet the minds of his subjects, alarmed at the reports of the prowess of the French auxiliaries, who aided the first efforts of the present monarch fer the recovery of his throne. “ Be not so credulous 979 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE as to listen to what they say of the Europeans. What superior ability should that race be possessed of? They have all the eyes of green serpents, and we ought only to regard them as floating corpses, cast on our shores by the seas of the north.” (Nou- welles des missions Orientales—p. 144.) The religion of the Anam nation is a modification of the Buddhist system, nearly resembling that which prevails in China. Many local and peculiar superstitions, however, are blended with it; such as the worship of the dog and tyger, to the first of which human’excrement, and to the second, human flesh | is offered. Traces of this worship are found among the mountaineers on the borders of Jndia, as well as in the proper Jndo-Chinese countries. Thus the tyger is worshipped by the Hajia tribe, in the vicinity of the Garrows or Garudas. The Quan-té, an ancient race, as the name signifies, who inhabit Kaubang or the mountaimous range which divides the dnam countries from China, regard them- selves as the original inhabitants of Zonkin and Cochin-China ; and consider the Anam as a Chinese colony. The Quan-to have a peculiar language, and write with a style, on the leaves of a plant, termed in Anam, jiwa. The J4oi and Mudng are also mountaineer tribes, who speak languages different from the dram, but it is hitherto unknown whether they are original races, or only branches of the Quan-to. The following comparative vocabulary of the Barma, T’hay, and Anam languages, with the Kong dialect of the Chinesc, will convey some idea of their mutual relations and differences.. A few Rukhéng / 4 2s _ OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 973 vayiations are also exhibited in the Barma column with the initial R. prefixed. Barma. Lalli! Gg TO Anam. Kong-Chinese: God pra yieng pra-chaw chia sunn, ?hien-chi heaven nip-ban siwan Chién Vhien the earth kam-ba pi-p’hop ‘dia thien-ha earth ‘myé R.mré-— din ‘dat ti air lé 1om pha-jy6 hang water yé R. ré nam nak, nuwok, — sdi thuy fire mi R.meing fai Jawa, héa f{66 sun ‘5 né tawan nyit, mat-bloei thai-yong, ngit moon 14 — duin nguyit, mat- ngfit blang star kyiR. kri | daw saw, tinh tin-sing sky m6 sa bloei, mun-Vhien sea . peng-lé t-lé bé, bién, hai = hoé river Whyong R. klong su ) hé kh’ron animal _ tareich-chan sat thu chhdék-l6i bird bngék nok ching chhéok-chay fish nga pla - ka ngu plant apéng ton thtw ch’haw tree , apéng gyi ton-m4i ss sang Q st, sat leaf ayéwék bai la hyep hill towng phu-khaw nui san plain lé-bieng hung ‘déw, nu phéng stone kyiowk hin ‘da sytik, lié gold _ Swé Vhong | wang kumm silver ngwé -ngtn bak ngtnn ‘ brass kyé “ vhong-k’ham ~~ thaw | vhéng iron san lék -thiet, sit = __thit tin khé ta koa _ thiek syak rice ch’han _ ké-siin gaw, lia, koem may ege a khai tlueng ch’hénn day ne | win ngay yat night nya k’hin _‘dém man evening nya-né ham ban-hom. _ya morning manék chaw sang-nyay chew nonth la din thang -yué, nguit 274 year man man woman father mother husband wife son daughter bro- ther elder a elder younger younger 4 ter friend enemy head face eye Barma. > neit ju yowk-kya , mim-ma p’haé maé léng maya « $a, sa-mi ako nyi umma nyi-ma sang-€-gyien yan-su gowng hmiek-na hmiek-chei’ch nakhaung na pajat ' Swa sha lék khye wan kyo ayé, sayé. R. aré, Saré ayo. R. aro asa swé no-yé cha sok ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE T’hay. Anam. Kong-Chineses. pi nien, nam, tué, nin —tudi khon nguwoi yun pachay ~ nam nan-yun paning naw nyu-yun, p’hé cha hi, fu : mé mé mu phawa chaw, pha law k’hung miya vw6, the law-p’ho lok pachay kon-blai chi lok paning kon-gai ngué p’hi-paciiay anh ake a. - nong pachay éng ti pi pajing chi amu . nong-paning €ng reoél , kla nghia pung-yow © satrfi nghéieh, thu tzow-yun hua tha ‘dau. thow na mat, may mat mién ta nyan, mok, % _ mat is oo, tamik mii pi hu tai ngi pak. khau, mieng, lémieng pa ‘ fan rang "nga . lin luwoi li mu tay sow tin chén khutok p’hing, thong dea, baw thu lang kat ‘pui-how nang déa phi _ kidak kot, shwang-kot ka a, no thit héwtik litit mau tiet hit nam-ndm =, suwa nin . kin an kid { kin-ndm - wdng yom stand sit sleep strike kill red green yellow white black * one two three four five six seven eight nine ten hundred thousand OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. Barma. mat-tat thaing it yeik sat-pi’ch ani acheing awa aphyu an¢k tit hnit song lé nga khyowk khuhnich shyit k6 ta ché ta ra ta Uhawng kyewin now’p khewin-now’p-do rau méng maung,meng-do su dén den-do bédu, bélu baha bédéng aliing apowhs 275 Kong- Chinese. Thay. . Anan. jan ‘duéng khi nang Ngai | cho non ngu mi ti ‘dain, ‘danh wat k’ha jiet, sat ; sat déng ‘do, tham hung k’héow shanh | jok luiang hoa ka, vang wéng khaw tlang, bak pak dam tham, ak hikk ning mot yutt song hui ni s4m teng sam si bon si ha Jang ung = hok lak lok chét bai chhat pét tang pat kaw chin kow sip tap sap roi klang pik p’han kin chin Wha toi, tau, ta, kwa ngo, nga ching-toi, moi- nga-té toi mung bai,mai,ngiiwoi ni chung-bai, moi- ni-té bai min ndé Whi, tha man arai — chiing-n6 | Whi-té,Vha-té kai ai nako — ardi nao- méya anei nao (placed af- nake _ tera word) Vhang-phé as thang-mot i ade mak . ded, nyet té T 2 #76 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE Barma. T’hay. Anam. Kong-Chinese. few cheich-cha-gulé hit, nit bé, dé, nyo tuk, shaw any, some takhyo kai kai ko-ai yow! above — athék b6n tlen shyang under awe! tai, lang chuéng ha in avhé nay, oei, tlaw li, in without pyieng nok vo, chang-ko, ngoii wai ngoai to ko, go ké cho ni, from ka, ga té | boei {zong this di-hu ni nay téko that ho-hu nun ey, no koko there ho hma tino bén-no nuné here di hma tini bén-nay koné before shyé pa tluwok sin behind. nawk thi lang fau how XIV. Pary.—The Pali language among the Indo- Chinese nations, occupies the same place which Sans- crit holds among the Hindis, or Arabic among the followers of Istam. ‘Throughout the greater part of the maritime countries which lie between Jada and China, it is the language of religion, law, litera- ture, and science, and has had an extensive in- fluence in modifying the vernacular languages of these regions, The name of this language, though commonly pronounced Bali, is 10re generally writ- ten Pali; but both forms are occasionally used. As -the origin of the word is still very obscure, it is dif- ficult to determine which is the more correct ortho- graphy. If, however, we could venture to identify the term with the Béhlika Whasha, which, in the Saurrya Dr’rpana of Viswandtha, is enumerated as one of the languages proper to be used by certain characters, in dramatic works, the latter ought to be considered as the more correct. La LouBERz, on the authority of D’Hrrgexor, has stated (Tom. I. p. 422) that the ancient Persic language was termed Pahalevi, (Pahlavi) and that the Persians do not ~ OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 277 distinguish in writing. between Pahali and Bahali. This conjecture would be confirmed by the identity of the terms Bali awl Badlika bhasha, were it to be established; for no donbt can be entertained that in Sanscrit geography, the epithet Bahlika is applied to a north © sepa t mesha zesté houeré reeoué - azra An vuzra } orothé gueoué henghAmé burezoeté peété heramn freescheté & OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 285 Sanscrit. Prakrit. Bali. Zend. they will come S2amishwanti Agamihii akamisunti aoont#ao he makes karoti karoi karoti kereté atth he is asti achi t hathi asté asai seven saptah satto sapta hapté heaven swargah saggu saged spérézé ln this specimen, the Prékrit words are selected from the Alanérama, Vritti of Buamana, and the Prakritalankeswarah of Virva’ Vin6v'HA; the Balt are taken at random from the Kumdra-Bap, Chitam- nan, and Wautamnén; and the Zend, from the voca- bularies of ANqueTin pu Perron, whose orthogra- phy, since { have uot been able to procure the ori- ginal Zend, has been preserved, however inaccurate, in preference to conjectural emendation; though I - am convinced that an orthography, more contorm- able to the origimal, would render the connection of Zend, with its cognate dialects, more apparent. Specimen of Bali from the Hatamnan. Sagee’ Lamécharupé giri-s‘ik’hara-gaté chantalikWhe vimdané dipé rat’hé-cha gamé taruvanagahané géhavat’hamhi k’héitté. | Bhumma ¢ hdyantu deva: jala-Vhala-visamé yakha-gandabba-naga tit’ hantam- -antikéy 4m munivara-vachanam sadavo mé sunantu. D’hammassa-vanakalé-ayum bhaddanta namétassa- B’hagavaté Arhatt6, s‘amima sambuddassa. | Y ¢santa-santachitta-tisarano-sarand4 éta-lokantaréva bhumm4-bhummé4- cha-déva guna- gana-guhana Phdyatd sabbakalam été 4yantu déva varakana~ kamaé mér u-rajé vasanto. Sanidsahétam munivaravachanam sétam maggam shana sabbési chakka-valési yakha déva-cha bramhano. Which may be thus restored into Sanscrit, without the radical change of a single word. Swarge’ kamécharipé giris‘ikharagaté chantarikshé vimnané dipé rashtré gTamé fay uvanagahané grihavatihi kshétré, Bhamau chéy antu déva jalast’hala-vishamé yaksha-gandharva-nigés ti’ hantam antiképam munivarachanam sad@’hayv® mé s‘rinantu. Dhermas‘ravanakal6yum b’hanyantam: namastasyaB’hagavaté Arhate- samyak sambudd’hasia, 286 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE — Yésantah s‘nta-chitta trisarana s‘aran& ihalokottaréva b’humau ab’hu- maucha, déya gunaganagrahana d’hayantah servakalam : €té ayantu déva varakanakamaé mérurajé vasantah. Santéshahétum munivaravachanam s‘ré6tum agré samagram servéshu chakravaléshu yaksha dévscha bramhanah. ; The Devas frequent Swurga, Kamarupa, the mountain tops, and at- mosphere, in their cars, and on earth, they visit the Dwipas, the fields, cities, recesses of forests, habitations, and sacred places. In imaccessi- ble places, by land or water, the Yakshas, Gand-hervas and Nagas re- side, in the vincity of waters. T.isten to me, ye devotees, while I recite the words of the Munivaras : this is the time for hearing sacred things— (the devotees reply) Say on. (the speaker proceeds) Reverence to, BHA- GAVATA ARuHATA, the all-comprehending, Those who hear, shall he- come pure of mind, and Trisara’ shall protect them both in this and other worlds: the Devas, earthly and unearthly, possessed of various qualities, constantly present themselves to their thoughts, and the, Devas who reside on AMeru, the chief of mountains, of pure gold, frequent them. In the full and perfect hearing of the words of the Munivaras, the Yakshas, Devas, and Bramhanas delight above all else. This. specimen may serve, in some degree, to ilus- trate the relation which the Bali bears to its parent Sanscrit. ‘Yhe passage is chosen at random, but con- siderable portions of Bal? have been subjected to the same process with a similar result; and I am satis- fied that it applies equally to Prakrit and Zend, though words of an origin foreign to Sanserit, may occasionally be expected to occur in all the three dialects. After having thus briefly stated the origin of both the Bali language and written character, I should, in conformity to the plan which has been followed in this rapid sketch, proceed to the illustration of its characteristic structure and grammatical peculiarities, with the relations which it bears to Prdakrit and Zend; but these, with a view of Ba/i literature, and its influence, as a learned language, on the vernacu- Jar Indo-Chinese tongues, I reserve for the subject of ‘another essay. The politeness and literary zeal of Mr. Cotreprooxe, have furnished me with ample fa- cilities of investigating the Prdkvit, in all its variety ts os ee Se) ee eel ter i OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 987 of dialects; but the paucity of my original materials, in Bali, and the total want of Mss. in Zend, have hitherto prevented me from giving the subject so full an investigation as its importance requires; but if the necessary materials can be procured, I hope to be soon able to submit to the Asiatic Society the re- sult of my enquiries. Of the Bali language, diffe- rent Késhas and Vydkaranas are known to exist ; and several of them are to be procured in Ceylon, as the Bali ‘Subdamala, Balavatara, Nigandu and Nigandu Sana. Of the Zend, various alphabets and vocabu- laries, as well as original compositions, are extant; but no set of grammatical forms, with which we are acquainted. The learned TycuseEw, in his disserta- tion “ De Cuneatis Inscriptionibus Persepolitanis,” 1798, recommends, earnestly, to the Asiatic Society, to form grammars and lexicons of the Zend and Pah- lavi; and this must ‘undoubtedly be performed if ever the subject be accurately investigated ; for as yet we are imperfectly acquainted even with the true arrangement of the Zend alphabet, though it is pro- bably the origin of the ancient Kw/ic character, if not the actual Himyaric character itself. I have at present little doubt that the character of the ancient Zend, or as it is termed, according to ANQUETIL DU Perron’s orthography, Azieanté, is derived from the Déva-nagari; for that author himself admits that the vowels coincide with the Guzeratti, and hints that in some alphabets the consonants also have a similar arrangement. Numerous circumstances likewise lead us to conjecture, that if ever the Persepolitan inscrip- tions in the Arrow character are decyphered, it will be on the principles of this alphabet. Nuizsuvr has stated, from actual observation, that the characters of these inscriptions are certainly written from left to right, like the Deva-nagari, and the alphabets de- tived from it. If this authority can be depended on, it completely sets aside every attempt to explain 258 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE them by any alphabet written from the right hand to the left. A subject, however, like the Arrow cha- racter, concerning which there are almost’as many Opinions, as authors who have engaged in the dis- cussion, can never be illustrated by mere conjec- tures, however ingenious or plausible.* * In revising the sheets of this essay, I perceive that several omissions have occurred from the number and nature of the various materials em- ployed, and the difficulty of classing them in the proper order-of ar- rangement. ‘The following additions are therefore subjoined. Te o the notices concerning }/alay compositions, the following may bé - added. 1. Asal agama Islam, or the principles of the Zslam faith. 29. Cheritra Raja Dewa Ahmud. > 3 2. Idlal agéma Islam, explana- 3 3 3 0. Cheritra Kobat Leila Indara. 1, Humsah penchuri. 2. Hikaiat segala Sésuhiinan. 3. Hikaiat Misa Tamon panji tion of the Ismalic worship. $. Idlakel fikeh, explanation of dng law of Islam. Wila Kastima. 4. Makota segala Raja. 34. Hikaiat Misa Gomitar. 5. Pasiru’l Koran. 35. Hikaiat Jarau Kolina. -6. Hafid Imam, ul Mumenin. cag Hikaiat Chahaju Langarel. 7. Hikaiat Miaraj Nabi Ma- . Silsility?) Salatin, or, Penurv- hummed. nan segala Raja. F $. Hikaiat Nabi Mahummed. 38. Hikaiat Ambon. 9. Hikaiat Nabi Musa. 39. Hikaiat Achi. 10. Hikaiat Nabi Yusuf. 40. Hikaiat Bayan. ¥1. Hikaiat deripada kajadiaiin 4\, Hikaiat Baktiyan, Mahummed. 42. Hikaiat Tana Hitum. 12. Hakam Islam. 43. Hikaiat Jowhar Manikam. 13. Hiikam Khaj. 44, Hikaiat Datu perjanga. ¢ 14. Hakam Kanun. 45. Hikaiat Dewa Raja. ~ 15. Elmu Fikeh. 46. Hikaiat Raja Bosman daz 16. Elmu Falak. Lokman. 17. Kitabu’l Faraid. 47, Hikaiat Raja Tambik baja. 18. Kitab ul Allah. ~~ 48. Hikaiat Raja Suliman. 19. Sijihu’l Huseinu’l Kashefi. 49. Hikaiat Rajah ul Ajam o 20. Samar adainu’] Islam. Azbah. , 21, Mirat al Muiminin. 50. Hikaiat Raja Kirripun. 22. Mirifat ul Islam, or Punga- = 51. Hikaiat Raja Kambdyu. nal.agama Islam. : 52. Hikaiat Raja Nila Date . 93. Perméta marifat Allah, Kawaja. 24, Reazu’| lehafi. ~ 53. Hikaiat Runga Rati. 25. Ruein parungan. 54. Hikaiat Isma Jatim. 26. Nur Mahummed. 55. Hikaiat Abdullah ibn ul 27. Cheritra deripada Suliman, - Omar. 28. Cheritra derinada al Omar. OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 289 ‘En addition to the list of Barma compositions, the follewing names of twelve popular works may be mentioned : 1. Wi bado, , 5. Nyawa, 9. Namosara Lénga, 2, Wi béng, 6. Séng-gyé, 10. Yadana sui-gyaing, 3. Padi muk, 7. Wi-miy, 11. Tong-fiché, 4. Néwa, 8. Siho namakara, 12. Yédana Rasi. The following additional notices and corrections of names refer to the list of Barma compositions given under the article BARMA, ac- cording to the respective numbers. 1. Jainda Mana Bikhu, an account of the female ascetic JAINDA MANA. 2. Nunda Jaina, the history of a Deva, also named ANUNDA. 6. Témi, the religious institutes of TEMTI. 7. Némi, Another of the ten great religious books of the Budd’hists, which are recited in the following order: 1. Témi; 2. Némi; ' 3. Janaka; : Sawan Nasyan; 5. Bhuridat ; 6. Maho sot’ha; 7. Samata; 8. Wit’hora; 9. Chanda Gingma; 10. Wesundara. Besides tsps the two following works are of great authority. The Paréik-gyi, which is the Barma Hatamndan. Pat’ham, which is the book of their mythology, revealed by Mya CHEWA-PARA. 8. Dherma pat’ha, a book on Justice. 9. Namagara, a ritual of prayers. 10. Logasara and Loganithi, Moral treatises. 14. Paramikhan, account of Samataand T’hik D’hat. 16. Bongkhan, the adventures of NEMI. iz Kado-khan, a réligious work on the expiation of crimes. 26. To-twek-khan, the same work as the Rukhéng Nga-chang bréng. 28. Anusasana, a small book for children, like the Tamul Atisudi and other compositions of Avyédr. 30. Attagat-Lénga, the Bidagat. ' 36. Hmat-chew-Bong, A System of morality. IV. An Account of the TRIGONOMETRICAL OPERATIONS in crossing the Pentnsuca of Inpra, and connecting Fort Sr. GEorGE with MANGALORE. BY CAPT. WILLIAM LAMBTON. Communicated by THE HonoraBLe WILLIAM PETRIE, Esq. Governor of Fort St. GrorGE. 8 ee GENERAL ACCOUNT. IN the year 1801 I had the honor of communicat- ing to the Asiatic Society my intention of extending a geographical survey across the peninsula of India, with a view to ascertain certain positions on the Coro- mandel and Malabar coasts, and to fix the» latitudes and longitudes of all the principal places, in the in- terior country, within the extent of the operations for connecting the two seas. My labours commenced in the Carnatic, in 1803, in measuring a small are on the meridian and on its perpendicular, an account of which has been published in the 8th Vol. of the Asiatic Researches, The triangles, from which those arcs were deduced, constitute a part of the general survey under my superintendance, now extended from sea to sea, taking in upwards of two degrees of lati- tude. A series of principal triangles has also been carried down in a meridional direction, from which has been deduced an arc of three degrees and upwards in amplitude, giving the length of the degree, on the meridian, in lat. 11° 59’ 55", equal 60494 fathoms, | and that from a great number of observations of dif- ferent fixed stars. As I expect that the detailed par- - I me —_ re TRIGONOMETRICAL OPERATIONS, &c. 291 ticulars of that are will appear before the public in anether place, it will be sufficient barely to mention it here, as being the scale from which the latitudes of places are computed.* A full account of this survey being intended for a separate publication at some future period, when more materials will be collected, I have chosen for the subject of the present paper, that part of it which I think will be the most interesting; viz. the trian- gular operations in connecting the two seas, and the method by. which the difference of longitude has been determined in my progress from east to west: and that it may be better adapted to the general reader, who, perhaps, may have ae time nor 1n- clination to enter into minute detail, I shall previ- ously state, ma concise form, the manner in which these extensive operations have been carried over the great mountains, forming the eastern and western * Tt may not be amiss to mention here, that some little irregularity had occurred at some of the stations of cbservation, occasioned no doubt by the plumb-line’s being drawn out of its vertical position ; but itis impossible to say at which of the stations this has happened, as at the three where the zenith distances were deemed the most unexcepti- onable, there is nothing, to appearance, which can be considered com- petent to produce the effect in question. One of these three is m the ceded districts, in latitude 14° and upwards. Another one is on the table land, near Bangalore, in lat. 18°, and the most southerly one is in the Coimbetoor country, in lat. 11°. The are, comprised between the stations in 11° and 13°, gives the measure of the degree 605350 fathoms; and that, comprehended between 11° and.14°, gives only 60461 fathoms ; so that there evidently has existed some cause, for deflecting the plumb- line, at one or both of these northern stations. I have, for the present, taken the mean result of the two cases, re- ducing them to the game latitude, 11° 59’ 55”, which is 60494 fa- thoms. This measure, used with all the recent measurements made in England, France, and at the polar circle, will give the mean ellipticity of the earth sh nearly, and therefore the polar, to the equatorial dia- meter, will be in the ratio of i to 1.003125 ney: U 2 \¢ 202 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL ghauts, and through the whole extent from Fort S¢. George to Mangalore, being a distance of three hun- dred and sixty two miles and upwards, on the parallel of the meau latitude between these two places. In the triangles of 1803, a great distance was deter- mined between Carangooly and Carnatighur, at which stations pole-star observations were made for deter- mining the difference of longitude of those two places, and it was then thought probable that others might be found in succession, nearly west from Carnatighur, so as to afford great distances for connecting the me- ridian lines; but it was afterwards discovered that Kylasghur was preferable, and it was accordingly chosen for continuing those distances to the west- ward, that between Carangooly and Carnatighur, as’ already determined in 1803, remaining the first. Kylasghur was laid down from the side Carnati- ghur and Hanandamulla, being given in the 39th tri- angle, and the side Hanandamulla and Poonauk of the 21st triangle, was the base for finding the dis- tance of Poonauk from Pilloor hill. From this last, and from the side Kylasghur and Hanandamulla, each as a base, the side Kylasghur and Pilloor hill has been obtained as a mean of the two results. From this, as a base, the series has been carried on to Yer- racondah and Kylasghur, depending on the measured line near St. Thomas's Mount; the particulars of which have already been given in the 8th Vol. of the Researches. The base near Bangalore (an account of which is given in Art. 2) is then had recourse to, for bringing out the same distance, and it will appear, in the ar- rangement of the triangles depending on that base, Tt ee RY on OPERATIONS IN ‘THE° PENINSULA. 293 that all the errors are intended to be combined in the distance between Rymandroog and Yerracondah. From that the triangles are carried eastward, and the ‘side Yerracondah- and Kylasghur again brought out, differing from the former two feet, which will show, by proportioning the said side to the length of the new base, that had the triangles been carried on, and that base computed therefrom, it would have ditfered from the measurement 3-5 inches. The distance, therefore, between Kylasghur and Yerracondah, is the second great distance for connecting the meridian lines. The third of these distances is that between Yer racondah and Savendroog, which is had from the base Savendroog and Nundydroog to the northward, and Savendroog Deorabetta to the southward, differing 11 feet, the mean of which is made use of. The same two sides are used as bases to proceed to the westward: the stations to the northward are Devaroydroog, Bomanelly; and Mullaprnmabetia ; those to the southward are Bundhullydroog, Mysoor hill, and Mullapunnabetta ; and, from the mean of these, (the difference being 5 feet) the fourth great distance is had between Savendroog and Mullapunnabetta. Finding the three stations, comprehending the two last distances, fall very favourably with respect to each other, the positions of their meridians have been fixed, with more than ordinary care, in moving to the westward. But, as this will be more particularly treated of in giving an account of the perpendicu- lar arcs deduced therefrom, I shall proceed to state. the manner in which the triangles have been con- tinued across the great mountains that form the western ghauts. ‘ Ws . 294 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL After the observations were completed at Mulla- punnabetta i in Noy. 1804, the western monsoon being then over, and the fav quale season on the Malabar coast approaching, it became necessary that some previous knowledge ot the country should be had, as I found that my “intended direction would take me ghauts forming a curve convex to the eastward, and, in consequence, 1s at too great a distance to discover any object on the sea coast; for I had all along en- tertained a hope of finding two or three stations, on the tops of these high mountains, from which to intersect the.flag staves at Cannanore, Tellicherry, and Mangalore. For the purpose of selecting stations I had detached Lieut. Karer, one of my assistants, who after encountering many difficulties, succeeded in the choice of two, one on the top of Balr oyndroog, in the Bednore province, and the other on Koondhully, a mountain in the Koor g. The distance between them has been derived from the base, A/ullapunna- betta and Daesauneegooda ; as is also ‘the fifth great distance connecting the meridians of Mullapunnabetta and Balroyndroog.. These stations, however, being too remote from the sea, I decided on descending the ghauts, and on the distance between them as a base, a series of triangles was carried through to Mangalore, and thence down the coast to Mount Delli and Cannanore. It will no doubt be noticed, that the great extent from Bangalore to the sea coast required ‘that another base should have been measured to verify the truth of the triangular operations, and it was my intention that it should have been done, but circumstances and various avocations prevented it, till the season became so far advanced that ev ery other object would have been lost. I had to fix the meridian at Balroyndroog, “across the Bullum district, which is a part of the~ OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA, 295 and to observe zenith distances at Paughur, the intended northern extremity of my meridian arc; and, by the time I arrived at the latter place, it was the end of April, and very shortly after that the mon- soon set in. 1 had, however, laid the foundation for a southern series of triangles, to be carried through the Koorg to Mount Delli, which was rendered prac- ticable by the assistance afforded me by the Koorg Rajah, to whose liberal aid I am indebted for the successful means I had in carrying the triangles over these stupendous mountains. Several beacons had been erected on commanding situations pointed out by me, previous to my descending the ghauts, some of which were distinctly seen from every part of the coast, and one of them (Taddiandamole) being visited as a Station, the season following, I was enabled thereby to intersect the flag staves at Cannanore and Lellicherry, and also a signal flag on my former sta- tion on Mount Delli. This branch of triangles was carried on in the beginning of 1806, and commenced from Mullapunnabetta and Mysoor hill, and thence to Bettatipoor,Soobramanee hill, Taddiandamole, Kundudda- kamuully, Mount Delli, and Baekul, From the distance between Zaddiandamole and Mount Delli, Cannanore, and Tellicherry, have been laiddown; and upon the dis- tance between Baehkul and Kunduddakamully, a branch of triangles has been carried up for finding the distance from Bullamully to Kunnoor hill, which was also deter- mined by the northern: series,and there is a difference of 3% feet. I have been more particular in giving an account of this southern series, because the ‘object was to do away any doubt that might exist, as to the accuracy of the northern one, from the want of a base on the Malabar coast; and I think,-So far as regards nautical purposes, no error, of any importance, can exist. It will, howev er, be necessary that a base U4 296 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL line be measured near AMangolore, from which al} these distances, near the sea, should be derived anew, when a more minute survey of the coast is made. As the situation of the places on the Malabar coast, and their relative positions, with respect to the observatory at Madras, and other places on the’ coast of Coromandel, constitute a most important part of this survey, I have left nothing undone, in that re- spect, to give full and entire satisfaction. But the great accuracy required, in these low latitudes, in as- certaining the length of a degree of longitude, has called forth more than ordinary attention; and I have reason to hope, from the many favourable and concurring circumstances, that my endeavours have been rewarded with success. The three stations best situated for determining the length of an arc, per- pendicular to the meridian, are Yerracondah, Saven- droog, and Mullapunnabetta ; their respective distances from each other being nearly 67 miles; and lying in a direction very nearly east and west, the spheriodical corrections for the angles are trifling. All the other great stations have therefore been used for connecting the meridian lines, their latitudes and longitudes be- ing computed spherically by using the oblique ares, as obtained on the elliptical hypothesis, the perpen- dicular degrees having been found equal to 60748 fathoms, and the meridional degree 60498 fathoms, in latitude 12° 55’ 10’, which is the latitude of Saven- droog, as had by referring to the latitude of Deda- goontah, the great station of observation, (Art. 8) for fixing the point of departure. The scale of 60748 fathoms, for the length of the degree perpendicular to the meridian, in lat. 12° 55 10%, is considerably different from what was formerly obtained from the observations made at Carangooly » OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSUBA. 297 and Carnatighur, and reduced to the same latitude; but this is not to be wondered at, considering under what great disadvantages they were made, and the extreme accuracy required i in making them: and it may be further remarked, that Carnatighur is by no means an eligible station, on account of the great mass of mountains on the west, and the low sandy plain to the east, which comes to the foot of the mountain. Such an inequality of matter must donbt- less produce a great lateral attraction, and sensibly affect the instrument. The station on Balroyndroog, on the top of the western ghauts, has been laid aside on a similar account. The relative positions of Savendroog, Mullapunnabete ta, and Yerracondah, having been fixed with great accu- racy, the connection with the observator yat Y Madras is effected, by working back to Carangooly, by means of the oblique ares, (4 Art, 15) and then using the northing and easting, and computing spherically, ‘by converting the easting into an arcat right angles to the meridian of Carangooly, and passing through ‘the observatory ; and also using the co-latitude of the point of intersection of the said arc and meridian. From this computation, the latitude of the stone pedestal in the centre of the ob- seryatory is had equal 13° 48'7". ‘The position of the flag-statt at Mangalore, is deduced from the meridian of Balroyndroog, “by using the southing and westing, in a similar manner as at Car angooly, W with respect to the observatory. It is thence. found to be im lat. 12° 51’ 38” N. and 24’ 50° W. from the meridian of Bale on wear By summing up the respective difie- rencés of longitude, we shall have 5° 23’ 23” for. the longitude of Mangalor e west from the Asser alah vy; to which add 2’ 29 , the easting of the chur¢h ste eple i in 298 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL Fort St. George, we get 5° 27 45° for the difference of longitude sien “the steeple in ort St. George and the flag-staff at Mangalore. The meridians of Carangooly and Balroyndroog are also used for fixing the latitudes and longitudes of other places on the two coasts, as will be seen in the detaiied account (Art. 15); so that by having the positions of a few places accurately laid, the general form of the peninsula may be determined, and a foun- dation laid for carrymg on more minute surveys, both along the coasts, and in the interior. I have given here the mode of computing the positions of the most remarkable places on the coasts, and of the great stations connecting the meridian lines. But from these different meridians, the latitudes and longi- tudes of other places are fixed by using the eastings and westings, and the northing and southing from the great stations, and computing spherically; so that the whole together amount to near six hundred. I have subjoined to this paper an alphabetical list, which includes the most remarkable places within the extent of the survey; and I have also added a table, giving the perpendicular height of all the great sta- tions above the level of tlhe sea, and the ultimate comparisons, of the height of a station on the beach, near Mangalore, as hac by computing from this coast, and by measuring from the low water mark on the other, where there appears an error only of 8,5, feet. This table also contaius the terrestrial refractions. It will be unnecessary to say more here, there be- ing sufficient, by referring to the plan of the triangles, io convey a general idea, and the adjoiming detail wili furnish “all the stelle for a more critical eX~ GENERAL PLAN Or THE TRIANCLES. Hom 1-10-41, 8 Madras 1 1°10 ~30", 7 ValX Plate 4. o* 21} 27", 8 Observatory wi GURRUDDAN D¢ URREA BAHADER GHUR i ‘> KARKUL A BALROYN | Daesauneegooda 5. pe WT eenlnad Bornanelly Va Rungaswany H & BP MANGALORE. KOOMLAR\ ° reniacbtael \ $ \ BAEKUL © Veer Rajenderpet H. © Poodacherrum H. Mla great Statue HNAGMUNGALUM By o MaILcoTTaH H > 4 y iS SERIS APATAM P. \ peaLray ILLY oor H&S" m™ q : a £ | Meridian Meridian COIM BET O Kimbletarine A... 9 SATTIMUNGALUM.....1- | Woorachnulla | Et ERODE NuUNDY D¢ a, Re é / \ Bodeenudla JS Patticondat—O—f2—— ac : _ (qq VENKETT XGHERRY NAGGERRY Pilloor Id & S* Nose QPaudre 5”! aes |p Allicoor, H & S? aS CARAMUNGLE © Ponnapferulla Meridian wt on VANTAN seal TRINOMALLY H. Comenelloor li HURROOR fd HS ! | o/ ALLAMPARVA jo] CAVERYPOORUM Panianula ° Oo R mete} OSANKERRY DE O BHAVANY P. ony ICHERRY i ! 5 ‘| i the RIE Us Meridian. fol LES OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 299 amination of the subject. The work is now grown toa magnitude far exceeding what was first proposed, and will, I hope, be adopted, as a foundation fora more finished superstructure, in times to come. The task has been an interesting one, and by no means arduons. reed from restriction of every kind, and permitted to act under the most liberal conditions, I have been enabled to obviate every difficulty ; which otherwise must have embarrassed my exertions, and defeated the ultimate objects of my labours. “SECTION. I. Series of triangles taken up at Hanandamulla aud Pilloor Hill, and carried to the base near Bangalore. I. ANGLES. At Hanandamulla. Between ' And Kylasghur +-+--+-+-++Pilloor Hill «..++-98? 15’ 34.6 "¢ 31.6 > $3”.6 34.5 “ At Pilloor Hill. Kylasghur +.-..+--.Hanandamulla -+-+42 59 9.25 5.8 8 8.95 Patlicondah «-2+++50 13 25.7 96.32 20.95: Gr aren Bodeemulla --++++50-36 20.75) .. ~ 21.4 t 21.07 SSE At Kylasghur, Referring flag, »».+.+-Patticondah, »--«-..53 2 34 } 33.62 33.81 Yerracoudali -- +--+ §9 17 57-10 | 56. f 57.61 59.66 ‘ 300 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Kylasghur, continued. Between And Referring flag, «+++ »~Bodeemulla «--+++2° 15 44” 44.25 44 43”.9 A2.25% ~ 40 Pilloor Hill +++++:33 9 56.5 54 53.25 53.12 aaa 0 54.25 Patticondah«-+++++53 2 33.81 Yerracondah:++++-89 17 57.61 54.15 Patticondah -+---+++-Yerracondah --+++-36 15 23.80 Referring flag -+++-+Paiticondah ++++--53 2 33.81 Bodeemulla «+-+++ 2 15 42.9 Patticondah ----+--+-+Bodeemulla -+++++50 46 50.91 Referring flag --+----Bodeemulla «+++++ 2 15 42.9 Pilloor Hill -++++-33 9 54.15 Bodeemulla --+-+++-+-Pilloor Hill -+++++35 25 37.05 Referring flag -++++-Pilloor Hill -+++++33 9 54.15 Patticondah --+-+-- SP 2 33.60 Pilloor Hill .-++.+-++Patticondah ----+-86 12 27.96 Referring Lamp: - Pole-star’s W. elongation, 3 28 57 : 52.4 55-25 53.5 At Bodeemulla. Kylasghur -+-++++++Patticondah, --++++85 23 a : 40.2 Pilloor Hill ---+--93 58 8.3 5 spy BS 7-15 > 6.45 7.4 4,25 | At Patticondah. -Rymandroog ---+-- Yerracondah++++++56 22 19.75 t 20.37 , Q. OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA, 301 At Patticondah, continued. Between And Yerracondah-+++++++Kylasghur,++++++101°21' 487.45 _ 49 .1 Kylasghur++++++++++Bodeemulla +++» 43 49 34.8 48".77 34 .95 > 36.2 ———— At Yerracondah. Referring flag -+++++Rymandroog ++++ 35 51 24.85 : 24.85 > 26.57 Tirtapully Hill «+ 73 22 43 .25) Rymandroog «+++-+-+Patticondah +--+ 78 25 51.85 - 52.905 > 51.06 Referring flag «+++«+Kylasghur> +++++»84 57 10. Re Patticondah -#++ 42 34 24.5 = QA 4 Savendroog ++++++++Nundydroog «+++ 37 46 58 .22 $02 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Yerracondah, contimued. Between And Ry mandroog:+++++++Deorabetta ++++++ 52° 19' 15 1 ov care 5: 16. Referring flag -++--++Savendroog ++++--94 16 15. Ankissgherry «+++145 13 21. 23 .5 18 .5 20. 23 a Rymandroog ++++35 51 26.57 Tirtapully Hill----73 22 45 .90 Rymandroog ++-++-+Tirtapully Hill----37 S1 19.33 Referring flag -+++-+Palticondah ------ 42 34 23.51 Kylasghur ++++++34 57 12.48 Patticondah »+++++++Kylasghur +++-++42 22 48 .OF Referring flag --++-+Tirtapully «+++-+ 73 22 45 .90 Ankissgherry -+++143 13 21.35 Tirtapully.-++++++++Ankissgherry -+++ 69 50 35 .45 Rymandroog «++-+-+-Deorabetta -----+82 19 15.21 Tirtapully Hill---+37 31 19.33 —— Deorabetta -+++-++++Tirtapully Hill----44 47 55.88 Referring flag ---++-Rymandroog +++-35 51 26.57 Savendroog -+++++24 16 14.97 Rymandroog +«-+---Savendroog «+++++ +58 24 48 .4 Deorabetta +--+++--S82 19 15.25 Savendroog -+-++-++-Deorabetta ++++++23 54 26.81 Referring flag: + - -Pole-star’s W. elongation, 9 3 6.5 3.85 - 3 14.97 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 303 At Yerraconduh, continued. Between And Referring flag - +++ Pole-star’s W. elongation: + 9° 3’ 5”.5 We A. Bi: 4,25 At Rymandroog. Between And Yerracondah -++-+-+-Patticondah «-+.+-45°11' 59.15 51 at ata Tixtapully Hill --++49 22 56.85 30.05 Nundydroog +-++121 27 28 Yerracondah ---+-++Tirtapully Hill -- 49 2 Nundydroog --+-121 2 GW CO & Tirtapully Hill----+-Nundydroog +++» 72 4 35.47 ————E ee At Tir tapully Hill. Nundydroog- seeeee+Rymandroog «+++51 31 46.65 44.03 Deorabetta .-.+++++Yerracondah +++ *97 51 18.75 Yerracondah --+++¢Ankissgherry «+++ 38 16 9.9 9.25 Rymandroog --++-+-Yerracondah +++-93 5 56. Nundydroog-+-+++-+Donnairgottah ++++95 53 43. 46.94 Mantapum Station - Sonata eeee3l 25 15.032 i615. 17 .27 Muntapum Centre - -Bonnairgottah + eoeeSl 25 7. #4 8.95 9.95 \ 7 804 | ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Tirtapully Hill, continued. Between And ' Savendroog ++++++++Allasoor Hill ++++36°33 e 7 t 30’.37 Deorabetta -++++++> Savendroog +++++- 46 42 26.25 94.5 Ianto < Deorabetta «+-+ee+. Yerracondah:+-+.-- 97 51 18.04 Ankissgherry ++++++ Yerracondah -+--38 16 9.25 Ankissgherry _++++++Deorabetta ++++++59 35 8.79 —— At Nundydroog. Rymandroog +++++-Tirtapully Hill----56 23 42.75 43 .75 Savendroog -++++++ -Yerracondah ++-++89 55 29.25 Savendroog +--+ +++ +Tirtapully Hill ---»71 26 37 if Savendroog ++++++++Devaroydroog ++++49 53 51 .42 53.46 | er At Bonnairgottah. S. end of the Base -»Muntapum Station .38 46 30.02) 5, 32.285 3b15 Muntapum Station --Tirtapully Hill--++51 7 53.25 f 53.6 54.62 Tirtapully Hill. ++++ »Muntapum Centre.51 5 56.65 Muntapum Centre --Savendroog -+-+++70 52 25.06 i 93.91 Savendroog »+++++++Allasoor Hill ++++75 50 27 a = _- OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 305 At Bonnairgottah, continued. Between And Dodagoontah Station Savendroog +++ 83°20 14.75 Wise 16 Savendroog -++++-+. Tirtapully Hill --121 58 22 21. ee RG At the Muntapum Centre. Bonnairgottah ++++-- Tirtapully Hill,-- 97 28 55. 54 55 90’. Savendroog «+++ 69 50 45 .¢ 47 Tirtapully Hill --++--Savendroog -++-167 19 40 43. ae At the Muntapum Station. N. end of the Base, --S.end of the Base 56 56 40 .62 S$. end of the Base, --Bonnairgottah ++. 35 3 50. Bonnairgottah ---+-+--Tirtapully Hill -- 97 26 51 At the S. End of the Base. N. end of the Base --Muntapum Station 33 43 60. 58. 61. 60. Dodagoontah Station 17 38 47. AS. AS .7 47. Muntapum Station --Bonnairgottah +-106 9-36. 39°. 36. 38. X “I ho Lon = ; 16”.17 ' 22.17 47.04 306 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At the N. End of the Base. Between And S. end of the Base--++Muntapum Station 89° 19’ 21”.5 20.75 Dodagoontah Station 67 41 24.5 22.58 + At Deorabetta. Savendroog ++++++++ Tirtapully Hill -- 79 40 54 52.9 Bonnairgottah «+++ ++ Ankissgherry++-+ 98 54 18 5 5 Savendroog -++++++: Bonnairgottah ++ 32 56 38 .25 22 Savendroog os i -Bonnairgottah + 32 56 37.17 Tirtapully Hill -- 79 40 52.9 i Bonnairgottah ------ Tirtapully Hill -- 46 44 15 .73 Aukissgherry --+-+ 98 54 20 Tirtapully Hill --.-++Ankissgherry -++- 52°10 04.27 Tl. MeEAsuREMENT of the Base Line near Ban- galore. This base was executed by Lieut. Warren, of H. M: 33d Regt. then one of my assistants ; ‘and was intended as a datum for extendmg the triangles to the Malabar coast: and also as a base of verifica- tion to the triangular measurement brought from the base near Madras; and it appeared that, by continuing the computations the whole distance, and making this base one of the sides of the last triangle, the com- putation exceeded the measurement only 335 inches. OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 307 No further account need therefore be given of the manner of performing this very important and deli- cate part of the work, than that in addition to the apparatus used in the former measurement near St. Thomas's Mount, there was a transit telescope, in all respects similar to that mentioned in the account of the trigonometrical survey of ngland for fixing objects in the alignement, and taking the elevations and depressions at the same time. The manner of using it was as follows : When the instrument was placed at a sufficient distance behind the commencement of an hypo- thenuse, so as to see distinctly the mark placed on: ~ the head of the drawing post, and the elevation or depression of the hypothenuse finally determined, the instrument being covered from the sun by a small cloth pandal, remained in that position, til four or sometimes five chains were measured. Previous to removing it, a small hooped picket was placed, by signal from the person at the transit, at a proper dis- tance behind the termination of the last chain. ~ In fixing the spot for this little picket, a common rod, with a sharp point was used, and the telescope of the transit depressed to the place on the ground intended to be marked. After the spot was fixed on, and the picket driven down, the instrument was removed, and placed in the alignement, with the plummet hanging over the centre of the little picket, and then. anew hypothenuse was laid out, or the former:one continued. When the hypothenuse was terminated, a register picket was driven into the ground, opposite to the arrow of the chain, and in such a manner, that when the brass head was fixed thereon, the slide might Moe “ { 308 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL be parallel to the chain, and very near it. A piece of wood was contrived to be placed upon the brass head, and fixed by a screw, which pressed against the end of the slider, so that when that slider was moved by its own screw, the wood, thus attached, moved with it, in the direction of the alignement, as nearly as the eye could judge. On the top of this wood was placed a T, having also a motion in the same direction with the brass slider, to expedite the operation; and on ‘the top of this T, a brass ruler, in length about six inches, was placed, having a sliding motion at right angles to the other; and in the middle of the pro- jecting end, was a mark from which the plummet was suspended, and by the two motions, at right angles to each other, the plumb line was easily brought to coincide with the arrow terminating the hypothe- neuse. A like operation was gone through with the commencement of the next hypothenuse, and the arrow brought to coincide with the same plumb line. Here the distance of each arrow above or below the brass rule was noticed as in the former measurement. If, after the removal of the transit, the same hypo- thenuse was continued, the register picket, at the end of the chain, was lett standing; and when the instru- ment was brought into the alignement with the plummet over the mark, nothing was required but to place the telescope at the former elevation or depres- sion, and move the cross vane which is applied to the heads of the pickets and stands, till the appro- priate mark coincided with the horizontal wire in the focus of the eye glass. OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 209 ExPERIMENTS, made for comparing the CHAINS, previous to the MEASUREMENT. Month. Thermometers. Comparisons. Jean of 5 Thermome- ters. 1804. 1 | Divisions. § The old chain exceed- May a 72.6 2 ed the new one by 17.5 A. M. At eT © aie oie eich ea atins 16.00 73.8 Joreees bcec cece secces 15.75. 73.6 [een eeecccenccscesveee 16.00 73.0 |e eres © Ge veveye eels exe ehaye 15.5 78D | ole vmigst iia tara qos means 14.75° 75 |< 002 0ne ge sls ome we “09 14:75 75.6 SS eceeceresiveee 15.00 77-2 |erees aiv'g8 te chat oho key Spel abee 14.00 Mean | 74.3 | cece teen ee neces Mean 15.47 Experiments, made for comparing the Cuains,; after the conclusion of the MEASUREMENT.» A « any o Month. Thermometers. “% & Hm +4 = 3 -~= Comparions. ey So¢ ee O07 1804. ] 2 3: 4 9 IS 2 Zacy : | Cavs ‘i Divisions. « i . ‘ominence- a ee m g 3 af Angles of ax & Perpendicular. ciel Gow nD) 2 eaic¥ Ses the last. ose| & Ss/ee eis a ess Dies L S Above £ & g E° § D® as =| Ascents. | Descents. oe oe = 2 = _ feet feet ! 300] 0° 9 27” |.00114 6.75 |71.6 200} 1 10 46.5 |.04239 8.5 |81 500; 2 00 15 |.30587 : 8.8 |88.6 400} 0 42 30 |.03056 4.94.50 |15. 2 89.9 300} 0 11 47 |.00177 1.0283 |11. 9 82.1 200; 0 16 30 |.00230| .9599 13. 9 80.8 300} 2 8 27 |.20940 11.2067 1k. 7 89.1 500; 1 1331.5 |.11437 |10.6929 10. 4.|90.8 400! 0 51 43.5 |.05428| 6.0182 5. 74 200, 0 32 31.5 |.00896 17. |88.9 400} 1 38 9 1.16300 8. 3194.2 300) 2 33 58.5 |.30087 0. 3 91.2 200) 0 54 94 |.02504 5. 5 82.2 200| 0 32 3. |.00868} 1.8645 23. & 71.8 600] 1 58 15 |.354:90 120.6344. 12. 8 84.7 600} 1 51 25.5 |.31514 {19.4439 | 8 6/9321 700| 1-26 27 |.22134|17.6012 4, 5 /91.97 500] O 38 16.5}|.03100| 5.5667 14 (89.8) <= $00} 0 6 14 |.00128 9. 2\79.6| = 400! 0 27 27° |.01276 7G TP MRS 500,113 4.5 11300 |. | 6. 2 73 E 400} 1 42 4.5|.17630] *~’ 12 86.7] 2 500) 2 26 30 |.45395{ © 21.3011| 8. 6 79.5| = Z200| 0 14 3 |.00167 0.8174 |13 7S 200! 0 36 16.5}.01113} 2.1103 3. 8 oh ; 300! 2 16 36 |.21381 |11.9174 25 94. 200} 1 47 22 |.09752| 6.2453 2. 3 |84.3 400} 1 11 43.5|.18208! 8.3450 ~|21. 2 72.4 900} 0 41 11 1.06453 110.7815 4, 9 87.6 300| 0 35 13 |.01573 11° |76.8 200! 1 1 43 |.03222 0. 5 170.8 300! 0 6 24 |.00053} 0.5585 2.75 77.6 200| 2 23 45 |.17483| 8.3606 7. 5 |87 400) 1 3 28.5|.06820] 7.3852 96. 5 87.8 800} 0 32 13 |.03312 . 122, 1 |80.2 700} 0 22 59 |.01568| 4.6799 14.37 70.7 600] 0 47 22 |.05697} 8.2668 ll 74.6 400} 0 59 35 |.06005 | 6.9325 11.55 33 400] 1 3 20 |.06788| 7.3687 ws 79 300} 0 10 00 [.00126) 0.8727 3. 6 {16.7 Descent from the termination of the) _ , base to the ground wees ssee abe, it aed 39800| | 6.63475| 307.7304 | 278.4189|514.32!389.2)83.1 North above the South extremity of the base = 39.74 feet. $18: ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At. the commencement the old chain ex- ceeded the new one 15.47 divisions of the micrometer — 0.00619 feet. Therefore 398 x 100.00619 feet will be the mea- sure In terms of the new-chain - - At the conclusion the old chain exceeded the new one 17.9 divisions, and had-there- fore increased 2.43 divisions = 000097 feet. Hence 3y8 x **? — 0.1930 feet, is the correction for the wear, winch add» - : - - 4 \ L The sum of the deductions from col. 4th is 6.63475 feet, which being increased in the ratio of 100 to 100 00619 will be 6.6351 teet, which subtract - - - Hence the apparent horizontal distance will be - - te = - = The correction for the expansion and re- duced to the standard temperature of 62° will be (83°.1—50) x0 0074— (62°—50°) X0 01237 Z 0215 feet, which add ° - 4 & Hence the corrected measure 4. the base for the temperature of 62° will be - To which add the correction for reducing all the hypothenuses to the level of the south end of the base - - - ' Which being reduced to the level of the sea, will be - 2 . 4 Feet. 39802.4636 + 0.1930 — 6.6351 39796.0215 + 3.1996 — — —_____.. - 39799.2211 4 0.0893 39799.3104 et 39793.7 . OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 315 Ill. TRIANGLES. Hanandamulla from Pilloor Hill 110381.9 id op oe OP ere uate A oe) TES = Angles for | Distance No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. e 23 a Gatenidtion: safeet: Hanandamulla ...... 98° 13’ 33’.6 |—1".8 98° 13’ 31.5 Pilloor Hill.......c00s 42 59 08 |—0.7 42 69 7 Kylasghur ae.) 58 47 22.4 |—0.6 38 47 21.5 45 ——_—_—_——_——_ et SEER 180 00 04 | 3’.1 }4-0’.9 [180 00 00 Hanandamulla {120135 Kylasghur from WalOor HU ' cccscecudesucoass cesaceecevsd|l THOGTES ] _ Hanandamulla from Kylasghur 120128 _ |Hanandamulla ...... 98 13 33.6 |—0.8 98 13 31.5 Kylasghur .....0.0..| 38 47 22.4 |—0.6 38 47 21.5 Pilloor Hill,......0..| 42 59 8 | |—0O.7 42 59 7 AG Here 2 aes ee ME ERR SUE 180 00 04 3.1} +0.9 {180 00 00 Hanandamutla sigh sssduaped sconce 1 10375.6 Pilloor Hill fo | Kylasahiur’ 6c. .s00ss0e0nses0e ececeseee ft (AO GRO . Kylasghur from Pilloor Hill 174382.3 - |Kylasghur ....... wweee| 86 12 27 .96|—3.7 | 86 12 24.95 _ }Pilloor Hill............ 50 13 26 .32/—-2.14 50 13 24.25, _ {Patticondah ........ Fp ke 43 34 11.5 r | pa Daaeae oi SA adi BEIT 2 f {180 00 00 Kylasghur .s.sseserssessesseseneevees| 1 9444:7.4 ~ Patticondah tom Pilloor Hill Se eet esscorensestaseagee 252452.9 Sl& ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—conTINuEp. Kylasghur from Pilloor Hill 174382.3 o sg o S w 5 & & a 24 Reh ae Be S Angles for Distance No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles, £ 2g & Calculation. in feet. 2 NM Kylasghur ......-c000 35° 25’ 37°.05|—0".8 35° 25 $5.5 Pilloor Hill.....:...... 50 36 21.07|—0O .7 50 36 20.5 Bodeemulla............, 93 58 6.45|—1 .7 93 58 4 8 isa Balser, IR pa ee ee PRY, 180 00 4.57 3.2 14+1°37|i180 00 00 Kylasghur .....scscssrssssescensereeeeee| 1 35085-8 Bodeemulla from Pilloot Hill v..ccccccesenchoss attessdel OME aan Kylasghur from Bodeemulla 135085.8 ~ Kylasghur see ee DO) 46, 50-91 {=P 3 50.46 48 .75 Bodeemulla............| 85 23 40.3 |—2 .2 85 23: 37 .25 Patticondah ........ | 43 49 36.2 j—1.3 43 49 $4 49 — 180 00 7.41 4.8 1+2.611180 00 00 f Kylasghur ....0.00+cessrecsservesseresee| | 94447.6 Patticondah from Bodeemullla ciscccccecoscscespecacceoss| LO) Lonbeee Kylasghur from Patticondah 19444°7.5 Kylasghur .......| 36 15 24.6 |—1.5 36 15 25 Patticondah ...... we(LOlL 21 48 .77/—4.8 101 21 45.75 Yerracondah .........) 42 22 48 .97|—1 .4 42 22 49 .25 50 {| —$________——— _—|—_—— ————— 180 00 2.34 7 .7\—5 .36/180 00 00 Kylasghur .....100+ce0scecseseeaseeresee| 2B 202200 Yerracondah from } I Pattioondah .......0...< Te eyes Angles for Distance No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. 2 PE ES "Rare ‘nt foat, St N. end of the Base} 89°19’ 20°.75|—0'.12 89° 19° 20” S. end of the Base | 33 44 0.06/—0.06 83 48 59.3 Muntapum Station | 56 56 41 .42)—0 .06 56 56 40.7 51 ——_—_ “|__| —[- ec ; 180 00. 02 .23 0’.24)+ 1".99]180 00 00 N. end of the Base ...... 126365.95 Muntapum Station from | S. end of the Base Se S. end of the base from Muntapum Station 47475.03 S. end of the Base |106 9 37 .72|—0.33 106 9 Muntapum Station} 35 3 56 .05|—0.08 35 3 Bonnairgottah ......| 38 °46 31 .15|—O 07 38 46 52 | 180 00 04 .92 ae 4+4.451180 00 00 S. end of the Base .......0.s00000(43551.7 Bonnairgottah from } Muntapum Station..........00/72811.7 Muntapum Siation from Bonnairgottah 72811.7 Muntapum Station | 97 26 53 .39|—1 .07 97 26 53.9 Bonnairgottah ......} 51 7 54.62|—0.37 51. 7 54.2 31:25 11.9 Tirtapully Hill ......| $1 25 16 .15|—0.41 1.85) +2 .31/180 00 00 53 180 00 4.16/_ Muntapum Station Livk bi cool ONE. Tirtapully Hull fom Bonnairgottah Se ae 3 16 ACCOUNT: OF ‘TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—conrTinvueEp. a eee eae Bonnairgotiah from Tirtapully Hill 138492.9 : 7 CV ECL SERS To ; TeWve gy + pylt nh oP See OLE ee ee o a = Fz ies + z P : S. = fss = Angles for Distance No.| TRIANGLES, | ‘Obsd. Angles. / 5 |] 2 | ¢\nslesfor | Distane A ja Bonnairgottah ...... 51 e 56”91|—0'4 51° °5' 56".5 Tirtapully Hill ...... 31 25. 8.96|—0.4 31 25 9 Muntapum Centre | 97 28 55 .27;,—1.1 97 28 54.5 54 -_ BMRA Lat ed 1”.9|—0.76/180 00 00 180 00 01.14 —————_— Bonnairgottah .......sccsssssevereee| 728156 Muntapum Centre rom | Tirtapully Hill .........s0ceeseeseesee| 10870501 TLL. kk ok no) DO — eS eee Muntapum Centre from Bonnairgottah 72815.6 Muntapum Centre | 69 50 46.5 |—0.6 69 50 46 Bonnairgottah ...... 70 52 23 .91}\—0.6 70 52 23.5 39 16 50.5 Savendroog Station} 39 16 50.8S|—0.5 180 00 O1 .29 1 .7;—0 .41|180 00 00 Munpatum Centre ......sese00se0e00|108661.6 Savendroog from | Bonnairgottah .......sss00eeseeeeereee4 O7968.7 With the sides Muntapum centre from Tirtapully hill 108705.1 feet, and Muntapum centre from Savendroog = 108661.6 feet, and the included angle at Muntapum — 167° 19 29’.3 the side Saven- droog from Tirtapully hill is found’ — 216038.9 teet. Again with the sides Bonnairgottah from Tirtapully hill 138492.9' feet, and Bonnairgottah from Sevendroog — 107968.7 feet, and the included angle at Bonnairgottah = 1210 58’ 19” the side Savendroog from: Tertapully hill is found — 216038.8 feet differing from the above 7; of a foot, and of which the mean is 216038.85 feet. OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. ao | — N TRIANGLES—contTINvUED. Savendroog from Tirtapully Hill 216038.85. Angles for Distance in No.| TRIANGLES. | Obsd. Angles. Cateviatian: hcé Difference. Spherical Excess | Savendroog +--+ -- 53° 36’ 47”.5 | 53°36! 45”.5 Tirtapully Hill----| 46 42 24.5 46 42 22.5 Deorabetta «++--> 79 40 52.9 : 79 40 52 56 ony 00 04.9 6’ .6| -—1".7|180 00 00 eacnunpeiae Sa eee ars 159828.8 Deorabetla from d Tirtapully Hill ------- reeeee+l176775.8 Savendroog ++---- 37 4h 43.15 +}—1.9 37 44 41.25 Tirtapully Hill ----| 70 48 41.9 |—2.4 70 48 42.5 Nundydroog-+++-+-!| 71 26 38.55| 2.4 71 26 36.25 57 180 00 036 6.7 | —3.1 |i180 00 00 Savendroog +++-++- se eee eee 0 1215296.5 r- : _ Nundydroog from Tirtapully Hill--+--+eeeeeeees 1394998 * Tirtapully Efill from Nundydrooe 139499.8, 51 31 44.03 | —1.0 51 31°43 i Grid S baie | 56° 23)-44/ PVE 1.6 56 23 42.5 f 72 4 35.47|—1.2 72 4 345 \ Didi 5s 6a SEG, Ge 58 180 00 3.5 3.15|'+.35 }180 6O 00 / Tirtapuliy Hill «+++. eeeee-|122112.3 Rymandroog from <_ Nundydroog «+++++e+++ee++/114788.1 $13 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—cONTINUED. a a Tirtapully Hill from Rymandroog 122112.3. —— ——- —: meneame — | o ) +) =} . ; 5 Se S Angles for Distance. No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. Bo og 5 Calculation. feet. ~ ay . A. |e —_ | Tirtapully Hill----| 93° 5° 51°93 1—2.13 93° 5 49" Rymandroog esee!| 40 22 54.58}—1 .04 49 22 53 Yerracondah +«++-} 37 31 19.33}—1 .03 37 . Sells 39 180 00 5 21 4’.21-- 1.011180 00 00 Tirtapully Hill «+--+. coos (15218521 Yerracondah from Rymandroog -+--- creeeee ee (2001 90.11 Tirtapully Hill from Deorahetta 176775.8. Tirtapully Hill-«---! 97 $1 i aiieaaag | 97 51 14.4 Deorabelta sees. | of 20 Sia ° . e | Vetracondah-...-. 44 47 55/83 |—1.28 | 44,47 54.5 | 1180 00 00 60 ; eli Yerracondah fom) Tirtapully Hill ++++++e+s0e 152197. Deorabetta seeoed es ceeeee Cae *, 2417529.8 Tirtapully Hill «+++! 59 35 8.79 |—1.76 Deorabetia »+++++| 62 10 4.27 |—1.67. Aukissgherry +++] . 2. 61 | ei | (Tirtapully Hill +++ - +++. -/150822.9] Ankissgherry from- a ) OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 319 TRIANGLES—coNTINURD. Tirtapully Hill from Ankissgherry 150322.7. g ies ’ 5 Ze = Angles for {Distance in No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. Z $2 E Calculation. feet. A lee} * = a aes ————— ane et Gaeta: Tirtapully Hill ----| 38°16* 9°.25| 07.9. 38° 16’ 8.25 | Aukissgherry eae 71.53 17.5 Yerracondah +--+! 69 50 35.4 {—1.2| 69 50 34.25 62 | 180 00 00 | | Tirtapully Hill --+---+-++-+- i oakaes Yerracondah from t Ankissgherry aldtahe eat sie oa teiatete | 99177.5. 3 Tirtapully Hill from Yerracondah 152196.9. | Tirtapully Hill ----| 93 5 513 |-2.13| 93 5 49 Yerracondah:---- *| 37 31 19.39 |—1.03 | 37 31 18 vmandroog eres) 49 22 54.58 —1.04 | 49 22 53 63 (180 00 05.26 haa +1.06 180 00 00 ; | | | Tirtapully Hill -++-+-+-++++-/122191.9 Rymandroog from-< Yerracondah +++eee-++-> «+» *|200214.3 The side from Tirtapully hill to Yerracondah is the mean distance found in the triangles Tirtapully hill, Deorabetta, and Yerracondah and Tirtapully hill, Ankissgherry and Yerracondah. - ad Yerracondah from Rymandroog 200214.3. F Yerracondah ----| 78 25 51.06|—3 .3 78 25 47.75 Rymandroog -++-+| 45 11 51.7 |—2 4 45.11 52 Patticondah --++-+| 56 22 20.37 |—2 .4 56 22 20.25 P |'64 1180 00 3.13 7-9 |—4.77 |180 00 00 eee eee i eee" -( Yerracondah....+.+.+e++++-+/170605.9 Patticondah from Rymandroog eeseeceseseere sess 235558.9 220 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—conTINueED. Yerracondah from Patticondah 170605.9. © k ; 5 3 Z 5 Angles for Distance No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. = z¢ = Calculation. feet. Yerracondah ........ 42° QF 4.8°.97| —1".4 42 29' 49.25 Patticondah .....000. 101 21 48.77 8 101 21 45.75 Kylasghur ssssseseeer 36 15 24.6 |—1.5 36 15 25 65 ——_—<————<—$ || | | ee 180 00 2.34 7’.7|—5'.36|180 00 00 Yerracondah ereeeeere tthe 282890.8 7! Kylasghur from Patticondali <.....:scssss Koondhully Hill ......Hannabetta wese45 31 And Mysoor Hill .s0.037 59 Daesauneegooda 150 36 Koondoor Hill ......71 37 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Mullapunnabetta, continued. ssivene97 AL’ 34".25 7 36 .38 36 .62 34. 35 .4 35 .25 32.5 $2.5 * a 34.5 35 .25 83 36 .5 33 .8 | ¥, 33 33 .87 12 10.7 AD 12.2 am t id 10.5 12 12.25 14 13 .2 14.5 12.7 i } 32 32 .75 25 .25 35 .5 32 5 24: 25 24.75 29 75 20 43 44.75 43 43 275 45 .25 46 .25 46 .75 12.58 33.6 22.94 60.65 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA, $235 At Mullapunnabetta, continued. Between And Referring flag --+++ Bolroyndroog ++++96° 36 48” > ~ 46.25 44 49.25 Ae ¢ 46'S 45.25 47°5 4.5.75 44.25 Referring Flag--+++++Bomanelly Hill --143 23 00.25 Savendroog:---+- « 97 41 34.36 Bomanelly Hill ---++Savendroog--+-++- 45 41 25.89 Referring Flag-+-+++.Mysoor Hill +--+ 37 59 12.58 Savendroog -+---- 97 41 34.36 Savendroog :+-++-+- Mysoor Hill +--+ 59 42 21.78 Referring Flag-++-++ Bomanelly Hill --143 23 00.25 Daesauneegooda 150 36 33.6 Bomanelly Hill --+-Daesauneegooda 66 00 26.15 Referring Flag- +++ - - Daesauneegooda- -150 36 $3.6 Koondoor Hil} ++ 71 57 22.94 Daesauneegooda +--+ Koondoor Hill -+ 78 59 10.66 Referring Flag++-++++ Daesauneegooda: +150 36 33.6 Koondhully Hill-. 55 38 44.68 Daesauneegooda «+++ Koondhully Hill-- 94 57 48.92 Hannabetta -+-++-+-- Koondhully Hill-- 45 $2 00.65 Hannabetta -+++++-- Daesauneegooda- . 49 25 48,27 Referring Flag-:+:-++Koondoor Hill 71 37 22.94 Koondhully Hill-- 55 38 44.68 Koondoor Hill--++--+Koondhully Hill-- 15 58 38.26 Hannabetta +++++++- Koondhully Hill-- 45 32 00.65 Hannabetta --+++++- Koondoor Hill +--+ 29 33 22.39 Referring Flag--+--++ Koondhully Hill-- 55 38 44.68 ¥ Balroyndroog++++ 96 36 46.3 Koondhuily Hill .:. -Balroyndroog +--+ 40 58 1.62 iia? Y3 396 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Mullapunnabetta, continued. Between And ___ § Pole-star’s great- Tet wee Referring Lamp ». 4 Festa Seen 170°48' 15".25 170 43 49 At Bundhully. Savendroog cereoees Deorabetta eeeoee 37 30 Aig 30’ 12 31.75 x Mysoor Hill +--+. 80 2 42.44 ern 44.19 =e At Cheetkul Hill. Savendroog «+++++++Devaroydroog-+-+134 49 45.13 44.25 44,25 A7 45.16 — a At Mysoor Hill. Referring flag--+»-+Bundhully Hill .. 55 26 46 . 45.75 i 45.22 43.9 Savendroog «+++ 108 17 44 ’ 43.75 46 45.19 AT a OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. At Muysoor Hill, continued. Between And Referring Flag++++++ Mullapunnabetta 177 47’ 26” ‘ 25.43 J Referring Flag-+++++Bundhully Hill -- 55 26 45.22 Savendroog:-++++108 17 45.19 Bundhully Hill-++-++Savendroog:+++-- 52 50 59.97 Referring Flag-+++-- Savendroog+++++- 108 17 45.19 Mullapunnabetta 177 47 26.5 Savendroog ++++---++Mullapunnabetta 73 54 48,31 i At Daesauneegooda. Mullapunnabetta+-++Bomanelly Hill -- 69 10 25. 26 Hannabetta---++- 89 54 5. 5 7 6 Koondoor Hill -- 47 3 2 Hannabetta «+++ +++» Koondoor Mill ++ 42 50 41.62 =e At Koondoorbetta. Mullapunnabetta ----Daesauneegooda-- 53 57 29 i , 32.75 31.75 Hannabetta-..--- 119 34 16.25 Balroyndroog ---+141 10 47.5 47 Koondhully Hill --- -Balroyndroog ---+75 12 19 , 15.75 Mullapunnabetta - -- - Balroyndroog -++-141 10 47.25 Hannabetta teres 119 34 16.25 Balroyndroog reeeese Hannabettas++++- 21 36 31 Y 4 39; 328 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Koondoorbetta, continued. Between Mullapunnabetta - - - - Daesauneegooda Daesauneegooda « - - - 'Mullapunnabetta - - - -Balroyndroog: +++ Koondhully Hill - +--+ Balroyndroog:- - - Mullapunnabetta - - - + Koondhully Hill Koondoorbetta-+-+++ Bettatipoor Hill+; 78 18 11.5 And Hannabetta Hannabetta - 58° 57’ 31".17 o++e119 34 16 .25 __—— «++ 65 36 45 .08 141 10 47 .25 TO LZ ile ae 143 36 55 .38 aa At Koondhully Hill. Mullapunnabetta-..--Bettatipoor Hill -. 57 53 Koondoorbetta Mullapunnabetta - - Mullapunnabetta - . Daesauneegooda - - Koondoorbetta> eeeen Balroyndroog «++ - 99 19 Bettatipoor Hill-- 78 18 --Bettatipoor Hill-- 57 53 -«Koondoorbetta -- 20 24 Stine: ~ ‘cee At Hannabetta. Koondoorbetta Balroyndroog ee i. 4132 --136 19 At Balroyndroog. Referring flag-+..++ Bullamully Hill .-169 57 Koondhully Hill.. 88 44 10.75 14 i 1208 4.41 2.37 51 as f 5275 OPERAT Between IONS IN THE PENINSULA. At Balroyndroog, continued. And ReferringLamp, Pole-star’s W. elongation 56° 46°43".5 Referring Flag+- ++ Koondhully Hill ----Bullamully Hill-- 81 12 11 -66 Koondhully Hill ---- Balroyndreog «+++ Bullanandgooda --- (soompay Hill eeewe Meejar Hill eeevvegeoe Balroyndroog ++--+-- Kunnoor Hill ----.. Bullanaudgooda «.- Kunnoor Hill -«-+-- Goompay Hill+++-- Kunnoor Hill «+... Balroyndroog ++++.++ Bullanaudgogda «++. 43 .75 43 .25 43 4A 5 44.25 43 .44 .»Koondhully Hill 88 44 52.75 Bullamully Hill - - 169 57 4.41 a Loomemnadl —— At Bullamully. Balroyndroog +--+ 57 46 30 ; 29.25 27.25 $1.5 31.75 32.75 -Kunnoor Hill ----118 21 13.5 Bullanaudgooda «- 80 53 15.75 43.12 44.37 -Goompay Hill--+- 79 17 39 i AS -Kuddapoonabetta. 89 14 44.177 41.13 39.38 Kuddapoonahetta 34 37 35.25 30.5 Mangalore «++++- 123 IE 27.75 25.5 24.5 Balroyndroog ----118 21 13.5 . Balroyndroog se++ 80 53 19.19 -_-_—_oo Bullanaudgooda «-160 45 27.31 Goompay Hill---- 79 17 49.17 -Kunnoor Hill ---. 81 97 45.14 Kuddapoonabetta 89 14 45.56 __ -Kuddapoonabetta’ 7 46 56.42 OO Bullanaudgooda -» 80 53 19.19 Goompay Hille+«++ 79 17 42.17 SE ee ee 41.56 32.87 25.92 330 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Bullamully, continued. Between And Balroyndroog -+++++Goompay Hill--++160° 11’ 1”.36 Mangalore -+++-+- 123 11 25.92 Goompay Hill-.----Mangalore --++-- 76 37 32.72 Balroyndroog -++-+>- Kunnoor Hill -++-118 21 13.5 Kunnoor Hill --+--+ Kuddapoonabetta 7 46 56.42 -++110 34 17.08 34 37 32.87 ——— - 75 56 44.21 Kuddapoonabetta -+Balroyndroog + Meejar Hill «+++ - «+ Kuddapoonabetta Balroyndroog :-- es ~ I, 5 At Ungargooda. 5 9.25 59.5 Balroyndroog «+++++Bullamully Hill -- 91 20 a Bullamully Hill -+++Meejar Hill -++-126 U1 27.5 - 28 59 12.7 13 9 6.25 Meejar Hill ---+++++- Booggargooda . en Ee At Booggargooda. Bullamully Hill Bullamully Hill .-.-Meejar Hill--+---113 Ungargooda +--+ 21 Meejar Hill+++++.«++Ungargooda 4 ++++Meejar Hill---+++113 5 40.75 43.25 44. 45.75 Ungargooda -+-+ 21 3 58 55 .o e094 9 38.58. 60".75 27.88 10.25 43.08 55,8 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 331 At Meejar Hill. Between And Bullamully Hill ++: Booggargooda «- +++ 54°37 20'.62 7 88 18’.67 7.5 Kuddapoonabetta 49 7 52 52 a 53.67 56.75 Kuddapoonabetta ++Kooliebogooda -+37 55 18.5 19.75 20 25 19.94 2) .25 Soeemecs aac At Kuddapoonabetta. Bullamully Hill ----Meejar Hill ------ 96 14 31.5 31.37 $1. 25 Kunnoor Hill +-+-48 38 44.25 ABS 46 .75 a Kooliebogooda:+-:-- Meejar Hill--++++58 24 55.25 57.75 56.62 55 ; 58 .5 Eedgah Station --86 11 35.5 30 t 32,08 30.75 At Kunnoor Hill. Bullamully Hill---- Kuddapoonabetta 123 34 21 te 91.12 : : 21 tas Vv. TRIANGLES. a ees a A ee ak, Bonnairgottah from Savendroog 107968.7 SBE obo SIAR aR si Ls SS 0S a Hla kL a a OD 5 138 5 Angles for {Distance in No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. 2g og 3 Calculation. feet. aA la : Bonnairgottah ...... 83° 20’ 16’.17|—0’.79 83° 20' 15".4 Savendroog.ecescerere 1 85. 4 53.8 |Dodagoontah Stat*. 61 34 51 29|—-0 .52 61 34 50.8 ee ee | | ee | ee ‘180 00 00 Be) 21 or eee eee eee eee ee aaa . Bonnairgottah ......++++| 70556.7 Dodagoontah Station from Savendroog wees ssesseaee 121933.2 San. |. ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—conTINUED. Savendreog: from Deorabeita 159828.8. © eS ase . B |ee S Angles for | Distance in No.| TRIANGLES. | Obsd. Angles. | 3 |S} = | Calculation. fet. : A la Savendroag ++++++| 44°41 40.93] — 44? 42! 30°.5- Deorabetta «e+e*+] O97 47 57.75 OF 47 ea2 Bundlitily ++++++1 37 30 30.12 37 30.285 67 i80 00 08.8 6”.9} +1°.91180 00 '00 Savendroog @ 4 0.6.e.0 6.0 6.8 6 ols Seles 260072 Bundhully from Deorabetta «++ cece ceccvceee ei 1 $4620.51 Savendroog from Nundydroog 215226.3. Savendroog «+++++| 50 14 6.37] —1.9 50 14 4.3 Nundydroog-+++++} 49 53 53.48] —1.9 49 53 51.6 Devaroydroog -+++] 79 52 8.45} —2.8 79 562 Sa 68 180 00 8.3 §.54|/+1.76}180 00 00 ¢ Savendroog cece cece enee es |(167238.7 Devaroydroog from- i Nundydroog ++ ++++e+++++++/168058.8 Sa a a Savendroog from Deorabetta 159828.8. . a 78 57, Aided, 47 20 37 Savendroog ++++++! 78 57 47.5 Deorabelta «+++! 47 20 38.73 Allasoor Hills +++] 53 41 39.59 2.26 1,55 —~1.69 abe 69 180 00 8-8 | 5.4 {40.42 peg 00 00 Savendroog «+ ++++ eeeeer cece 1458591 Allasoor Hill from 2". | | | Deorabetta os ie 2 eee ereesoe “|teaees } OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. : $33 TRIANGLES—conrinucp. Savendroog from Allasoor Hill 145859.1 o isa = ox ‘ : = 58 S$ Angles for Distance No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. iS Ze Fs Calculation. in feet. QO Ri Savendroog sssswee| 55° 41/ 34".99 1.3 55) 41’ 39'.8 Allasoor Hill.......i) 62 10 43 .71{/—1 4 62 10 41.5 be Cheetkul Hill .....{ 62 7 47 87|\—i1.4 627/457 7 180 00 06.5 4.2 |42°.3 1180 00 00 SAVENATOOg sesscoesecseacecreceecreeee| L4G ZES Cheetkul Hill from } FL LLASOOY cob cinives nccmestesweewaspabeeavans Savendroog from Cheetkul Hill 1459248 Savendroog sec 6 56 13 .43)+0.04 6 56 12.5 Cheetkul Hill.........,134 49 15 .16|—2 134 49 42.5 Devaroydroog ......| 38 14 4.75|+4+1 .26 38.14 5 71 (ere aba SEAN Sa ie aaliete CN ie niaane Maoe se es Liege 180 00 3.34 0.7 |4+2.64)180 00 00 ' Savendro0g ..ssccccoscocesceesenece vee LOT 2248 Devaroydroog from } Cheetkul Hill ......ccscsesesscecenore| 284770 9 eae aaa Noda cab beh sacs Neots! eacnrnlairerh ae we mateo AAP ear Ss Savendroog from Devaroydroog 167229.25 Savendreog......00e) 51 25 2.12)—2.1 51 25 00.) Devaroydroog ..... 89 33 44.01) —4.1 89 33 40 Bomanelly Hil...) . 0. . 39 1 20 72\ - ——|—__—— - | 180 00 00 Savendro0d .iscoecsoscoccecsecveees ove] LOD IG4D Bomanelly Hill tom Devar0y droog srecvesseseseeseseeeseee| 2076221 334 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—contTINvueEp. Savendroog from Bomanelly Hill 265594.9 rs) =, 2 |22| 2 . 4 g 56 S Angles for | Distance No. TRIANGLES, Obsd. Angles. & 2h Ss Calcalatio.. in feet. | 5 D Savendroog .sssve 28° 48' 2” .35|—2" 28°.48' O “4 Bomanelly Hill...... 105 30 41 .06|— 7.5 105 30 33.6 Mullapunnabetta ...! 45 41 25 .89\—1 .3 45 41 26 73 | eee 180 60 9 .3 10’.8\—1”.5 |180 00 00 fis CNALOOE wsscseeee reser eseere 99 1046.2 Mullapunnabetta from ae Hill... .secveseoscs|1 18G09e 7 Savendroog from Bundhully Hull 260072 Savendroog secsse 47 6 33 .68|—4.1 47 6 29.5 Bundhully ............} 80 2 44.19/—6.2 80 2 38 Mysoor Hill ......... 52 50 59 .97|—4.2 |! 52 50 52.5 74 | "| | eq 180 00 17 .84 14 .5| + 3.341180 00 00 } Savendro0g ....scesscessesvsersoee| S21 S004 Mysoor Hill from Bundhully .......scccscecenees seseee | 239000 Savendroog from Mysoor Hill 3213854 Savendroog. ......6 46 23 6.26\—5.7 46 23. 00.5 Mysoor Hill .,.......| 73 54 48 .31|-—7 .7 73 54 44 Mullapunnabetta ...) 59 42 21 .78/—6 .3 59 42 15.5 . os 75 180 00 16.35 19 .7,—3 .35|180 00 00 i Savendroog SOC eee eee eee eeeeeeeee 357641.2 Mullapunnabetta from Piyeoor TAH... <2. ccpspemesans 269475.6 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 335 TRIANGLES—contTINUED. Savendroog from Mullapunnabetta 357641 .2 2 ig Ss {22] & Angles for {Distance i No.| TRIANGLES. | Obsd. Angles. | 5 |ES| = Cateuintion! fae oe ‘ek om al RN CS ~ a gy | ee | cee Savendroog Station | 28°48’ 2’.35| —2”. 28° 48’ 00.4 Mullapunnabetta --| 45 41 25 .37|—1 .3 45 41 26 Bomanelly Hill-++-|105 30 41 .06/—7 .5 105 30 33 6 76 180 00 8.78 10”8}—2”.02|180 00 00 Savendroog ne as ate WN rrr 19G5592.8 Bomanelly Hill om) Mullapunnabetla +++++--eeeee 178807.7 Savendroog from Muliapunnabetta 357641.2 Savendroog Station | 46 23 6.26|!—5.7 46 23 0.5 Mullapumnabetta --] 59 42 21.78|—6.3 59 42 15.5 Mysoor Hill---+--- 73 54 48.31 | —7.7 73 54 44 77 4180 00 16.35 4 3.351180 00 00 Savendroog Station -++++--+-- 321387.6 Mysoor Hill from Mullapunnabetta -+++++ +++ ++-{269477.5 Mullapunnabetia from Bomanelly 178807.7 Mullapunnabetta --} 66 00 26.15} —1.8 66 0 23.8 Bomanelly Hill--+-] 44 49 14.67 | —1.5 44 49 12.7 Daesauneegooda --{ 69 10 25.04] —1.9 69 10 23.5 | 180 00 06.76 5.2 | +1.56]180 00 00 8 Mullapunnabetta--++-++++++++- Daesauneegooda from Bomanelly Hill «.-+-+++--++-- 356 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—cONTINUED. NC a aa a Mullapunnabetta from Daesauneegooda 134849 9 Sg a o oe or } ; © & 2 5 Angles for | Distance in No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. A Pe z Calculation. feet, ~ om) = ~ . Q ND : = see ae eee Mullapuunabetta --| 49° 25° 48".27 ==1".25 49° 25' 47” Daesauneegooda ++} 89 54 6 .00}—2 .37 89 54 3.6 Hannabetta «-sees] 2. 2 40 40 90.4 79 180 00 00 Mullapunnabetta+++-++++++ee. 206922.5 Hannabetta from F . Daesauneegooda seeeeee s+*+-/i57180.4 Mullapunnabettd from Hannabeita 206922.5 Mullapunnabetta «-| 29 33 22.39 |—0.02 29:33) 29.4 Hannabetta --+-+-] . . . -30 52 24,2 Koondoor Hill++++)119 34 16.25 |—2.89 119 34 13.4 | Saas eed es CT 80 | 180 00 00 - Mullaponnabetta+---.-- +ee++/122081.6 — Koondoor Hili from 7 Hannabetta ++ +e+eee e+e 0001173557 _ oo Mullapunnabetta from Daesauneegocda 134849.9 \Mullapunnabetta --| 78 59 10.66|—1 .6 78 59°91 Daesauneegooda --} 47 3 24.93 /—1 .1 47. 93/2283 ‘{Koondoor Hill--++| 53 57 31.17]—1 .1 58 57 28.6 _——— | J 81 180 O° 6.76 3”.8|4+2".96|180 00 00 Mullapunnabetta ----+++++«-- 122081.2. Koondoor Hill from t 9 Daesauneegooda -++++++++++-|163790.6 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 337 TRIANGLES—conrTiNUeED. Daesauneegooda from Hannabetta 157180.4 o = =) > . F o {22 5 Angles for {Dance in No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. Z ag = Calculation. eet, | a |e4| * Daesauneegooda ++} 42°50’ 40.37] —1’".2 42° 50’ 40”.4 Hannabetta -+---+/ 71 32 34.00} —1 .5 71 32 34.7 Koondoor Hill-+--| 65 36 45.08} —1 .4 65 36 44.9 4”.1]—3".65}180 00 00 — 82 180 00 045 Daesauneegooda +++++reeees + ++/1G01.8 Koondoor Hill fom) Hannabetta ++++++++eeseee sees /11/55.7 Hannabetta from Koondoorbetta 117355.7 Hannabetta -++-++/136 19 17.37} —3.96 136 19 13.4 Koondoorbetta +--+} 21 36 31 +0.85 21 36 31.9 Balroyndroog «--- 22. 4 14.7 —————— | | | ee 83 180 00 00 - Hannabetta seeeseseeeeees 1146 Balroyndroog from . Koondeorbetta - +++ ++ ¢++«++/219§ Mullapunnabetia from Koondoorbetta 122081.4 Mullapunnabetta --} 15 58 38.26|+1.07 15 58 39 Koondoorbetta ++ |143 36 55.38 |—4,22 | 148 36 50 | Koondhully Hill --! 20 24 30.64)+1.50 20 24 31 $4 [ (11.65 14-2, 63 180 00 00 Mullapunabetta +++. ++-+++++ 2072. 8 Koondhully ond . / «© (€ Koondoorbetta Same The side Mullapunnabetta from Koondoorbetta is the mean distce had from the 80th and 8 Ist triangle. Z 356 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—coNTINUED. . anne dean aaa ren iiit | Mullapunnabetta from Daesauneegooda 1348490 9 oS = / a So y = 9 = Angles for [Distance ii No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. & as = Calealation. febes f 5 ea] = = . n 1 ee EEE EEE eee —— — —— i Mullapuunabetta --| 49° 25‘ 48".27] 1.25 49° 25' 47” Daesauneegooda ++} 89 54 6 .00|—2 .37 89 54 3.6 Hannabetta «-+eee] 2... 40 40 90.4 79 180 00 00 Mullapunnabetta-+-+++-++-. - 1206922. Hannabetta from e | Daesauneegooda a 8'0,6 e1ea@ eis sie i57180.4 Mullapunnabettd from Hannabeita 206922.5 4 Mullapumnabetta --} 29 33 22.39 |\—0.02 29 33 29.4 Hannabetta -++++-) 2... 30 52 94.2 Koondoor Hill +--+ 119 34 16.25 |—2.89 119 34 13.4 80 | 180 00 00 [ { 7 Mullapunnabetta+--+.-- see+=/122081.6_ Koondoor Hili from : Hannabetta -- «cesces se eeeees 117355.7 Mullapunnabetta from Daesauneegooda 134849.9 |Mullapunnabeita --| 78 59 10.66 |—1 .6 78 59:°.91- 7 |Daesauneegooda --} 47 3 24.93|—1 .1 47 $3 22.3 i Koondoor Hill---+] 53 57 31.17{/—1 .1 58 57.28.6 81 180 0° 6.76 3”.8|+2”.96)180 00 00 Mullapunnabetta ----+++++4-- 122081.2 Koondoor Hill from Daesauneegooda +++++++eee0. 163790.6 ; OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. By i TRIANGLES—conrinvueED. Sl a eR Le el SP Se eae eanlee ; Daesauneegooda from Hannabetta 157180.4 o eo Se - : 5 ge 5 Angles for _|Dance.in No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. a | 2 Calculation. eet. : a lea] * | ee 42° 50° 40°.4 (1 32 34.7 65.36 44.9 4.1 |—3".65/180 00 00 Daesauneegooda ++} 42°50’ 40'.37] —1’ Hannabetta -+-+-+/ 71 32 34.00}/—1. Koondoor Hill-+-+| 65 36 45.08} —1 .4 Or to 180 00 0.45 Daesauneegooda -+++++eee6 + ++{1601.8 Koondoor Hill from Hannabetta «+++ +eeeceecee sees {1155.7 LET RD ae: eS SF ee eee! mS Hannabetta from Koondoorbetta 117355.7 136 19 13.4 21 36 31.9 22. 4 V4.7 180 00 00 Hannabetta -+++++/136 19 17.37 |:—3.96 Koondoorbetta +--+} 21 36 31 +0.85 Balroyndroog «+-- 83 Hannabetta eerersreseevereee 1146 Balroyndroog from Koondcorbetta «+++ ++ ¢++e++|2198 Mullapunnabetia from Koondoorbetta 122081.4 / Mullapunnabetta --} 15 58 38.26 |+1.07 15 58 39 Koondoorbetta ‘++ |143 36 55.38 |—4,22 (143 36 50 © 20 24 31 Koondhully Hill -+| 20 24 30.64)+ 1.50 1.65 |+2.63 |180 00 00 al 180 00 04.28 | Mullapunabetta ++++++++++ + +/2072. 8 Koondhuily from < © « (€Koondoorbetta ++ +seeeesers 963 .2 The side Mullapunnabetta from Koondoorbettais the mean distce had from the 80th and 8 Ist triangle. Z S9 ©9 io 8) ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—contTINvuep. Koondoorbetta from Koondhully Hill 96366.3 F 2 | 5s Angles fi Distance No Obed. Angles. = | 25 Calculation. in feet. | a | i eee Sie oe sccoewel 79 12 17°.37|— 75°12’ 15°.67 ondhully Hill...) - + - 78 48 9.73 Balroyndroog.seseree 25 59 34.6 180 00 00 Koondoorbetta ssessescoseesseesesee| 215698 Balroyndroog from Koondhully Hill ........0ss0seesseeee|21 2592.8 Koondoorbetta from Mullapunnabetta 122081.4 ondoorbetta ...... 141 10 47 .25|\—9 aa 141 10 37.8 ullapunnabetta...} . . - 24 59 21.75 alroyndroog | 13 50 00.45 36 en PEE as AS | 180 00 00 00 Koondoorbetta.s.....secsessese00e|21 5698 Balroyndroog from Mullapunnabetta sesso veee| 3200945 Mudlapunnatetta from Koondhully Hill 207682.8 ullapunnabetta ... 40 57 59.5- oondhully ......66 99 12 16.2 jalroyndroog......+. 39 49 44.3 37 — 180 00 00. M ullapunnabetta ...scecsesseseeere 320075 Balroyndroog from Koondhully Hill ateeetsteere a8 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 339 TRIANGLES—conrinvep. Koondhully Hill from Balroyndroog 212588.5 oe | oO FZ oa P z is en Bes = Angles for Distanee No. TRIANGLES, Obsd. Angles. fe a Z & Célculatinte in feet. O in Koondhully Hill...) . 2. 41° Ol’ 23".8 Balroyndroog........| 81°12’ 11".66|— 3.5 8112 82 Bullamully ....,..+00+ 57 46 30 .4.2|—2 .4 57 46 28 88 —- ——— | ———_|_—__—_____ 180 00 00 Koondhully Hill ....s.cs0seeceseveee| 248343.2 Bullamully from Balroyndroog ...ssesseseeeseoseeseeee| 649446 The side Koondhully hill from Balroyndroog is the mean distance found in the 85th and 87th triangle. Balroyndroog from Bullamully 1649446 Balroyndroog.......} + + | 28 44 41.5 Bullamully ........060 50 54 19 .37|—0 .6 | 59 54 19.2 Ungargooda ........| 91 21 00.75|—O0 .4 91 20 59.3 89 ————_—— |__—-—_———_———_—__——_ 180 00 00 s Balroyndroog sssssosssssesseseneee veel 149749.3 Ungargooda from ' Bullamully COP oeR SEH Seo HOP SeveeDeeDecreee 79345.5 The supplemental chord angle at Bullamully, between Megar hill and Ungargooda, corrected, is subtracted from the observed angle between Balroyndroog and Megjar hill, to get the angle at Bullamully, between Balroyndroog and Ungargooda, as an observed one. Z 2 $40 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL Bullamully from Ungargooda 79345.5 : ; 2 Angles for . No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. Calculation. Excess, Error. Spherical Differen: ¢. ——— = Bullamully +++++s | 16° 02’ 24.8 Ungargooda «+ ++«+ 126°11' 27'.88} —0".7 126 11 27 2 Meejar Station--+-| 37 46 8.19) +012 37 46 08 a } 180 00 00 Bullamully «++ +++ ++eeeeeeee © +}104550.2 Meejar Station from Ungargooda «+++sersseeeeees) 35795.8 At Meejar hill, the supplemental chord angle between Booggar- gooda and Ungargooda, corrected as an observed one, and subtracted from the observed angle between Booggargooda and Bullamully, gives the angle between Budlamully and Ungargooda as an observed angle. ; eo Bullamully from Meejar Station 104550.2 Bullamully -+++++] 34 27 32.87 | —0.26 34 37 33.75 Meejar Siation ««+-| 40 07 53.67 | —0.27 49 07 54.5 Kudapoonabetta +-| 96 14 31.37} —0.58 96 14 31.75 91 179 59 57.91 1.11|—3 .2]/180 00 00 Bullamully A010. 6 O g.0 6B O.0 B's ¢) 5 Se 79536 Kudapoonabetta om} Meejar Station«+++++++++++++|59763 Bullamully from Kudapoonabetta 79536 7 46 55.5. 48 38 44.7 123 34 19.8 7 46 56.42|—0.02 48 38 45.5 |+0.17 123 34 21.12] —0.33 180 00 03.04 0.18} +2.86}180 00 00 ! Bullamully +--+... udapoonabetta -- Kunnoor Station -- 92 Bullamullys eeeeeeneseeeeenes 71655.7 Kunnoor Station from Kudapoonabetta «+++ ++++++++/12995,8 OPERATIONS IN. THE PENINSULA. 341 SECTION, III, Southern series of triangles, commencing from Mullapunnabetta and Mysoor hill, and continued to the Malabar coast, terminating ‘with the distance from Bullamully to Kunnoor station, which is also brought out by the northern series. VI. ANGLES. At Mysoor Hill. Between And Referring Flag -+-+>- Mullapunnabetta 177°77' 26" 25.45 27.89 | 5 28.5 27, > -26".50 27.5 25.25 ‘ 23:5 ae tee | Bettatipoor Hill --136 06 58.65 ; 57.42 56.25 Sao Referring flag, -+++++Mullapunnabetta 177 47 26.50 57.01 Bettatipoor Hill -+136 06 57.01 Mullapunnabetta ----Bettatipoor Hill -- 41 40 29.49 ee 2g At Mullapunnabetta. Referring flag --++-++++Mysoor Hill -- 37 59 12 10.75 1275 12.25 14 Bettatipoor Hill «+ 12 26 40.75 Z3 39.25 349 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Mullapunnabetta, continued. Between And Referring flag ++++++Soobramanee «+ ++59° 05’ 03”.25 07.5 Ray As ” 6.75 06 . 4.75 8 Referring flag ----++Mysoor Hill +--+ 37 59 12.58 Bettatipoor Hill -- 12 26 39.97 Mysoor Hill ---++--++Bettatipoor Hill -- 50 25 52.55 Referring flag «+++-+-Soobramanee +--+ 59 5 06 Bettatipoor Hill -- 12 26 39.97 Bettatipoor Hill -+++Soobramanee ---- 46 38 26.03 ae At Bettatipoor Hill. Mallapunnabetta +«---Mysoor Hill +--+ 87 53 46 50.75 + 48.67 49,25 Soobramanee +++- 83 35 12.75 11-5 9 11.26 11.55 1D Seobramanee «++++»Taddiandamole -- 51 37 49.75 52.25 54.75 > 5% 49.5 53.75 see At Taddiandamole. Betlabpoor Hill ++++Soobramanee -+-- 54 50 32.95 30.5 32.75 32.5 31.14 29.75 32 . 28.25 Scobramanee -+++-+Mount Dilli -+++194 57 23 23.5 19.25 > 22.1 22.5 21.75 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. At Mount Dill. ’ Between Kunduddakamully ->Taddiandamole --60° 21" 24.75 i Munjuimpuddy --19 17 At Kunduddakamutly. Goompay Hill ---+-++Annantapoor Hill--15 56 Baekul --+++++++++»Annantapoor Hill --37 41 Goompay Hill------ Ballanandgooda Munjuimpuddy Goompay Hill++++-++Annantapoor ---- Taddiandamole +++ -+Goompay Hill Annantapoor -++++-Taddiandamole «- > 37 41 43 .25 Baekul oes. eeeccee Annantapoor --++-+-Baekul --- Goompay Hill+-++++Annantapoor ---- Baekul] «e+. -eves Taddiandamole Taddiandamole - - ~-20 14 st es 2°25 442 31 23 8 ° 9. 10. 2D 25 | sf 10.69 “3 t 43.25 25 25 25 39.335 als. : a7 25 29,75 Taddiandamole - - 15 §6 10.69 eehoh 2587 re 166 58 37 .69 —— 155 19 39.06 Oe ee - 37 41 43 .25 .15 56 10 .69 53 37 53 .94 ed 155.19 39 .06 Baekul --+-+++++++-Munjuimpuddy - 25 44 29.75 -. RAR Munjuimpuddy -+++-Taddiandamole --129 85 9.31 re ee ee ey Ge At Munjuimpuddy Hull. Kunduddakatully --Mount Dili - »+-100 26 09 10: 9 8. ga At Annantapoor Fill. Goompay Hill---- seer Ballanandgooda Ballanandgooda -«-- Bullamully SS Ser -»Kunnoor Station °57.. 57,33. 544 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL At Baekul, Between i And Munjuimpuddy +«+++Mount Dilli -+--32° 37° 56”.75 5.73 5Susd Kunduddakamully 32 31 59.75 63 Goompay Hill ------ Annantapoor -++-11 45 56 . ; 60.75 62 Goompay Hill +-+--- Kunduddakamully 92 36 56 .25 ; 55 25 55,25 55.29 Munjuimpuddy -++-+Mount Dilli------ a2 3 5104 Kunduddakamully 32 32 01 .37 Mount Dill --+-++--- Kunduddakamully 65 09 59 .04 5 eect Kunduddakamully 107 11 12.5 16 .28 17.29 At Goompay Hill. Bullamully-+-+++* 35 09 13.5 . 16 .25 14 16 Annantapoor +++.140 37. 3.74 A .75 6.5 24.5 Kunnoor Station 93 6 48.5 3 : 50 AG .25 *Ballamully +--+. 35 9 14.04 Kunnoor Station 93 6 48 .25 3l i OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 345 At Bullamiutly. Between And Balldnandgooda ++++Goompay Hill +» 79°17’ 59") 43.13 > 4017 i ; 44 .37 \ . Balroyndroog:+++ 80 53 15.75 ) bs « n - ore) 92 : 1.75 19.19 397.25 Balroyndroog ++-++++Kunnoor Station 118 2! 15.5 Balroyndroog -+---+-Ballanandgooda-+ 80 53 19 19 Ballanandgooda -++++Kunnoor Station 100 45 27 .31 * Ballauandgooda +-+++Goompay Hill ++ 79 17 42 .i7 ———_ Goowpay Hill -----+Kunnoor Station 81 27 45 .14 ee Le Oe Vil. 'FRIANGLES. Mullapunnabetta from Mysoor Hill 209477.5 a ee | ?. CO PC Oe ee eee Angles for |Distance in Calculation. feet. 20. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles, Difference Spherical Excess Error a eee ——— | ——_— --—____—_ Mullapunnabeita --| 50° 25! 52”.55|--2".3 50° 25' 49".6 ~ JMysoor Hill------ 41 40 29 .49|\—2.3 41 40 20.6 Bettatipoor Hill ++} 57 53 48 .07)—4.2 $7 53 43.8 93 | 180 00 10.71 8.8 |+1’.91/180 00 00 2, Mullapunnabetta +++ ++-+++e+-/179204.4 4 . . § Bettatipoor Hill from 3 Mysoor Hill eeoereesreereeneue 207867.4 Mullapunnabetta from Bettatipoor Hill 1792944 46 38 24 83 35 8 49 46 28 Mullapunnabetta --| 46 38 26.03 |—1.98 Bettatipoor Hill --| 83 35 11.26 |—3.23 Soobramanee -+++}; . . > 180 00 00 Mullapunnabetta --+-.+++-++-/233359.7 © Soobramanee fom} . Bettatipoor Hill --+++ee+ ++++/170734 346 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL Bettatipoor Hill from Soobramanee 170734 Angles for No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. P iGaledlation, Difference, Spherica! ec meen Bettatipoor Hill...... SCS 5D ame sesete Soobramanee ......... Taddiandamole ...... 54 50 31.14|—1 .96 | 2 * 62" . 5V° 37’ 50".1 ert ie Bore 73 31 40.7 ° F 54 5029.2 180 00 00 00 Bettatipoor Hill... Soest 95 Taddiandamole from | Soobramanee Hill......cc000 Soobramanee Hull from Taddiandamole 163730.4 ee a ae 1 anae | 49 11 36 .6 Taddiandamole...... 74 37 12 .54|— 2.21 74 37 10.3 Kunduddakamully | 56 11 14.75|— 1.71 56.11 131 180 00 00 Soobramance Hill cssecseee 190004.3 Kunduddakamully from Taddiandamole scersecsscssacesss 149160.2 The supplemental chord angle at Tuddiansdnieie between Kua duddakamully and Mount Dilli, “yeduced as an observed one, 1s sub- tracted from the angle Soobramance hill and Mount Dilh, as ob- served at Taddiandamole, to give the angle Kunddudakamully and - Seobramanee hill. The station at Kunduddakamully could not be seen when the angles were taken at 7addiandamole. Laddiandamole from Kunduddakamully 149160.2 By SS LD Taddiandamole...... 50 20 8.26] « Kunduddakamully 69 18 26 Ay | Hy 61 69 18 25.10 Mount Dilli ......... 60 21 28 .08|—~1 .441 - 60 21 26.64 | 97 De | eirene s A8 180 00 00 Taddiandamole .sccscereerers 160548.9 * Mount Dilli tom} : Fiat, (ean Kunduddakamully eve seeeesose 132113 et a OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 347 The supplemental chord angle at Kunduddakanully, between Mount Ditli and Munjuimpuddy, made as an observed angle by ap- plying the correction, and subtracted from the observed angle be- tween Muijwimpuddy and Taddiandamole, gives the angle AZount Dili and Taddiandamole as an observed angle. TRIANGLES—conrTinuep. Kunduddakamully from Mount Dilli 132113 = Lv % ro = 5. © Angles for Distance No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. 2 2 E 5 Papi Nd ome oe lee Kunduddakamully | 86°01’ 12°.35|—1” 86° O01 11.35 LU ea a 98 48 50.21 Baekul ereecc eee oeesenecD 65 09 59 -04|—0O 6 65 09 58 4:4: 98 sel the be SCAR" Hee 180 00 00 OO 7 Kunduddakamully,...scssssseessesesere 70162 Baekul from Mount Dilli SPHERE R OCR EOR GES eEe See eeBeee 145223.2 In this triangle the same supplemental chord angle between J/ount Dili and Munjwimpuddy, corrected, is added to the.observed angle at Kunduddakamully, between Baekul and Moyuimpuddy, to get the observed angle between Mount Dill and Baekul. Kunduddakamully from Baekul 70102 | {Kunduddakamully | 53 37 53.941—O .4 53 37 53.54 | {Baekul «-+-++++-+! 92 36 55.58|—O .9] | 2 36 54.68 | |Goompay Hill----| . . . 33 45 11.78 99 ! ) 180 00 00.00 Kunduddakamully --++++----/126145.9 Goompay Hill com) Baekul Sees eoevereseeeeseree 101681.2 oS ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TRIANGLES—convTinvuep. Kunduddakamully Jrom Goompay Hill 126145.9 | j a ~~ o Sw | 5 E¢ is 1D; a No | TRIANGLES. Obsd: Angles. | | | Bf. E Angles for Distance’ = ao S| Caiculation, in feet. ‘ ja) nN Kunduddakamully | 26° 14’ 39°.35|—0".6 : 26° 14’ 387.75 Goompay Hill ...... 83 44 30.21;—0O .7 83 44 29.5 \Gallanandgooda ... fin Ya 70 00 51.75 Ne ee eee 180 00 00 Kunduddakamully. .,...0sseseeeee os Ballanandgooda from } Goompaye Bibl: ..: cassssspresnnssncnde Goompay. Hill ......} 35 09 14 .94)--0.12 35 09 14.8 Ballanandgooda ...) . . . 65 33 62.7 Bullamully ....000-) 79 17 42.71|—0.18 79 17 42.5 101 PARIS Wee Goompay Hill Si tele ea 54990.2 Bullamully from Air "a Ballanandgooda siescccsrseseersseer( S478) Goompay Hill from Bullamully 54990.2 Goompay Hill ...... 57 57 33 31|—0 .28 51 57 33 Bullamully .........00 81 27 45 .14,—0 .39 81 27 44.75 Kunnoor Station... aa Oe ‘ | 40 34 42.25 102 _ ee 180 00 00.00 Goompay Hill ......ssesseseeseeeerere|S3600.1 | | Kunnoor Station tom | al Bullamully SOR AOT AER OR EOO TOR aCe EER SEE ESF 71659.4, OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. “SAQ _ The same side Bulldmully from Kunnoor bill brought out down from the northern series is 71655.7 feet: therefore the mean will be 71657.55 feet. Hence, as the side Bullamully from Kunnoor hill, brought down from the. northern series, is the mean, so is the side Meejar hill and Kuddapoonabetta, brought down from the northern seri€s, to 59764-6 feet, as derived from the mcan of both series. -_ TRIANGLES—continuep. ; Meejar Hill Jrom Kudapoonabetta-59764.6 @ cS @= 0 = e5. 2 f 3 22 S Angles for {Dist i No.| TRIANGLES. | Obsd. Angles. | 3 [52] = | Calculation. | feet A ae cae | | —_—————$—$—— |] ——|Meejar Hill.......:.:..] 37° 55° 19".94|—0".12 Kudapoonabetta ...| 58 24 56 .62/—0.17 Kooliebogooda ...... fijen | 103 | |) + | : § Meejar Hill-....secssesee[5 1224.7 Kooliebogooda from N Kudapoonabetta.,........36956.5 > 350 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL SECONDARY TRIANGLES, Kudapoonabetta from Kooliebogooda 36956.5 No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. | Distances from the intersected Objects in Feet. Kudapoonabetta «+ | 86°11’ 32 Si 17110.2 Kooliebogooda 25 28 59 t Eedgah Station +++ { 39680.7 Eedgah Station -- 68 19 19 Eedgah Station from Koolebogooda 39680.7 Eedgah Station »+ | 66 09 43 : -§ | 10073 Kooliebogooda 14 30 24 t Station en eee | | 36782.3 | Stationonthe Beach 99°19) 53". | | Bullamully from Goompay Hill 54990.2 ( Bulauinlighwe-*. | 76.3733) 9 an eas j 91763.7 Geacapag Elna ve | 069) 16859 | ee 95446.7 Mangalore +----- | 34 05 28 Bullamully from Kunnoor Station '71659.4 | Bullamully «--+-- 4 50 12 yi again { 91761.4 Kunnoor Station+- | 158 37 57 Biel 21234.9 ical caeee . 1G ST) oe hn | Mount Dilli from Kunduddakamully 132113 | Mount Dillie«---- | 132 10 39 | arises, 87563.4 Kunduddakamully 18 46 24 Semeners 201632.7 29 02 57 | Cannanore «++s++- Taddiandamole from Mount Dill 160548.9 Taddiandamole 31 59 09 ; 157072 Mount Dilli..--.. |, 71°49 11 Cannanore a { 87574.2 Cannanore «+++. 76 11 40 ; Taddiandamole from Cannanore 157072 Taddiandamole -- i 16 51.05 t Gee ign in Raa { | 171686.4 Cannanore -++++-. | 98 16 45 50294.4 Station in Redoubt | 64 52 10 Taddiandamole from Station in Redoubt 171686.4 Taddiandamole 29 26 : Station in Redoubt | 132 52 33 | } Tellicherry ++++sees { Tellicherry --+++ 46 38 O] 175846.6 . 6143.1 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 351 SECTION IV. Latitude of Dodagoontah Station, with the position of its Meridian. Dodagoontah station is selected as the point of depar- ture in preference to the observatory at Madras, as it-is nearly in the middle of the tials and its meridian ts intended to be carried down to Cape Comorin. It has al- ready been extended below the latitude of 11’, and the series of triangles from which it is deduced, being to form the foundation of all the branches which may hereafter be carried to each coast, I have considered it as the properest meridian to which ‘all latitudes and relative longitudes should be referred. 8. Zenith distances of stars observed at Dodagoontah, with their corrections for precession, nutation, aberration, and the semi-annual solar equation, back to the beginning of the year 1805, for determining the latitude of that station. OBSERVATIONS AT DODAGOONT AH. a SERPENTIS. NEAREST POINT ON THE LIMB 5° 55’ S. 1205. Obsd. Zenith Correct Zenith | Thermometers. Y Dv E Distances. 8 S Distances: isaac aa Month. oO; Upper. | Lower. July 10.) E. | 5°57’ 04’.49 | 7’.14 | 5°56’ 57°35 | 70° | 70° 12.) W. | 5 56, 59.38 |'6.93 | 5 56 Ae 73 73 15.) E. | 5 57 07.74 | 6.64 | 5 57 01.10 | 79.5 | 79 18..W..1°5 56 54.73 16.36) 3:56 48 .37.1) 78 78 19.) Bo] 5.57.9 64:16 .26 15,57 3.38) 76 76 24.)W. | 5 56 59.24 | 5.82] 5 56 53.43 |-79.5 | 79 26.| E. | 5 57 05.74} 5.66] 5 57 00.08 | 75.5 | 75 27.|W. | 5-56 52.13 | 5.58 | 5 56 46.55 | 79 79 29. E. | 5 56 59.41 | 5.43) 5 56 53.98 | 72 72 | 31.) W..| 5 56 52.73 | 5.28 | 5 56 47.45 | 75.5 | 76 - 1806, June 19.) E. | 5 56 16.76 {19.08 |, 5 56 57.68 | 73 73 ) 20.. W. | 5 56 10.88 118.95 | 5°56 51.93°| 72 72 22.|W. | 5 56 07.38 \18.70 | 5 56 48.68 | 76 76 23.) E. | 5 56 13.21 |18.57 | 5 56 54.64 | 73 73 |e ee Mean: Sree: | 75cl SE eS 352 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL e HERCULIS. NEAREST POINT ON THE-LIMB.1° 35’ N, " . i 1805. ¢ oo __.. | Thermometers. g Obsd. Zenith == | Correct Zenith 2 ‘ Month am Distance. 5* Distance, Upper. | Lower. 7 , T a a July 12. | E. | 1°37’ 19.83. |.0’.39 | 1°37’ 20°.22 | 68° 69° \ 37 20.26 | 72.5 | 73 16. PHS 20253) | Oner hk 19. |W. | 1.37 37.14 | 0.73.1 1 37 36.44.| 75 76 | 28. |W. | 1 37 35.88 | 2.03 | 1 37 33.85 | 74 4. 99. |} E. | 1 37 922.55 | 2.16 1.1 3720.39 | 76: | 7% Sty ios | 1.37; 23.16.) 2.42 | 1 37° 20-54, a8 68 .5 August 2.) W. | 1 37 35°26 | 2.66 | 1 37 32.60 | 77-5 | 77.5 7.(| E. |.1 37 24.76 | 3.26 | 1 37 21 504 Fh. 8. |. W. | 1 37 36.89 | 3.37) 1.37 33.521 71 Soe 9. | E. | 1 37 25.56 | 3:48 1 1-37 22.08.| 71 «/771 102.) W..,\.1.37, 36..79)1.3..58 37.33.2121 73 73 12. | E. | 1:37 24.76'| 3.78 | 1 37 20.98 | 74 74: 14. |W. 1 1 37 37.87 | 3.987 1 37 33.89 | 74 74: 16. | E. j-1 37 27.06 | 4.17 | 1 37 22.89.) 71.5 | 71 Mean -+++) 73 73.5 —a ee The Latitude of Dodagoontah Pe ote deduced from the foregoing tars. From the beginning of 1805. STARS. Mat aL SSI TT Go le on ae Latitude. Mean Declination. | Correct Z. Distance. ‘ —— a =. « Arcturus-+ssessseeee| 20°12 19.23 N. 7°12 19”.84 N.| 12? 59/ 59”.39 N. aw Serpentis-+-++++++++-| 7 3 0.3 5 56 59 .64°S. 59 .97 a Herculis «+--+. ++++++| 14 37 30.96 1 37.28 .99 N. 61 .97 « Ophiuchi -+-+++++++| 12 42 50.91 0:17. 17.718. 58 .62 yp Aquila -+-+e+-+eee+-] 10 8 58.34 2 50 59.78 S 58 .12 Alair ssceeceeeeeeee! § 21 53.53 438 3.34 8. 56 .87 B Aquilee -+eeeeeseeee| 5 55 52.71 i nh oS 73'S: 61 .44 Markab --++++++--++) 14 9 40.09 de” OUST 76nN: G2:.55 v Pegasicesseeseeeeees| 14 6 4.7 64 4523: Ne 60 .47 _—_ Means: 35 12 59 59 .O1 This is one of the stations alluded to in the note p. 291, where the plummet is supposed to have been drawn to the northward; in which case the latitude here deduced must be something in defect. 9. Pole-star observations at Dodagoontah Station, reduced for de- termining the position of the Meridian. 1805. Angle between | Angle between quparent Bt em Latitude. Azimuths, the Pole-star and| the N. Pole and Month. ; Lamp. Lamp. 1°46’ 42".16}) 1°31’ 53".00] 0° 14’ 49".16 July 19. | 1°43’ 58”.20/) ( 22.| 1 43 57.57 || 1 46 41.70} 1 31 56.25] O 14 45.45 August 8. | 1 43 54.07 | re | 1 46 38.10] 1.31 51.25] O 14 46.85 12 1 43 53.05} | ° 1 46 37.06} _1 31 48.50] O 14 48.56 17. | 1 43 51.70 ‘ S }] 1 46 35.67] 1 31 46.25} 0 14 49.42 ‘48. | 143 51.441 o& }| 1 4635.40] 1 31 47.50] 0 14 47.90 19. 143 51.16/| “& J|}-1 46 35.10] 1 31 45.50; 0 14 49.60 > 23.} 1 43 50.04)| 2 | 1 46 $3.97) 1 31 45.50} 0 14 48.47 26. 1 43 49 .09} | 1 46 32.99] 1 31 43.50] O 14 49.49 27. | 1.43 48.82] ) \{ 1 46 32.73} 1 31 44.50) 0 14 48.28 Angle between the N. Pole and Referring Lamp N. easterly-+---++---- 0 14 48.31 Angle between the Referring Flag and Savendroog ++++++se++-++++-|104 4 29.68 Ancle between the N. Pole and Savendroog Station -+++++++++e+e++2+|103 490 41 37 A LLL LDA EDL LDL LLL L ALL LALA AAA ALLIELALD 360 — we ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL SECTION V. Length of the Perpendicular Degree, and the Latitudes and relative Longitudes. of all the great Stations of Observation, and other places on the two Coasts. 10. The measurement of an are perpendicular to the meridian, and the length of a degree in latitude 12’ 55° 10”. For determining the latitude of Savendroog, we have at Doda- goontah station, the bearing of Savendreog station with the meridian 76° 10’ 18’.63 S. Wand the distance between these two stations = 121933.2 feet. These will give the westing of Savendroog = 118399.2 feet, and the southing of the point on the meridian of Dodagoontah, where the perpendicular let fall from Savendroog, will cut the said meridian — 29143.3 feet, which is equal to an arc of 4’ 48”.88, and this deducted from the latitude of Dodagoontah gives 12° 55’ 11".03. The westing will give an arc perpendicular to the meridian 19’ 29’.04, with which, and the co-latitude of the above point, the latitude of Savendroog will be had 12° 55° 10”@4. — Nore. The meridional degree is taken at 60498 fathoms, being the computed degree for Latitude 12°55 10°, as deduced from the mea- sured degrees for latitude 11° 59° 55" and latitude 52° 02 30’. @PERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. $61 Pole-Star Observations at Savendroog Station, reduced for determin- ing the position of the Meridian. 1804 ———- +. Month. March 6. Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp ---++++«-+++- Distance. te 1 1 14 1 / 1 1 1 1 1 59 .62 59 .91 00.19 00 .49 00 .96 Apparent Polar Latiind VS",OL GS ot Angle between |Angle between the N, Azimuths. the Poie-star and} Pole and Referring Referring Lamp. Lawp. 1°46. 39".72| 2° 28’ 56”.75} - 0°42’ 17.03 1 46 40 2.28 57 .25|") O 42 17.25 1 46 40'.3 1 2 28°54 O 42 13.7 1 46 40 571 2 28 53.5 0 42 12.93 1 46 40.86] 2 28 57.75} 0 42 16.89 1 46 41.73]. 2 28 56 O 42 14.27 1 46 42.03] 2 28 58.75}. 0:42 16.72 1 46.42.31) 2 28 58.75) | 0 42 16.44 1 46 42.62} 2 28 58.25] 0 42 15.63 1 46 45.11] 2 29 01.12) 0 42 Angle between the Referring Lamp and Mullapunvabetta Angle between the North Pole and Mullapunnabetta + +++ --++-- Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp +«+ Angle between the Referring Lamp and Yeiracondah - Augle between the North Poleand Yerracondah -.--. 92 O+ 49 .45 ‘| 92 47 05.34 E. 18.02: 0 42 15.89 E 90 40 01.16 —_——= 89 57 45.27 We> 0 42 15.89 E, —EEE Pole-Star Observations at Mullapunnabetta Station, reduced for de- termining the position of the Meridian. Nov. 7. 8. 10. 12 13: 14, 15. 16, es 19. 12% 13. 14. 15. 16. 20. 24, 25. 1805 Dec. fe re ee ee la 43 43 43 43 4D 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 42 .37| 4.2 .03 41 36 40.71 40 .39 40 07 39.75 39 .42 39.11 38 .49 13 .24 13 .04 12.85 12 .67 12.49) 11 .84 11 .29 11.16 Ae ee nn ll ll ool el 46 46 24° {170 293 .65|170 22. .90|170 22 .29)170 21 .90}170 91 64/170 21 .81\170 stor AW 20 .651170 29 .02/170 54..11,)170 53 .9 |170 53 .71|170 53 .52|170 53 34,170 52 .67|170 52 6111170 51 .99/170 43 43 43 | 15 .25|172 18. -..J172 18 .37|172 19 .13]172 19 .38|172 20 {172 19 .62|172 20 {172 19 .25|172 19 .25|172 49 172 4§ .251172 A§ 121172 AZ 5751172 49 .25|172- AS .2 1172 AS .5 \172 50 35/172 29 39.25 29 41.65 29 41.33 29 41.42 29 41,34 29 41 04 29 40.93 29 40.97 29 39.9 29 39 .27 29 45.11 29 42.15 29 41.83 29 41.27 29 42 .59 29 40 .S7 29 40.61 29 42.34 > a Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp ---+++++++++{172 29 41.25 W. Angle between the Referring Lamp and Savendroog -+++++++++| 97 41 34.36 Angle between the North Pole and Savendroog -+-+++++eeeees| 89 48 44.39 E. en ‘ $62 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL as Pole-Star Observations at Yerracondah Station, reduced for determin- 3 ing the position of the Meridian. 1804 Angle between |Angle betweén the N. ( ApHasepe Polpe Latitude} Azimuths. the Polelatak and Pole and Referring Month. Rrietance. Referring Lamp. Lamp. ere mere | eeemeeeemnenioenoeeneseneaewms | Seema ees | ane | Jan. 15. | 1° 43° 49".81 1°46" 30".42| 9° 3’ 6.5 |> 7°16 36°.08 16. )S 1 43 49.82} 1 46 30.43} 9 3 3.851 7 16 38.42 19. 1 43 49.9 %, 146° S051] «9. Gis? 7 16 31.49 20. | 143 49.92) ao 1 46:°30.53|- 9 3. 3.5.1.7). 167aa..07 21.| 1 43 49.95) ‘S 1 46 30.56 9 3 5.5 | 7 16 34.94 22.) 1 43 50.02} & 1 46 30.63} 9 3 3.75] 7 16 33.12 23. | 1 43 50.07] és 1 46 30.68} 9 3 4 7 16 33.32 26.1" 1 43 50.26). ° 1 46 30.871 9 3 5 7 16 34.12 O76 Ne PAS 5Oa35 1 46 30.96, 9 3 4.25) 7: 16.33.38 Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp}----+++++++- 16 33 .64 E. Angle between the Referring Lamp and Savendroog ++++++++++| 94.16 14.97 “NI Angle between the North Pole and Savendroog sovccecceccces| 86 59 41.33 W. As the latitudes were necessary for computing the azimuths, they were first had spherically for the two stations at MJ/ullapunnabetta and Verracondah, by taking the westing and easting from the me- ridian of Savendroog, and converting them into parts of great circles. These came so near the truth, that on recomputing the azimuths by the latitudes finally brought out, there was no sensible dif- erence. It may be remarked here, that no double azimuths have been taken. ‘The pole-star being so low, and the vapour in the atmo- sphere so great in general, that I have never, except in two in- stances, been able to discern it while the sun was above the horizon. OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 363 The Arc comprehended by the Meridians of Savendroog and Mullapunnabetta. Let S and M be tthe stations at Suvendroog and Mullapunnabetta, and P the pole, and SR Pp be a great circle per- pendicular to the meri- dian SP at S, and also Ss a parallel of latitude at'the same point S. Then we have given the observed angles PSM and PMS, the distance SM, and the latitude of S, to find the latitude of M. In the spheriodical triangle MSR, the angle MSR = 90° — 2: PSM = 0° 2’ 14”.73, and the angle SMR = 180: — 2 PMS = g0° 11 15”.61, and these being Corrected for the Chords, we shall have the angle MSR = 0 2’ 14’.73, and the angle RMS = 90° 11 15°.58 for the chord angles. Whence the angle SRM = 180° — sums of the above angles, or 89" 46' 29.69, and with these and the side or chord MS, the dis- tance given by the triangles, we shall find the chord of the perpendicular arc SR = 357644.6 and the side MR = 233.64 feet, and this last may be taken either as a chord or arc indifferently. Now the spherical excess of the triangle SMR is 0”.02, and the sum of the corrections for the angles MSR and SMR being — 0’.03, the difference between this sum and the said spherical excess is + 0'.01 the correction for the angle MSR, which applied to the chord angle, we get the angle MRS or PRS as an observed angle, equal 89> 46’ 29".68. Continue the meridian PS to t, and draw Rt pa- rallel to Ss. Then, since the small angle SRt, or its equal RSs, is half the difference between the angles 364 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETSRICAL” PRS and PSR, that is half the difference between 90° and the angle PRS as an observed one, we have ia i ES = 297-68) — 5 45°.16, the angle RSs. Hence in triangle RSs considered as a plane one, there — are given the angles at R and S$ and the side SR, as formerly found, from which will be had Ss and-Rs equal 357642.6 feet and 702.51 feet respectively ; as also Ms (= RS — RM) equal 468.87 feet, which measures the distance between the parallels of $ and ) M. But 468.87 feet as an arc on the meridian is 4°.65, which substracted from the latitude of 8 gives - 19° 55 05".59 for the latitude of M, the station at ALullapunna betta. Hence in the triangle SPM_ there are given the sides SP and MP (the co-latitudes of S and M) and. the angles PSM, PMS, the observed angles at S and M. Then, as the tangent 77 4 52" 085: tangent Oo 0’ 2'.325 :: tangent 89° 53 14.83: tangent "O° 4 31’.26; which last applied to the half sum of the observed angles, we get 89° 5 314.83 + 431" 96 = 89° 57° 46 09 and 89: 59 14" $3 — 4' 31°.96 = 89° 48 43".57 for the angles at Savendroog and Alulla- punnabetta such as they would have been observed ona sphere. Then. proceeding by spherical compu- _ tation with the sides PS, PM, and the angles PSM and PMS given, the angle SPM, or difference of longitude of S and M will be had equal 1° 00! 247.44, from which and the side SP in the right angled spherical triangle PSR the side SR or arc SRq per= | pendicular to the meridian PS at the point S will be had equal 0° 58’ 52.71. Now the chord of the are SR is had = 357644. 6 feet, half of which will be as the sine of half the arc SR, and from which is got the radius of the same are, and thence the length of the are SR is found to be 3$57650.8 feet. Then as 58’ 59"°.71 : 357650.8 :: 60 > 364463.3 fect, or 60743.8 fathoms, for the measure of the degree at tight angles to thé meridian of, wWavendroog. . hip ° OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 365 The Arc comprehended by the Meridians of Savendroog and Yerracondah. Let S and Y be the stations at Savendroog and Yer- racondah respectively, and let the latitude of Y be deduced from that of S, the angles PSY and PY S having been observed. Let SR be a great circle perpendicular to the meridian SP at S, and St’ a parallel of lati- tude at the same point 5... Here the angle Rave: PSYs-.90":=— 2 47 5’.34, and the angle RYS being the sites ed angle at Y = 86° 59’ 41’ 33: These: angles being corrected for the chords, the supplement to ) their sum will be the chord angle at R in the spheriodical tri- angle SRY. Let the chords of SR and YR be com- puted with the corrected angles, then if the angle at R be augmented by the difference between the sum of the corrections for the other two angles and the spherical excess, it will become 90° 13 14 74, or such as would have heen observed at R. Hence 180° — z SRY = 89°46 45”.26 the angle (RS, and by con- sidering the triangle StR asa plane one, the small angle tSR is equal ee O° 6 37'.37. With this angle, and the angle tRS, and the distance SR, as frail ‘above, the nal oie tR is had = 675. 86 feet, which sodad to RY = 17067.72. gives tY = 17743.58 feet, the distance between the parallels of Sand Y. But 17743.58 feet is equal to an arc on the meridian of 2’ 55.98, and this deducted trom the latitude of Savendroog, gives 12° 5% 14.26 for the la- titude of Yerracondah. . Hence, with the co-latitudes of Savendroog and 366 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL Yerracondah, and the observed angles PSY and PYS, we have, the tangent of half the sum of the first, to the tangent of half their difference, as the tangent of half the sum of the second, to tangent of 2° 54’ 25”.92, their half difference: from which we get the greater angle at S = 92° 47’ 49".25, and the less angle at Y = 66° 58° 57’.41 thus corrected for computing sphe- tically: and with these and co-latitudes, proceeding us before, the angle SPY will be had = 0° 59’ 14.83, and the perpendicular arc = 0° 57’ 44”.86. But the chord subtended by this arc is 350824 feet, and there- tore the arc itself 350827.7 feet. Then, as 57.’74767 : 350827.7 feet :: 60’ : 364510.8 feet, or 60751.8 fa- thoms, for the length of the degree at right angles to the meridian of Savendroog, as deduced from the dis- tance between Savendroog and Yerracondah ; and the leneth of the perpendicular degree deduced from the distance between Savendroog and Mullapunnabetta being 60743.8 fathoms, the mean of these two, or 60747.8 fathoms, may be considered as nearly the true measure for latitude 12° 55’ 10”. ‘If the ratio of the earth’s diameters be taken as 1 : 1.003125, and the meridional degree in latitude 11° 59’ 55” be 60494 fathoms; then, by using these data, the computed meridional degree on the ellipsoid in latitude 12°55’ 10” will be 60498 fathoms; with which and the above ratio, the computed degree at tight angles to the meridian in the same latitude will be had 60858 fathoms, which exceeds the measured one by 110 fathoms nearly; so that we may infer from this, either that the earth is not an ellipsoid, or that this measurement is incorrect. The more we investigate this interesting subject, and the more ample means we employ to ascertain the exact figure of the earth, the more seems to be wanting to satisfy our research; and if we feel re- luctant in giving up the elliptic hypothesis, because it is consonant to that harmony and order with which we are familiar, the discord which these re- sults indicate, afford by no means sufficient evidence OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 367 to induce us to abandon that theory. The great nicety in making the pole-star observations is well understood, and it will be made more manifest in the case before us by increasing or diminishing the half sum of the angles with the meridians, recipro- cally taken at Mullapunnabetta and Savendroog, by one second only, when it will appear that a difference of nearly one hundred and fifty fathoms, in the perpen- dicular degree, will be occasioned thereby. I am fully aware of the delicacy necessary in taking these angles, and I am also aware that some eminent mathematicians consider the method of determining the difference of longitude by the convergency of meridians as insufficient in these low latitudes; yet I am of opinion that by repeating these observations whenever stations can be found, either in the same, or in different latitudes, the truth may ultimately be very nearly attained. I at one time had determined on increasing the number of observations at AZulla- punnabetta, Sacvendroog and Yerracondah, on my re- - turn to the eastward; but when I was at A/ullapun- nabetta a second time, and had increased the number of pole-star observations there to eighteen. and had also taken several other angles between Savendroog and the referring lamp, and after all finding that the angle between the meridian and Savendroog was al- tered only 4, part of a second, I did not think it ne- cessary to go to the other stations, particularly as the observations there had been made under the most favorable circumstances. It is, notwithstanding, desirable that many more measurements of the kind should be made, and that other methods should be tried for getting the length of a degree of longitude, - particularly that of carrying a good time-keeper be- tween two meridians at a known distance, a method which has been strongly represented to me by the Astronomer Royal, and which I mean to put in prac- tice in the course of my future operations. I had also devised another method by the instantaneous extinction of large blue lights fired at Savendroog, the times of which were to be noticed by observers at 368 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL Mullapunnabetta and Yerracondah, the distance of whose meridians on a parallel of latitude: passing through Sevendroog being nearly 135 miles. The experiments were attempted, but the weather was so dull that the lights could scarcely be distinguished. There is bestdes a difficulty in fixing the precise mo- ment of extinction; and even in the most favorable state of the atmosphere, when the lights may be distinctly seen with the naked eye at near seventy miles distance, to come within half a second of the truth, would be as near as the eye is capable of, which is equal to 7’4 in an angle at the pole: but the mean of a great number of successful results might come very near the truth. Since the triangles in this survey have been carried direct from the observatory at Madras to Mangalore, by which easy means are offered to determine the length of a parallel of latitude subtended by two me- ridians nearly five degrees and a halt distant from each other, it may be further suggested, whether a long course of corresponding observations made at Madras observatory and at another place on the Malabar coast, by the eclipses of the satellites, oc- cultations of stars by the moon, &c. might not afford another eligible method for determining the length of a degree of longitude. In short, the, difficulty of obtaining this desidera- tum, and the important advantages to geography and physical science which must accrue therefrom, are such powerful incitements to a zealous prosecution of the inquiry, that I may venture an assurance of leay- ing nothing undone, which may come within the compass of my abilities, to give every possible satis- faction on the subject; and if my endeavours to throw some light on the path to future discovery be successful, I shall close the period of my labours with the grateful reflection, that, while employed in conducting a work of national utility, [ shall have added my humble mite to the stock of general science. 3 OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 369 11. Latitude and longitude of Kylasghur. Let Y be Yerracondah, K Kylasghur, and P the pole. Then in the spherical triangle PYK there are given YP = 77° 7 45’.74, the co-latitude of Yerra- condah, YK = 46 33.51, , the oblique arc as com- puted on the spheroid ; and the angle PYK = 92° 13.46'.11, as observed at Yerracondah, to find PK, the co-latitude of Kylasghur which by spherical computation will be had equal 77° 9 38.7, and therefore the latitude equal 12° K. 50 21.3, with which latitude the azimuths being reduced, the pole star . observations at Kylasghur will stand as follow: 1805. Angle between | Angle between the _——- Month. eyepanre: Referring Lamp. Referring Lamp. Dec. 3. | 1°43’ 54".74 |} °2 (| 1°46735".41 | 3°28" 57" 1°49 21", 7. | 1 43 53 82 Ss 1 46 34.51 | 3 28 52.4 1 42 17. 12. | 1 43 52 .84 iS 1 ‘40439-5613 28 55°25 1 42°21. 13. |°1: 43 52.5 : 1 46 33.46 | 3 28..53..5 1 42 20. Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp----- codeooet 1 42 20. Angle between the Referring Lamp and Yerracondah +++-++++++} 89 17 57. Apparent Polar Latitude} Azimuths. the Pole-star and North Pole and ~_—_* 59 89 69 04 30 E, 607 Angle between ihe North Pole and Yerracondah -++++++++++e+++| 87 35 37.307 W. If the same angle be brought out by using the co-latitudes of Yerracondah and Kylasghur, and the observed angle at Yerracondah, between the N. pole and Kylasghur, it will be 87° 35 37°, very nearly the same as was observed. , } __ Then again, as the sine of either of the co-latitudes, is to the sine of the opposite angle, so is the sine of the oblique arc_KY, to sine of the angle KPY, equal Bb $70 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 47’ 49’.98, the difference of longitude ; to which add the difference of longitude between Yerracondah and Savendroog, equal 59’ 14”.83, we have 1° 46° 57’.81 for the longitude of Kylasghur, east from the meri- dian of Savendroog’. 12. Latitude and Longitude of Karnatighur, and the position of its meridian, deduced from that of Kylasghur. The southing of Karnatighur from Kylasghur is 95144 feet, equal to an arc of 15’ 43’.61 on the meri- dian of Kylasghur; and the easting is 1093.83 feet, equal to 10’.8 of a great circle at mght angles to the said meridian, and passing through Karnatighur. From the nearness of the meridians of these two stations, the former arc may be considered as the difference of latitude, and therefore being subtracted from the latitude of Kylasghur, we have 12° 34 37’.69 for the latitude of Karnatighur. Hence, by using the co-latitude 77° 25’ 22.31, and‘ the small perpendicular arc 10’.8, we shall have the difference of longitude 11.06, and the convergency of the me- ridian of Karnatighur. towards that of Kylasghur 2’.46 nearly. The former of which being applied to the longitude of Kylasghur, will give 1° 47’ 8’.87 for the longitude of Karnatighur from the meridian of Savendroog, E. Now the observed angle at Kylasghur, between the north pole and Karnatighur, was 179° 20° 28".83, whose supplement is 0° 39’ 31°.17, which will there- fore be the angle at Karnatighur, between the north pole and the parallel to the meridian of Kylasghur ; + from which subtract the convergency, we get 0° 39’ 28.71 for the angle between the north pole and Kylasghur, westerly ; and this subtracted from 93* 98 42’.22, the angle formerly taken at Karnatighur, between Kylasghur and Carangooly, gives 92°49: 13'°.51 for the angle between the north pole and Carangooly. The same angle taken at Karnatighur, in 1803, OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 8371 was 92° 49’ 15'.93, but as there is reason to doubt the accuracy of that angle, from reasons already given, to which may perhaps be added the want of experi- ence, I shall reject it and adopt the one now brought out for determining 13. The latitude and longitude of Carangooly Hill. The length of the arc comprehended by the sta- tions at Karnatighur and Carangooly, as determined by the triangles in 1803, was 291196.9 feet, which, as an oblique arc, according to the present scales, will be equal 47° 56".21. Let P be the pole, K P Karnatighur, and C Ca- rangooly ; and therefore KC the oblique arc = 47 56".21.: “Then if * the observed angle at Carangooly, be made use of, (which must be ac- curate enough for this purpose) we have sine 4 PR: sine 2 PCK’ 3: & sine KC: sine angle C K’PC equal 49’ 2’.9. the difference of longitude. Hence 1° 47’ 8.87 + 49° 2”.9 = 2° 36 11.77, the longitude of Carangooly from the meridian of Savendroog. And as sine angle PCK’: sine K’P :: sine © PK’C > PC = 77 27 42".2, the co-latitude of Carangooly, whose complement 12° 32’ 11’.8 is therefore the la- titude. 14. Latitude and longitude of Balroyndroog, with the position of its meridian. | As the atmosphere was so extremely dull when * As determined in 1803, equal 87° 00’ 07.54. Bb.gZ * 372 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL the pole-star observations were made at Balroyndroog, the angle between its meridian and the station at Mullapunnabetta, could not be taken, we must there- fore depend altogether on computations made with the oblique arc, the latitude of Mullapunnabetta, and the angle at that station with the N. pole, and the station at Balroyndroog. Let M and B be the r stations at Mullapunna- vii betta and Balroyndroog vd ” respectively, and let P be the pole, then hav- ing given PM equal 77° 4’ 54.41, BM.-the: ob- lique arc equal 52'4.2".12, and the observed angle PMBequal75°52'54.95, B we shall 6btain by sphe- tical computation the side BP = 76° 59’ 08.4 the co-latitude, and the an- gle BPM. 52°°28”.94 the difference of longitude, which add to the longitude of Savendroog from Ca- rangooly hill, and Alullapunnabetta from Savendroog, there will be 4° 29’ 05.15, the longitude of Balroyn- droog from ‘Carangooly hill. Taking the latitude thus found for computing the azimuths, the pole-star observations at Balroyndroog will stand as foilow : j ayn Angle between |Angle between the N. sibel el Latitude} Azimuths. — jthe Pelecton and Pole and Referring Month. it Referring Lamp. Lamp. Feb. 20. | 1° 43' 34.15 1° 46’ 21".05| 56° 46’ 43".50| 55°00 22°.45 ” 25h 43 34.89) or 1 46 21.73} 56 46 43.75| 55 00 22.02 24.) 1 43 35.06) 5 1 46 21.98} 56 46 43.25} 55 00 21.27 2on ried 43; 35.35) “I 1 46 22.25) 56 46 43 55 00 20.75 26.) 143 35.57) & 1 46 22.50) 56 46 44.5 | 55 00 22 27.) 1.43 35.80) = 1 46 22.74) 56 40 44.25] 55 00 21.51 % 28. ] 1 43) 36 .03 1 46 22.97| 56 46 43 .44] 55 00 20.44 a rn RR A AE Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp -+++++++++++] 55 00-21 .49 N. Bs 378 | places on the two coasts in lat principa OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA, citude. 15. Reduction of some re) tude and lon "S 56°63) M 9Z90F PEOFS [A'S FO SS OLfeese++ atopeppngl-+ wusodopugay, *S 6POL8T)'M O68E9 .1SE8 e9eZ8 |M'S 16 Sh All-+ tunrodapueanu) 'S LOPOIZIM OFIOS |S CcEggis| L00E3 | 'S CF SE Lt|+eeee+ Alraqoipuog] + uoNnvig URIOOT © "S SE8SEOsrM 9662E QOFLS | SSEES TT ‘S SS OS BI}: -uONLIG UePeIOOTA| +++ + [IF] floowunesg "N OZES6I!A GOVOLZSTIN FIGST |: FIGST | “N Sl OO O |{1oyeasasqG sespeyy]- - asnofpy s, Korqaopy "N OSPLLI"H SOOLTIN 1966S 13036 |'A "N $1 OL FO]+-asnoy sAarquoyq "N GOOZ61)'A SOOIFITN LOFGS 6EZStla "N 2G 23 8Gl-+ aBx00y “1G WOAl+ + «> [EET apodeynyy *S QOPSSIM TLISS 1S QOFSSTMTLISS lOPSFSI AAS OF FI Poles ++ +++ -ploortusag "N GOSLEIA SOLPH TN SOSZEI] A SOTPP |SOPPFIA (N10 2b oLl[++++*+ oapodeyjnyy|>- igs soesurieg "aay "4295 *jaaJ "Joay "aay ‘UeIpMoT, | *oipuedsag | ‘ueipey | ‘oipuediag *Apoosuerey ‘SISIq] | Jo UvIpLey ayy 07 | ‘*pojndaiod soor[d LV SNOTLYLG paliojat ssulvog — ES | er ay} uo Ajoosuviey woz saoueysig ay} WO saeuLysIq unjnaipuaduad spr wmosf puy ‘unpruioapy joy7 wosf 870) JopULUoIOD ay? uo svan)d UIP} -199 fo sagunysyp ay}? pun ‘sjajynavd spr pun Kjoosurirg fo unrpriapy ay) YRM ‘sasup ayy Summjywoy “SF AIAVY, "S LETZOSIM 66FSS |'S TIGOLI|M SLZEF [ZFSOLIV AAS TS GS Pifeee ees Ansayopay ‘S OSOE9T| M TILEL |S FOOTSIIA OSGES |ZZOLZEI" MAS GS GH GElesse+* GlouRUURD]-- afowlEpuVippey, "S QBSISEl| T2569 |'§ S35EO "A TOISEIOOTOHI\A “S OL CG FO}++ sjowepurippRy) — ‘S O5800FM 18642 1S OSZIEII"M ZOTOT ISLIZEllM ‘S SO SBF leoese Uflq wNoy| Aypnueyeppnpunysy "S €O989TI'A\ 63899 |§ SOLZOTl"A OSOFL [OFIOSI!'A “S OF LE Ge} Aymueyeppnpuny "§ LOISOZ"A G686EE1|S HOOTOTIA OB6E |TSOTOI|A “GS GE BL G |ereessse++ yaeg)++++++++ KudwoopH "S OS99TM 6O66EI\'S OSZOF |M SOSES [066FS |W 'S 6B 8O Gelr+++ INET Aedmooy = "N 80086 1M OSS903/'N FIZET |'M PES68 IZOZIO [MIN 89 ST Sziereers osopesueR soe A ee "S SSLOLTVM OFSOLT/S SSLOLTTM OFSOLIISPOFOT) AN 'S 9 ,2¢ PE oseees Aynmeyng)+++- sooipudoajyeg “Joos “joaj ‘Joop *joaj *jaay ‘ueIpLiayy | ‘ompuediog | suerpuayy | ‘oipuodiog *Sooapusoyeg ‘sysiq, | Jo uvIplayy oy} 0} | ‘poyndaroo sooxyq LV SNOILVLG aqj} HO 5001p : Aaja SSULwO -~uso.neg wiry s90ur}st gy i ae tod | a s ee Se upjnaipuadsad sjr moist pun “unipriayyy yoy} wo.tf 78P09 Ieqe|PIN, ay} UO saonjd UID}.L29 0 sa9uD}sip ayy pup ‘sjajyvand sp pup Soospusosjeg fo umprsayy ay) ypia sapcup ay) Summzuoy “1 ATAVL 1p ay} P 192] a4 pusos|eg "pt 374 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL By table the first, AZangalore flag-staff is west from the meridian of Balroyndroog 206380 feet, and south 98008 feet from the station; and these converted into arcs according to the above scales, will give 33’ 58” and 16’ 12” respectively, and the latter arc added to the co-latitude of Balroyndroog (equal 76° 52’ 8”.4) gives 77° 08 20" for the co-latitude of the point where a-perpendicular from JZangalore will cut the meridian of Balroyndroog at right angles. Then as Rad. : Cos. 77° 8 20" :: Cos. 33’ 58” (the perpendi- cular) : 77° 08' 22”, the co-latitude of Mangalore. And again, as Tan. 33’ 58”: Sin. 77° 08' 20" :; Rad. > Cot. 34 50’, the difference of longitude between Balroyndroog and the flag-staff at Mangalore, By proceeding in the same manner with the other places on that coast, we shall have their latitudes, and their longitudes from the meridian of Balroyndroog as follow: Longitudes from Latitudes. | Balroyndroog. Names of Places. Mangalore Flag-staff ++---+++| 12°51’ 38" 0°34’ 50" W. Baekul Fort S. E. Cavalier ----} 12 23 32 0 22 55 W. Mount Dilli Station «+--+. --e+-: 12 O1 41 0 12 47 W. Cannanore Flag-statf ---+-+-- 1 ap Lie | 0 02 38 W. Tellicherry Flag-staff +++--++- 11 44 52 0 0417 E. By table 2d, the observatory at Jdfadras is 127009 feet east, and 193370 feet north from the station at Carangooly, which converted into arcs give 90 54.45 and 31' 57’.78 respectively ; which being applied to » the meridian and its perpendicular, passing through the observatory, and computing spherically, as in the last case, we shall obtain 13° 04 8”.7 for the latitude of the observatory, and 21° 27°.81 for its longitude east from the meridian of Carangooly. And by pur- suing the same method of calculation, we shall have certain places on the Coromandel coast referred to the meridian of Carangooly as follow : OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 375 Longitudes from Names of Places. Latitudes. Carangooly. Madras Observatory +++++++- 13° 04' 08".7 0°21' 27".81 E. O 23 44 E, 0 03 20 W. 0 06 48 W. Fort St. George Church Steeple} 13 04 45 Pondicherry Flag-staff --+++-+++| 11 55 56 Cuddalore Flag-staff-«..++++++ 11 43 23 The difference of longitude between the meridians of Carangooly and Balroyndroog, by Art. 14, is 4° 29° 15.15, to which add the longitudes of the different places from the respective meridians, as heretofore deduced, we shall have the difference of longitude of those places which lie nearly in the same parallels of latitude as follows : Difference of longitude between the observatory and Mangalore, - - : - = - - - 5095 W3 Church in Fort St. George and ditto, 5 27 45 Pondicherry and Cannanore, - - 4 28 13 Cuddalore and Tellicherry - <- 4& 18 Here it may be proper to notice that in the requisite tables, the difference of longitude between Fort St. George and Mangalore is 5° 27 25", within 20" of what is here given; but the difference of longitude between Cuddalore and Tellicherry is 4° 8 42, differing no Jess than 9’ 18" from the triangular measurement, ' 376 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRIGAL APPENDIX. TABLE of LATITUDES and LONGITUDES of somé of the principal Places, as deduced from the Operations in general. Nott. In the abbreviations H signifies hill; P pagoda; and Dg. droog. In all pagodas the tower is meant, unless otherwise specified; or, if they are stations, the platform is generally the place where the instrument stood, and is mostly marked by a small mill-stone. All places having the asterisk (*) annexed to them are the stations of the large theodolite, and are distinguished either by platforms with large stones in the middle, having small circles inserted thereon; or if on a rock, the circle is inserted on the rock: and in’ both cases the centre of the | circle denotes the point over which the plummet was suspended. Names of Places. ALLAMBADDY Fort«: sie csc. ASP? PAAMIANGOY Ele @ ap'eice oS ole we dU Acide UIC El os « 3:45 alnemidia hidsisite sige ALLUMPARVA Fort 12°27 14°.) 4° 8°23” W. | 76° 8 7” EB. BHAVANY P. --++- sees see e eens 11 25 45 2 34 19 77 42 11 * Bodeemulla -------++- sete eens 3.12 41 1 10 55 79 5 35 BoDEELIMRAUZ De. ++e- eee rece 12 26 17 Be BS 78. DAT BoLconDAH Dg.-+ esse cree ee eecees 12 37 15 2 -8 14 78 8 16 * Bomanelly H. and P. -+---+-++-+- 13 16 18 ree Ae 76 39-2 * Bonnairgottah «+++ -++-+s-++eeeeeees| 12 48 45 2 40\4 77 35 49 * Booggargooda ++++ esse eeeeeeeeee 138 3 4 515-16 75 114 * Bullamully --++ +--+ -eeeeeeeeeee 12 48 33 5 10 14 156: 1G * Bullanaugooda -+++++++ +--+ veeeee! 12 45 12 5 (5°28 Th Bs} 2 * BuNDHULLY Dg.----- cece ce eeee 12 12 16 2755 42 | 77 21 28 Busmuney Dg. ----- bane eeeeeee 3 44 DA 3:12. 57 | PRABNBS ByRAN Dg. ee ecce ee cece ee eect eeee 13. 5 41 3 4 47 77 11:43 CANANORE FORT, Flag Staff ----| 11 51 11 453 1 | 75 23 29 * Carangooly H. +--+ +e++ceeee reece 12 3212 | 0 21 98 | 79 55 2 CAVERYPOORUM FORT ++++++e+ee- 11 54 43 2 29 36 | 77 46 54 CAUVERYPAUK FORT ++ +eeeee seeees 12 54 15 0 47 18 | 79 29 12 CuHaLaAmcoTran Large Tree ------ | 13-26 50° | 2. 7-36 | 78 3805 CHARGUL Dg.---+ eee eee e eee ee eens 12 53.18. |-1-36°19 | 78 40 11 CHAYLOOR FORT — eeseeceeeeeeees 48,96 37 3°2y +I 76 55 29 * Cheetkul H. +--+ +-+e sees eeeeeeee 13519 16...) 2:56) 890 th Thess Chendragherry Fort --------- eseee| 12 27 53 5°85) ¥S eyeeape tae * Chencaud +--+-+ cee ce cece ceenee 11 66°56 +O 39e4e | 79 36 45 CHENROYN Dg. e+e eee eee cee cence 3 35 49 3: 2-43 77 13 45 CuInGLEPET Fort Flag Staff-.+--.-- 12 41 59 0 16 12 80 0 18 CHINI Dg. eee eee ee cee rece ee meee 12 42 18 1 42 19 78 34 11 CHINEROYPUTTUN ++ +eeee ee eerees 12 54-9 3 51-53 76 28 37 Chittepet H. -+--+- sees rere eeeees 12 27 58 0 51 37 79 24 53 Chittepet Mosque +++++++-+-+++-.-- 12 27 55 0-53:58 077922732 CHITTLE Dg. Flag Staff---.-+---. 1413 4 3 51 34 76 24 56 CHITTOOR Fort .-2-+--+--eeeees 13 13-5 19°27 1200R. <3 CHOREEGHERRY Dg. --++-+ ee eeeeee Ete od fp 3-356 TUT 32 CHUNGAMAH -eeereeeeeeeeereceee 12 18, 4 1 97 24 78 49. 6 Coxar Fort P. ----- tte e eee eee +-1 13 8 20 2 649 78.49 41° ConJEVARAM Great Pagoda --+----- 12 50 47 0 32 52 79 43 38 * Coonawaucum H, «+--+ -+eeeeeeee 12 50 56 018 51 79 57/3 * Coonum H. «+--+ eee eee er eee eees 12° 5°20 O 34 12 79 42 18 Covetone Church -++-++++++++eee- 12 47 36 0 0:5 E. |-80 16 35 CUDDALORE Flag Staff----- ‘eeees! 11 43 23 0 28 16 W.| 79 48 14 CuRPAH Fort -+++ sere seecee neces 13 14 39 3 24 11 76 52 19 * Daesauneegooda -----++--- ceeeee) 13 15 46 A 6 34 716: 9 66°’ Darampory Fort --++++-see+e ees «-| 12 3 48 / RA eB 78 11 25 DENKANICOTTAH Fort +++++++++ ---| 12 81 53 22T 53 77 48 37. DEONELLY Fort «+--+ ++-++++++ee+e5| 13 14 59 | 2 32 38 77 43 52 ~* Deorabetta +--+ cere reer eeeees ‘12 37.82 2 37 36 77 38 54 * Devaroy Dg.:--- LE Bile Ocho (0 ve ceeeel 13 22 25 2 9.298 71714 2 * Dodagoontah --++++++++-+++++0+| 12 59 59.9 | 2 37 40 77 38 50 Durrea Bahader Ghur++++++++++++-+] 13 20 13 5 34 14 74 42 378 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TABLE—conTINUED. , Longitude from Names of Places. Latitude. Madras Obser. Greenwich. ENNORE Tree ----... Bhd < uile! «she! ala) ate 13°14 59’ N.| ©? 4/ 42” FE.) 80°21’ 12” E. ERope Fort S. E. Cavalier--+- + eoeee] 1} 20 27 2 31 26W.| 77 45 4 French Rock’s Pillar ...---+.-+e. »e21 12 30°31 3.33 24 7643 6 GINGEE Dg. +. see e eee cece ewes 12 15 18 0 51 19 79 25 11 GoPAUL Dg. seee cece eee eeeeeeaee 12 29 52 2 57 31 77 18 59 GOODEEBUNDAH Dg.eeeeeeeseeeeee 13 40 34 233 3 77 43 27 * Goompay H. cece ceeceweeeceees 12 40 19 5 14 10 75 220 GoonicuL Fort «+++. peceee foesifa) wens 13 1 33 3 13 34 77. 2 56 Gooriattum P..---...e0.- al hres etait ce 12 55 52 1 24 42 78 51 48 GUNGANGHERRY Dg.steeeeeeeeeeee 12 25 54 1 57 47 78 18 43 GURRADAN Dg, eere snes ecccceoene 13 28 54 4 0 47 76 15 43 * Hallagamulla PB. s-++e- sere va. 1 O62 248 54 77 27 36 * Hanandamulla -.+seeseees ie eibhin/ pie 12 55 57 0 51 14 79 15 16 PV Arcetainnieia tetsvate isle ele lets Saipis eater cuenetens L370: Als 4 9 42 76 6 48 Hooty Dg IR Stat atin stig eho talioll vie Sip tel eleitete ere 12 49 13 2.13055 77 3 25 * Hunnabetta +--+ see eesees veces LS Giryd Ap SAND 75 45 18 THUNNAMUN Deg.eeeeee sere ce ceeeee| 13 55 41 419 38 75 56 52 HHURROOR FORT «ee cesccceuce eee 12¢ 5.2) .50 146 1 78 30 29 AV DEUR GET RV iois ise ple slsarecelstelens,s eralete| OS AZ iG 5:15. 27 7) whe S JAINKUL Dg. ++ seee ees StBhiahs phere) Aenea 13 54 35 3 59 50 76 16 40 JEMALABAD Flag Staff -----.++--.. 13.1 34 4 57 46 75 18 44 KARKUL FORT ceoecoccnecesceces 13 12 34 5 15 36 75 O 54 * KARNATIGHUR ccoceseceses eoeee! 12 34 38 1 10 31 79 5 59 Kasragooda Fort------ Shoes eceeees 12 29 36 5:16,,.3 75 0 27 Kaumun Dg. -..----. the Gils) oebaleccns 14 14 59 2 58 44 77 17 46 Kaup Battery «+++ +++ eeeeeeeeeeee| 13 13 Dt 5 S14 7445 9 KISTNAGHERRY ¢+essecesecsececee| 12 329.15 Bi Bi iG 78 14 21 Koapiconpau Dg, -++++-- seeveee! 13 49 49 228 24 77 48 6 KONGOONDY Dg. eee eeeeeeeeceee 12 46 3 149 0 78 27 30 HIOOMIDAT. PORT) © eties celeeise ses celts] LP) S36). .5 519 6 74 57 Qh KOONDAPOOR Fort+«++seeceeseeees! 13 38 10 5 34 11 74 42 19 * Koondhully H. -«+++++-+eeeeeeee-] 12 39 33 429 21 7547 9 * Koondoorbetta>++-++se.ee. eeeeees! 12 51 16 418 19 75 58 11 Kopa Dg. --ecesene cones ; eMeeekiees 32 3 456 5 75 20 25 Kow ae Dg. OS SERIO ve ele wien wisiGieveles io eaio vio Di Se QE 75 8 .3 * Kuddapoonabetta -++++.+++. sees] 12 55 37 5 22 29 74 54 1 Kur Dg. +++: ose slain siete eecceesees!| 13 38 47 4 20 56 718 55; 32 * Kulkolah -2-e-- sseccccvcece eeee! 13 25 14 239 9 77 37 21 * Kumbetarenemulla -->........00+ 11 35 31 2 58 57 77 FHSS * Kunduddakamully -++--...++.- »-| 12 23 28 § 139 77 14 $1 * Kunnoor H.---»---+..s.eee0e ve2e] 12 51 55 1 259 79 A3 39 * KYLASGHUR ees ceeocesseees --1'12 50 21.3 1 10 42 79 5 48 Mack Ly Dg. sere cere eee eeeeee --| 13 25 58 245 4 77 31 26 MADRANTICUM Py ees eee eee eeceens 12 30 36 0 43 12 79 33 18 Manras (Observatory) +++++++++++- 13 4 8.7} 0 00 00 80 16 30 * MAILLACHERRY Dg. ++++++++++++| 12 16 6 0 52 32 79 23 58 Maricotrau H. and P. +--+ +eee- -| 12 39.57 3 36 9 76 40 21 MAHARAIH Dgseecveersceeeseceed 12 53 St 419 40 75 56 50 OPERATIONS IN TABLE—contTINUED. THE PENINSULA. 379 a ks ST Ea cn Names of Places. Latitude. * Mullapode Fcc ces eocnse — os twee 12°. 54! 56” N. MAtvavit_y Fort (S. W. Cavalier) | 12 23 0 MANGALORE Fort (Flag Staff)-- | 12 51 38 * Mannoor let cle.clprele wiad!'s a0 lo, « ¢\60s6's 13 O 39 Marakerra (Tree) -+++++++++++ re+-| 12 26 20 * Maumdoor H. alae > 18,6 pie u.ele o.cgis os 12 44. 4:4, Mepacasuie Dg. Mosque ----+--- 13 49 54 * Meejar Hill eoceee Cenpevesceescne 18° "3°2) MIncHICUL Dg ab cis wisio sie 'eseis ‘ola soos! 13 Q7 AT MoopaBIDDERRY P, +++ sewer eeees 13 4 24 Moopuwappie Dg. «------ seeseeee| 12 40 57 WIGGEICY Orie s + spaces ncccovcesses| 19 § 19 MONJERABADs cos cece ccesccces acc to 55 cz: % Moratan Gisle’e.s.< pis o'§ es 5 Pon age ees il 58 30 * Mount Dili’. +o 2-02 dec ccsepe oe Oe Ad Mount St. Thomas’ (Flag Staff) «- 13% 0 ZO MuppuKSERAH Dg, -++++++++++--- 13 56 41 IMUDGEHERRY Di. ee ccc ccc ester cece Tos O01 7 Muglee H. (Stone) +--+-+-+--++-++-- | 13 9 59 MMULcLANAIG P, -+ cece ec cvcce secs! 12 44 43 * Mullapunnabetta 2 ROME ROR Cee OE ee Boer | 12 55 6 Mutwacc.e Dg. ++++++---+s- +e+-| 13 10 14 * Mungot erect als blots. + 91s' as 9\ oo evae 3 | 31-081 Muntapum N. of Bangalore -------- 13 0 45 * Mylum H. a nicie iaieliaiolaialipte tole, atevelaete 12 7 54 MYSOOR FORT (High Cavalier) --} 12 18 21 * Mysoor H. eee essere cere ee cces 12 16 40. Naggerry Nose ce ns, oes edie ele d siaisl ss 13 22 50 NAGMUNGATUM Fort+++-+-++-- ese] 12 49 11 NARRAIN Deg. op wie wind 0 dic s'0 eee es 12 42 45 NARRICUT Dg. eee eee e rr ccc cer ece 13 7 54 * Naudkaunee----:- eelced ve ccece oe NOL55S 5 -Neppicut Dg. (Muntapum) ------ 14 9 81 Necicut Dg. (Pillar) --+---- 13 14 50 NUGGUR (BEDNORE) Flag Stall 13 49 10 _* Nunpy Dg ele .o' piaie' a) wie piece. s.essieval ste 13 22 12. NUNJENGODE P.-++-++-++s sete reese Be Fg OvEA Dg. «-se sees rece ceeeee cess] 12 36 55 OosscoTTa (Eedgah) ++++++++++++| 13 4 21 Oossoor H. and P. «esses eeeecees 12 43 33. ‘OOTRAMALLOOR Fort «+-+++ee-eees 12 36 55 OoTUR Dg. +eeeee cere ceees o wrovelsiond 12 57 40 OyMUNGGUL Fort -+++++-++--+> coeel 14 5 44 PATTICONDAH P, eeoeeerereeees eel 12 54 45 * Patticondah +--++e+se++se+-- erees! 138 10 25 * Paudree ) oO 1S) -|Yerracondah - -|3396.9 50 |,1,|)Savendroog «+ -|4004.9 oat nn ies) ~I nr S bo |. | Mullapunnabetta |3406. 7;|Koondhully « « + - /4366.3, 53 |.{Bullamully +--+} 774.5) | nN o>) — iS) 6 |1,|Kudapoonabetta 318.7} SEP RDU PUEDE OSE RUD RO MSCS USooneE oo ¢ = _— ne Stat.ontheBeach| 22.6, The station on the beach above the low-water mark by measurement+++++++- Difference or error++++ess+} tticondali « «+ -|Yerracondah atticondah --+-!Bodeemulla ---- odeemulla ---++|Patticoudah --.. Yerracondah. --|Rymandrocg Rymandroog --|Yerracondah Rymandroog. --|Nundydroog Nundydroog -|Rymandroog - Nandydroog - Devaroydroog -- Devaroydroog --|Nundydroog-+-- Yerracondah --|Tirtapully +--+. Tirtapully Hill. -/Yerracondah Tirtapally Hill --|Bonnairgottah .- Bonnairgottah . efPistapuly Hill - Bonnairgoitah --!S. end of the Base S, end of the Ba Ase Raticaippottals-- Savendroog ---. Bandhullvdrone: Bundhbully ----|Savendroog -«-. orabetta --+-|Ponnassmulla -- Ponnassmulla --|Deorabetla ---. onnassmulla --!Paulamulla --.- Paulamulla -- --|Poonassmulla Paulamulla ----{Woorachmulla - - Woorachmulla --|Panlamulla ---. ee - --|Deorabetta ++. rabetta ----|Bonnairgoltah - oorachmulla - -|Shennimulla- - Shenninnlla ease Woorkehmalla- Shenninmlia---.|N.W. end of Base 0 N.W.end of theB !Shennimulla - 0 Shennimulla---- Puckopalliint? -+/0 uchapolliam --|Shennimulia -- - -|0 N.W. end ofthe B |S. E. end of a 0 E.endof the B. |N. W. eud of Base)0 Bonnairgottah --|Dodagoontah .-. 0 irtapully Hill. - Allasoor Hill - 0 llasoor Hill --|Tirtapully--.... 0 lasoor Hill --|Kulkotah --..../0 ulkotah -++-+.+-|Allasoor Hill ../0 ulkotah ----+.|Yerracondah - -|0 rracondah_ --|Kulkotah --..-.|0 erracondah --+|Bomasundrum - -|0 omasundrum -+|Yerracondah --/0 erracondah --|Paughur ---+++|0 ‘aughur -+-+++/Yerracondah --|0 endroog sees Cheetkul eeeeesiO See biretes bss se sess seesess om A ee el “I jo Or . IRMAS Oo) = i Ce a Gr Go as wore ow me AS o@>) DOS ROUPOSSoororomsyeD PODOS ROU mEOUUUE Ue moo mbyY er a re ye er ere Gee Ne ee ee te etm a Ne rt a rte Nap rae i ae rd lyme NaN ad ee OPERATIONS IN THE PENIN (pe) — oo 12 wm Co — Nj i) Or _ bed re) ~~ to = ie) “I ive) to “J =" no m— or © © fea) ce \ ™ — Or wo- Ns ——_— a : Apparent. 4 x _ STATIONS AT Stations Observed. yea D2 Se E ‘s es i Ss cx Ps ae is erracondah --)Patticondah --../0°21° 29 an TSULA. 383 8. Stations not lying in the nearest direction between the two seas, and commencing trom Kylasghur. Elevation above the Sea. Stations. Heights. 6° });|Patticondah - «+ «|2942.7 lv wis 19 {4 v 35 20;* 1} 53 }/5|Bodeemulla ----|1646.6 Rymandroog ++ /4226.3 zo|Nundydroog --+|4856.8 q'7|Devaroydroog + -13940.2 z3|Tirtapully+ ees. 3182. 3|Bonnairgottah --|3305.1 A5|S. end of Base - -|3023.6 7 7|Bendhullydroog 4254.5 1J}Ponuassmulla + -/4928.3 Paulamulla «-++|4958.3 sts, Woorachmulla « -/2472 ';\,| Deorabetta ----|3408 1) Shennimulla - +++ |i788.0 51; N. W. end of Base| 1060.3. Puchapolliam --|1010.4 S. E. end of Base} 925.5 ;!,|Dodagoontah --|3037.9 All !asoor Hill --{3380.6 #;|Kulkotah ++++++}3406.6 ‘|Yerracondah ++|2848 ,},|Bomasundrum - «|2037.7 j,|Paughur ++-++- 3052.6 .|Cheetkul «+--+ /3329.3 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL TABLE—CONTINUED. SO 3s $ Elevations above the Sea.) STATIONS AT Stations Observed. a fin = 3 $ PS: * Cheetkul Hill --|Bailippee «+++ 0° 25 si 50" | padinnee aaa Bailippee «-+++- Cheetkul ++++-- 0 656 E|g '9 >? 3 oe Bundhully -|Kombetarene --j}0 3 26 E t ier ul Kumbetarenemulla |Bundhully -{0 36 23 D. 36°56 | /3|Kuethetanne Bundhully -|Mysoor Hill----{0 29 27 D. sg Mysoor Hill----|Bundhully ++--|0 6 13 D. Mysoor Hill----|Bettatipoor ----}0 © 11 D. t 34 Bettatipoor ----|Mysoor Hill----|9 30 4 D. A Mullapunnabetta |Bettatipoor Hill |O 5 6 E. i 29 Bettatipoor Hill |Mullapunnabetta |0 50 58 D.| Mullapunnabetta | Bomanelly -10 18 52 D. 29 Bomanpelly ---+-|Mullapuanabetta 0 8 42 D.j/§ ~~ ° Bomanelly +---|Daesauneegooda }0 O 6 E. i 98 ‘Daesauneegooda {Bomanelly -]0 25 55 D| x Daesauneegooda |Hannabetta «++-/0 13 30 D.|] 25 Hannabeita ----|Daesauneegooda |0 9 27 D.|f ~ Mullapunnabetta |Balroyndroog --|/0 7 3 D. 52 Balroyndroog --|Mullapunnabetta jO 41 16 D. Bettatipoor ----|Taddiandamole |O 8 15 E. 32 5 Taddiandamole |Bettatipoor ----|0 37 30 D. ‘1 ; Taddiandamole |Mount Dilli----|1 56 5 D.| 26 27 |;4/Mount Dilli--+« Kunduddakamully|Taddiandamole {1 17.19 E.} 24 34 =i-|Kunduddakamully Kunduddakamully|Baekul «+--+... 1 31°47 D. ; f Baekul «------- Kunduddakamully|1.21 40 E. 11 33_j7s|Baekul a Bullamully -+++|Kunnoor Hill --|0 29 53 D. , BS it Kunnoor -+--.- Bullamully 019 35 E. t 11 16 Kunnoor + us Koondhully --+-|Soobramanee --|2 22 57 E. 4 32 },4|Soobramanee Koondhully «--+|Koondoor Hill--|Q 25 49 D. ay A Koondoor Hill--/Koondhully ----|0 11 25 E. t 15 54 |s5 Koondons aang Meejar [Hill --++|Kudapoonabeita |O 23 31 D. 9 52 |+-|Meejar Hill +++} ¢ Meejar Hill ---- Boogeargooda 0 > LE 16Vp tay oie Booggargooda - - Meejar Hill----|0 2 23 D. i 3 59 |1;|Booggargooda +--+} Stat.on the Beech|Kooliebogooda |0 14 39 E. py ae Kooliebogooda- -|Stat. on the Beach|O 17 55 D. t 6 5\% Kooliebogooda > | | » a VAX Mate 5. ys dn Account of the Mater Prant, which furnishes the Medicine generally called CoLumMBo, or COLOMBA Root. BY DOCTOR ANDREW BERRY, Member of the Medical Board of Fort St. George. Kauumes of the Africans. CotomsBa, or Cotumgo of the Shops. ]. is spelt Kalumbo by the Portuguese, in whose lan- guage the o is mute, and from this the name origi- “nated, by which this valuable root 1s known in Europe. It is a staple export of the Portuguese from Mozxam- bique, and from the. quantity exported, it is remarka- ble that the place of its growth, should have been so long unknown or doubtful to the rest of Europe. Ir is never cultivated, but grows naturally, and in abundance, in the thick forests, that are said to cover the coast about Ozbo, and i/oxambique, and inland about 15 or 20 miles. ‘The roots are dug up in the month of March, the dry season; or when the natives are not employed in agriculture; not the original root, which is perennial, but offsets from its base, and that of sufficient size, yet not so old as to be full of fibres, which render it unfit for commerce. Turs root is in high estimation among all the 4/r:- cans, even far removed from Mozambique, for the cure of dysentery, which is frequent among them ; for ve- nereals; for all complaints of Jong standing ; in pow- der for the cure of ulcers, and as a remedy for almost every disorder. Vou.X, Ce 386 ACCOUNT OF THE MALE PLANT Soon after it is dug up, the root is cut into slices, strung on cords, and hung up to dry in the shade. It is deemed merchantable, when, on exposure to the sun, it breaks short; and of a bad quality when it is soft, or black. ‘ I am indebted for the above account of the columbo root, to Mons. Forrin; who, when at Mozambique, purchasing it as an article of trade, procured an entire offset from the main root, of a larger size than usual ; which he brought with him to Madras, in September 1805; and presented it to Doctor James ANDERSON, the Physician General ; who considered it a valuable present to himself, and a great acquisition to Jndia. Tuts root was cylindrical, somewhat flattened on the opposite sides; about 15 inches in Jength, a part being broken off; and between 3 and 4 inches in diameter ; outwardly the common colour of columbo, but on breaking the surface, which is covered bya thin, ten- der, brownish pellicle, of a fine yellow. Tue root being succulent, and heavy, I planted it horizontally ina large box, filled with garden mould, where, in about a fortnight, it shot out two stems from the end that had been broken off from the parent root, but from not being vigorous, no flowers were then pro- duced ; and in about six months, from the time it had been planted, the stems withered down tothe ground. ~ Txe root was then carefully taken up, which was not altered in size, or appearance, but from the end oppo- ‘site to where the stems had shot out several fusiform roots, or sessile tubers, had grown, as represented in the accompanying drawing, (fig. 2) These had evi- dently suffered from confinement in the box; none of. : ; “~ . = es alate ee ee 7 Oe -Rapix perennis, ramosa; rami fusiformes. _Cavutis annuus, post sex, aut septem menses marcescens, volubilis, CALLED COLUMRO OR COLOMBA, 387 the roots were then separated, and the whole was depo- sited in acool room, and covered with a moist sand ; where in about two months, the old root began again to throw out several buds from the same end as before. It was now planted in the ground, when one more vi- gorous shoot, which grew rapidly, soon destroyed the others; and in a month this shoot produced male flowers only, nor after the strictest search, could any other be found on the plant, so that the genus is as yet uncertain. Tus stem, like the former, withered insix months, when the roots were dug up, and found considerably larger, but not much altered in shape, nor had any of them attained a size to be compared with the original. There was only the addition of one new Jateral root or branch, from this second year’s growth. As it was supposed that these roots would now vegetate, they were detached ; which has been unfortunate, as several months have now elapsed, and no buds have formed : they are however still very fresh, and may yet orow. From this it appears that only large roots are fit for planting out. ‘From the male fiowers, and habit of the plant, the columbo seems to-belong to the natural order of Sar- mentacee Linn, or Menisperma of Jussieu. The follow- ing description may help to decide. Pianta Herbacea. simplex, teres, pilosus, crassitudine penne. Fora alterna, petiolata, semipedalia et majora, quingueloba, quin- quenervia ; lobis integerrimis, acuminatis. Perioxt teretes, pilcsi, “basi reflexi, folio paulo breviores. Cc2 388 ACCOUNT OF THE MALE PLANT, &c. Mascuttr Flores. Racemy axillares, solitarii, compositi, pilosi, folio breviores. Pe- dunculi partiales alterni, floribus sessilibus. Bractes lanceolate, ciliata, decidue. Caxyx Perianthium hexaphyllvm ; foliolis equalibus, tribus exteri- oribus, tribus interioribus ; oblongis, obtusis, glabris. Cororta hexapetala, minuta, Petala cuneato-oblonga, concava, carnosa, obtusa, stamina ambientia. Sramina, Fi/amenta sex, corolla paulo longiora. . Anthere qua- drifobe, quadriloculares. PistiitLu™M nullum. EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES. Fig. \. Tue extremity of the shoot that flowered in 1807, rather smaller than the natural size. 2. The whole root, about one-third of the natural size only. 4 One of the bractez. . The underside of one of the flowers. e The upperside of the same. These three are magnified. 6. One of the petals more magnified than the last three. 7- The underside of one of the stamina, in the en- larged apex of which the four polliniferous pits are seen. 0 i et ee Vi Ox Sanscrit and Pra’crit Porrry. BY HENRY THOMAS COLEBROOKE, ESQ. fe design of the present essay is not an enumeration of the poetical compositions current among the Hindus, nor an examination, of their poetry by maxims of cri- ticism recognized in Europe; or by rules of composi- tion taught in their own treatises of rhetorick; but to exhibit the laws of versification, together with brief notices of the most celebrated poems in which’ these have been exemplified. Aw inquiry into the prosody of the ancient and learned Janguage of India will not be deemed an unne- cessary introduction to the extracts from /ndian poems, which may be occasionally inserted in the supplementary volumes of Asiatick Researches: and our transactions record more than one instance of the aid which was de- rived from a knowledge of Sanscrit prosody, in decy- phering passages rendered obscure by the obsoleteness of the character, or by the inaccuracy of the tran- scripts *. It will be found similarly useful by every person who aunt that language; since manuscripts are in genere! grossly incorrect; and a familiarity with the metre will frequently assist the reader in restoring the text where it has been corrupted, Even’ to those, who are unacquainted with the language, a concise ex- planation of the Jndian system of prosody may be cu- rious, since the artifice of its construction is peculiar, = A pee a rr * Vol. I. p. we Vol. IL. i 389. c 3 3g0 ON SANSCRIT AND and not devoid of ingenuity: and the prosody of San- scrit will be found to be richer than that of any other known language, in variations of metre, regulated ei- ther by quantity or by nuinber of syllables, both with and without rhyme, and subject to laws imposing in some instances rigid restrictions, in others allowing ample latitude. I am prompted by these considera- tions to undertake the explanation of that system, pre- mising a few remarks on the original works in which it is taught, and adding notices ot the poems from which examples are selected. Tue rules of prosody are contained in Sé/ras or brief aphorisms, the reputed author of which is Pinea- LANA GA, a fabulous being, represented by mytholo- gists in the shape of a serpent; and the same, who, un- der the title of Paransatt, is the supposed author o the Mahabhdshya, or great commentary on grammar, and also of the text of the Yoga s’dstra * ; and to whom likewise the text or the commentary of the /yétish an- nexed to the Védas +, appears to be attributed. The aphorisms of PinGaLa’cua’kyA, as he is sometimes called, on the prosody of i ae: (exclusive of the rules in Précrit likewise ascribed to him), are collected “4nto eight books, the first of which allots names, or ra- ther literal marks, to feet consisting of one, two or three syllables. ‘Lhe second book teaches the manner, in which passages of the.Védas are measured. The third explains the variations in the subdivision of the couplet and stanza. The fourth treats of profane poe- try, and especially of verses, in which the number of syllables, .or their quantity, is not uniform. The ee oe ee * Or Sénc’ hye system of philosophy ; distinguished from that of Cariza. + In thesubscription to the only copy of this commentary, which © I have seen, it is ascribed to SesHanaGA; but, inthe body of the “work, the commentator calls himself SOMACARA. PRA CRIT POETRY, 391 fifth, sixth and seventh exhibit metres. of that sort which has been called monoschemastic, or uniform, because the same feet recur invariably in the same places. The eighth and last book serves as an appen- dix to the whole, and contains rules for computing all the possible combinations of long and short syllables in verses of any length. Turs author cites earlier writers on prosody, whose works appear to have been lost: such as SaiTava, Crausutica, Ta’npin, and other ancient sages, Ya’sca, Ca’s’yapa, &c. Pincata’s text has been interpreted by various commentators; and, among others, by HeLa’yup’HA BHATT A, author of an excellent gloss entitled Mrita sanjivini *. Itis the work on which I have chiefly re- lied. A more modern commentary, or rather a para- phrase in verse, by Na’Rra’yYAN’A BMAT'T'A TARA’, under the title of Vrislécti ratna, presents the singu- larity of being interpreted throughout in a double sense, by the author himself, in a further gloss entitled Parieshé. Tue Agnipurdn’a is quoted fora complete system of prosody -~, founded apparently on Pineawa’s apho- risms; but which serves to correct or to supply the text in many places; and which is accordingly used for that purpose by commentators. Original treatises like- wise have been composed by various authors t : and among others by the celebrated poet Ca’tipa’sa. In * I possess three copies of it ; two of which are apparently an- cient: but they have no dates. 4 itis stated by the authors, who quote it, (NARAYANA BHATTA and others,) to be an extract from the Agni purana: but I haye not been able to yerify its place in that Purdna. ~ Such are the Vinbhishana, Vritta-derpana, Vritta-caumudi, and Fiitta-reinacara, with the Chhandi-manjari, Ch’ handi-mértanda, Cl handi-mala. Ch’ handi-niviti, Cr’ handé-gevinda, and several tracts under the title of Vritta-muetdvali, besides treatises included in Cea s 392 ON SANSCRIT AND a short treatise entitled S’ruta bé@ha, this poet teaches the laws of versification in the very metre to which they relate: and has thus united the example with the pre- cept. ‘The same mode has been also practised by many other writers on prosody; and, in particular, by Prn- GALA’s commentator Na’ra’yan’A BHAT T’A; and by the -authors of the Vritra Retnécara and Vritta der- pan'a. Ca’tipa’sa’s S‘ruta bif'ha exhibits only the most common sorts of metre, and is founded on PINGALA’S Précrit rales of prosody ; as has been remarked by one of the commentators * onthe /ritia Re/ndecara. | Tue rules, generally cited under the title of Prderit Pingala, have been explained in a metrical paraphrase, teaching the construction of each species of metre ina stanza of the same measure, and subjoining select ex= amples. This Prdcrit paraphrase, entitled Pigala vritti, is quoted under the name of Hammira +?, who is celebrated in more than one passage given as exam-_ ples of metre: and who probably patronised the au- thor. It has been imitated in a modern Sanscrié trea- tise on Prédérit prosody entitled Vritta muctavali+ ; and has been copiously explained in a Sanscri# com- mentary named Pingala pracasa §. —, en ee ee works on other subjects. For example Var AHAMIHIRA’s system of asiro ogy, which containsa chaster oo prosody. Thie Vritta-retndcara CEDARA BHATTA, with its commentaries by DivacaRA BHATTA, NARAYANA BHATTA and Hari-BMASCARA, bas been the most consulted for the present treatise. The Vritta- derpona, which relates chiefly to Prac/it prosody, has been also much einployed. | * DivacaRa BHATTA. f In the commentary on the Writtocti ratna, t The author Durcapatra was patronised by the Hind*pati princes of Bunitlc hand. The examples, which like the text are Sanscrit in Pricrit measure, are in praise of these chieftains. § Ly ViswaratTua. (4% ¥ B ost se ‘J pue & 2° Sug PER I ebay bie usw Oie bw Repke Bly t | POS wBaReye RRQ bey eue tte XR U Ape bwu Py pinta jets GbE eeyb 1 RE} eR t bpp) ep Bibte neers ILA ft se Rube frig we eyPrb} 2 tbh & ens Ih Sent 2b |S BERS eer bseee Le HR WryRess ed ieresuintys Ube LPB | REP US eR Bese dni urizin 2m E2e} WDE Wee ewE Rey ye ch: Pew yL27b | bier Bhuj eeOB: Rey PB Eee eyes ‘'g WL Wek GPa. ibs kein Eh Be biw epiewe ewe eer te 2S tim Oo “Jo =f* eyo —]° 4) -O} -o-j2° oc! -a yur WR Peek cewees ae BEB Bi? eR VERE BED ee Ueete Wot Whielee eine binant rieive eee fileB eIbD Bayt PL2e YE eiPIPP Rika eB 1 QS Hue AMR ep Lb Re es he Bitey ey nie Bak (PE HY IE Bie olebiv elie dyin rice WSL wypice PM WEIR Yuli Ze te PEbIP ie 2b el ejabie bite Phe e ‘E°Phd WEBER RES EE ete Eo Ae t— -j--lo-ol- gO f= -[==-; —-jao- Pei thei Brite lek eee bot -f0 Soy -—i--j--i-—-eoe — 'e 8ey i tbe? Bezee Berme ot nigh Zeb e REEL Neen :er GS weye te reipin eoibie hw: Habe: ereeite ‘£90 00d TLE Ta vata big. 6. R fa Awa ZAG Maviz wea: | ~ ~\ wafeafain atnarfafara Hata A MarANg ANT TATA ~ ~ € Fig. 8 Aifgans any wialaaafaara | Ada? a ARAaTA | naVAana _ waqrA _ ae = = Vy - ww & sw FF wT Ho pe me Rewer & F & © > ee Ge oo ce eee eR ae mh eid othe! f B & a ya a on € y & 5 RY = hy ff b= x ee = 0 mM « sS = ie x ie fo Ww = fe be me 1e © e Wow Mm. ge wr Er r &, 3 e p> - ws a w % 6 ae & By ye & Cn Dew jerdibict PILE by ga N eBibleviclie BH PREY | BOE tee Fig. 7. Taanyafuanrarfaamafafmaaraag: | aransa aafyaniz Vw TATA {fafanaa y Yen watafaaifa ~ c ARE Quan ‘EC aafza a 2 aA GA ~ Aca mMargggaafanegaca ang oy qn ya zyfant: sez Re safya-fqans: 1 WOE “oe as o 7 io cf ow. Ez oe = Ce & re ° \o/ wy x at re oy & ‘= a a ro we C= eEwees Pe ee ee wie Bw eS Sy fee Ge BY ao Fp @ ¢ ‘tao eB € = fe. ) = RY ee Se Gx ko Be ene rt a a oY ae €< rE Bey be i f= Agee a ft tt Es ee pr UE, pe © Bae 3 S = Se-42 =7, Se . Fe pugoM a. ete == =e ne & Lh is r ay ec op -AerS — PRA CRIT POETRY. 393 'Tuouen relative to Prdcrit prosody, the rules are applicable, for the moft part, to Sauscri¢ prosody alfo : since the laws of ‘versification in both languages are nearly the same. Tue Précrit, here meant, is the language ufually employed, under this name by dramatick writers; and not in a more general fenfe of the term, any regular provincial dialect corrupted from Saascrit. He’ma- CHANDRA, in his grammar of Pricrit, declares it tobe so called because it is derived from Sanserit*. Accorpinexy his and other¢grammars of the lan- guage consift of rules for the transformation of Sanscrit words into the derivative tongue: and the specimens of it in the Ivdian dramas, as well as in the books of the Juins, exhibit few words which may not be traced toaSanserit origin. This is equally true of the several dialects of Précrit : viz. S‘auraséni or language of S’u- raséna,t and Mégad'hi or dialect of Magadha;¥ which according to grammarians, who give rules for dedu- cing the first from Sanscrit, and the second from the first,§ or both from Sanseri/,|| are dialects nearly allied to Précrit, and regularly formed by permutations, for which the rules are stated by them. The same may be ay a EE ES *Sre PrareA. Fig. a. + Curtuca BHATTa (on Menv 2. 19.) says, that Suraséna is the country of Mat’hura. + Cleataor Bihar. But it does not appear, that either this, or the preceding dialect, is now spoken in the country, from which it takes itsmame. Specimens of both are frequent in the Jndian dra- mas. § Vararucnt, and his commentator BHAMAHA. || HemacHaAnpRa, who, affer ftating the fpecial permutations of these dialects as derived from Sanscrit, obferves in both places, that the reft of the permutations are the same with thofe ot Praerit, | 394 ON SANSCRIT AND said of the Pais’dchi, as a language, (and distinguished from the jargonor gibberish which either dramatick wri- ters, or actors exhibiting their-dramas, sometimes put. into the mouths of demons); for the grammarians of Précrit teach the manner of forming the Pais’achi* from the dialect called S’auraséni.~ Vhat remark may be also extended to Apabhrans‘a as a fixed language partaking of Pracri¢ and S‘auraséni, but deducing ma- ny terms immediately from the Sanscrit under rules of permutation peeuliar to itself. { Tue affinity of these dialects of Pracrit to the San- serit and to each other is so great, that they recipro- cally borrow, notwithstanding their own particular rules, terms permuted in the manner of other dialects, and even admit, without alteration, words inflected ac- cording to the Sauzserit grammar. § They may be, therefore, considered as dialects of a single language, the Prdcrit or derivative tongue ; so termed with re- ference to Sanserit, from which it is derived. Besipks these cognate dialects, the dramatjck writers introduced other languages as spoken by different per- sons of the drama. Such, according to the enumeration in the Séhitya derpan‘a, || are the Dacshin’atya, ¥ or lan- guage used in the south of India; the Dravi'di or _-_—_—- * Or language of the Pistéchas, [See PrateA. Fig. b.) Boama- ga on VARARUCHI. ? + Vararvucat and Hemacwanpra. Thelast mentioned author notices a variation of this dialect under the name of Chulicapadisachi ; which differs very little trom the proper Paisdcht. \- J It is taught under this name by HemacHAaNDRA, among other dialects of Pracrit, But the name usually signifies ungrammatical language. § Hemacuanpra ad finem. Pon? s. {] Some with Vaidarbhi, according to the commentator of the — Sthitya derpana. The country of Viderbha is said to be the modern _ Berar proper, PRA CRIT POETRY. 305 dialect of the southetn extremity of the peninsula; the Avanticéd (probably the language of Md/ava) ;* the Ard ha magad hi, distinguished from M/agad hi proper- ly so called ; the Béhlictbhashd, perhaps the language of Balk in the Transoxana) ; ~ the Mehardshtri or di- alect of the Marhattas; the Prachyé or language em+ ployed in the east of India; ¥ the Absiri and Chindah, which from their names, seem to be dialects used by herdsmen and by persons of the lowest tribes; the Sénearé and Sdabar?, concerning which nothing satis- factory can be at present suggested ; ; and generally any provincial dialect, _, Ir is not to be supposed, that the Préerit rules of prosody, as taught by Pineata, are suited to all these languages: but it is probable, that they were framed for the same dialect of Prderit, in which they are composed; and they are applicable to those cognate dialects, which differ much less from each other (be- ing very easily confounded), than they all do trom San- serit, their acknowledged common parent, Generally those rules may be considered applicable to all the lan- guages comprehended under the designation of Pré- crit, \ as derivative from Sanscri/; and certainly so to the vernacular tongues of the ten nations of Hindus now in- habiting India, Awniter on Sanserit prosody|| pronounces ES SE * Avanti is another name of Ujayani. + Bahlica ot Behlica (for the word is spelt variously (is a country famous for the breed of horses. Amena.2. 8.45. It appears to be s'tuated north of India ; being peationcd 1 in enumerations of coun- tries, with Turushca, C’hasa, Casmira, &c.(ABMACHANDRA. 4.25. Tricanda s ésha.2. 1. Q.) _ $ The commentator on the Satitva derpana (Rama CHakan ka); tea pacts Prachya, by Gaudiya; meaning, no doubt, the language of Bengal. He was himself a natiye of this proyince ; and his woik is modern, being dated Saca 1022 (A. D. 1700.) - § As. Res. Vii. p. 219. | Nagayana pearta ina commentary: on the Vritta retnacara written in Sambat 1602 (A. D. 1546.) 396 ON SANSCRIT AND the various kind of metre to be admissible in the pro- vincia]l languages, and has quoted examples in those of Mihdarasht’ra’, Gurjara and Canyacubja. The last mentioned, which is the same with the old Mindi, as 1s demonstrated by this specimen of it, might furnish very numerous instances; especially the Aimaz poetry of Cr’sava pa’sa,* who has studiously eniployed a great variety of metre. Some examples will accordingly be quoted from the inost distineuished Hindi poets. The sacred books of the Sikhs, composed ir a Perabi dia- lect, which is undoubtedly derived from the ancient Séreswata,t abound in specimens of such metre. The language of Mishild, and its kindred tongue, which prevails in Bengal, also supply proof of the aptitude of Sanscrit prosody; and the saine is probably true of the other four national languages, ¢ Pincaua’s rules of Sanscrit prosody are expressed with singular brevity. ‘The artifice, by which this has been effected, is the use of single letters to denote the feet of the syllables. Thus L. the initial of a word signifying short (/ag’/a), indicates a short syllable. G. for a similar reason,{ intends a long one. The combi- nations of these two Ictters denote the several dissylla- bles: Ig signifying an iambic; gl a trocheus or cho- reus; gg a spondee; lI a pyrrichius. ‘The letters, M.Y.R.S.T.J.Bh. and N, mark all the trisyllabical feet, ~ from three long syllables to as many shorts A Sgn- * Contemporary with Jewancrr and $Hau JeHan. + The remaining Saresqwata Bra/manas inhabit chiefly the Penjab. I Those of Dravida, Carnataca, Telinga, and Odra or Udiya. 1 omit Gaura, The Brahmana:, bearing this national designation, are fettled in the distriets around De/hi: but, aniess theirs be the lane guage of Mathura, it is not eaty to assign to them a parucylar na- » tional tongue, § Being the initial of gurz, long. FRA‘CRIT POETRY. 307 serit verse is generally scaued by these last mentioned feet; with the addition cf cithera dissyllable or a mono- syllable at the close of the verse, if necessary. This may be rendered plain by an example taken from the Greek and Latin prosody. SCANNED in the Jndian manner, a phaleucian verse, instead of a spondee, a dactyl and three trochees, would be measured by a molossus, an anapzest, an amphibra- chys and a trochec; expressed thus, m.s. j.g.l. A sapphic verse would be similarly measured by a cretic, an antibacchius, an amphibrachys and a trochee; written r. t. j. gol. To avoid the two frequent use of uncommon terms, I shall, in describing the different sorts of Sanscrit metre, occasionally adopt a mode of stating the mea- sure more consonant to the Greek and Latin prosody, in which the iambic, trochee, and spondee, dactyl, ana- peest, and tribrachys are the only feet of two or three syllables which are commonly employed. In Précrit prosody the variety of feet is much greater: verses being scanned by feet of different lengths from two mdtrds, (two short syllables or one long) to three, four, five and even six mésrds or instants. ‘These vari- ous descriptions of feet have been classed, and denomi- nated, by the writers on this branch of prosody. Tue verse, according to the Sanscrit system of pro- sody, is the component part of a couplet, stanza or strophe, commonly named a S’/éca, although this term be sometimes restricted to one sort of metre, as will be subsequently shown on the authority of Ca’zipasa. gy ‘ r 398 ON SANSCRIT AND The stanza or strophe consists usually of four verses de- nominated pada; or. considered as a couplet, it com- prises two verses subdivided into padas or measures. Whether it be deemed a stanza or a couplet, its half, called ard’has’ loca, contains usually two padas; and in general the pauses of the sense correspond with the principal pauses of the metre, which are accordingly in- dicated by lines of separation at the close of the sJéca and of its hemistich. When the sense is suspended to the close of a second S‘/éca, the double stanza is deno- minated Yugma; while one, coniprising agreater num- ber of measure, is termed Cu/acz. In common with others, I have sometimes translated s‘/éca by ‘* verse,” or by “couplet; but, in prosody, it can only be con- sidered as astanza, though the pauses are not always very perfectly marked until the close of the first half: and in conformity to the Indian system, it is generally treated as a tetrastich, though some kinds of regular metre have uniform pauses which might permit a divi- sion of the stanza into eight, twelve, and even sixteen verses. In Précrit prosody, a greater variety is admitted in the length of the stanza; some species of metre being restricted to a true couplet, and others extended to stanzas of six and even sixteen verses: independently of pauses, which, being usually marked by rhyme, would justify the farther subdivision of the stanza, in- to as many verses asthere are pauses. Even in San- scrit prosody, instances occur of stanzas, -avowedly comprising a greater or a less number of verses than four: as three, five, six, &c. But these are “merely exceptions to the general rule. } / PRA’CRIT POETRY. 399 ConcerNninG the length of the vowels in Sanscrit verse, since none are ambiguous, it is only necessary to remark, that the comparative length of syllables is determined by the allotment of one instant or md/ré to a short syllable, and two to a long one; that a natural- ly short vowel becomes long in prosody when it is followed by a double or conjunct consonant ;* and that the last syllable of a verse is either long or short, ac- cording to the exigence of the metre,t whatever may be its natural length. Sanserit prosody admits two sorts of metre. One eoverned by the number of syllables; and which is mostly uniform or monoschematic in profane poetry, but altogether arbitrary in various metrical passages of the Védas. The other 1s in fact measured by feet like the hexameters of Greek and Latin: but only one sort of this metre, which is denominated A’ryd, is acknow- ledged to be so regulated ; while another sort is govern- ed by the number of syllabic instants or mdérdés. mm rrr pe es ST EE * Or by the nasal termed Azuswara, or the aspirate Vitarga. By poetical license, a vowel may be short before certain conjuncts (viz. as in Prate A. Fig. c.) This license has been borrowed from Pracrit prosody, by the rules of which a vowel is allowed to be sometimes short before any conjunct, as before the nasal: but in- stances of this license occur in classical poems with only four con- juncts as above mentioned; and, even there, emendations of the text have been proposed by criticks to render the verse conformable to the general laws of prosody, (Seeremarksin the Durghat'a vritt; Cumara.) ; + This rule of prosody is applicable to any verse of the tetrastichs : but it is considered by writers on rhetorick inelegant to use the pri- vilege in the uneven verses; and they thus restrict the rule to the close of the stanza and of its half, especially in the more rigid spe- cies of regular metre. 400 ON SANSCRIT AND 1. Gan'ach' handas or metre regulated byfeet (mdird- ganda.) A’nrya’ or Ga’ r’Ha’. Tue metre, named A’ry4, or in Précrit, Gaha, from the Sanscrit Git hd, is measured by feet denonnated an’a, or matragan‘a, which are equivalent to two long syllables or to four short: it is described as a couplet, in which the first verse contains seven and halt feet; and the sixth foot must consist of a long syllable be- tween two short. or else of four short; while the odd feet (ist, 3d, 5th, and 7th) must never be amphibra- chys.* In the second verse of the couplet, the sixth foot (for here too it retains that name) consists of a single short syllable. Consequently the proportion of syllabick instants in the long and short verses is thirty to twenty-seven.- The same metre has, with some ropriety, been described asa stanza of four verses a ae it is subdivided by its pauses into four padas, which have the usual privilege of going to the last syllable, whether naturally long or short, the length required by the metre. ‘The cause is commonly restricted to the close of the third foot; and the measure is in this case denominated Paffydé: but, if the pause be placed otherwise in either verse, or in both of them, the metre 1s named Vipulé. A PARTICULAR sort of this measure, deduced from either species above described, is called Chapalé ; and the laws of its construction require, that the second and fourth feet should be amphibrachys; and that the first foot should be either a spondee or an anapest; and i _* ; apreite > ; * If the rule be violated, the metre is named Gurvini; bnt this ts. reprobated by writers on prosody. + As Res. Vol. Il. p. 390. } Vritta mustavali. PRA CRIT POETRY. AOi the fifth, a dactyl or aspondee. ‘The first verse of the couplet, the second or both, may be constructed ac- cording to these rigid rules: hence three varieties of this sort of metre. Tue regular 4’ryé consists of alternate long and short verses: but, if the short verse precede the long one, the metre iscalled Udgiti. If the couplet consist of two long verses, it is named Gi/z; or of two short verses, Upagiti. Another sort of this metre is named Arya giti: itis sopatncted ne completing the eighth foot of the regular dry Tuis measure admits nee of eighty principal variations ; deducible from the nine sorts abovemen- tioned: for the pause may be Placed at the close of the third foot in either verse of each couplet, in both, or in neither; and either verse, both, or bat Ped may be constructed according to the strict rules of the Chapala measure; and the verse may consist of seven and a half, or of eight feet; and may be ar- ranged in couplets consisting of verses alternately long and short, or alternately te and long, or else uni- formly long, or uniformly short. Tar A’ryé metre is very frequently employed by Indian poets; but works of great length in this: mea- sure are not common: it is oftener intermixed with verses of other kinds, though instances do eccur of its exclusive use : thus the first and fourth cantos, and most part of the 2d and 3d, in the poem entitled’ Nalodaya, and the entire work of Go’veRD HANA ‘+, are in the. A ryé metre. And so is the brief. text of the Sane hya ee eS * It may be varied by alternating a Jong and a short verse, or a short and a long one, or by making both verses long. , ¢ Consisting of seven hundred (or with the introduction 755) stanzas of ‘misce}laneous poetry; and entitled from the number of stanzas Sapte sai. Vou. ps Dd . AO2 ON SANSCRIT AND philosophy of Caria, as taught by Is’wakacrisu- w’s.*; and the copious treatise of astronomy by Brau- MEGUPTA. . Tue Nelodaya abovementioned, which is ascribed to the celebrated poet Ca’Ltpa’sa, isa poem in four can- tos, comprising 220 couplets or stanzas {; on the ad- ventures of Nana and DaMayanri: a story which is already known to the English reader §. In this singu- lar poem, rhyme and alliteration are combined in the termination of the verses: for the three or four last syl- lables of each hemistich within the stanza are the same in sound though different in sense. It is a series of puns on a pathetick subject. Ir is supposed to have been written in emulation of a short poem (of 22 stanzas). similarly constructed but with less repetition of each rhyme; and entitled from the words of the challenge with which it concludes, Ghata carpara. [See Prater A. Fig. 1.] .* Turrsty and touching water to be sipped from the hol- low palms of my hands, I swear by the loves of sprightly damsels, that I will carry water in a broken pitcher for any poet by whom I am surpassed in rhymes.’ ' ee * Author of the Carica or metrical maxims of this philosophy. Sutras, or aphorisms in piose, which are ascribed to Carica bim- self, are extant: but the work of Iswara Crisuna is studied as the textot the Sanc’hya (As. Res. Vol. VIII. p. 466.) t Entitled Brahmesphuta sidd’hanta: other treatises, bearing the same or « similar title, are works of different authors. 1 Chiefly Arya, with a few anapestic stanzas (Totaca), and 2 still sma! ler numberof iambics and trochaics (Pramani and Samani.) § -Translated by Mr, Kinwersiey of Madras, from a tale in the provincial languace, eae 3 PRA’ CRIT POETRY. A403 However, the epick poem of Ma’e’Ha, which will be mentioned more particularly under the next head, contains a specimnea of similar alliteration and rhyme ; the last fourteen sianzas of the sixth canto, (descriptive of the seasons,) being constructed with like terminations to each half of the stanza. Instances will also be cited from Bu a’ra vi’s poem hereafter noticed. Tue following example of a species of the 4’ryé me- tre is taken from the preface of the Nalsdaya. A'ryaé giti (8 feet). [See Prare A. Fig. 2. | “* Tue king celebrated under the name of RaMa *, exists, who is conversant with the supreme ways of moral conduct ; in whose family, exempt from calamity and enriched with the gems of the earth, dependants flourish.” 1. 5. Tue next is taken from DAMAYANTI’s lamentation on finding herself deserted by her husband Nara. It is in the same species of metre. 26. Tatra, padé vyalinam, at’la vibhran:am vané cha devya, “Lindam, tanu-vrindé vyalinam tatin dad’hané, taya ’spadé vyalinam. . 27. Véga-bala’ pasitaya, Venya, Bhaimi yuta lalapa ” sitaya. z Nripa! sa-calapa ’ sitaya hatwa ’rin, bandhavan cila ’ pasi taya. -28. Sa cat’ham mana-vandnam, Nyayavid! acharasi sévyamana- vananam, D’hrita-sima navyanam, - Déranam tyagam, anupama! *navananam. re se * Rama Rasa, by whose command the poem was composed. So the commentators remark : but it remains uncertain who he was, or where he reigned. - Dd.2 AOA QN SANSCRIT AND 28. Para-critam état twénah [tu énah} Samarami, tan na smrito si mé tattwéna, Dosha-samétatwéna pradushayé na’tra sambhiamé tat twéna! (twa, ina!]” [See Plate A. Fig. 3.] ‘Tren the princess wandered in the forest, an abode of serpents, crowded with trees which resound with the sweet buzz of bees, the resort of flocks of birds. With her dark hair dishevelled through her haste, Brarmi thus lamented:’ “ King! thou slayest foes, but defendest thy kindred, with thy quiver and thy sword. Unrivalled in excellence and con- versant with morality, how hast thou practised the desertion of a wife proud but left helpless in a forest; thus rendering thyself the limit of praise? but I consider this evil to be the act of another; and do not charge thee with it: I do not blame thee, my husband, as in fault for this terror.’ 3. 26—29. X In the passage here cited, some variations in the reading, and greater differences in the interpretation, occur: with which it is, however, unnecessary to de- tain the reader. After consulting several scholia, the interpretation, which appeared preferable, has been selected. The same mode will be followed in subse- quent quotations from other poems. I. Métraéch handas or metre regulated by quantity. /1.° Varra’nr’ya. Awornen sort of metre, regulated by the propor- tion of méfras or syllabick instants, is measured by the time of the sy!lables exclusively ; without noticing, as in the Ganach handas, the number of feet. It is there- fore, denominated Maé/réich’ handas, and the chief me- tre of this kind is named /aitdliya. At is a tetrastich oF strophe of four verses, the first and third containing the time of fourteen short syllables; and the second and “a PRACRIT POETRY. AO5 fourth, sixteen. The laws of its construction impose that bath verse shall end in acretic and iambic; or else in a dactyl and spondee *; or, by bacchius-. In regard to the remaining moments, which are six in the odd verses, and eight in the even verses of the strophe, it must be observed as a general rule, that neither the second and third, nor the fourth and fifth moments should be combined in the same long syllable ; nor, in the second and fourth verses, should the sixth métré be combined with the seventh. ‘That general rule however admits of exceptions: and the name of the metre varies accordingly f. Antuoves the Vaitdiya regularly consist of alter- -nate short and long verses, it may be varied by making the stanza consist either of four short or four long verses; admitting at the same time the exception just now hinted §. Tue following is an example of a stanza composed in a species of this metre: | * This variety of the-metre is named A paralica, + Thus augmented, the measure is called Aupach’handasica: the whole of the last canto of Macua’s epick poem hereafter men- tioned is in this metre: and so is the first half of the 13th canto ina Buaravi’s Ciratarjuniye. t In the even verses of the strophe, if the 4th and Sth moments be combined in one long syllable, contrary to the general rule abovementioned, the metre is named Prashya vritti or, in the odd verses, if the 2d and 3d moments be so combined, the metre is de- nominated Udichya vrit#i: or the rule may be violated in both in- stances, at the same time; and the measure then takes ahe name of Pravrittaca. -§ Atetrastich, consisting of four short verses of the sort called Pravrittaca, is named Charuhasini: and one comprisio g four long verses of that description is termed Aparantiea. Did. guia A406 ON SANSCRIT AND Vaitd lya (Pravrittaca). Idam, Bharata-vansa-bhtibhritam, sruyatam, srutt-manérasayanam, pavitram, ad’hicam, subhédayam, Vyasa-vactra-cat’hitam, PRavVRITTACAM. [See PLate A. Fig.4.| « Listen to this pure, auspicious and pleasing history of the kings of the race of BHARATA as uttered from the mouth of Vyasa.” ‘Here, as in most of the examples given by the cominentator Ffena’yup’Ha, and by other writers on prosody, the name of the metre occurs, but with a different acceptation. Where the stanza has the ap- pearance of being a quotation (as in the present in- stance), it might be conjectured, that the denomina- tion of the measure was originally assumed from the example; and this conjecture would appear probable, wherever the name (as is frequently the case,) has no radical meaning connected with the subject of metre. ' But, in many instances, the radical interpretation of the word is pertinent and has obviously suggested its application as a term of prosody; and the stanza, which is given as an example, must therefore have been purposely constructed to exhibit the metre by words in which its denomination is included. This is confirmed by the circumstance of some of the words being incom- patible with the measure which they designate: and in ‘such cases the author apologizes on that ground for not exhibiting the name in the example. Tue Vaitdliya metre has been employed by some of the most eminent poets; for instance, in the epick poem of Ma’e’Ha, the 16th canto of which is chiefly in this measure, as the 20th and last canto PRA CRIT POETRY. | 407 is in that species of it which is called Aupach hand- asica. Tue work here mentioned is an epick poem, the subject of which is the death of S’1s’upa‘xa slain in war by Crisun’a: it is entitled S’7s‘updala-badha, but is usually cited under the name of its author, whose de- signation, with praises of his family, appears in the concluding stanzas of the poem. Yet, if tradition may be trusted, Ma’e’na, though expressly named as the author, was the patron, not ‘the poet. Asthe subject is heroick, and even the unity of action well preserved, and the style of the composition elevated, this poem is entitled to the name of epick. But. the Zudézan taste for descriptive poetry, and particularly for licentious de- scription, has disfigured even this work. which 1s other- wise not undeserving of its high reputation. The two first cantos and the last eight are suitable to the design of the poem. But the intermediate ten, describing the journey of Crisun’a with a train of amorous damsels, from Dwdaracd to. Indraprast ha, is misplaced, and in more than one respect exceptionable. Tue argument of the poem is as follows. In the first eanto, Na‘repa, commissioned by Inpra, visits Crisan’s and incites him to war with his cousin, but mortal enemy, S’1s’upa’na king of the Chédis. In the second, Crisun’a consults with his uncle and brother, whether war should be immediately commenced, or he should first assist Yup’ HISHT’HIRA in completing a_ solemn sacrifice which had been appointed by him: the result of the consultation is in favour of the latter measure: and accordingly, in the 3d canto, CRIsHN’A departs for Yup’ HIsH®?’HIRA’S Capital. In the thir- teenth he arrives and is welcomed by the Pa’n’pavas. In the following canto, the sacrifice is begun; and, in the next, S’‘1s’upa’La impatient of the divine honours paidto CrisHn’a_ relate Oh his partisans from the dA AO8 ' ON SANSCRIT AND place of sacrifice. A negociation ensues; which is however ineffectual, and both armies prepare for action. This occupies two cantos. In the eighteenth both ar- mies issue to the field of battle, and the conflict com- mences. ‘The battle continues in the next canto, which describes the discomfiture and slaughter of S’1s’‘upa’La’s army. In the last canto, the king, grown desperate, dares Crisun’a tothe combat. They engage, and in the Jvdian manner fight with superna- tural weapons. S‘is’upa‘LA assails his enemy with ser- pents, which the other destroys by means of gigantic cranes.. The king has recourse to igneous arms, which Crisun’a extinguishes by a neptunian weapon. The combat 1s prolonged with other miraculous arms, and finally CrisHwn’a slays S’1s’tpa’La with an arrow. Tue following example is from a speech of S/1s’v- -pa’LA’s embassador, in reply to a discourse-of S’ary act brother of CrisHn’ nm at an interview immediately pre- ceding the battle. [See Puare A. Fig. 5. ] rey eR bIdYA 2epib VERY etal inte pJEyhtite | :CmbprGtbGt bey Bel beens) Naoke & WAR WWelb SINS ber: PRI2e SESE RBYJ hI PeId oe} | PRIMES gt? nehB ue ERLE tjeb metas 4 WEA WWE De Dipkbey thy ebry De See Mm ny a oe | Bb} wey 2d: 2S weeiBewetiee: bh ie : WOAH reece REED Rye Bi BeyReek Bu je B r . “ > AK Vee yeyb une BYR 2B Be eee Rhee ibd ey s B w \ i : = ft WL At Hwee e Bribe neh ate eeasibehe th S 3 A | SERRE we PREPER-BELB 2p yeikjeypss Re E oR WsberA ie Boobies th hhse Benn byl 2u wy 4 i ibe Se 2einh Beye Sper uaethevienta 2 B n oh y WEN Min BpbArbje Duc yriehe pug tele Zak} & oo m ay Ve LUCE: bye PEs beweayib 2 igre hee Ek A HOE We Tidy eye Beads PR ao? TRE ?A Pe 1B SeupwyS-pe tueyerizeee Ba hyth UW GAS if (DRubHROB webeyee Boh Phi Pe ube te eByey {DERE E Der Qe pybyerywebiwe Pe Beitr S ‘9 OL or : & yy Nejmbje ether elke hyteere jure byte iSeiae & ViRerere Pree het Br BeviE be pyh 9 uy wi & mS W Be peu Be ee ey relryen 2 Bipeure | am te thayi Din beepk te icp PigiebiBe} Ul FAM maqafa Hara My 1! sfas ye ygrsnr Agios Gg OIA fy sofa n enfan ‘peg WIESE wy) [Ep Kwpie Ltpreje) Sipribic}3 is ytumb er EB unlBieihe wuR2G Be: Mes -2ye “g Su ‘Lit bod -Yf AIF TA fafaadautes aafqn:ataisfragaar | ~ TaRer Ba ware 14 II cad Tt AD UANYAYS AT BE = Fans sor stay arfet KH TELE RE Il ATM MARHEAT | fa yQaMyles a Zora I! a fz 3H WOVE STM YZ 3 ! qfagy 4 PRA CRIT POETRY. A417 Tux Cundaliciis composed of one stanza of the metre named Dohé, foliowed by another in the measure called Rold. Theentire stanza consequently comprises eight verses. In this species of metre, rhyme and al- : ~ Jiteration are so appropriate ornaments, that it admits = the repetition of a complete hemistich or even an entire werse: asin the following example extracted from the Pingala vritla. Cun'd'alica or Cun'd' alii. Dhélla maria D’hilli maha, much’hia Méch’ha sarira, Pura Jajjalla mala bara, chalia bira Hammira. Chalia bira Hammira, pai bhara m€ini cam pai. _ Diga maga nahaand’héra d’bili sGraha raha j'hampai. Digamaga naha and’hara anu. -C’hurasanaca 6ila Davali, damafi vipache’ha:maru D’billi maha d "holla. [See Prare B, Fig. ie ‘Havinc made the barbarians faint at the sound of the drum beaten in the midst of D’di//i, and prececed by JagsaLa - eminent above arhlets, the hero Ham™ina advances; and as the hero HamMiRna syanees: the earth trembles under his feet. The cloud of dust, raised by the march of his multitudes, ob- sscures the chariot of. the sun. Darkness spreads with the march of his muititudes, The hosiages of the Kborasanian are slain; th» foe is slaughtered ; and the drum 1 is beatin the mudst of D’hiliz.’ A sTANZA of nine verses, composed of one of five with atetasirich of the metre called Dohd subjoined to it, is deno. inated Rud’d’hé. Here the stanza of five contains three verses of 15 moments each, with two.of 12 and 11 interposed. The distribution of the feet, together with a restriction as to the ierminating one, varies in each verse: and a difference in the regula- tion of the feet gives rise to six varieties which have — distinct appellations. Vou. X. Ee AIS ON SANSCRIT AND Tue Chatushpadica (Pr. Chaupaia or Chaupdi) isa stanza of sixteen verses distributed into four tetrastichs, in which each verse contains 30 moments (scanned se- ven times 4-2), and terminated by a long syllable. This measure is of very frequent use in the poetry of the modern languages. The Rdémdyan'a of TuLast DA’SA, in seven Cantos, a poem held in great estima- tion by Findus of the middle tribes, is composed chiefly in a similar metre under the same name (Chaupdi) and containing the same number of verses (16) in the stanza. It altersates with the Dosd; and very rarely gives place in that poem to any other metre. In this metre the stanza contains the greatest num- ber of verses of any admitted into Pra‘crit prosody. The other measures regulated by quantity are tetra- stichs, except the Ghaf/‘a and certain other couplets, noticed ar the foot of the page*; some of which might have been ranked with more Bron under the next head of uniform metre. Owe other measure which is-placed in this class, but which belongs rather to another, remains to be noticed. It is an wregular stanza of four verses containing alter- nately 17 and 18 syllables with no regulation of their length or of the quantity of the verse or stanza. It is te med Gand ha, or in Pracrit Gand hana. Tue rest of the Précrit metres may be sought’ in the svynoptical tables subjoined to this essay. ne ee ES, ET QS * The Ghattdé and Ghattdnanda, consisting of two verses 3 OF 31 m tras each. In the frst species the pauses are after the 10th and 18th mdtrar; in the other a‘ter the 1ith and 18th. There is also astight diftcrencein the distributioa of the feet (7 times 4 + 3 short; and O13 times 3-5 He Kaan short. ) The Dwipadica has iM cach verse 28 ma'‘tra’s (6-1 five times 4-+ 1 long.) The Sic’ha coatumag the like number, the Chana’ with 41 ma tra’s to the verse, ; d a Laid with 45, are conplstes but the feet are sage regu ate a PRA’CRIT POETRY. Alg THE present may be a proper place for noticing aclass of poetry, which have been even more cultivated 3 in the Précrit and provincial languages than in Sanscrit. Lal- lude to the erotick poetry “of the Hindus. general character, I shall briefly observe, that it is free from the grievous defects of the Hindi poems composed in the stile.and metre of Pers:an verse; but it wants elevation of sentiment and simplicxy of diction. The passion, which it pictures, is sensual, but the lan- guage refined; with some tenderness in the expression and in the thoughts. Among the most celebrated po- ems in tiis elie may be mentioned. the Chaura pancha- sicé comprising fifty. stanzas by Cuaura. and Amaru s‘ataca containing twice that number by Amaru. The first is supposed to be uttered by the poet CHAuRA, who, being detected in an intrigue with a king’s dangh- ter, and condemned to death, triamphs in the recol- lection of his successful love. The other, which isa collection of unconnected stanzas on amatory topicks, is reputed to be the work of the great SANCARA- A’cH ARYA, Composed. by him in his youth before he devoted himself to the study of theology. On its 9 Some of the commentators on this poem have at- tempted to explain it ina devout and mysica) sense, on the same principle upon which Jayape’va’s lyrick poems are interpreted as bearing a religious meaning. The interpretation, however, is too strained to be admit- ted; and though Javape’va’s intention may have been devout, aad his meaning ‘auieaal: AMARU, OF whoever was the true author of the.work bearing this name, is clearly the love of an earthly mistress. Tue most singular compositions in this class of poe* try, and for which chiefly a notice of it has been here introduced, are those in w hich the subject is treated bree 420 | ON SANSCRIT AND with the studied arrangement and formal precision of the schools. I shall instance the Rasamanjari of Bua’- NUDA?TA Mis‘RA in Sanscrit, and the works of Ma- ‘TIRAMA and SuNDARA in Aiind:. Were various des- criptions of lovers and mistresses distinguished by tem- per, age and circumstances, are systematically classed and logically defined, with the seriousness and elabo- tate precision of scholastick writers. As ridicule was not mntendea these poems are not humorous but tri- fling: and I should not have dwelt on the subject, if their number and the recurrence 6f them in different languages of Jvdta, were not evidence that the national faste is consulted in such compositions. Ill. Vara'a vritta; metre régulated by the number - of syllables. Tue next sort of metre is that, which is measured by the number of sy lables : it is denominated Acsharack - handas ot Varu‘a vritia in contradistinction to the pre- ceding kinds which are regulated by quantity; and it may be subdiv ded into three sorts, according as the verses, composing the stanza, are all similar, or the al- ternate alike, or all dissimilar. ) Tuts also is a stanza of four verses (padas), each containing an equal nuinber of syllables, the length of which is regulated by special rules. "The number of _ syllables vartes from twenty-four, toa hundred and four, in each strophe: this is, from six to twenty-six in each verse. ‘There are indeed names in Précrit prosody for verses from one to five syllables, and instances of San- stated, viz. from twenty-seven, to one less cia a thou- sand. But these constitute distinct classes- of metre. Between the limits first mentioned, twenty-one kinds receive different appellations appropriated ( to the : num- of syllables contained in the stanza. PRA'CRIT POETRY. 421 Eacu kind comprehends a great variety of possible metres according to the different modes in which long and. short syllables, as well as pauses, may be distri- buted: and since the four quarters of each stanza may be either all alike, or only the alternate similar, or all different, the variety of possible metres is almost infi- nite. Pinegaxa, however, gives difections for compu- ting the number of species, and for finding their places, or that of any single one, in a regular enumeration of them; or conversely the metre of any species of which the place is assigned: and rules have been piven even for calculating the space which would be requisite for ~ writing down all the various species. In the first class, or kind, wherein the verse consists of six syllables, 64 combinations are computed on the syllables of each verse ;. 4096* on those of the half stanza; and 10,777,216 -— on the 24 syllables which constitute the complete stanza of this class. In the last of tie twenty-one kinds, 67,108,864 combinations are computed on 26 syllables within each verse; nearly 4,503,621,000,000,000, on 52 syllables; and more than 20,282,388,000,000,000,000,000.000,600.600, ona hundred and four syllables which form the stanza. Tue different sorts, which have been used-by poets, are few in comparison with the vaft multitude of possible metres, Still they are too numerous to be all described oe * Viz. 64 uniform and 4032 half equal, + Viz. 64 uniform; 4032 half equal: and 16,773,120 unequal or dissimilar. t A mode of calculating the possible varieties of metre is also taught in the L:/e’vati, a treatise of arithmetick and geometry by Bua‘scaka. ‘This truly learned astronomer was also a poet; and . his mathematical works are composed in highly polished metre. : If “the reader figure to bimfelf Evcrrip in’alcaick meafure, Dioruan- TUS in anapest, or the Almagest versified with all the variety of - Aoratian wietre, he will form on adequate notion of this incongruity. hes 4 A22, ON SANSCRIT AND ‘ at full leneth. I shall therefore select, as specimens, those sorts of metre, which are most frequently em- ployed, or which require particular notice ; referring for the rest to the subjoined tablesis which the various kinds are succinctly exhibited by single letters descrip-. tive of feet scanned in the Jndian and in the Latin mode. In the best Sanscrit poems, as those of Ca’L1pa’sA, Bua’ravi’, S’rHarsHa, Ma’eua, &c. the poet usually adheres to the same, or at least to similar metre, throughout the whole of the canto;* excepting towards the close of it, where the metre is usually changed in_ the lait two or three stanzas, apparently with the in- tention of rendering the conclusion more impressive. Sometimes indeed, the metre is more irregular, being changed seyeral times within the same canto, or even altering with every stanza, Tue Raghava pindaviya, by CaviRa’sa,} is an in- stance of a complete poem, every canto of which ex- hibits variety of metre. This extraordinary poem is composed with studied ambiguity ; so that it may, at the option of the reader, be interpreted as relating the history of Ra’ma and other descendants of Das‘ar- AT HA, or that of Yup’ HIsHT’HIRA and other sons of Pa’xpu. The example of this singular style of com- position had been set by Supannp’uu in the story of Vasavadatia and Ba’NABHATTA in his unfinished work entitled Cadambari; as is hinted by Caviaa’sa. Both these works, which like the Das’acumdéra of Danni, are prose compositions in poetical language, * Writers on rhet: rick (as the author of the Sihitya darpan'a and others) luy it down as a maxim, tbat the metre and style shouldin general be un form in each canto: but they admit occasional deyia~ tions ‘n regard to the metre. ¢ So the author has called himself. - PRA CRIT POETRY. AZ3, and therefore reckoned among poems, do indeed ex- hibit continual inftances of terms and phrases employed ina double sense : but not, like the Réghava péndaviya, two distinct stories told in the same words. Tue following passage will sufficiently explain the manner in which the poem is composed. ‘The first stanza isof the mixed sort of metre named Upajaii, which will be immediately described ; the second 1s in one of the measures composing it, termed Upéndravojra. {Sez Pirate B. Fig. 2.] 56 Matuh s‘riyan sandad’had Indumatyah Slaghyah s‘aratcala invé’du panctch, Asau, prajapalanadacsha bhavad, Ajasya chacré manasah pramodam. 51. Vichitraviryasya divan gatasya Pituh sa rajyam patipadya balye, Purim Ayddbhyam, Dbritréshtra bhadram, Sa Hastisopham sue’ham ad’byuyasa. “ Havine the beauty of his mother InpumMaAmT\, and admirable like the dewy season when it enjoys the beauty of the stars, he (Das’aAra’rHa) made glad the mind of Aya* by his skill in the protection of the people. Succeeding in youth to the kingdom of his variously valiant father, who de- parted for heaven, he dwelt happily inthe city of Aydd’bya’, which was adorned with elephants and upheld the prosperity of his realm.” OrHERWISsE interpreted the same passage signifies - ** Havine the beauty of his mother, and admirable like the dewy season, when it enjoys the beauty of the stars and of the moon, he (Pa’NbDv) made glad the heart of the unborn god, by his skill in the protection of creatures. Succeeding in youth to the kingdom of his father VicniTRavirya* * lgthks Gabe gaara * Asa was father, and Inpumari mother, of Da’sazar HA. Ee4 ADA ON SANSCRIT AND who departed from heaven, he dwelt happily in the peaceful city of /’aslinapura auspiciously inhabited by DuriTaRa’- sHT mas’ 1460. and\51. To proceed with the subject. In general the dif- ferént sorts of verse, which are contained in_ the sub- joined synoptical table of uniform metre, ate used singly, and the stanza is consequently regular: but some of the species, differing little from each other, are invermixed. ‘Lhus the- Indravojra, measured by a dactyl between two epitrites (Sd and 2d), and the Upéndravajra, which begins with a diiambus, may be mixed in the same stanza. ‘This sort of mixt metre (an example of which has been just now exhibited) is de- nominated Upajati : it of course admits fourteen vari- ations ;* or, with the regular stanzas, sixteen. The relief which it affords from the rigorous laws of the uniform stanza, render it a favourite metre with the best poets. It has been much employed by Ca‘ripa’sa, in whose poem on the birth and marriage of Pa’rvartY, three cut of the seven cantos, which compose it, are in this metre ; as are eight out of nineteen in his heroick poem on the glory of the race of Racuv. Tue last mentioned work, which is entitled Raghu-, vans‘a,and is among the most admired compositions in the Sauscrit tongue, contains the history of Ra’ma and of his predecessors and successors from Dini’Pa father of Racuu, to AGNivern’a a_slothtul prince who was succeeded by his widow and posthumous son. The first eight cantos relate chiefly to RAGHU, with whose history that of his father Drui’pa and of his son Asa, if nearly connected. The next eight concern Ra’ma, whose story is in like manner intimately con- * VicuiTravirya was husband of Pa’npu’s mother. + Tb-y have distinct names, which are enumerated in the Ch’ handimértan'da, cited by the commentator on the Vrita Retndcara: as Maniprabha Cintinati, &c. : * PRA’CRIT POETRY. 495 nécted with that of his father Das’aratua and of his sons Cus’a and Lava. The three concluding cantos regard the descendants of Cus’a, from Arit’Hi to ‘Aentvenn’a, both of whom are noticed at consider- able length ; each being the subject of a single canto, in which their characters are strongly contrasted ;_ while the intermediate princes, to the number of twenty, are crowded into the intervening canto, which is little else thanadry genealogy. . Tue adventures of Ra’ma are too well known to re- quire any detailed notice in this place. The poet has selected the chief circumstances of ‘his story, and nar- rates them nearly as they are told in the mythological poems and theogonies; but with far greater poetical embellishments. Indeed the general style of the poems esteemed sacred (not excepting from this censure the Ramayana of Va‘tmi'c1,) is fiat, diffuse, and no less deficient tn ornament than abundant in repetitions; and it is for this reason,.that examples have been se- lected, for the present essay, exclusively from the cele- brated prophane poems. Ka’ma’s achievements have been sung by the prophane as frequently as by the sa-- cred poets. His story occupies a~considerable place in many of the Pura’s’as, and is the sole object of Va’i- mics poem, and of another entitled Ad hya’ima Ra’- ma yaa, which is ascribed to V¥a’sa. A fragment of a Ra'ma'yan'a attributed to Baup’HA’yANA is current in the southern part of the Indian peninsula ; and the great philosophical poem, usually cited under. the title of Yo'ga vasisht ha, is a part of a Ra’ma’yan’a, come prising the education of the devout hero. Among prophane poems on the same subject, the Raghuvans’a and Bhal'ticdvya, with the Rig hava pa'ndavtya before mentioned, are the moft efteemed in Sznserit, as the Ria'ma’yai’a of Tuvas‘ipa’sa and. Ra’machandrica’ of Ce’savapa’sa are in Hindi.. The minor ‘poets, who have employed themselves ‘on the same topick, ‘both = A260 ON SANSCRIT AND in Sanserit and in the Pra’crit and provincial dialects, are by far too numerous to be here specified. Tue other poem of Caitrpa’sa abovementioned, though entitled Cuméra sumbhava or origin of CuMA’RA who is son of Pa’rvati), closes wih Pa’rvari’s wedding. It has the appearance of being incomplete : and a tradition runs, that it originally consisted of twenty-two books. However, it relates the birth of the goddess as daughter of mount Hima’Laya; and ce- lebrates the religious austerities by which she gained S’ina for her husband; after Canparua, or Cupid, had failed in inspiring S’1va with a passion for her, and had perished (for the time) by the fiery wrath of the god. The personages, not excepting her father, the snowy mountain, are described with human manners and the human form, and with an exact observance of Indian costume. — Tue following stanza from a poem in mixed lan- guage, upon the same subject (the birth of Cuma’ra), is selected asa further example of Upaja’t: metre, and as a specimen of the manner in which Sanscri# and Pra’crit are sometimes intermixed. It is quoted for that purpose in the Pingala-vritzt. [Sue Prare B. Fig. 3.] Balah Cumarah ; sa ch’ha-mun‘da-d’hari. Upad-hina hamu écca- nari. Ahar-nisam c’hai visham bhic’hari, Gatir bhavitri. hamari. De’vr’, grieving over her infant son CuMmA’RA or SCANDA, says, «¢ The child is an infant, but he has six mouths [to be fed] : I ama helpless, solitary female; night and day my mendicant PRA’CRIT POETRY. AL husband swallows poison: what resource is there, alas, for 9? me ¢ An instance of the same measure used in the Mara- hat't’a (Maha'ra’shtra) language is quoted by the com- mentator on the Vritta-re/na’cara. It appears, how- ever, from the rhymes, that the verse is there subdi- vided by a pause after the dth syllable. Tue variety of the Upaja’ti metre is increased by the further mixture of two sorts of iambic measure ‘ nated Vans’as ha and Indravans’a’. The first is com- posed of a choriainbus between two diiambi; in the second, the first dissyllable is a spondee instead of an iambic. Instances of this mixt metre occur in Va‘L- mMicir’$ Ra’m'yan'a,* in the Srt-bhi’gavata Purana + and in a metapuysical and theological drama entitled Prabo'd ka Chundr’odaya ft. Tue following example from the drama now men- tioned, exhibits the combination of those four sorts of metre in a single stanza. Vidya-prabédhdédaya-janma-bhimir, Varanosi mucti puri niratyaya Atah culéchch’heda-vid’him yid’hitsur nivastum atréch’- hati nityam éva sah. [Sez Prare B. Fig. 4.] ‘* Varan'asi, the indestructible city of eternal salvation, is the native land of science and intellect: hence, one desirous of observing the precepts by which a continuance of family is cut off, fand final beatitude obtained], is solicitous to dwell there continually.” * In a passase of the Sundara Canda. + Book 10th. ~ Among the perfons of this drama are the paffions and vices (pride, anger, avarice, &c.) with the virtues, (as pity and patience ;) and other abstract notions ; some of which constitute very strange perfonifications, Theauthorwas Crismn’a PANpira, ee eee A28 ON SANSCRIT AND Tus same term (Upcja'ti), 28 descriptive of mixt metre, has been also applied to the intermrxture of two spondaic measures named Vu'to’rm? and Sa‘hni: which are very similar, the first having an anapzest, the other acretic, between a dispondens and 2d epitritus, with a pause at the fourth syllable. Analogous to the first of these are the Rar’ hoddhata’, and Swa'gata’ measured by an anapzest preceded by two trochees, and followed in ‘the one by two tambics ; and in the other by an ionie. These andthe preceding are 1 etres in very coii:mon use with the best poets: and instances of them, will occur in subsequent extracts chosen -for the sake of other measures with which they are joined. THE several sorts. of metre above described are, like the two last, also emploved separately : for insiance the first cantos of the Naishad’ hiva of S’ni'sarnsHa, and Cira'ta’rjunwa of Bua’ravi, as well as that of theepick poem of Ma’cua, are in the iambic measure alles Vans astha ; which recurs again in other parts of the same poems: especially inthe Cira’ta, of which four books out of eighteen are inthis measure. Tue first of the works just now mentioned is a poem in twenty-two cantoson the marriage of Naua king of Nishad@ha and DAMayYanti daughter of Buima king of Viderbha. Itisa favourite poem ona favourite sub- ject : and though confessedly not free from faults, is by many esteemed the most beautiful composition in the Sanscrit language, The marriage of Nata and Da- MAYAN TI, his loss of his kingdom by gaming, through the fraudulent devices of Cal; disguised i in the human, form, his desertion of his wife anal his transformation, her distresses, her discovery of bis wite and his trans- formation, her distresses, her discovery of him, and his restorat.on to his proper form and to his throne, are re- lated in another poem already noticed under the title of + Nalédaya : their acyeht ites likewise constitute an , ’ ¢ PRA‘CRIT POETRY. 429 episode of the A/zha’bha'rata,* and are the subject of a novel in prose and verse, by Trivcrama bhatt a, en- titled WNalachampi + or Damayanti catha'. Sri uar- sHa’s poom, though containing much beautiful poetry according to the Indian taste, is very barren of incident. It brings the story no further than the marriage of Nara and Damaynari, and the description of their mutual affection and happiness which continues not- withstanding the machinations of Cai. The romantick and interesting adventures subsequent to the marriage, as told inthe Nalodaya, are here wholly omitteds while the poet, with a degree of licentiousness, which is but too well accommodated to the taste of hiscountry- men, indulges in glowing descriptions of sensual love. Twe following example of Vans‘ast’ha metre is from the introduction of the Naishad’ hiya’ Vo render the author’s meaning intelligible, it may be necessary to premise, that the mere celebrating of Naxa end Da- | MAYANTi 1s reckoned sufficient to remove the taint of a sinful age; and is so declared in a passage of the Maha'bha'rata. Vans’ast ha metre. ‘Pavitram atratanuté jagad yugé, smrita, rasa-cshalan- ayéva yat, cat’ha; ; Cat’ham na si mad giram, avilam api, swasévinim ‘éva, pavitrayishyati. [Sez Prare B. Vig. 5.] “ How should a story, which, being remembered, purifies the world in the present age, as it were by an-actual ablution, See Ne De ers * From the 53d to the 79th chapters of the Yanaparva. t A composition, in“which prose and’ verse are iitermixed, is ‘walled Champi. 1 AEE aK > A30 ON SANSCRIT AND fail of purifying my voice, however faulty, when employed on this narration.” 4. 3. In the following passage from Bua’ravi{’s Cirdétir- juniya, the last stanza is an example of the Wélini wetre; and the preceding one, of the Pushpitagra; which will be noticed further on : all the rest are in the Fans‘ast'ha measure. It is the close of a reproachful speech of Dravpani to her eldest husband Yup’- HISHT’HIRA, inciting him to break the Compact with Duryoép’nana, by which the Pa’ypavas had engaged to remain twelve years in exile. [See Prats B. Fig. 6.] “ T do not comprehend this thy prudence ; for opinions are indeed various : but anguish forces itself on my mind, when considering thy extreme distress. Thou, who didst formerly repose on a costly couch, and wert wakened with auspicious praise and song, now sleepest on the ground strewed with pungent grass, and art roused from thy slumbers by the dis- mal howlings of shakals. Thy feet, which, resting on a foot- stool adorned with precious stones, were tinged by the dust of the blossoms in the chaplets worn by prosirate monarchs, now tread the wilderness where the tips of sharp grass are cropped by the teeth of stags. Thy person, O king, which formerly gained beauty by feeding on the blessed remnant of the feast given to holy men, now wastes with thy glory, while thou feedest on the fruits of the forest. ‘That thou art reduced to this condition by the act of thy enemies, harrows up my soul. To the valiant, whose courage is unsubdued by the foe, misfortune is a triumph. Relinguishing peace, O king, be active and rouse thy energy, for the slaughter of thy foes. Placid saints, not kings, attain perfection, disarming their enemies by patience. If persons- such as. thee, whose ho- nour is their wealth, who are leaders of the brave, submit to such insupportable disgrac:, then is magnanimity destroyed without resource. If divested of courage, thou deem sub- mission the means of lasting ease, then quit thy bow, the symbol of a sovereign, and becoming a hermit, feed here with oblations the purifying flame. Adherence to the compact is not good for thee, valiant prince, while thy foes compass thy PRA‘CRIT POETRY. A3l disgrace : for kings, ambitious of victory, scruple not the ‘use of stratagem in treating with enemies. ‘Thee, who by force of fate and time art not sunk ii the deep ocean of cala- miiy, dull with diminished splendour, and slow to enterprise, may fortune again attend, as thou risest like the sun with the new born day, dispelling hostile gloom.” 1, 37,46. To return to the enumeration of analogous sorts of metre. A true spondaic metre, named Vidyunmala, consisting of four spondees, with a pause in the middle of the verse which virtually divides the tetrastich into a stanza of eight, is often mixed, as before observed, with the metre termed Gityarya, containing the same quantity in a greater number of syllables. OrueRr measures also containing the same quantity, but in a greater number of syllables, occur among the species of uniform metre. The subjoined note* ex- hibits several species, in whichgthe verse is divided by the position of the pauses into two parts equal in quan- tity, and some of them equal in number of syllables. Farther instances are also stated in the notes, of metre containing the same quantity similarly reducible to equal feet +. Someof the species of metre, which con- tain a greater number of syllables, are reducible, in conformity to the position of their pauses, to this class}. -—— *Rucmavati or Champacamdl4 compofed of alternate dactyls and spondees; Mattd measured by three spondees with four short syl- tables before the.last; Pan’ eve containing a spondee and dactyl, and an anapeest and spondce ; BAramaravila:itd measured by two spon- dees, four short syllables and an anapewst ; Jalodd hatagatd composed of alternate amphibrachys and. anapzest, und several other species ; as Cusuma vichitra, Manigun'a nicara, Cudmala danti, Laland, &c. ‘+ Dod’haca compoted of three dactyls and a spondee; Totaca con- taining four anapzests; Pramitéeshara, measured by three anapests with an amphibrachys for the second foot; Mddd, a species of Chan- dravarii, and some others. we — _ t£ Thus Mattgcridé combines two simple kinds, the Vidyinmdla and Chandravarté.: So Craunchapadé, is composed of two species before- ‘Mentioned, the Champacamdlé and Manigun’a. ; 43% ON SANSCRIT AND Aux these varicties of tretre have a great analogy to the Métrasumaca and other species before described, which s milarly contain the quantity of 16 short, sylla- bles or 8 Jong ; reducible to four equal feet. , Amone the kinds of metre described at the foot of- the preceding paragraphs, the Dédhaca, Totaca and Pramitacshara are the most common. A stanza in the anapzestic measure named Pramitacshara, in which each verse exhibits alliteration at its close, has been already quoted from the fifth canto of the Crra:ajuma of Bua’. RAvVi. The specimen of anapzestic measure Yotaca, which will be here cited from the close of the Na/odaya, is a further instance of alliteration introduced into eve- ry stanza of this singular poem. TotTACa. Ari-sanhatir asya vanéshu s‘uchim padam apadam Apad ama’ padama. Sie’hadan cha yat’haivé janaya Harim yatam ayatamaya tama yata Ma, (See Prats B. Fig. g.) «The luckless and despondent croud of his foes found in the forests a calamitous place of sorrow ; and prosperity was constant to him, who gave happiness to a sincerely affection- ~ ate people, as she clings to Hari, who blesses the guileless.” 4.46, ; ‘ Ir has ‘been. before said, that, in several sorts of metre, the pauses would justify the division of .the stanza into a greater number of verses than four.and in- stances have been shown, where either the number of syllables, or the quantity, would be the same in each verse of a stanza of eight, twelve, or even sixteen short verses. In the following species of metre, the verses of the stanza, subdivided according tu the pauses, are - > = ¥ ‘Se Si Z i. ~ =f a ee oe = f° Se a, ™ ae oe ~ ipa bs wees a A Si iy tere Se ree - j ; peti yawast ae a. ae ” ie eal’ 4 oy PoP ty ‘ Ry oN QaAdx * WSR 1 iY Dik Ue IKUe kU pM SDE PBR be { ub 2hik Phite? hier Phib GB eps 2A hpre 6 Seg 3k Wedd DS BES SbjistuhibsisG 1 YR Myre ybiy Sp uBidib tl WR i some ese ee Ribbeye eid HI we sebisune > prSi2 pith: bu bs WRK Ueber Shweeek bbe bh | suayipele 2 ube: AR berber tru Ne Ue Rave mibesia dy Baepeetaupse| | fteresbh mee lb ieiDh biote nie eR Ut HED Ut} SULPEBEREPIBYK | Ldibspksdeawabeniteys Ri US:detebtpibe | sumees | vy 2 HERS BIZicblberee Sie} | oR | Bb abe mPEiehIhS rhiBs | BBnediewelee Seyi e Ue WDE W eby2e Mer rela wee | eae rhey hoe vlikbye |) o® 1 REpt ets 2s BerWekSe L21wPS hoe TPR UBReOw OE | ibuelaReb se dshie obvebs 1 unheh UsEMEDBuee Shes tt SE} nowewe Sa Bebe epee | Me iwefibs WBE E ds eum bie H (bucuib Sy 3 chu) dujicta|dee Re bh BP ele 2|k Ue | PUB bins bl Be wehwiPOBBPSivek hh? wv ‘9° SU WW RUbReb PIR! JER (PEGI brie bJAyebI Re: kobe | WIRePLy he Yu de vibe DBEIPUEL Zerbhe z SLT 1 PEE a) & 2b wis: be th: AReey ae kee y 8uy WSR HP ete ee 2B pe Hwee ryt REDS Pie Ibe 2 lb wee | Sari -wie Ribble hhhyeme eee Se bE Punky 2yEbjn ‘¢ SU NG. I Ae 3 Bune YB b BPP eOye BP wiloder Bile WP twee Biko war I Repeat’ YHERPSe B2a-wwhl nme woh Bayh eB elbee “SM MRR Rik Loirribe Leuk Le in swufee ) BI eRyeLOLe bia jee I cbigtb Yeats pYhy SB Lsky le ieee ehpoh BYyeLe ek BELLE 2 he Who WHPITPRCCE PEERS IZSE eee pe SS Gye hej beJHuAE Bb 1 Oper eyes 12 bylk PB : bhe eye ER Areb emmy sod basiwew Meyue ‘ger evd') ALIA ‘7 Sug . lig. 8. faa AAA ~ TIAMAISATS faaaa RUA analy) Sudtaazafaifearaa mf qa Yeoyu faye framartataatasishy) Rag ag x aRnaaTyfa a AAR WHAT: | AEA AL YTOAT A o BAAATA i BfeAigamms yatfa pfaft a + \ ayaagatfafa | GaeT2 yaw: sar agi | Man 7 gy ale faat antes a Sf. I YOM AFARS AND 8 ZS ifaRaranr: * IAT Il i e3 < lo waAANIA aA aAfA WAR % aa Ves Ul aeMMRATgfig aa gATIAA | Ag > Zfaaan 1 ana ram arafqg 3 8 ARALR alfgan ¥ yranmaa | RAMS foRTIUATAala aT A TY % AAA LYM BAARINS GA Val NE x ~ :M-gain ala nyen PRACRIT POETRY. A33 Tue Saérdilavicridita, a very common metre, of which examples occur in the former volumes of Asiatick Re- searches*, is a tetrastich in which the verse-consists of nineteen syllables divided by the pause into portions of twelve and seven syllables respectively. ‘The following instance of this metre is from the close of the first book of Ma’cHa’s epick poem; where Na’rrpa, having de- livered a message from InpRa, inciting CrisHn’a to war with Sts’ura’La, king of the Chéd/is, departs, leay- ing the hero highly incensed against his kinsman and enemy. [See Puare C. Fig. 1.] O'm ityuctavoto’t’ha sa’rngin’a, iti Vyo hritoa va'chan, nabhas Tasminn utpatiré purah sura-muna v Indoh s‘riyan vibhrou, S‘atru’n’a m anis‘am vinasa pis unah, Crudd’hosya Chaidyam prati, Vyo'mni va, bhruceti ch’haléna, vadané Cétus chaca'r'a’padam. ‘Watts the divine sige, having delivered this discourse, ascended the sky, bearing on his front the radiance of the moon; the hero, armed with a bow, uttered an expression of assent ; and the frown, which found place on his brow wreak- ful against the prince of the Cdédis, was as a portent in the heavens, foretokening destruction of his foes.’ 1. 75. THe Manda'cra‘nta’, which is the metre in which the Még’hadtita is compesed, has pauses suddividing each verse of seventeen syllables into three portions, containing four, six, and seven syllables respectively : viz. two spondees ; twe pyrrichii and an iambic; a cre- tic, trachee, and spondee. The Harin'i differs from the preceding in transposing | the first and second portions of the verse, and making the third consist of an anapest between two iambics. An instance of it will be-fubsequently exhibited. . oe * Vol. [. p.27 Vou. X. F £ NE NE ET ST 9. A34 ON SANSCRIF AND Tue example of the firft mentioned metre, here in- serted, is from the Megha-dita. This elegant little poem, attributed as before observed to Ca’Lipa’sa, and comprising no more than 116 stanzas, supposes a Yacsha or attendant of Cuve’ra to have been separated from a beloved wife by an imprecation of the god €uve’ra, who was irritated by the negligence of the attendant in suffering the celeftial garden to be trodden down by Invra’s elephant. The distracted demigod, banished from heaven to the earth, where he takes his abode on a hill on which Ra’Ma once sojourned, * entreats a passing cloud to convey an affectionate mes- sage to his wife. Mandacrata metre. [See Piars C. Fig. 2.] 6. Jatamy vanss'’é, bhuvana-vidité, pushcaravartacanam, Ja’na'mi twa'm, pracriti-purusan, ca maripam, Maghonah. Téna’ rt’hitwan, twayi, vid’hi-sasad daraband’hur, gato- ham, Ya‘ehna midgha’ varam ad’ higtiné, nac’hame labd’haca'ma. 7. Santapta’na‘n twam asi s’aran’an ; tat, payd, priya ya’h Sandés‘am mé hara, d’hanapati-créd’ha-vis léshitasya, Gantavya’ té vasatir Alaca’ nama yacshés wara’n’am, a hyédya‘na- st’hita- hara-s’iras’ - chandrica -d’hcuta- harmya. “I KNEW thee sprung from the celebrated race of diluviag clouds, a minister of Inpra, who dost assume any form at pleasure: to thee I become an humble suitor, being se- parated by the power of fate from my beloved spouse: a request preferred in vain to the noble is better than success- ful solicitation to the vile. Thou art the refage of the in- flamed: therefore do thou, O cloud, convey to my beloved a message from me who ain banished by the wrath of the god of riches. Thou must repair to Alaca the abode of the lord of Yacsbas, a palace of which the whitened by the moonbeam Semel ot ee * Called Rémagiri. PRA’CRIT POETRY. A35 from the crescent on the head of S’'rva, who seems fixed in the grove without.” 6 and 7. Tue Sicharin’i, also a common metre, distributes seventeen syllables into portions of six and eleven ; an iambic and two spondees in the one, anda tribra- chys, anapeest, dacty], and iambic in the other. This is the metre of the Ananda lahaai, a hymn of which SANCARA’CHA’RYA is the reputed author, and which is addressed to Siva’, the Sacti or energy ‘of Siva or Mana’pe’va. It comprises a hundred stanzas of or- thodox poetry held in great estimation by the devout followers of Sancara: the devotional poetry of the Hindus does not atnay employ metre of so high an order. ExAMPLES of this measure will be shown in a sub- sequent extract from a work of a very different kind: a drama, by Boavarnu’rientitled Mélati Mad have. Tue Maélini’, consisting of fifteen syllables, places two tribrachys and a spondee in the one subdivided portion of the verse, and a cretic, trochee, and spondee in the other. An instance of it occurs in a former ex- tract from the Cira’ta’rjuniya. ‘The following example of this metre is from the drama abovementioned. ‘The passage is descriptive of a love-sick maid. Moa’ ling metre. [See Phare C. Fig. 3°j Parimridita-mrin‘ali-mlanam angam ; prarittih Cat’ham api parivara-prart *hanabhih Criyasu. Calayati cha him4ns’6r nishcalancasya lacshmim Abhinava-cari-danta-chch’héda-cantah capélah. ° * Her person is weary like bruised threads of a lotos ; scarcely can the earnest intreaties of her attendants incite her to any exertion; her cheek, pale as new wrought ivory, emulates the beauty of a spotless moon. 1, 22. Pf 2 A36 ON SANSCRIT AND Tue Praharshini, containing thirty syllables, sepa- rates a molossus, from two pyrrichii, as many trochees and aspondee. An example of it will be shown ina subsequent extract from BHAVABHU TI's drama. Tre Ruchira’, with the same number of syllables, disjoins two iambics, from two pyrrichil, a trochee and cretic. The opening stanza of the Bhattica’vya may serve as an instance of this metre. The poem bearing that title, is on the subject of the adventures of Ra’Ma? it 1s comprised in 22 cantos. Being composed pur- posely for the practical illustration of grammar, it ex- hibits a studied variety of diction in which words ano- malously inflected are most frequent. The style, how- ever, is neither obscure nor inelegant : and the poem is reckoned arnong the classical compositions in the Sanscritlanguage. The author was BHARTRIHARL: not, as might be supposed from the name, the celebrated brother of VicRaAMa’pITYA: but a grammarian and poet, who was son of S’gi’D’HARA SWA’M{, aS we are informed by onc of his scholiasts Vinya’ vINODE. Ruchira’ metre. [See Prater C. Fig. 4.] AbbGn nrip6, vibud’ ha-sac ‘hah, parantapah, srutanwit 6,Das | arat’é’ha ityndahritah, Ganair varam, bhuvana hita-chch’haléna, yam Sanatanah pitaram up gamat swayain. j * He, whom the eternal chose for a father, that he might benefit the wor'd [in a human form, ] was a king, a friend of the gods, a discomfiter of foes, and versed in “acience): his name was Das aratT ga. He wasa prince eminent for his virtues,’ 1. 1. THe Suvadand’ distributes twenty, syllables in three portions of the verse: one containing two spondees and a bacchius; the second four short syllables and an - anapzest ; PRA’CRIT POETRY. A437 anapeeest ; the third a spondee, pyrrichius, and iam- bic. The Srag@hara’ a very common metre, differs from it, only in the third portion of the verse, which contains a trochee, spondee, and bacchius: but here the number of syllables in every subdivision is equal: viz. seven. In all the other instances above described, the subdivisions of the regular verses were unequal. Tue following sorts of metre, which are usually em- ployed, have no pauses but at the close of the verse. The Drata vilambité contains in each verse two ana- pzests. preceded by three short syllables and a long one, and followed by a trochee. Instances of this measure have been already cited in an extract from the Cirdtar- juniya. The Sragvini is measured by a trochee, spon- dee, and iambic repeated ; asthe Bhujangaprayata is by a similar repetition of an 1ambic, trochee, and spondee. Both sorts of metre are of frequent occurrence in clas- sick poems. Tue Vasantatilaca. which consists of a spondee, iam- bic, tribrachys, dactyl, crochee, and spondee, is one of the metres in most general use. It commonly occurs asa change from other metre. But the whole 5th canto of Ma’cua’s poem isin this measure. The Chaura panchasica, a short poem before described, is in the same metre, and so isa pathetick elegy on the death of a beloved wife which occurs in the Bhamani vilasa a collection of miscellaneous poetry by JAGANNA‘T’HA Pandita raja. It begins thus: Vasantatilaca. [See Pate C., Fig. 5.] ‘ Since fate, alas ! is become adverse, and the gem of kindred is departed towards heaven; to whom, O my soul, wilt thou tell thy grief? and who will appease thy anguish with refresh- ing words?’ Ff 3 438 ON SANSCRIT AND Tux following passage from some Hindi poem, is quoted in Na’RAYAN’A BHAT’T’A’s Commentary on the Vritta Retnacara as a specimen of this metre in the Canyacubja dialect. [See Prare C. Fig. 6.] Candarpa-ripa jaba tén tumha linha, Crishn’a! Locépacca- ma hama hin, baéu-pira, ch’hd:4, Jau bhét'icain viraha-pira nasdii méri. Yain bhénu dati path ‘ai, cahi bata, Gépi.* “ CRISHNA, since thou didft assume the form of Cupid, f have neglected worldly affairs, suffer:ng much anxiety. Re- lieve by thy presence the pain of separation which [ endure. Such was the message, with which the Gop dispatched her embassadress.”’ V. Sloca or Vactra. THE most common Sanscrit metre is the stanza of four verses containing eight syllables each: and deno- minated from the name of the class, Anushtubh. Se- veral species of it have been described. Two very sim- ple kinds of it occur, consisting of iambic, or trochaic feet exclusively. The rest are included in one gene- ral designationt. But several analogous species are comprehended under the denomination of Vactra. Here the laws of the metre, leaving only the first and eighth syllables indeterminate, require either a bacchiu — * Short vowels, when final, are so faintly sounded, that they are ufaally omitted in writing the provincial languages of Jndia in Ro- man character, But they have been here preserved at the close of words ; being necessary, as in Sanscrit, for exhibiting the metre. jeThe first termed Pramdni, the other Samdni. “Considered as a - species of uniform metre, the first is also named Nagaswarupini or _ Matallied; and the second is denominated Mallicd. There js alsoa regular measure which alternates trochees and iambics, and is deno- minated Manavacdcrida : and another, named Chitrapada, consisting of two dictyls anda spondee. — t Vitana. m * PRA’CRIT POETRY. A39 or anamphibrachys * before the eighth syllable, and forbid an anapaest or tribrachys after the first; as also in the 2d and 4th verses of the stanza, an amphimacer. A variety of this metre introduces a tribrachys before the 8th syllable in the Jst and 3rd verses, and a bacchius in the 2dand 4thf. And another sortt, which admits five varieties, requires the penultimate syllable to be short in the 2d and 4th verses ; and introduces before the 8th syllable of the 1st and third verses, a dactyl, anapeest, tribrachys, amphimacer, or molossus. Tue metre, which is most in use, is one of the spe- cies now described, in which the number of syllables is determinate (viz. 8); but the quantity variable. Ca’- LIDA‘SA appropriates to this metre the term S’/ca (ab- breviated from Anushtubh s’loca); and directs, that the fifth syllable of each verse be short; the sixth, long ; and the seyenth alternately long and short. The mytho- logical poems under the title of Pura’n’a, and the me- trical treatises on law and other sciences, are almost en- tirely composed in this easy verse: with a sparing inter- mixture of other analogous sorts, and with the still rarer introduction of other kinds of metre. The varieties of the Anushiubh S'loca, which most frequently occur, make the 5th, 6th, and 7th syllables of the ist and 3d verses all long or all short; or else the 5th long with 6th and 7th short. ‘Thus varied, it is much used by the best poets. Ca’tipa’sa has employed it in the 2d and Oth cantos of his poem entitled Cumara sambhava; and in the Ist, 4th, and several others of the Raghuvan'a. The 2d and :gth cantos of Ma’c’Ha’s poems are in this metre, and so is the 11th of the Cira/arjuniya. Tue examples, here subjoined, are from Ma’e’Ha’s poem. One passage is part of a speech of Ratara’mMa eo * The metre is named Pathya when an amphibrachys is introduced in the 2d and 4th yerses ; some say in the ist and 3d, + Chapalu, : ot Vipula. F f 4. ° - AAO ON SANSCRIT AND to Crisun’A, urging him to the immediate commence- ment of hostilities against Sisurana: the other is ex- tracted from Upp’nava’s reply, dissuading CaisHna from instant war, and-advising his previous Compliance with YuD HISHT HIRBA’S invitation to assist ata solemn sacrifice which the king was on the point of celebrating at Lndraprast ha. [See Prats C, Fig. 7.] BaxLara’MA speaks, ‘A proved enemy, and a tried friend, are most to be regarded ; for they are known by their actions: others, presumed to be so, from temper or affinity, may be found in the end to be friend or foe. Peace may be maintained with a natural enemy, who confers benefits; not with a pre- sumptive friend, who commits outrages; kindness, or injury, is the proper test of both. ‘Tke king of the Chédis was offend- ed, O Hakt, by thy seizure of RucHMINI: for woman is the chief cause, that the tree of discord takes root. Whilst thou wert engaged in subduing the offspring of the earth, he be- sieged this city, as darkness encirc'es the skirts of Méru, while the sun is remote. To hint, that be ravished:the wife of Varuev is enough: the narration of crimes is too disgust - ful. Thus agerieved by thee, and having much injured us, the son of S RurAs RAV AS 15 an enemy demonstrated by deeds, The man, who is negligent, while an enraged foe meditates aggressions, sleeps in the wind with fire under hisarm. What forbearing man, who would cheerfully dissemble a slight and single injury, can patiendly endure repeated wrongs. At other times, patience becomes a man; and pudency, a woman; but valour befits the insulted warrior ; as modesty should be laid aside by a woman in the nuptial bed. Whoever dives, (may none so live !) tortured by the pain of insults from his enemy ; would that he had never been born, vainly giving his mother anguish. Dust, which, kicked by the foot of the tfaveller, rises and setties on his head, is less contemptible than the das” tard, who is contented under wrongs.’ 2. 36—46. Upp’Hava in reply addressed to Ca1suna. ‘ [See Puare C. Fig. 8.] PRA’CRIT POETRY AAI “The just King, and his kiasmen, relying on thee for an associate capable of sustaining the heaviest burden, are willing to undertake the task of a solemn sacrifice. Even to enemies who court them, the magnanimous show kindness; as rivers convey to the ocean the rival torenis from the mountains, Violence, used against foes by the strong, 1s at length success- ful; but friends, once offended, are not easily reconciled even by compliances. Thou thinkest, that the slaughter of the foe will most gratify the inhabitants of heaven: bat far betier is it to present offerings, which are desired by the deities, who devour oblations. What the virtuous offer, under the name of ambrosia, in flames, whose tongues are holy prayers, was the splendid ornaiment of the ocean churned by the moun- tain Mandara. The promise made by thee to thy father’s venerable sister, to forgive her son a hundred offences, should be strictly observed. Let the intellect of a good man be sharp without wounding; let his actions be vigorous, but conciliatory ; let his mind be warm without inflaming: and let his word, when he speaks, he rigidly maintained. Before the appointed hour, even thou art not able to destroy the ty- rant, on whom thyself conferred that boon ; no more than the sun can prematnrely close the day, which he himself enlights , ens. 2. 105—110. ‘V. Compound metre, Insranczs of compound metre have been already exhibited under the designation of Upajati, consisting of two kinds of siraple metre variously combined: two of these combinations are repeated under the head of half equal metre with The contrasted names of 4e’h- yanaci and Viparitac hyanaci. Other species of metre, belonging to this clas3, are in use among eminent poets : particularly the Pushpitagrz, and Aparavactra. Inthe first, both verses are terminated by two troehees anda spondee, and begin with four short syllables, one verse interposing a pyrrichius, andtke other a dactyl. In the next species, both verses are terminated by three 1ambics, and begin hke the preceding with four short syllables; but one verse interposes a single short syllable, and the other a trochee. | ~ 44% ON SANSCRIT AND Exampxes of the first of these mixed measures are very common. One instance has been already exhibited in a quotation from the Ist canto of Bua’Ra’vr’s poem of Arsuna and the mountaineer. The whole tenth canto of the same poem, and the seventh of Ma’eua’s death of S’ts’upa’La are in this mixt metre. The second is less common: but an instance occurs in the 18th canto of the Cira’ta’rjuniya. Tue close of the gth canto of Ca’iipa’sa’s Raghu- vans’a, exhibiting a variety of metre, in which two of the species now mentioned are included, is here cited for the sake of these and of other species which have been before described. The subject is Das’paT’HA’s hunt, in which he slew the hermit’s son: a story well known to the readers of the Rhdmdyan’a. . [See Prare D. Fig. 1.] € Thus did the chase, like an artful mistress, allure the king forgetful of all other business, and leaving to his ministers the burden of the state, while his passion grew by indul- gence. ‘ The king, without his retinue, passed the night in some sequestered spot, reposing on a bed of leaves and blossoms, and enlightened by the flame of wild herbs. At dawn, being awakened by the flapping of his elephant’s ears in place of the royal drums, he delighted in listening to the sweet and auspi- cious tones of chirping birds. ‘ One day, pursuing an antelope, and outstriping his atten- dants, he arrived, with his horse foaming with fatigue, on the bank of Tamasd a stream frequented by the devout. In its waters a deep sound caused by the filling of a vase, was mistaken by the king for the grumbling of an elephaht; and he directed an arrow towards the spot whence the sqund proceeded. By this forbidden act, * Das’RAT’HA transgressed: for even the wise, when blinded by passion, deviate into the athless waste. ‘ Ah father!” was the piteous cry which issued; and the king, anxious, sought its cause among the ee eed * The royal and military tribe is prohibited from killing elephants ' less in battle. ‘ | veduthiea nin: 2Oe ee Aen Birdenwe oe Bein “Zum el RY ; s WEIR Siie “A wysunyal a of (BLEWantiovio hime PRR RE SEL EU ERY - 2ucyseoypnty Hot qi BESREM DIE BEaAr ? Jeb eee He eipinbeR Reet SP hh | bbe Ree eibpIeeteimlOd > Bw > ‘CUb Ol “CO ALF Id EB. WV Ne Pees De 2ye wey Hee Id ey EIRIRD Yh le hepBe Bes PSD ApH te Cente Esher | ce Rw ss ppwy: BWR Rete 2b t Ph bs Ww BIRD) OUT WX hte Dey be Bp Lue KER) & fe DRebere ee ey Bi! origi Gee eek pee Mesa + 1 PB wR IB LB: pee USN Sn Pisin Lies Bye alee te Sih se yeh eB Le Ite DEP LA VINPS. + ISL HAL HW WEEDS BEERS EL SGV OyPrER erp bye ryiiebyinin Yeu SP w Bye wire bK:e 2 eas eeciatel 1 Pe Gidib Mee Yee eipbpey Be Bear MPA MINS ‘2 std” > ween Aye reipeey wo} Le Di IPL B Phe ie robe wee Bale 1 stenia > & Peery Aum iL te emmh2 tne Snipe yy Murer fp ELST wre PE Sp IDby DIP: init Re ke Be ND-e thin Pye bats PAR ELS ) veduthieapia: 2 ee epe2) eK Bie beynsi eee Bisdintt 2 uA I ‘ayy UY Hehe ek a HAZY RIBERYe IR SMine 8 A eyryy y en ur 1 see: atbeye town Pew wpe Sige) PUA SKY + LUaYSLDYVAT & et Og Not N BERR EM NTe eb Abe BRBuE eB oiwhie Se leeiwe yk Re . ? ? (Pe uclvire tripe PEMRUP ES 2ubib Pls la sh aed epalk } Ye eI be “DEP LIUAs DINpIO LS | OL SUT wD. n: eeRaup DB ir bibkey best ide 2jere Be tf & Bebieb Lelie Ley B LOS! oD edhe We BmieBhe SubyK | wurst we Rye Su ee Sicaueusd or Satarna sii lode ova pee Uikikine B12 Pee Skye edse een PRiteu yen sh pri 2 Hibrbpes me ce iS riots 2 uype BEjbes? jbunmpRAmES kite pte > irc eh BaL SSB 1 py Gu bb BkyKuRE A Ziste we Be Bie th See ie 1 wit ieette > Bey Se BEJHIGIIER bi pees veh Cate x Hos Wwe pri ibyinip boebipep 2 Shbikn eviews | BE PRUIR PANS aT WED Sik eesbib- Bure i SS theupR > bile PrP ke Ripe Dip we iby NS Bipg | PDBESIPE REM PAID E web iGeu: ‘ptFel bleu ep keer ® nik uiejpes iy > mAb ew 1B | :VBRIBJR Beye Ub TB the Be se a> Ree SUP heirllBis i 3a is diba: dekh ® Phe Ap iekiGa: poe BwS bina ib BRUR EPUB pet IR PIE REPEL; AO Ae we ariae 3 "hot Bye Me sb p> BE je sb Bike Pee Re yy] Pepbe2 digs | Pikedibejw ee ieiR GEIR euRTE Bekele a2 B inuk W Ro URE bieAB we Bs ge cane bib hee wire | BEYER bp bie 2wPUEE bh Bib Baie ADL Wes PE Pe My tube REY bye Shue Bibb} b rSanviag 1k bie M3 > bu ipre ps TBR: wk b b1S bien Biv Wes ae: RIL EBEE BPRIRE Dep be BICIBB IRL vei a cea B HEN ep ke S uve BEE Wo 1 BheurR & Ph bk eae Sie Py: *PGeynelve Bye ft 222 bith Pepe hur ewni neue BDWEIEL oS Dine, Ey wip 3g es 2 ipwe ne te SeR2b ike 1 BER K2TeveEREyD B WB epPY Sake De PIRIeLS 11 NE ni BE bit Y bl Sie but Bwe jon Sb ents ! vomeeyet Sin eiee Sey eb Bee: fehe u — uw We eelewevlin 2 p Eee Sy Wipe n | UA YB Se ky bie tet ehpHiobhe se 1 aon ib S Leibe big wie WRIDMEEE Em | ‘Mie DR b>} Eetbteh eye viding Timaru So nee Se dye peyery Ser EbirfoiMlUB IRb Lis be | DEMIR Iyer 3 2 b2h: Rib LOS abe rage e 1 NG a tS Bo tibva Pele elem Zuber burp Pes | WME Bie LPRIb v2 nee APES SEEPS MRO Il debe e cee MEH inieiubeR rect Sin 1 whRpre RY eye biel etwstluM? & meweeie) > “OUY Md “Ol ALF Td Tr: Sag _ Fig. 18. Avery uncommon metre named Avitat‘ha or Hareut aca. t frafataaa Zaat fafgaanauza: xo 4G ZU Fig. 20. TASBUatIa featifaatanyrorat faqag : 14 faafafgatargtan wafeiimaeufe aay afafaza ni QQ il any * Sic'harini quifag aed auiigezefana Sana: Al WMA wag we -_ a aufaagian aaag @ryfeda:aa faat7ata ans > Ey) “é afanial tig atcatatytaag vara BATT AM | 37 area afaamfaa:catUfaa aa YEH Fig.6. fi mr try - az wages + Mandacranta ~ Fs Fig.19. Ofaureg F ugay ama-faaacifariataz -auita | ar BS Wen fawnfas aaya Zz % Vasanta tilaca. Pia ak 28 fhasafag [atag antine ga = WEL INs: WQS Il - = sera afmarag \ s paafaaRr AT IaGee Anta TAMIIATY wa Svat aga ata WI AUT U farfan = Fig:5. HEWN DA BET] HI 1 TA AYUKA TG - j AGA | ¢ r t Sardula vicridita . t araassiturat aa => We: ATARI Wlarwaana | . Fig: 17. fi afaas afayadfaqaia mA a x BAfERUTAaafeA: 1 RE II WNIT tA Aaaafannonn aA * Sicharin' . awa Pig. 4. « nT ginafadt aaa masAauANaAg Mew Cy Fi 4. fafa tata sfanaA a ataazaferanautaazafgaata a muag xf ig. o {an ata gaifamarfa Baa Gates ye 4 Angiran CS aaferat faxta * Anushiubh. 3TT SYA AATIATE Sa:tifea VS i Sardula vicri ‘dila. it a bhjwh 342 th: yb 2yeee Rabel | :b2yRey Byby dy 2Oev ee Stinevpee mraAnfagtara gteq nu + Fig.7. Jat HAURafa: | faaaaa #Q aldaaraq T Vactra. PRAC’RIT POETRY. AA3 reeds. He found the vase; and, near it, a hermit’s son pierced by his arrow; and he stood amazed as if internally wounded. ‘he king, of glorious lineage, who had already, alighted from his horse, eagerly inquired the parentage of the youth; who, resting on the vase, with feeble accents said *© he was the son of a hermit, but no priest.” Instructed by him, the king conveyed the wounded youth to his blind pa- rents: and to them as they approached their only son, he related his mistaken deed. The unhappy pair, lamenting, conjured the king to draw the arrow from the breast of their wounded son. ‘Vhe youth was dead. The aged hermit rati- fying his curse with tears instead of water for a libation, pro- nounced this imprecation on the king, ‘ In thy extreme age thou shalt reach thy fated time, with grief like mine for a beloved son.” While he spoke, as it were a serpent assailing first and then discharging fatal venom ; Caus ALya’slord, conscious of the first offence, addressed him thus: ‘ Thy curse has fallen like a boon on me, who have not seen the beauteous countenance of offspring; as fire, fed with fuel, fertilises the soil which it burns.”’ The king then said, “* For me, who merciless deserves death at thy hands, whatare thy commands >?” The holy hermit asked fuel for the funeral pile ; he and his wife resolving to follow their son in death. The king, whose attendants were now arrived, promptly fulfilled his command, and remained dejected, bearing with him the her- mit’s curse, a cause of his future destruction, as the ocean embraces the devouring fire. Again the king addressed him. «* Wise hermit! what shall this shameless criminal, who de- serves death from thee, now perform.”’ He desired the funeral flame to be duly lighted: and the king presented the fire for him and his wife and son. ‘ The chief of the race of RaGcuu, attended by his army, now returned to his palace, dejected, bearing in his mind the heavy imprecation of the saint, as the ocean holds within itself the fire of destruction.’ 9. 74.—89. ‘Tuts extract exhibits, besides two stanzas of Pus pitagra* and as many of Sundari metre, ~~ both belonging to the present head, and one, of which an example was promised in this place, ¢ several others - — ae re ee * 75 and 76. { 77 and 79, most properly the last. ; t Swdgatd 78. AAA ON SANCKIT AND which have been before exemplified, * and twe which are less common. - A SINGULAR species of variable metre is menuioned by writers on prosody, who describe it as a stanza in which the verses increase in arithmetical progression. In the instance exlibited by them the four verses of the stanza increase regularly from 8 to 20 syllables. Varieties of it are noticed in which the progression is not regular: the short verse exchanging places with the second, third, or fourth. The quantity of the syllables is in general indeterminate: but varieties are stated in which tle verse consists of short syllables, either ending, or beginning with a spondee, or both ending and beginning with spondees. A cxuass of metre, which admits an inordinate length of the verse, 1s known under the general designa- tion of Dan‘daca. The verse may consist of any num- ber of syllables from 27 to 999; and the specifick name varies accoidingly. * ‘The construction of the metre requires that the fix first syllables be short, and the remainder of the verse be composed of cretick feet; or, instead of’ the cretick foot, the bacchius. These two kinds of metre are distinguished by diffe- rent names. A verse consisting of any number of anapeests within- the Jimitation abovementioned, 1s also comprebended under this general designation; as are verses of similar length consisting exclusively of iambick or trochaick feet. ‘hey have their peculiar ‘denominations. — + —— — - * Vasania tilaca81—87 and Upéndravajra $8. Ruchird 90. + Manjubhdshini 74 (P.T.D. 31.) and Maitamayira 80 (2S - T.1.D.S.) : t For example. Arza, which comprises 10 feet ; Aanava 11; Vy'ala12; Jimu'ta13; &e. ~ - — PRA‘’CRIT POETRY. 4A5 Examp es of these extravagantly long verses are to be found in the works of the poet Va’na. It ts unnecessary to insert any specimen of them in this place ; as an example will occur in a subequent quota- tion from BHavaBHuTi’s drama. Tuat class of metre which is termed half equal, be- cause the alternate verses are alike, comprises various sorts, which appear to be compounded of two simple kinds with an appropriate number of syllables of a de- terminate quantity. ANOTHER class, in which every verse of the stanza. is different, appear more complex. But, here also, the quantity as well as the number of syllables being regu- lated, the stanza is in fact composed of four kinds of uniform metre. THE most common metre of this class is that called Udgatd. ere the number of syllables in each verse, as well as their quantity differs; the first verse com- prising an anapeest, iambick, tnbrachys, and trochee; the second a tribrachys and anapest with two iambics ; the third, a trochee, tribrachys, and two anapeests*; and the fourth, an anapeest, iambick, and pyrrichius, with three iambicks. Tue 12th canto of the Cira’ta’rjuniya is in this me- tre; and so is the 15th cantoof Ma’cua’s epick poem. It begins thus: [Sze Puate D. Fig. 2.] * But the king of the Chédis was impatient of the honoars, which the son of Pandu commanded to be shown in thit as- ——— * Or the third yerse may consist of a trochee and dactyl, with two anapests ; or of two trochees, with two anapeests : and the metre is denominated, in the first instaace Sanrabhaca ; 3 im the second, La- lita. i? 446 ON SANSCRIT AND sembly to the foe of Mad’hu: forthe mind of the proud is envious of the prosperity of others.” Oruer kinds of metre, in which every verse of the stanza differs in the number and quantity of syllables, are comprehended under the general name of Gd'ha ; under which also some writers on prosody* include any. sort of metre not described by PiNGALA, or not distin- guished by a specific appellation. The same denomi- nation is applicable also to stanzas consisting of any number of verses other than four ~~. An instance of a stanza of six verses has been remarked in the Mahab- kérata ; andanother example occurs at the beginning of Ma’cua’s poem. , [Sze Puate D. Fig. 3.] Dwidha critatma, cim ayam divacar6é ? Vid’htima rochih, cim ayam hutas‘anah ? Gatan tiraschinam antru sarat’ héh. Prasidd’ham trddhajwalanam havirbhujah. Patatyad’ ho dhama-visari sarvatah. Cim étad ? ityaculam icshitam janaih. Na’rEDA descending from the heavens to visit CRISHNA, is thus described: _ Ts this the sun self parted into two orbs ? Et is fire shining with light divested of smoke. The motion of the luminary, whose charioteer has no legs, is distinguished by its curvature. The assent of flame is a known property of fire. Then what is this. which descends diffusing light around?” Thus was the sight contemplated with wonder by the people.’ Mag’ha 1. 2. ———_— € * Heva’yup’uaand Na’Rayan‘a Tara’. + Diva’cara on the Vritta Retnaara. t It is cited by Diva’cara BHATTA as an instance of a stanza of six. Yet the scholiasts of the poem omit the two first verses, and read the stanza as a tetrastich: one commentator, however, dues remark, that copies of the poem exhibit the additional verses ; and another commentator has joined them with two more verses ina s« parate stanza. PRA‘CRIT POETRY. 447 VI. Prose; and Verse mixed with Prose. I roLtow the example of Sunscrit writers on proso- dy, in proceeding to notice the different species of prose. ‘They discriminate three and even four sorts, under distinct names. 1st. Simple prose, admitting no compound terms. It is denominated Muclaca. This is little used in polished compositions: unless in the familiar dialogue of dramas. It must undoubtedly have been the colloquial style, at the period when Sznscrit was a spoken language. 2d, Prose, in which compound terms are sparingly admitted. It is called Culzca, This and the preceding sort are by some considered as varieties of a single species named Chirr/icd. It is of course a common stile of composition: and, when po- lished, is the most elegant as it is the chastest. But it does not command the admiration of Afindu readers. 3d, Prose abounding in compound words. It bears the appellation of Uscalica praya, Examples of it exhibit compounds of the most inordinate length: and a sin- gle word exceeding a hundred syllables is not unprece- dented. This extravagant stile of composition, being suitable to the taste of the Indian learned, is common in the most elaborate works of their favourite authors. Ath, Prose modulated so as frequently to exhibit portions of verse. It is named Vrittagand’hi. It will occur with- out study, and even against design, in elevated compo- sitions; and may be expected in the works of the best writers. Some of the most elegant and highly wrought works in proseare reckoned among poems, as already intimated, in like manner as the “Telemache” of Fengtoy and “Tod Abels” of Gessner. The most celebrated are the Vasavadatta of Suzanp’nv, the Dasa Cumdra ef Dan’pi, and the Cadambari of Va'wa. 448 ON SANSCRIT AND Tue first of these is a short romance of which the story is simply this. .Canparp PACE ‘Tu, a young and valiant prince, son of Cuinra’wan’t king of Cusuma- pura*, saw in a dream a beautiful maiden of whom he became desperately enamoured. Impressed with the belief, that a person, such as seen by him in his dream, had a real éxistence. he resolves to travel in search of her, and 24 2. 5 - ~ 8X2410K2=96 3. Padanivrit; “-"7 x 37} Nii “Ss -- = 835-12. #86 A, Atipadanivrit, 0 +8 +7 => 2bebe Pathyd, - 84841248=36 5. Nagi, - - 9 +9+0= 24 2. Nyancusarim (Scand hogriva or 6, Varahi, - -0 +64+9>= 24 Urovrihati,) 841248+48=36 7- Bardhmana, - 6 +7+8=> 21 8, Pratisht’ha, - 8 +7+0= 21 9. Dwipadyiraj, svl258> 21 3. lng th edt he /8X3412 = 30 Ai Fe Sate eae 12-4 8 x “i 2 10. Tripadviraj, - 11%3= 22 3. Mahavrihati, KSagrtietals | x 3=36 If. Usuntrn. ry V. Pane. 1, Tripad, (12 +3 4-2) 1. Cacubh, - “="8 +12 +8= 28 2. Pura Ushnih, 12) 8 }4= 28 3. Paroshnih, - 84-8 +12=— 28 2. Chatushpad, - + 7%4= 28 Il. Anusur‘’usa. 1, Chatushp4d, - - Sx4= 32 2, Tripad, (8-+ 12% 2), viz. 12-4 8+ 12.+4-or 1241248. 124. 1282. 1. Satah.p,.. - - 12: 8=40 or 841248 ot 2. Astara-p 8+ +1 3. Prastara-p 1: $1248be= 40 1. Chatushp: d, rays i 40. 4. Vistara-p ich Cec. a 40. ny 45. Sanstara-f. 12484 8+ ioe i PRA CRIT POETRY. 2. 1. Aesharapaneti, 5% 4=20 2. Alpasahpancti, 5 <2=10 3. Padapancti, - 5£5=25 4. - - 44645%*3=25 3. Pat’hyd, - 8x 5—40 4. Jagali, - - -. - 8x6=48 A463 VI. Trisnrugit. 1 Jyotishmati, 1148%4=43 2, Jagati, - - 1248x4=>44 Purastddjyotishmati, 11 (12) +8X3 . Mad hyd, 84+-8+412 (12) +8-+8 Uparishtad, 84+-8+4+848+1) (12) Deficient and exuberant Metre. 1. Sancumati, —5-+ax 3 ex. (Gayatri) 5+ 6x 3=23. 2. Cacudmati, —6+ax3 3. Pipilica mad’bya, = (Tripad) = many+few+ many ex, 84448. 4. Yavamad’hya, =(Tripad) —few-+ many-t few ex, 8+10+8, 5. Nivrit, =a—1 ex. (Gayatri) 24—1=23. 6. Bburij, =a+ Lex. (Gayatri) 244+1—25. 7. Viraj =a—2 ex. (Gayatri) 848 +6=22. 8. Swaraj, =a+2 ex. (Gayatri,) 8$+8+410=26 *. ee | 1 Gan'avritta of Panscrit Prosody, and Ma'travritta of Pra‘crit Prosody ; regulated by quantity. 1. A’rya’ or Gav’hd Pr, Gahd, 390+ 27 ==57_¢. Odd verse: 30 c, =73ft. (6th= Sc. or Pr.) Eyen yerse: 27 c.=732 ft. (6th= Br). Each verse ends in L. Pause in Ist verse before 7th ft. if Pr. But if 6th tt. be Pr. then pause alter Ist syllable. Pause in 2d verse before 5thft. if Pr. 16 Species: Pat'hyd: Pause after 3d. ft. (3-+43=71 ft. & 12 +18412415=57c.). Vipulas Pause placed otherwise, Hence A divipula, Antyavipula, and Ub- hayavipula, wiih Ist yerse, 2d, or both, irregularly divided by the pause. Chapala 1st f. S. or A. 2d Sc. 3d S. 4th Se. or D. Oth Se. or. (in the short verse, Br). 7th 8. D. A. or Pr. “Hence Muc’hachapali, Jag’ hanya chapu- lt and Mahachapala, with 1st, 2d or both yerses so constructed, Therefore A’rya+3 Chapalasy Pathyd +3 Vipulés=16 species. * If there be room to doubt whether the metre be reduced from the next above, or raised from the next below, the first verse deter- mines the question ; for it is referred to the class to which the first verse or pda belongs. If this do not suffice, the metre is referred to that class, we is sacred to the deity, to whom the prayer is ad- h dressed. _ Shou this also be insufficient, other rules of selection have been provided. Sometimes the metre is eked out by substitu- ting iya or uva for correspondent vowels, pears to be practised in the Samaveda This in particular, ap- ABA Variations: A’ryd, Ist verse 10800. 2d yerse 6400. Chapala Ist verse 32, 2d verse 16. In Pr4crit prosody, 27 species: from 27 L. +3 Br.=30 syll. to VL. and 55 Br.=56 syll. ‘ Speeifick varieties. — Culina containing 1 Sc. Culatha,2 Sc. Vesyd, many Sc. Ran'dé, no Sc. Gurvin'i, Sc. Ist, 3d, Sth or 7th ft. But this is against rule: which excludes ampbibrachys from the odd feet. 2. Upertior Vigérha Pr. Vi- g@ha’. 27+80=57c. viz, t2+4 154+ 124-18. 3. Upacitr Pr. Ga'hu. 27 + 2754 c. viz. 124+ 154 124-15. 4. Gitt or Udga' tha’ Pr. Uz- gatha’. 304-3000 c. viz. 124 18+12418. 5. A’rya cit! or C’hand haea Pr. Scand’ha. 32+32=64 c. 8 ft. complete. (3-++5° =8f. and 12+ 204 12-+4+20—64 c). Species 16 (Pathya' &c.), varia- tions of each verse 10800. In Pracrit pros dy, 28 species from 28 L. & 8 Br. to! L. and G2 Br. 6. Chandrisa’, Sangiti or Gdt hi- ON SANSCRIT AND ni Pr. Gihni 30432=62 c. viz. 12418412420, ~ 7. Sugiti, ov Parigiti Pr. Sinhini 324 30—62 c. viz. 12420412 +18. Also 6. Sengiti, 32 + 29=61 c. A’ryt (7% ft.) + L. in. both verses. 7. Sugit?, 324 27=—59 c. - L. in first verse only. 8. Pragiti, 30+29=59 ¢. + L. in second verse only. 9. Anugit?, 274+32=59 c. Reverse of Sugiti. 10. Manjugiti, 294+30=59 c. Reverse of Pragiti. 11. Vigiti, 294+ =58 c. Upagiti + L. in both verses, 12. Charugits, 294 32=61 c, Reverse of Sangiti. 13. Fallart, 324+30=—62 ec. A’ryagiti—L, in last verse, 14. Lahktd, 3043262 e. —L. in first verse. 16, Pramada, 294+27=56 c. Upagiti + L, in first verse. 16. Cuandrica, 274+ 22=56'¢. -+ L. in last verse. ~ All these kinds admit 16 spe- cies as above: viz. Pathyd, &e mex gra . Vl. Ma’tra’ vritta or Matra’ ch’ handas, of Sanscrit Pro- sody. 1. Varra’tiya, 56 to 68 ¢. 1, Vaitaliya, 1441060414 ¢ 16-60 c. End in C. + 1. Shortsyllables by pairs {even verses not to begin with 2TR). 2. Apitalica, End in D. & S. 3. Aupachhandasica, 10418 +16+418=68 c. End inC, & B. Each kind admits 8 varieties of the short verse & 13 of the long; from 3 long syll. to 6 short begin- ning the one, and from 4 long syll. to1 long & 6 sbort in the other. Also the following species undereach kind. ~wy 1. Dacshinantied, begin ra “with Ys) PRACRIT POETRY. Comprising 2 varieties of the odd verses. I. 1. (or Tr.); and 4 of the even verses. I. B (or Pa. 2d or Ath or 5 Br.) 2. Udichya vritta, odd verses begin with I. 3. Prachua vritta, even verses C. or Pz. 4. 4. Pravrittaca, the 2 preceding combined. 5. Aparantica, 16 K4 —O6A Cc. (Prich), 6. Chéruhasini, 14 KX 4 —50c, (Udich). 2. Ma‘rra’ samaca, 16 (4¥ 4) %4—64c. EndS. ord, Begin S.A. D. or Pr. 1, Miird samaca, 24. ft. S. A. or D. 3d. ft. A. 2. Vis'loca, 24 Sc. or Pr. 3d. S. or D. 3. Vanavisacd, 2d S.A. or D. 3d Sc. or Pr. 4. Chitra, 2d Sc. or Pr. 3d A. Sc. or Pr. 5. Upachitrg, 2d S, A. or D. 34 S. or D. 465 6. Piddculaca, the above inter- mixed. The lst species admits 24 va- rieties; the 2d, 32; & the 3 next, 48 each. The va- riations of the last species are very numerous. 3. Gitrya RYA’ or Achalzd hriti, 16 + 4 All short syllabies. 4, DwicHanpaca; or Cou- let. 1. Sicha or Chudi,32 Br, + 16L. 2 species: Jyotish Ist verse 52 Br. 2d 16 L. Saumyd or Arangacrida ist verse 16 L. 2d 32 Br. Also 1 Sic’ha 30 4+ 32 = 62 c. Ist Verse 28 Br. +L. 2d 30 Br. L. + . Charja, 32 +30 =62 ¢. ist 30 Br. + L, 2d 28 Br. 4+ L. 3. Chulicaor Atiruchira 294-29 =5Sc. 27 Be. + L. Also 3 Chulica 29 +31=60 c. Ist \erse 27 Br. + L. 2d ‘29 Br. -+ L. iS) ; — Eee I. Matra vritta of Pracrit prosody continued from Table I. 8. Doha 8S. Dwipat’ha, 134 114134 1!1=4S e. 3 ft. viz. odd verses 64443. ‘even verse 6 +441, 23 species from 23 L+2 57. to 48 Br. 9. Utcach’ha Pr. Uccach’ha, 11x 6—66 c. 6 verses, 3 it. each 44443. 8 species from 66 Br. tu 28 L +10 Br. 10: Rola or Lola, 24% 4=96c. Pause ii-+13, Usually end in L. Vou. X. 12 species from 12 L to 24 Br. 11. Gandha Pr. Gandiana, 17 4+18417+18=70 Syll. 12. Chatushpada or Chatush- padica Pr. Chaupaia Chaupaa, 30% 4% 4—480c. 16 verses; 74 ft. 4%74+L. 13. Ghatta & Ghattananda, 3k % 262 c. 1048413 =4%7+ 3 Br. or 1347 4132643 X3 4544434242 Br 14. Shat’pada or Shat‘padica Pr, Cr'hapaa, 964 56=152 oh A660 Cavya 24 (11413=644x4 \-2 Br}.+4=906, Ullala 28 (15 + 13) *% 2256. Varieties of the Tetrastich 45 from go Br. to 44L 4+ 8 Br. Varieties of the whole stanza 71 from 7OL +12 Br.to 152 Br. 15. Prajjatica Pr, Pajjalia, 16 * A= 64c) 4)ft' Bndid Se, 16. Atiliha At’hilla Pr. Adi- 1a16%4=64¢c. No Sc. End in P, 17. Padaculaca Pr. Culapaa, 16% 4=64¢, 64-4242 L. 18. Raddg stanza of nine= 116 c¢. Wid. dst eC. 4ft) ‘viz. 34-4 =4+4. End in Sc. or Pr. 2d=12 ¢.=4 le. End in Pr. 3d=15 c. End in D. 4th=11 ce. =3 ft. End in Tr. 5th=15 c. End in D. Oth to 9th= Doha as before, 5 species. 19. Padmavati Pr. Pauma, 32%4=128 c. 8 ft. no Sc. 20. Cundalicea Pr. Candalia, stanza of eight=142 c. Doha + Rola or ie a 21. Gagan‘aneana, 25 ~4 = 100 c. 20 syll. viz. 5 L & 15 Br. ee aig be 2. Dwipadi or Dwi ‘pada, 28 a4 c. 63 ft. »viz. 6444-5 +L. 23. Chanja, 41x 2=82 c. 10st, viz. ti Pr 4-3.G, 24. Sicha, 28 x2=—56c. 7 tt. vigs Pas + Sc. See San- /scrit metre. 25. Mala, 45x 2=900 c. 11 ft. viz.4x%9+¢.45S. Also 25. Mala 45+27=72c. ist verse as above, 2d verse 4’rya. 26. Chudicala Pr. Chuliala, 29 eae ce. Half the Doha-+ 5. . Saurashtra Pr. Sorati'ha, a 13-b11413—48 ron Reverse of the Doha. e28. Hacali, 14%4=-56.¢. ’ nerally Pr. ON SANSCRIT AND 35 ft. viz. 4 X34-L,1 syll. 11 or 10). ft. D. Pr. or A. sometimes S. Not end in P.S., : 29. Mad’hubhava, 8 x 4= oD ee 2. ft. End in Se. 30. Abhira, J1 X4=44c. 7 + Se.or D. +1 +4 Sc. or-Se. 4+- Tr. +Sc. 31, Dan‘dacala, 32 %4=—128c. 4%4+ 0424-8 or 104-84 14. Endin L. 32. Dipaca, 10OX4=40. ce 4+5+4Br. usually end in Se.\ 33. Sinha’valoca Pr. Sinhalao 16% 4—64c. 4 it. A. or Pr. but end in A. 34. Plavangama Pr. Paranga- ma, 21 XA=—SB4 c. 6% 3+ 1. Begin with L. 35. Lila’yati, 24orless X 4—= 96 or less. 6 ft. or less: not end in A. : 36, Harigita, 28 %4=113c. SHOTS %34 L. Should begin with Pr. and endin S. 37. Tribhangi, 32 K4=128 c. 8.ft. No Sc. Endi in L. 38, Durmila’ or Durmilica ’, 32% 4-128 c. 1048414. ft. 8. 39. Hira or tliraca, 23 x 4= Q2. Cc. 4 {t. viz. 6%3-45. ft. 6 Br. ord L. with 4 Br. End in L. 40. Jaiad’hava or Jalaharana’, 32 Xx 4=128 c. Pauses 10+-84648. ft..S Ge- End in A. 41. Madanagriha or Madana- hara’, 40X4=160 c. 10-{-8+4+ 144+8=—40. 42, Maha‘ra'sht'ra Pr. Mara-. hat't'a, 29% A=116 c. 101-8+11+ or64 4 x5 +L. 4) Bt. Also the following hinds ; 43. Ruchira’, 30x 4=120 c. 75 ft. end in L, PRACRIT POETRY. 44, Calica’, 14x 4=56c¢, Pauses 846, 45. Va‘san'a, 20Xx4=80 c. 4 ft. End in C. Pause before the last. 46, Chaurola, 16 + 14 + 16 +14=060 c. ft. A. or Pr. 47. Jhallana’, 37% 4= 148 ¢. 72 ft 5x 7+ L. Pauses 10+ 10 + 10-F7; 48. Ashad’ha, 12474-1247 25a) Gs AG 49. Ma‘lavi, 16 + 124 164 12=56 c. Long verses 4 ft. short verse end in! 1 50. Matta’, 20 x 4 = 80c. 5 ft. no Sc. 51. Rasamala, 24 %4 — Q6c. 6 ft’ hha 52. Avalambaca, 13 x 4 = 02 Cc. 3 ft. 4 x 2+°6. End in L. SS AV. Metre regulated by number of Syllables. Vactra, 8X4=32 syll. 2 ft. between 2 syll. The species vary in the 2d ft. or 3d place. 1. Simple Vactra. — L. or Br. + M. &c. (except Tr. & A.and, in the even verse, C). +B.-+ L. or Br. Therefore Ist 4th & 8th syll. either long or short. Sth short. 6th & 7th long. Either 2d or 3d long. Variations of the Ist verse 24; of the 2d20. 2. Pathyd. Ist verse as aboye; 2d with Sc. for 2d tt. Hence 7th syll. short. ' 3. Viparita pat hya. The preceding transposed. 4. Chapala. Ist verse with Tr. for 2d dt. Therefore 6th & 7th syll. short. 5. Vipula. 2d verse (some say Ist, others all) with 7th syll. short. Therefore 2d ft; D. Sc. Fivor lr. 5 or 7 species: Bha-vipula. Ist verse (some say either) with D, for 2d ft. Ra-vipu- Ja, with C. for 2d ft. Navi- pula, 2d ft. Tr. Ta-vipula, 2d ft. H. Ma-vipula, 2d ft. M. Ya-vipula, 8d ft. B. Ja- . vipila, 2d ft. Se. No instance occurs with an anapast for the 2d ft. of 3d place. Hh 2 AO8 ON SANSCRIT AND V. Acshara ch’ handas or Varna vritta. ‘Metre regu- lated by number and quantity. Regular or uniform metre; the stanza being composed of equal and similar verses. From one. to five syllables in the verse, or from fonr to twenty in the stanza. I Uecra’ orUcr’ua. 1 xX4A—A, 1.Sri, g- —L, 2Mahi, [pao ote II. Arvucta’.2,x4=8. 1. (Str, or Cama, 2 ¢. = S,2. Rati, or Mahi, d. g.=1. 3 Ssru, g./, = T. 4. Madhu, Pr. Mahu, CN A oad tC Til. Mapuya’.3%4=12: 1. Nari, or Tali, m. = M. 2 Sas 1, Pf: Sas, 7. b., oF riga; Pr. Pics, of Mrigi, 7.2 °C.4, Raman‘, or Ramana, s. =A. 5. Panchala, ‘or Panchala, ¢. = H. 6. Mrigendra, Pr. Maida, 7. = Sc. 7. Mandara, bh. =D. 8. Camali, o1 Camala,». = Tr. IV. Pratisui’HA’ 4 x A = 16. 1. Canya, or Tirna, Pr. Tin- na, m. g.—28. 2. Ghari, or 'Harica, 7. 4. 2T. 3. Naga- lica; Lagalica, Nagani, or Naga- nica, Pr. Magania, or Nagani,j. g. 21. A. Sati, ag. =P. I. V. SupRATISHT’ HA’ 5 % 4520, 1 Pancti, Acsharapancti, or Hansa, bh. 2. geo & ua. Sammoha, m.2 ¢. = M.S. 3. Haritabandha, or Hari, 2 ¢. 7. 2g.ort.2g.—8.B. 4. Priya, hire Aw Les 6 eee, Sr, Jamaca,n. 21, =P, 7Tr. eR é From six lo twenty-six syllables in the Verse. 1. Ga’yarrRi. 6%4—24. 1, Tanumad’hya, ty.=SPS., 2. Vidyullec’ha, ot Sesha, Pr. Sesa,2m.— 38. 38.Sasivadana, or Chauransa, 7 y=2P8. 4. Wasumati,¢s —S PI, 5. Va- nita, or Tilaca, Pr. Dilla, 25— | 2A. 6. Yodba, or Dwiyod’hi, Pr. Vijoha,2r. TSI. 7. Cha- taransa, Pr, Chauvansa, nu = 2 PS. 8, Mant’hana, or Cama- vatara, (half of the Saranga), 2 & = §1T. 9g, Sanc’ kanari. or Somaraji, (half of the Bhujang- eprayata), 2y=\|TS. 10. Ma- lati, Sumalati, Vasanta, or Ca- minicanta,27= IPT. 11. Da- manaca, 22 =3 P. } JI. Usunin 7x 4= 28. 1, Cumaralatita, (24+ 5)j sg =]. +r. S. 2. \Madateehia, msg —=SDS. 3. Hansamala, srg= ATS. 4, Mad’humati, Bin p '2' Pa rgl=2TC. 6. Suvasa, x7 / =2PD. 7. Carahancha, 4s / ; 5. Sumanicas © PRACRIT POETRY. =2PSc._ 8. Sirsha, Pr. Ses, 2mg—2SM. II. ANuSHTUBH 8 x 4 = 32, 1, Chitrapada, 2 54, 2g = 2 DS. 2, Vidyunmala, Pr, B7/- jumala,{4 + 4t)2m2¢—=2 S+ 2S. 3. Manavyaca, or Ma- navacrida, (4 + 4+) bh.tl g= TI+ TI. 4. Hansaruta, wn 2g¢=— SDB. 5. Pramanica, Nagaswarupini, or Matallica, 7 7 lg —41. 6. Samaniea, or Mal- liea,r jgl=4T. | 7. Vitana, xe22 —21TS., 8: Tunga, 2 a22=3PS. 9. Camala, 2/ ar, = 2P2I. 10. Hansapadi, 2gms=—2STI. 11. Matan- ote 26 Bo St les.) (12, Rambha, algm—=2P2S. IV. Varwarr19x4=36. 1. Halamuc’hi, (346), 77s =C+2PI. 2. Bhujagasi- susrita, (7 + 2),227m—=—2P A + 8. 3. Bhadrica,r2r— 2 TAI. 4. Mahalacshmi, 3 7 = TS BI. 5. Sarangi, or Sarngi. nys == 2PSA. 6. Pavitra, Pr. Payitta,mbh.s. =2SPA, 7. Catia, 1 2°ueeess’ PA, sg. Bimba,.2.s 7 = P,Tr. TS. . 9. Towmara, 27, = ATPT. jo. Rupamali, rm =—3SM, 11. Manimad’bya or Maniband’ha, ores, > D240 E12. Bh jangasangata,sg7r= ASI. © V. Pancrti 10x4 = 40. 1. Sudd’hayiraj,m 5 je =S T3I1. 2. Panava, (5 -+ 5), mn yg=SD+AS. ormnjg= SD +4ALI. 3, Mayurasarini, + jrg=4TS8. 4. Matta, (4 4 6),mbh.sg=28+42PS. 5, Upasv’hita, (24+8)227¢=8+4 2 Al. 6. Rucmavati or Champa- camala (5+5§). bh.msg¢ DS+ DS. 7. Manorsama, a 7 j g.=P 469 41. 8. Ssnyneta, P.Sonjunta, s2 Jg=P2T7 21. g.Saravati;3 dh. g =2DTI... io. Sushama,t y bh.g=SASA. 11. Amyrita- mati. or Amritagati, 7 jung =P APA. 12. Hansi, (4 -+ 6), m bhimg=2STr.S8. 13. Cha- rumuc’hi, ny bh. g =P ASA. 14, Chandramuchi, ¢ n dh. ¢= SP2A. VI. TrisHTusyH 11 x pe’ Y: 1, Indravajra, 2¢72¢—5S1 DTS. 2. Upendravajra, jt 7 2 g¢=2 IDTS. 3. Upajati, or Ac’hyanaci, (14 species.) The two foregoing intermixed. 4. Dod’ haca, Band’hu or Nilaswarupa, 36h, 2¢ =.3 DS. 5. Salini, (4471), m2i2e=228+ C TS. 6, Vatormi, (4 +7), bhet 2g =28 +AT S47. Bhramaravilasita, (4 + 7 +), m Td 2S4+2PA 8, It’hoed'dhata,, rarlg =2T A211. Q. Swagata,r 2 bh. 2e —2 TAPS." 10. Vrntavor Vritta, (4+ 7+),2252¢e=8 PAS. 11. Syenica, or Srenica, rjrig=4ATC. 12. Sumuchi, (5 46t),22 7/7 = PA+2A, 13. Bhadrica, 2arl/g —2PA2 1, 14, Maucticamala, Sri, Anu- cala or Cudmaladanti, (5 + 6), bh.in2g=DS+42PS5.. 15. Upas’hita,7s#2¢ = 1TrSTS. 16. Upachitra or Viseshica, 3 s/ g —3Al. 17. Cupurushajani-, ta, 27 2e— 2 PA bs ons. Anavasita, 2 y bh.2g=2PS DS. 1g. Mot'anaca, t+27 1 & —S3 A. ’ 20. Malatimala, 3 m 2g 245M. 21. Damanaca, ralg=4P A, 22, Madand’ha, msg2g=5 2TS. VIT. JaGaTII2~%A=AB. 1, Vansas’tha or Vans‘ast’ha-~ yila,gezr=Z1T3I. 2.tn- Hh 3 470 dravans‘a, 2¢7r—SI1T3I. 3. Upajati, the two foregoing inter- mixed. A. Tot'aca,4s=4A. 5. Drutavilambita, » 2 dh r= PI2ATJ. 6. S'triputa or Puta, (8+ 4,22my=3PS8S4T S. 7. Jalodd’hatagati, (6 + 6), geese iP PP Pr. ae te ta or Lalita, 2inmr=3P2S I. 9, Cusumavichitra, (6 + 6), nyny=2PS+4+2PS5. 10. Chanchala‘cshica,Pramudvitava- dana, Mandacini, Gauri or Pra- bha, (7 + 5),2"27=2PA+ BI. 11. Bhujangaprayata, 4 =ITSITS. 12. Sragvini or Lacshmi@hara,47—TSIiITS T. 13. Pramitacshara, s7 2s — ASc.2 A. 14. Cantotpada or Jaladharamala, (4 4+ 8), m bh. s m=28+2P2Sorsbh. msm =—DSD2S.3 15. Vais’ wadevi, {54 7),2@m247=MS+ TS B. 16. Navamalini, (8 + 4), #9 bhe y= BP SBT 4 PS... 17. Chandravartma, (4 + 8%), 7 1 Be SOT Pa AS US: Pri= yambada, w4.7r= P IPSI, 19. Man‘imala, (6+ O),t vty SE SFO Pic) De alae z bh. jr—SiP3i. 21; Uyjwalt, | Saran, t+) 273 2 ho eg tives lati or Varatanu, (5 + 7),2 27 7—PA+A2.1. 23. Tamarasa or Lalitapada, x 27 y=2P2D S. 24, Lalana, (547) bhim2s =P'S + :D'T 1 or bh. 7t'2s— D §8+2PA. 25. Drutapada, 2 bh.ny=PI3PS. 26. Vidy- ad’hara, (4+ 8),4m=25+44 S. 27.Saranga,4i —SITSI T. 28. Maucticadama, 47 = I PTT PT. 30." Modaca, +2. =4D. 30. Taralanayani, 4 cial. ie VIL. Arisacarti, 13 x Aa92- ; * 3. Praharshin:, (3 + 10) m m7 ON SANSCRIT AND rg=M+2P2TS. 2. Ru- chira, or Atiruchira, (449) 7 dh. sjg=214+2PTC. 3. Mat- tamayura, or Maya, (4 + 9) m tysg=25+TIDS. 4. Gauri, 2n2rg—3P TSB. 5. Man- jubhashin’i, Prabod’hita, Sunan- dini, or Canacaprabha s 7 57 g= Al + P'3'T.. 6, Ch ndriea, Cshama, Utpalini, or Cut ilagati, (7+. 6)2n2¢9 =PATS I. 7. Calahansa, Chitravati, or Sinhanada, 5 72s¢— P2T P DS. 8, Chancharicavali, y m2. rg S125 CTS) Seeman dralec’ha, (64+ 7)asryg=2 PI4+2TM.° 10. Vidyut, (6 +7) as2 tg Bok De ot C. 11. Mrigendramuc’ha, 227° te = PA P21 Sige dene ca, 453 = "SA Poo. pen eae canda, or Canda4y/= BIT SII. 14, Pancajavali, or Pan- cayali, dh. u 272 ='D2P 2D. 15. Cdandi,272s¢ =4PDS. 10, Prabhavati, (4 + 9) ¢ dh. 57 goS1+42PTC. IX. Saccars, 14. x 4 —506. : 1. Asambad’ha, (5 + 9) mtn s2g= MS+4+2PA S-@. Aparajita, (7 + 7) 227rslg = 2PA4+1Alorsurslg = PT AIAI. 3. Praharanacalita, ° or Calica, (7 + 7) 22 bh.nlg= 2PA+2PA. 4. Vasantati- Jaca, Sinhonnata, Udd’harshin41, Mad’humad’havi. or Sobhavyati, tbh.2j2¢g=SIPIPTS. 5. Lola, or Alola, (7 + 7) m sm bh. 2¢=SDS+SDS. 6. Indu- vadana, or Varasundari, 64. 7 5 n 2¢2TPTPT PS? 7 Nae, (7+ P\2n poe aS D.TS. 8. Lacshmi, ms # bh, 2g=SDSTDS. 9. Supavitra, (8+ 6)4n2¢>4P+4 2 Ps. 10. Madhyacshama, (4 4+ 10) or PRACRIT POETRY Cut’ila, (4-++ 6 + 4) m bh. ny § =28+3P+25. 11. Praimia- da, #jbh.jig —2P2TPTI. 12. Manjari, (5 + O)sisyle= P2TPYT SI. 13. Cumani, (Ss + 6) nj bh. j2g 2? REP rok * 34. Sucesara, 7 nrnrlg= P2IP3I. 15. Vasanti, oct aie 2g—2SDA2S. i6. Nandi- muc’hi, (7 + 7) 222:2¢=3 PSITS. 17. Chacra, or Cha- crapata, 4.3n/g—T5PI. 18. Lilopavati, (4 4+ 10;)4m2¢— 25 + 5S. 19. Nat’agati, 4 72 £=6 P+S. 20. Copavati, bf. m sti s= DS DSTI. X. ATISACCARI, 15 x A= 60. 1. Chandrayarta,(7 4+ 8t}42s= 3PTr.4+PTr.A. 2. Mala, or Sraj, (6+ 9) 4 xs=2 Tr.4 2Tr. A. 3. Manigun/anicara, (8 + 4) Ans=AP+2P A. 4. Malini, or Nan’dimuc’hi, (8 + 7j2nm2y=—3PS 4 CT S. 5. Chandralec’ha, (7 + 8) mrm2y=2SB4+SITS. 6. Camacri’da, Lilach’hela, or cons and Sarangaca, 5 me 6SM. 7. Pr: abhadraca, or Sub- ~ hadraca th Sucesara, (7 + 8) ajba.jr=2PO+P3I1. 8. Ela. (5 + 10)s ;2n y= AI +41T. 9. Upamilini, (S + 7) 2 nt bh. 1—3PT.4+SAL 10. Vipinatilaca,zsx2r = 2 PItTr. TSIJ.- 11. Chitra, 3 m 2 os BS MATT St. 12. ‘Funi- aca, or Chamara, (8 L 7 Br. 23c.)=6TC. 13. Bhramara- vali, 5s=5A. 14. Manahansa, $37 bh. 7A LP 221,15. S’arabha, or S’as icala, 4z 4+ 5s = 6@P A. 16. Nisipala, bh. js 7 =e PLP 2i.. 17sUtsarazrn 2bh.r=2T3 AI. 18. Hansa, (8+7)n2jry=2PD3TS. ATi XI. Asutr, 10,464. 1,,Rish rabhagajavilasi ra, or Gas sc ethedigs vilasita, {7 4+9) d4.7r32 ¢=D2T +3 PA. 2. Van= ini,2j bh. jr g=2P2TP2TS. 3. Chitra, Chitrasanga, Atisun- dara or Chanchala, (dont le Sa- manica) rjrjri=8T.. 4. Pan- chachamara, Naracha or Nara- cha, (double Praménica), j r jr Jg=—8T. 5.Dhiralalita, d4. rn r ng=D TP 2 TAS @r@ka- gati, Nila, Lila or Aswagati, 5 bh. g—4 DOE I, ae Chacita (S 48 i) bh. sming—=DAS+SD A. 8. Mada wnalalita, (4-+60+46) m bh.nmng—2S+2PI4+SPI, 9. Pravar alalita, mAsST g =—h2 § 2PITS. 10. Garudaruta, 77 4h. jute 2 PS TOT ST Ge. ae las’tie’ha, (16 or 546+45) bh, 12 o0h.g—D2T3 AorDT+ t PT +- TA, 12. Varayuyati, bf. T7pine — D2 S2 Pia As. Brahmerupaca, (double Vidyun- mala,)5mg—8S. 14 Achalad- hrita, or Gityarya,inl=8 P. 15. Pinanilamba, {44+5+7) m t ymsg=2S8+DS+4+S DS. 16. Yauvanamatta, (5+11) b4.3 ms g=D538+35 Ds XI. ATYASHITI,A7 x A—O8. 1. Sic’harin’?, (6411) ymns bhidg=12S5S+2PIDI. 2. Privhwi, (6+9)/sjsylg=t P2i+47Tr.TSI. 3. Vans‘apa- trapatita, or Vansapatra, (10 + 7) bh. rn bh. nlg=D2TA+42 PA, 4, Harin’i, (6 +44 7or t7)asmrslg =2PI14258 -LTAI. 5. Mandacranta, (4+ 6 +7) mbhn2t2e¢=258+42 Pl 1 C.-T. 8S. OF Wadcutmea,, or Nardat’aca (7 -+ 10}, or Avitat’ha a t), a bh, .2 j 1g=Tr. 2h + 7. Cocilaca, (74+6 { A72 4+4t¢or84+5 44 4)=Tr.2] + PIP+TI. 8. Hari, (64+4+47) Qnmrslg=—3P42S5+4I1AL. g. Canta, or Cranta, (4+6+47) y bhinrsig =1S+ 2PI+1 AI. 10. Chitralec’ha, or Atisayani, (104+7)2s7 bh.g2eg—2A2I 4+Tr.TS. 11. Malad’hara, or Vanamalad’hara, 2 sys y/g = 2 P21Tr.TSI. 12. Harini, (4 +647) mbh.nmylg=2842 PI+SBI. XII. Duriri, t8x4= 72. 1. Cusumitglata vellita, (5+6 +7) mtn3y—=MS+2P I+C TS. 2. Mahamalica, Naracha, Lata, Vanamala, (104+ 87t)2 4r—3 PTS+HIT SI. 3. Sud’- ha, (64646) ymusts= 125 4+2PI4SPI. 4. Harinaplota, (81545) ms 27 bh. r=ST 21 4+ AI+AI. 5. Aswagati,5 bh. s—5 DA. °6. Chitralec’ba, (4+ 4 4.7)m2n2im—ST+P Fr. S+1ITM. 7. Bhramarapada, bh.r3nm—D2TsPA S.° 8. Sardulalalita. (12 + 6) msjsts oye tT AS Pel 6. Sir dula, (1246) msjsrm=SD2 T AST BS. ATO. WCesara, (24-7 47) mbh.ny%r=2Sf¢uPa 4+ SIC. 11. Nandana, (11 + 7) nj bh. J 27=2PTDI421 ©, 12. Chitrasala, Chitralec’ha, (4474-7) m bh.n 3 yr=25+ 2 PAtCT SS: 13. Chala(423 +7) mbh.nj bh. r=25F2PA +A 14. Vivudhapr-ya, (8-- 10%) 7 62j bho r= 2T zi + P2T25. 15. Manjira, 2m bh, msm—3SDSD2S. 16. Crid- achandra, 6 y= IT PITPITP. 47. Charchari, rs27 5%. ¥=T.D C1): 2F 29. XIV: Aripuriti, 19x 4-70. 1. Sardulavicridita, or Sardula, /PA+HSI ON SANSCRIT AND (1247) msjs2tg=SD2T A+SIC. 2. Meg’havisp’hur- jita, or Vismitra, (64+64-7.) ym ns2rg—J)28S42P14+CTS. 3. Panchachamara, 2 » = alter- nate g/—Tr.P7 I. 4, Pushpa- dama, (54+747) mins2rgo= Ms+2PA+CTS.,. 5. Bimba, (5+7+7) mins2t g—=MS+42 6. Ch’haya, (646 +7 or 12+-7) ymns bh.t g=I 28+2Pi1+ DSI. 7.Maca- randica, (61647) ymus2 jg —-12S +2PI1-+1A by 8S. Sa- mudratata, (8S +447) 757 5 tbh. cxIP2iL PLESIA. 9.Su- rasa, (7+7+5)mrbh.nyng —=MTS }3PAL PT 10. Manimanjari, ybh.ny2jg=l S2PA2T21. 11 Chandra- mala, er Chandra, (10 + 9) 327 2n1=5P4+D3P, 12. Dha- valanca, or Dhavala, 6x g = 8 P A. 13. Sambbu, (74046) s¢# y bh. 2meg=ASASS3S. XV. Criri, 20x4=80° 1. Suvadana, (7+-7+ 6) m rbh- ny bh. la=2SB+2PA+S PL: 2. Vritto, or Gandaca, r jr j rj gIl=lOT. 3.Sobha, (6+ 7 + 7\ ym 2n2Zt2@e=lZS4+2PA 4+ TSB, A. Gitica, or Gita, s oj bhrslg=AIP2T2TAl. XVI. Pracriri, 21 x A-— 84. 1. Sragdhara, (7 + 7+ 7) ™ rthn3y=2SB42PA4 TS B.. 2. Salilanid’hi, Sarasi, Sidd’haca, Sasivadana or Dhri- tasri, 2) 64.3 7r=2PTDI142 A2I. 3. Narendra, dh.r2n 2j)y—D2T 3 P2D5. XVII. A’crit1, 22 x4 FEL 1 Bhacraca, (10 +.12) dA, rn rarng—=D2TAtITr.2TA. 2, Madira, or Lalita, 7 24. g=6 PRACRIT POETRY. DTI. 3. Hansi, (8414) 2m2 g4n2g—45S+6PS. XVIII. Vicritr, 23x%4 02. 1. As'walalita, or Adritanaya, (11412) 27 64.7 bh. j bho dl g= Se eDi+t0Te. TDL. 2. Mattacrida,, or Vajivahana, (8+ 15)2mt4nlg—4S+PA. 3. Sundari, (7 + 6+ 10) 25d/.s¢ 2j=APS42PS42D. 4. Ma lati, or Madamatta, 7 54. 2¢ =7 DS. 5. Chitrapada, 7 bh. 1 g=7D I, Mallica, 7,7 4g—I1P LP TIP:T I A, XIX. SancriTi, 24 x4 — 96. 1. Tanwi, (64+7412+4 12)d/. ins 2 bh.ny=DS+2P A+ 2 A473 D2Ps. 2.Durmila,8s=—8 A. 3.Cirita, 844.=8D. 4. Jana- a,6rf2TSITSIT Ss ag 5. Madha’vica’,77y=I1PTIPT IPTIPS. XX. ATICRITI,25 x4 = 100. 1, Craunchpada, (54+5+4+8-+4 7) b4.ms bh. Ang=DS4+DS8 +4P+42PA. 2, S’ambhu, 8 mg—11SM. XXI.Urcriti26y% 4— 104. 1. Rhujangavijrimbhita, (8 + ll +7) 2Qmi3ursig=4S+4 4APA+TJATI. 2.Apavaha, (9 464645) mOns2¢g—=SD2 P+3P+3P+AS.. 3. Gauri, 8 m2g—13 8, eae Erom 27 to 9909 syllables in the verse. Dawn’paca, 27 X 4= 108 to 9909 Xx 4= 3906. 1. Chan’darishtiprayata, 2 2 7 r=z2 Tr. 6C. 2. Prachita, 22 8 &c. r. 325 species from 9 to 333 feet viz. 2d Arna,2”8r. 3d Arn- ava, 22Qr.. 4th Vyala, 210 7. Sth Jimuta, 2” ill r &c. Or 3. Prachita,@n 7 &c. y = 2 Tr. 7 &c. Be 4, Mattamatangalilacara, 9 &c,7 = 0-&c. ©. 5. Sinhavicranta, 2 2 10 &c, r. 6. Cusumastavaca, 9 &c.s = Q &c. A. 7- Anangasec’hara, 1g 1g &c. = 15 &c. I. 8. Asocamanjari, r j &c. = 15 &c. hes Alfo S.tura,2g¢8"s —§ 12 === VI. Half equal Metre ;.the stanza being composed of equal and similar couplets; but the couplets, of dissimilar VETSeS. 1. Upachitra, (Upajati 4- Ta- marasa). \st 3 verse3silg —3 Al. 243 64.2g=3DS. 2. Drutamad’hya, (Dod haca+ Tamaraic), ist 3 bh.2¢,=3D S. 2da22 y=3P2D5. 3. Vegavati, (Upachitra—pe- nult Br, in Ist verse). Ist3s ¢ =ZAPS. 24364.9g—2D58. 4. Bhadraviraj (species of Av- pach’handasica), [sit jrg=3P 2TS. 2dmsj2g—SD2Tu 474 5. Cetumati. Istsz7 sg — Al Tr.S. 20° 64,r22¢ =T.21 Tr76) 4% 6. Ac*byanaci (Upajati viz. alternate Indravajra and Upen- dravajra; some say, one verse Indravajra three Upendravajra.) Ist (and 3d) 2 ¢7 Fe—Sl DTS. 2d (and 4th some sav 3d) jt 7 ¢ Ie=21D TS. 7. Viparitac;hyanaci (the con- werse of the preceding.) Ist 7 t 7 2 g-2I DTS. 2d2¢j2g=—SI DTS. 8. Harin’apluta (Drutavilam- bita — one syllable) Ist 357g¢= 3AI. 2dx2bhr=PI2Al. Q. Aparayaotra (species of Vaitaliya: ot Bhadrica4+- Malati). tet 2arlg =2PAZTI. 2d n2jr=P2A2i. ON SANSCRIT AND PRACRIT POETRY. 10. Pushpitagra (species of Anpach’handanca). Ast2n ry =3P2T8.- 2Wda2yjreg= 2B 3 TS: 11. Yavamati. Istrjrj = GIRS" 3d)y'r5'7 g = Se 12, Sicha. 1st 287 ¢ = 7 Tr. Pe 13. Chanja.. 1st 307 = 7 Tr, P;) 94:28) w= 9 Se BY Ss 7 Vr. 14, Lalita. IstrsJ gg = 2T 27; 2d s ajo A Tre ae 15. Caumudi (Bhadrica + Chanchalacshic3). Ist 2 nrlg — Tr. P31. 2272 ae Sil 16, Manjusaurabha (Malati + Manjubhashin'), stn 2yr =S2P TSI. WdsYsPee a P-3 I. : en AS ee VII. Unequal Metre ; the stanza hein 14 composed of dissimilar verses. a) 1. Udgata, 1st verses 757 = AITr. T/28 187 ¢°= Tr. A 2 TY. 3d bh.nglg= Tir 2 A. Athsjsjg =AIP3I. 2 varieties: viz. Savrabhaca, 3d verser 2 bh.g =TD2A. La- lita, 3d verse2725—=2Tr.2A. 2. Upast’hitaprachupita, Ist verse sj bh.2g—=SD2TDS. Qdsnjrg=A2PTS.3d2ns =—PA.4thanj7y—=5PDS. 2, varieties: viz. Bard'hman'a, gdverse2us2ns=3PA. 3 P A Sudd’havira lrishabha, 3d versetzvr=SA@kh 3. PADACHATURUED HA, iIn- creasing in arithmetical progres> . sion from § to 20 syll. viz. Ist “a verse 8, 2d 12; 3d 10, 4th 205) 6 species: viz. Apida, End in S Rest Br. Pratydpida, Begin with S orbegin and end with S, Man- jari or Colicd, 1st and- 2d verses transposed 12 + 8-4 10 ++-, 20. Laval, \stand 3d transposed 16 4+ 12+ 8+ 20. Amritad hard, Ist and 4th transposed 204 12 +1048. ’ — VIII. Supplement, under the denomination of Ga’ THA’. 1. Stanzas comprising four un equal verses, constituting ametre not described by writers on pro- sody & 2. Stanzas Comprising more or fewer verses than four; viz. three, five, six, &c. 3. Any metre not specified by PINGALA. 4. Metre not specified by any writer on prosody. Prats = . —— Peis A Us Remarks upon the Aurnonities of MosurmMan Law*. BY J.H. HARINGTON, ESQ. ",, + g HE basis of Mohummudan law, religious, civil, and criminal, is the Kordn; believed to be of divine origin, and to have been revealed by an angel to Mo- uuMMuD ; who Caused it to be written and published, from time to time, as occasion required, for the refuta- tion of his opponents, or the instruction and guidance of his followers: though the hundred and fourteen So0- wur, or chapters, which compose the Koraz, were not digested, in their present form, until after the death of Mouummup: whenthey were collected by his imme- diate successor Azoo Buxr; and were afterwards, in the 30th year of the Hijrah, transcribed, collated, and promulgated, by order of the Khuleefuh Oruma’n-f. Tue Kordn being thus considered the writjen word of God, its texts, when clear and applicable, and not abrogated by other texts of subsequent revelation, are unquestionable anddecisive. But, (as remarked by an eminent historian ¢,) ‘‘ In all religions the life of the founder supplies the silence of written revelation: the sayings of Manom™ert were so many lessons of truth ; a eee eee ee ee eS * These remarks are intended to form part an Analysis of the Laws and Regulations, for the civil government of the British ter- ritories, under the Presidency of Bengal. This work is designed for the use of the students in the coliege oi Fert Wiliam; and the second part, which relates to Criminal Jastice, is introduced'by a summary of the Mobummudan law of crimes and punishments, for the purpofe of rendering more intelligible the amendments of it enacted by the Regulations of the Governor General in Council. + V. Sare’s Preliminary Discoarse, Section III. ¢ {In chap.L. of the Decline and Full of the Roman Empire, relative to Arabia. . 476 REMARKS UEON THE his actions so many examples of virtue; and the public and private memorials were preserved by his wives and companions.” In fact, the ordinances of the Kordn, in civil affairs are few and imperfect; and must have proved altogether inadequate to provide for the various objects of legislation, in a large and civilized commu- nity, without the aid of the Soonnut, or rule of conduct, deduced from the oral precepts, actions, and decisions, of the prophet. ‘These were not committed to writing by Mouummup; but were collected after his death, by tradition, from his companions, (the Sahdbah ;) their contemporaries, (Tubiieen, literally, followers ;) and successors (Tubd-i-tabiieen;) and the authentic traditions, which have been preserved in numerous compilations of fhddees, (dicta, factaque; precepts and transactions;) Soonun, (instituta vile/, exempla; rules of practice and examples ;) or Riwdyat, (relationes, reports;) constitute a second authority of Mosulman Jaw; conclusive (if the authenticity and application of the traditions be admitted) in all cases not expressly determined by the words of the Kordn *. -_——— — ,— - * The collections of traditions held in the most general estimation, as genuine and authoritative, by the Soonces, or orthodox traditi- - onists, are the following; denominated SiAdA-7-sitla ; or the six au- thentics. 1. Sahech-i-Bokhdree. Compiled by Asoo Aspootran, Mo- HuMMuD, of Bokhard. He was born A. H. 194; and died in the year 250; in the suburbs of Sumurkund. His compilation is said to contain above seven thousand traditions ; selected from 500,000. 2. Saheeh-i-Mooslim. By Azoo’s Hose x, Moosuim, of Ny'sha- poor. He died A. H.261; and is also said to have compiled bis work from 300,000 traditions. This and the preceding coiléction, when cited together, are called Sahcehy'n, or the tevo authentics. 3. Soonwn-1-l5n-i Majah. By MouwuMMUD-RIN-I YUZEED, BIN-I Masan: of Kuzeen. (Erroneously named Ben MounumMup, in D'Herseror. Title Senan Ebn Magiah.) He died at Kuzveen, in Irak, A, H.273. 4, Soonun-i Aboo Diood. By Asoo Da‘oop, Sory’ma’n, of S¢jis- tan. He was born A..H. 202; and died at Busrah, in the year 275. His work is stated to consist of 4,800 traditioss selected from 500,000. ; ; —_—. ~— ’ AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A77 Tue schisms and dissentions, however, which took place among the Mohummudans, after the demise of their legislator and fuunder, especially the contest of the succession to the Khilafut, or pontificate, which gave rise to the Shiya, or sectariesof ALEE, have occafioned various differences and disagreements, both in reading and interpreting the words of the Koran, and in ad- mitting or rejecting the traditions, which compose the oral law. ‘There appear to be an error, or verbal inae- a 5. Jima-i Tirmizee. By Asoo Jgzsa Monummun, of Tirmiz, in Toorkistan. He is alsosurnamed Zyreer or Duuresr, from his blindness. His birth was A. H. 209; and his death in 279. His compilatien is noticed by D'Hersetor, under the title of Gzame al Kebir; and is erroneously cited (apparently from D’Hersecor,) in Ham:1Ton’s Preliminary Discourse, page 36, as quoted in the Hida- yah: instead of the Jéma-i-Kubeer, on fik-h, or jurisprudence, by Imam MouumMup. 6. Jama-i Nisdee; called also Soonun-i Nisdee. By Anoo-1 app- oo Rauman AumupD, of Visa,a city of Khorasan. He was born A. H. 215; and died in the year 303., This collection is selected from a former compilation, by ibe same author, called the Soonun-i- koobra; and mentioned by D’Hexsgexot, under the title of Sonex Al Kebir. The four works last mentioned, when cited collectively, have the designation of Soonun-i-urba, or the four collects of traditions. The fhort notices, which) have been gigen, of their compilers, and of the authors of the Saheehyn, ave taken chicfly trom the Mirat-oolpaalum, an esteemed general history composed by Buxutiyar Kuan, in the reign of Avrunezes. They are confirmed, with many other ’ particulars, in the Mishfat, a work of autiority on the traditions - admitied by the Soonees; and used, as a class book, in Mosulman Colleges, with the Saheeh-i Bukharee, aud Saheeh-i Mooslim. The author, Saygsu WarrezoopeEeN, Asoo ABvooLLAH, Maumoop, who finished his undertaking (to verify and illustrate the traditions conthined in a foriner compilation, called the Musabeeho’ soonnut, by Hosen Bin-i Musoo-oop, Furars) A. H. 737, states that the Mowutta of Matix pin Ans, (the founder of the second orthodox sect, who died A. H. 179} ts, by some reckoned one of the sixth au- thentic coilections, instead of the Soonwn-i Ibni Majah. He adds that others are of opinion, the Darumee, compiled by Asoo Mouum- MUD ABDOOLLAH of Sumurkund, surnamed DaruMeE, who was born A. H. 181, and died in 255, sbould be classed as the sixth au- thentic. But he iias himself given this place to the compilation of Moxvummup, the grandson of Masau; and it is commonly placed third in the series, with reference to the supposed order of publica- tion. 478 REMARKS UPON THE curacy, in the observation of the learned, and in gene ral accurate, translator of the Koran, that “the Son- nites receive the Sonna, or book of traditions of their prophet, as of canonical authority ; whereas the Shiites reject it as apocryphal, and unworthy of credit *.” From this remark it might be inferred, that the Siiyd reject the traditions altogether ; whereas they admit many which are not deemed authentic, and are consequently rejected, by the Sdonees. They have also their collections of hddees, and Sdonun, which they deem genuine and authoritative ¢. The difference between them, and the h/-i-Sconnui, or othodox tra- ditionists, who, as remarked by Mr. Hamitton, ap- | pear to have assumed this title of distinction, ** in op- position to the innovations of the sectaries X,”’ lies, as far as respects the traditions, in the different autho- ee ee * Sare’s Preminary Discourse, Section VIII. : + Movuraver S1kxAj 00’DEEN Atre (one of the law officers of the courts of Sudr Deewareeand Nixamut Adalut, as wellas of the Supreme Court,and employed by the late Sir W. Jonzs, to compile the Sheeah part of a Digest of Mosu!man Law, upon contracts and inheritance) states the Kovioob-i urba, or four books of traditions, held autiieniic by the Shiya, 10 be the following : 1. Tahzeecb. 2. dstibsar. Both compiled by Asoo Jarur Mo- HuUMMUN, of Teos in Khorasan. 3. Jama-i Kafee. By Mounummup sin-1 Yaxoor. Of Ry in Persian Irak. 4. Mun la Yahzoorb ool-fukeeh.. By Monummup-s1n ALeg, of Komm, also in lrak-i Ajum. The third of these collections, which quotes the compiler of the two first, is said to have been presented to Imam Manpes, who was born A. H. 255. The author of the fourth compilation is stated in the Mujalis ool~Momuneen, to have been contemporary with, and protected by, the Persian King Roxn-oo’pou.an, whodied, A, H. 360. { Preliminary Discourse to his translation of the Hidayah, page 22. Hisobseryation, at length, is ‘‘ the Mussulmans, who assume to themselves the distinction of orthodox, are such as maintain the most obyious interpretation of the Koran, and the obligatory force of the traditions, in opposition to the innovation of the sectaries ; whence they are termed Soonis, or traditionists.” This, however, is partly open to' the same objection, as has been stated to the re- mark of Mr, Saxe. ; : OE AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A79 rities, which are admitted by the two sects for the Ahaadees, received by them respectively. The Stonees allow traditionary credit to the Sahabak, or companions of their Prophet; especially to the most eminent amongst them, or those who had the longest and most familiar intercourse with Monummup; and to the Khoolfa-i rashideen, or the four Khuleefahs, who were the immediate successors of the Prophet ; and in- structed-by him in the principles, and tenets of his religion. Also to several intelligent and learned men, who were contemporary with the companions and first Khuleefahs, and who are included in the general de- scription of Tabijeen already mentioned ; as well’ as to others, who succeeded these; (the Yiuha-i-tabi-icen ;) and have veritied their reports of traditions, by citing the names of the persons, through whom they were successively traced to their genuire source, the inspired Apostle of God*. Tue Shiyé, on the contrary, gaye no authority, of credit, to the three first A‘hulecfahs, Aznoo Buxr, Omer and Oruma’n : nor to any other companions of MonummMupD, excepting such as were partisans of Axreg. They extend their faith and obedience, how- ever, to the admission of all traditions of their Pro- ee ee a ee * The nature of this treatise does not admit ofa fuller account of the Soonee tradititions ; which are distinguished by some authors as Saheek (authenticated ;) Husun (approved :) Zazeef-o-ghureeh (weak and poor ;) Meonkur-o-mouzooa (denied and imposed:) by others, as Moosnud (vouched or certified ;) and Moorsu?, or Moonkuta (detached or divided.) The Moosnud are also subdivided as Murfooa (ascend- ing to the Prophet ;) Moukoof (resting with the Sahabch;) and -Muktooa (severed or cut short among the TzAzieen 3) or by any other classification as Mootawatur (repeated, successive ;) Mush,hoor public, notorious; and /ahid (single, particular.) The Mzshkai, ' referred toin a former note, has however been translated by an of- ficer of the Bengal establishment, and if it receive sufficient en- courage ment te repay the heavy-expence of printing in India, it will be speedily published, A80O REMARKS UPON THE phet’s sayings and actions, which they believe to have been verified by any one of the twelve Imdmeeyah ; a6 well as to the precepts and examples of those Jmams themselves ; the whole of whom they venerate, as being the lineal descendants (through Fa’riman), and ac- cording to their tenets, the rightful successors, of Mouvummop ; and the last of whom they believe to - be still living, though invisible; it having been pre- dicted of him, that he will return to judge and rule the world ; to punish sinners, and those who have de- parted from the true faith; and to restore and con- firm the genuine truths of religion, with piety, justice, and every other virtue *. WueEwn neither the written nor oral law prescribes a tule of decision, the concurrence of the companions of Monummup (Jjmé,4 i Sahabah) is received by the Sconees, asa third source of legal authority: and if *’Phe names of the twelve Jmams are given by D'HeRgetor, under the head of Imam. He has also given a brief statement of the tenets of the Shiva, under the titles of Schiah, Ali, and other titles of his valuable, though (as might be expected in so volumi- nous ard miscellaneous a work) sometimes erroneous and often im- perfect compilation. A fuller account of the doctrines, and practice of the Shiya is contained in the 2d vol. of Cuarpin. (Description dela Religion des Persans, in the Amsterdam Edition of his Vayage en Perse published in M.DCC.XI.) But the most authentic informa- tion upon the jurisprudence of the Imdmeeyah sect, (which, not » having been established, for the administration of justice, in any part ot the Company’s territories, needs not to be further noticed in this tract,) will be furnished by the completion of a work, the first yolume of which is already printed,) and entitled— A Digest of Mohummudan Law, according to the tenets of the Twelve Imams ; *‘ compiled under the superintendence of the late Sir Witt1am “« Jongs: extended, so as to comprise the whole of the Jmameea code ‘© of jurisprudence, in temporal matters; and translated, from the « original Arabze, by order of the Supreme Government of Bengal ; «* with Notes, illustrative of the decisions of other sects of Mohum~- ‘¢ mudan lawyers, on many leading and important questions. By ** Captain Joun Baruyig, Profeflor of the Arabic and Persien Lan- “ suages, and of Mohummudgn Law, in. the College of Fort « William.” AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A81l this also fail, they allow the validity of reason, restricted by analogy, (hiyas) in applying, by inference, the ge- neral principles of law and justice, to the various trans- actions and circumstances of the changeful scene of human life; which, as they could not be all foreseen, itwas impossible they should be ‘completely and ex- pressly provided for. This is so clearly stated, with the origin of the principal Sdonee sects, who agree in matters of faith, (ekweed,) but differ on points of prac- tical jurisprudence, ( fik,A,) in a section of the Mokhtusur 60 dowul (compendium of dynasties) of Grecortus Asoo'L Furvs, translated (into Latin) by Pocock, in his Specimen Ehstorie Arabum; that the following Englhsh version will not, it is persumed, be unaccept- able ; especially as both the Arabic orignal and Latin translation, are little known in India *, “Or the sects (Muzéhib) which differ upon the branches, or derivative parts of the law, concerning rules of jurisprudence, and cases of disquisizion, four are the most celebrated : viz. those of M’aALIK BIN-I Ans ; of Monummup BIn-1 IpREEs, 00° SH’AFIAEE; of AnMup Btn 1 Hungut; and of Agoo He sane Naoma’n Bin-t TuHa’sit. The fundamental yrounds of disquisition ({jtzhad} are also four; the scripture * Azoo'’L Furus wasa Christian, born at Malathia in Aladulia, ot Armenia minor, A.C, 1226. Buthe wrote in Aradic, and appears to have been weil versed in the religion and law, as we -Il as in the history, of Aradia. V.Pocock’s S becimen Historie Arabnm, coin= prising an extract from the dynasties of Azoo’L Furus, which, GIBBON obseives, “* form a classic and origina! work on the Ay dian antiquities.” Published at Oxford, in 1050. Alsv the complete Latin version of the original work, by Pococs, published in 1663. Greson has added, upon this, however, that * it. is more useful for the literary than the civil history ef the East.” Cap. Lils v.13. . Ei 482 REMARKS UFON THE (Aitab.;) the traditionary law (Sdonnut ;) the concur- rence of the prophet’s companions (/jmad ;) and ana- logy, or analogical reasoning (kiyas). For, when any legal question arose, respecting what was lawful or un- lawful, a regular investigation took place, in the follow- ing manner. First, they searched the book of Almighty God (the Koran ;) and if any clear text were found in it, such was adhered to. But, if not, they sought for a precept, or example, of the Prophet; and abided by it, if applicable, as decisive. If none such were discovered, they inquired for a concurrent opi- nion of the zahabah; who, being directed in the right way, are not open to suspicion of misleading ; and therefore, if their sentiments could be ascertained, on the point in question, they were deemed conclu- sive. If not, an ‘ultimate resort was had to analogy and reason ; the yariety of contingent events being in- finite ; whereas the texts of the laware finite. It thus appears certain that the exercise of reason may be pro- per and necessary in legal disquisition. Ima’m Da‘oop of Isfahan, howeyer, entirely rejected the exercise of reason ; whilst, on the contrary, Asoo HungrErau was so much inclined to it, that he frequently preferred it, in manifest cases, to traditions of single authority. But Ma‘’urx, Suarijfes, and Ipn-1 Hunsut, had seldom recourse to analogical argument, whether mani- fest or recondite, when they could apply either a posi- tive rule, or a tradition. This gave rise to their dif- ferent opinions and judgment ; which are recorded in books that treat of their disputations ; yet neither infi- delity, or error, is to be charged against them on this account.” Tue four principal jurists, and founders of sects, among the sdonces, who are noticed by Anoo’L Furvs, have been particularly mentioned in the notes of AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A483 Pocock’s Specimen, already referred to; in the Bibliotheque of D’Hexperor ; and in the preliminary discourse of SALE and Hamriron *. The doctrines of Ma’trk, and Inn-1 Hungun, are not known to prevail in any part of India. Those of Swa’Fiigx have a limited prevalence on the sea coast of the penin- sula; and are understood to obtain among the Mulays, and other Mosulman inhabitants of the Eastern Islands. But the authority of Asoo HunErEFAnH, and his two disciples, ABoo Yoosu# and Im’am Mouum- MUD, is paramount, and exclusively governs judicial * Their names, at length, are—1. Asoo Hunerran Nadma’n BIn-I THABIT: or, as pronounced in India, SagitT. 2. Asoo AsBpvooLLtAH MALIK BIN-I-aNs, or, as otherwise read, Anus, 3 Asoo ABDOOLLAH MonuMMUD IBN-I-IDREFS OO’SHAFIIEE, or 2 descendant from SHarFii. 4, ABoo ABnooLLAH AHMUD IBN-1 Hunsut. The first is commonly called Asoo Huneeran, eaning the father of Hunegrau, and therefore is impro- petly cited, in the translation of the Hidayah, by the name of Huneerau only; which, moreover is a ieminine appellation, and was the name of the second wife of Atez. (Vide Tit. Haniran,- in the Bib. of D’Hersetor,) He was born at Koofah, about A. H. 80; (some say ten, and others twenty-one, years earlier ;) was in- structed in the traditions, by Imam Jarur-r Sapik, the sixth Imam ; who, as an authority for the precepts and actions of Monummup, is esteemed by the Soonces, as wel! as by the Shiya ; (not the Sheeah Doctor, Asoo Jarur, mentioned in a former note; as erroneously stated in Hamitton’s Preliminary Difcourse, p. xxiii. Vid. Tit. Giafar inthe Bib. Or.) and. died in prifon, at Bughddd, in the Khildfut of Munsoor, A. H. 150. The founder of the second sect is known by his proper name Matix. He was born at Mu- deenah, between the vears 9O and 95 of the Hyrah ; and died, at the same place, in a state - of religions retirement, during the reign of Haroon oo’iitusuzep, A. H. 179. The patronymic, Shafiiee, usually distinguishes the third leader: who was born at Gzza or Ascalon, in Palestine ; in the hundred and fiftieth year of the Aijrah ; and died at Cairo, (where the famous SaLAd 00 DEEN, some cen- turies afterwards, founded a College, in honour of his memory and doctrines,) A. H. 204. The last chief, AHMUD,is more generally called, from his father, Jgn-1 Hunput. He was born at Bughdad, or according to some at Murv, or Muroo, in Khorasan, A. H. 164, and died at Bughdad, where he attended the lecture ot Su avitie, A.H, 241, Tia AB4 ' REMARKS UPON THE decisions, in Bengal and Hindoostan, as well as ‘at Con stantinople, and other seats of Mohummudan dominio in Turkey and Tartary. It will therefore be sufficient to state the system of Asoo Hunzrran, ‘with the il- lustrations, and amendments of Asoo Yoosur and Im’am Mouummup *.; noticing, after the manner of the Hidayah, any. particular opinions of the other orthodox sects, upon points of importance, which may appear to require it. ! Ir has been remarked by Sir W. Jones, in his pre- face to the Sirajeeyah +, ‘that although Azoo —S eee * Azoo Yoosur Yaxoor pind IBRAAEEM OoL Koores, was born at Keofah, A. H.113 ; and after finishing his studies under AxsooHuneeran, was appo'nted Kazee of Bughdad by the Khalleefah, Hanes. He was aiterwatds, in the reign of Haroon 00" Rusueep, made Kazce oo! Koozat, or chief Judge; and retained that-high station, (which is said to have been first instituted for him) until bis death, A. HW, 18°22}Aseo AppooLtran MouumMmup Bin-1 Husuw oo" Suyeanze (of the tribe of Shyban) who is usually called Imam Mouowmup, was born at Wasit in Arabian Irak, A, H, 132., He was a fellow pup'l with Asoo Yoosur, under Asoo Huwnreran, and on the death of the latter, continued his studies. uncer the former. He is also said to have received instruction from) Matix. He was appointed by Haroon 0o’RusHgep to administer jostice in Irak-i Ajum or Persian Irak, and died at Ry, the former capital of that province, A.H. 179: or, according tO; the Rowzt oc'rivahern, an esteemed history from the comimence-_ ment to the 75yth-year of the Hijrah, by’ Yarirer, A.H. 189. (See further particulars respecting Apoo Yoosur and Imam Mo- HUMMUD, in Hamrtton’s Preliminary Discourse). Zoorur BINn-1 Hoozer, and Husun pin-1 Ziv Av, (the former of whom held the. appointinent of chief magistrate at Busrak, where he died A. H,. 158) were also two distinguished contemporaries, and schiolars, of Axzoo Hunerran ; and are sometimes quoted as authorities for his doctrines ; especially when the’two principal difciples are silent. tT A work of authority upon the Mohummudan law of inheri-- tance, transtated’ and published, witha commentary, by Sir W. Jones, in the year 1792. This is the only part’ of the Mosulman - Digest, undertaken by'the venerable judge in 1788, which his various _ avocations and studies allowed’ him to complete.. He deemed it _ worthy of being exhibited entire, as cOntaining the « Institute of Arabian law om the important title mentioned by the Brisish legis- Jature (in the Statute 21 Groreg IN. Chapter LXX) of inheritance - AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 489° Huyrrran be the acknowledged head of the prevail- ing sect, and has given his name to it, yet so great veneration is shown to ABoo Yoosur, and the lawyer Monuvummoup, that, when they both dissent from their master, the Moosulman judge is at liberty to adopt either of the two decisions, which may seem to him the more consonant to reason and founded on the better authority.” This remark corresponds with the re- ceived opinion of present lawyers; and is sanctioned, for the most part, by a passage to the following effect in the Hummadeeyah*. ‘+ Futwas (law decisions, or Opinions) are given primarily, according to the doctrine of ABoo YoosurF ; next according to Im’am and succession to lands, rents, and goods.’’ And it is of particular value to the jurisprudence of British India, as the Hidayah, trans- lated by Mr. Hamitton, does not include the law of inheritance. it has not been ascertained when the author of the original treatise lived. But the Kushf 00 Zunoen,.(or dhunoon, as pronounced in Arabia) the bibliographical work of Hasee Kuuiran, which fur- nished materials for a considerable part of the Bibliotheque Orientale, (Vid. Gavann’s preface, p. xiv. Ed. M.DCC.LXXVI.) mentions it, under the title of Purayid 00’ Sujawundee in the following terms; together with the date of the commentary of Syrup SHuREEF; the substance of which is given by Sir W. Jones, with that of a recent Persian comment, by Moutaves. Mozummup Kasim, who was employed by Mr. Hasrines to translate, from the Ara/ic into Persian, both the Sirajeeyah and the Shuree feeyah. ‘* Vhe Furayid-co’ Sujawundee, composed by Imam S1RAJ 00’DEEN, Maumoop sin-1 Asp oo’ RusHerv, of Swawund, is commonly called the Fura,cezi Sirajseyah. It is held in high estimation and ia general use. Many’of the learned have written commentaries upon it, to the number of forty ; the best of which is the comment of Syyup oo’Suurrer ALEE B1N-1 Monummup, of Joorjan; finished, Sumurkund, in tbe year (of the Hijrah) 104. This commentary is of the first authority, and universal'y received. Several Scholiasts, of erudition, haye civen annotations upon it. * A- collection of legal expositions, by Asoo’. ruTHa, Roxn oo DEEN 1BN-1 Hosam, Mooftee of Nagor, in the Dwkyun ; and de- dica.ed to his teacher, Humap oo’ peren, AumupD, chief Kazece, of Nuhr walah. The rime when this work was compiled is not.ex- act'y known ; bat, thought of modern date, it is held in consider- able estimation. The court of Nizamut Ada/ut possess a compiete cooy, obtained for them, with some other Jaw byoks, by Lord Teignmouta, from the Vuwab V izeer, in the year 1797. ' hs li3- A480 REMARKS UPON THE MontumMMupD next according to Zoorur; and then according to Husuw pin-r Ziy’ao. It is said, that if Asoo Hunerran be of one opinion, and his two disciples of another, the Mooftee is at liberty tochuse either; but the preceeding rule must be observed, when the Moofee is not a scientific jurist ; (and there- fore not competent to judge of the opposite opinions.) This is copied from the koonyah *, In judicial de- creees however a preference is given to the doctrine of Asoo YoosuF (who was an eminent judge) ; for Imam Surukhsee +, has declared it safe to rely upon ABoo Yoosur in judicial matters ; and that the learned have followed him in such cases; though if there be a dif- ference between the two disciples, which ever agrees with Agoo Hunegerau must be preferred. The joint opinion of the disciples may also be adopted, though different from that of Asoo Hunesran, if the dif- ference appear to proceed from a change of human affairs ; (/it.a change of men, and alteration of*times ;) and modern lawyers are agreed, that the doctrine of the two disciples may be taken for adjudication in all matters of civil justice.” Ir appears, however, that the ancient jurists held the authority of Azgoo Hunerrau to be absolute, although both his disciples might differ from him, This is stated, without reservation, in a chapter, ‘‘ on the order of authorities to be observed in_ practise,” * A law tract often quoted inthe Futawa-i Aalumgeeree, not known to be at present extant; and by whom composed, has not . been ascertained. ft Spums oot Aimman, Asoo Buxr Mosummup, native of Surukhs.in Khorasan. The Moheet composed by him will be men- tioned in a subsequent note. He also wrote acommentary on the Jama-i Sughecr of IMam MouummMupn ; and a comment upon thie Kefee ool Hakim, (statedin the Kush/-o0'xunoon to have been com- posed by Haxim-1 SHaugED, Monummup; but no longer extant,) which is called Mubsoot-i Sarukhsee, and often quoted in the Hidaych. He died, at the place-of his nativity, A. H. 483. Led ? AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A87 forming part of the book entitled dddéb ool kaxee, or duties of the kdzee, in the Futawd-i Adlumgeeree, of collection of law cases, compiled by order of the Em- peror AA’LuMGEER. ‘The same chapter contains other useful information upon the rules and discretion, under which the Mosulman magistrate is empowered to ad- minister justice ; and as it is not long, a literal trans- lation of it is here introduced ; omitting only a quota- tion from the Mubsoot, which being nearly a repetition of that given from the Budayia, the insertion of both appeared superfluous. “ Tr is incumbent upon a ézee (or judge) to give judgment according to the book of God; to know what parts of the divine book are in force, and what have been abrogated ; to be able to distinguish be- tween the texts which are clear and positive ; and such as are of doubtful meaning, having obtained a different interpretation from the learned. If-no rule be found_ in the book of God, the sdzee is to decide according to the traditions from the Prophet. He must there- fore be competent to discriminate those in force from such as have been superseded ; and the spurious and invalid, from such as are genuine and authoritative. He must be acquainted with those which have obtained successive, notorious, or single, verification; and with the character and credit of the reporters of them. Because some are celebrated for their knowledge of jurisprudence (jik-h 6 adalut;) as the four first khulee- fahs, and the three ABDooLLans, (viz. ABDOOLLAH 1BN-1 Omur, ABDLOOLAH IBN-I ABBa’s, and AB- DOOLLAH IBN-1 Musdéoop, three of the more learned of the companions ;) whilst others are esteemed on account of their long and familiar intercourse with the Propbet, and their perfect recollection of the tra- ditions ; and they are preferred accordingly ; the for- mer as the best yom a on the general principles 1A 488 - REMARKS UPON THE of legal science ; the latter for the authenticity of par- ticular traditions. If a case arise to which none of the traditions, derived from the Prophet, may be applicable, let the kuzee determine it. according to the concurrent opinion of the Sahabah (companions), for their con- currence affords a just and obligatory rule of conduct. If there be a difference of opinion a mong the compa- nions, let the azee compare their respe ective arguments, and follow those which. on investigation, may appear to him preferable; supposing him “qualified to enter into such adisqnisition. He is not authorized to reject the whole of these opinions, and adopt a judgment of his own, altogether novel. For the companions have agreed upon this point, that although they may differ ‘sts n each other, it is not lawful to institute new doc- trines, at variance with the whole of them. Kuusur * holds the contrary opinion. that when the companions differ, the kazee may adopt a judgment altogether distinct, as their dissention affords eround for disqui- sition : but what Is aboye stated has the best. founda- tion. When the companions have agreed upon a point, in which one of their followers (/abiieen) has dissented from them; if the dissenter was not their contemporary, his opposition has no weight ; and a judgment given conformably thereto, against the .con- current opinion of the companions, would be invalid : but if-he were contemporary with them, and then expounded the law in) opposition to their) opinions, * Taram Asoo Buxr, AuMupD, pIN-1 Omur, surnamed) Kuusar,. or the farrier... He composed the most celebrated of the works known under the title oi Adah ool Kazee, or duties of the Kazee ; ‘and is slated, in the Kushf'co Zunoon, to have died A. H. 261. A high encomium is, added upon his composition 5 which is said to consist of 120 Chapters, replete with usetul information. Several learned men have written.commentaries upon it, of which the most esteemed is that of Imam Omnrk Brw-1- ABD-OOL-AREEZ, eeety called Hoosam, the inattyt; A. H. 526. i Ths AUTHORITJES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A8Q and they eave sanction to his disquisitions, as in the in- stances of SHoRY’A and SHABEE*, the concurrence of the companions docs not bar the opposite exposition, so admitted. With respect, however, to expositions which have no other authority than part of the Tadi- ween, there are two reports of the sentiments of Azoo Hunexran. One, that he did not consider such to be authoritative : and this appears to be the true doc- trine. ‘Lhe other, contained in the Nuwadir --, states, that if some of the followers of the companions have given Fufwis in their time, and have received from the latter a sanction to their disquisitions; as SHory’A, Husun {, and Musxook gin-1 Aspa||, their decisi-« ons should be observed. It is thus written in the Mo- heet §. ane ee — * The first was Kazee, the second Mooftee, of Koofah, in the first century of the Hijrah; and they were esteemed two of the most learned men of their age. The former, whose name at length, is Asoo OmyYAH SHORYA BIN Oot Hiras oot Kinperg, held the sta- tion of Kazee, at Koofah, for seventy-five years, and died A. H. 78 or 80; after resigning his office the year before his death. The en- tire name of the latier is ABoo Omur AAMIR BIN-I SHURAHEE 00 SHasee, deriving his surname from the town of Shad, in Arabia. He died A- H. 104, , + Ten different works of this name, (meaning, literally, rare, scarce) are specified in the Kush/ os Zunoon; of which one was composed by Imam Monummup, the disciple of ABoo Huneeran 3 and it is probably that bere referred to. It is considered to be of less authority than his five other works, the Jama-1 sugheer, Jama-i ku- beer, Mubsoot, Zeeadat, and Siyur, which are well known, and fre- quently quoted, under the general designation of Zahir oo Ruwayat, the consp'cuous reports. { Vid. Bib. Or. Tit. Hassan al Baszi. » || A learned native of Hamadan, who became a convert to Istam, during the life of MonumMup ; and died at Koofah, A. H. 62. § There are three works of this title; all of which are quoted in the Futawa-i Aalumgceree ; but the two others are distinguished by * the addition of Surukshee or Bocrhance. The two latter will be men- tioned in a subsequent note. The Moheet, here referred to, is sup- posed to have been written by Mourana Rugee 09g DEEN of Nyshe- ’ 4AQU REMARKS UPON THE “Tr the concurrent opinion of the companions bé not found in any case, which their followers may have agreed upon, the Kdzee must be guided by the latter, Should there be a difference in opinion between the followers, let the Kdaézce compare their arguments and adopt the judgment he deems preferable. If, however, none of the authorities referred to be forthcoming, and the Kazee bea qualified jurist; (hil ool- Ttihad, \i- terally a person capable of disquisition ;) he may con- sider in his own mind what is consonant to the princi- ples of nght and justice; and applying the result, with a pure intention, to the facts and circumstances of the case, let him pass judgment accordingly. But if he be not a qualified person, let him take a legal opinion from others who are versed in the law, and decide in conformity thereto. He should, in no case, give judg- ment without knowledge of the law ; and should never be ashamed to ask questions for information and advice. [tis further requisite that the Kazee attended to two rules: first, that when the three Jmdms (Asoo Hun- EEFAH, Agoo Yoosur, and Ima’m MonumMup) all agree, he is not at liberty to deviate from their joint opinion, upon hisown judgment. Secondly, when the Imams differ, ABnpooLian BIn-1 Mopa’ruk * says, the Kdzee’s sentence is to be given according to the —- > es poor, who, in the notes prefixed by Syrup Aumup-1 Humavesg to an old copy of the Hidayah, purchased at Mukhah, is said to have - compiled the opinions of the followers of Anoo Hunerran, in a regular serics; whereas other compilers had blended them. This | Moheet, howeyer, is not extant in India, and is only known by quo- tations from it. * One of the pupils of Azoo Hunzgran, surnamed Muroozer from Muroo, the place of his natiyity. He was held in high vene- ration for his piety, and his tomb is said-to be visited, at Hvt, in Arabian Erak, (Vid. Bib. Or. Tit. Abdalla). He died at the age of 63, A. Li, 180, (Mirat o0/-adlum). 4 AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAw. AQl opinion of Asoo Huneeran, because he was one of the immediate followers, and contemporaries, of the companions, and opposed them in the futwas. So it is in the Aloheet of SURUKHSEE*. ‘“‘ Tr no precedent be found from Asoo HunEEFAR and his disciples, and the case have been determined by subsequent lawyers, the Kazee is to abide by the judgment of the latter; unless there be a difference in their decisions, in which event the preference 1s left to his discretion. If not even a modern precedent be forthcoming, the Kézee may exercise his own reason and judgment; provided he be conversant with jurispru- dence, and have consulted with sages of the law. In the commentary of Tana’vEE +; it is stated, that if the Kaézee pass sentence on his own judgment, in op- position to the manifest letter of the law (Nuss), such sentence is not valid. But if the sentence be not con- trary to the clear letter of the law, and the Kazee, after passing it, should change his opinion, his former judg- ment is, nevertheless, valid: though his future adjudi- — a re * The author of this work, which is extant, and he'd in high es- timation, is stated, in the Kushf 00 Zunoon, to be SHUMS oCL AIM- mau, Agoo BukR Monummup, of Swukhs, menti- ned in a former note. The Moheet-i Boorhanee, composed by BooRHAN 00” DEEN- Maumoop B1n-1 AuMup, is also noticed in the Ku:hf oo Zunoon ; but without any other particulais of the autior. He is mentioned by D’Hersevort, under the title of Szrakhsi, as having been born at Surukhs; and having gone from hence into Syria, where he su- perintended a Collegeat /eppo; and died at Damascus, A. H. 571, His Moheet is known in India ; aud an incomplete copy is possessed by the court of Nizamut Addlut; but it is less esteemed than that of SHuMs oot AIMMAH. + Ima’m Asoo Jarur Amup 5B1IN-1 MoHuMMubD, of Taba (a town in Upper Egypt) is one among te nuinerous commentators of the Ja- wa-i Sugheer of Imam Monummup. He also wrote an abridgement of the doctrine of Asoo Hunereran, and his two disciples, intitled Mobhtusur-i Tahavee. Both works are often quoted, as authorities, but are not known to be now extant. He ts statedin the Kushf vo Zunoon, to haye died A, H. 371. AQ2 REMARKS. UPON THE cations must be regulated by his recent opinion. This is the doctrine of the two elders (Suy’xuy’N, viz. Asoo Hunzrran and Asoo Yoosur,) and Ima‘ Monummoup agrees with them, provided the second: opinion of the kazee, in such cases be deemed by others preferable to the first. It is further stated iby Tana’- VEE), that) if the ancient jurists have formed different opinions upon any point, and their successors have agreed upon the opinion to be preferred; according to the two elders, this agreement does not remove the effect of the former difference ; ; but Ima’m Mouum- MuD thinks it 1s removed thereby. Suy’kKH oot Is- LAM SHUMS OOL AiMMAH SuRUKHSEE, reports, howe- ver, that all the disciples of Asoo Hungeran agreein opinion upon this point, and that a few of the learned only hold the continuance of the original dissent, not- withstanding tie subsequent agreement. ‘ If the lawy ers -of one age concur in any particular doctrine, and a kazee, in after times, differing in opinion from them, with an upright intention, pass an opposite judgment ; some hold his so doing to be legal, provided there were an original difference among the learned upon the doc- trine in question; whilst others deem it illegal, not- withstanding such eriginal difference 5 but all agree upon the illevality of the opposite judgment, supposing no difference of opinion to have been at any time en- tertained upon the subject. In the Futawa-i Itabiyah* it is stated. that if a kazee take an exposition of the law from a Mooftee, and differ in opinion from the latter, he is to pass sentence in the case according to his own judgment; provided he be a person of. understanding and knowledge; and that if the sentence be passed -— _ * The author of this work, Asoo Nusr Anmup 81N-1-Mounum- MUD OoL iTaAsee, of Bokharz, is mentioned in the Kushf co Zunoon ag haying also writteo a commentary. on the Jamasi sinh of Im- am Mogunmup. He died A. H. 585, AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. AQ3 against his own opinion, in deference to that of the Mooftee, it is according to the two, disciples (Sa’ur- By N, viz.. Asoo Yoosur and, Ima’m’\Mouummup) invalid : in like manner. as in matters.of religious pre- ference on presumption, it is forbidden to act upon the judgment of others: but Asoo Huneeran holds the sentence to be valid in such cases, as it isthe result of legal disquisition. Supposing the sazee not to have exercised his own reason on the case, at the time of his giving judgment according to the opinion of the Moof- tee; and that he subsequently. forms an opinion, at va- riance with that of the Mooftee; Im’am Monummup says, his sentence is liable to abrogation; but Asoo Yoosur affirms, it is not affected thereby ; in the same manner as it would not be affected if the kazee had passed sentence on his own opinion, and had afterwards changed that. opinion. The foregoing is copied from the Tatarkhaneeyah *.” “* Wuen there is neither written law, or concurrence of opinions, for the guidance of the Aazee, if he be capable of legal disquisition, and have formed_a deci- sive judgment on the case, he should carry such judg- ment into effect by his sentence, although other scien- tific lawyers may differ in opinion from him ; and should not be governed by their sentiments, in opposition to his own ; for that which, upon deliberate investigation, appears to be right and just, is accepted as such in the sight of God.. If however the persons, who declare an opinion different from that of the sazce be superior to. him in science, and he consequently adopt their judg~ ‘ ' 4 l ee, AE ee ee * Vid. B’}. Or. Tatarkhan. An imperfect copy of the work refer- red to, entitled Futawa-1 Tatarkhaneeyait, is in the passession of the court of Nisemut Adalut. 2 AQA REMARKS UPON THE ment, questioning the grounds of it, from respect to their superior knowledge, ABoo HuneEran admits the legality of his proceeding. Asoo Yoosur and Im’am Mouummup, on the contrary, do not allow it to be legal, unless he ultimately adopt their opinion as the result of his own judgment. This, at least, is one report: but another says, that the master and his two disciples held, respectively, the reverse of what has been mentioned. If in any case, the kazee be perplex- ed by epposite proofs, let him reflect upon the case, and determine as he should judge right: or, for the greater certainty, let him consult other able lawyers; and if they differ, after weighing their arguments, let him decide, as appears just. Should they agree with each other, but differ from his own opinion on the case, he is to adhere. to the latter until he be convinced it is ill founded. and may give judgment accordingly ; but not precipitately, or unt:l he has duly weighed and ex- amined the whole of the circumstances and evidence. Let him not fear or hesitate to act upon the result of his own judgment, after a full and deliberate examina- tion: but let him beware of a doubtful and conjectural decision, without complete investigation, as such will not be approved in the account of his actions to God ; though, from want of certain information to the con- trary, it may pass as a valid sentence among men. What has been here said supposes the kdzee to be a Moojtahid, or scientific yurist, competent, from his ta- lents and learning, to undertake legal disquisition. If he be not a person so qualified, but possesses a know- ledge and full recollection of the points and cases de- termined by the eminent lawyers of his persuasion, let hin give judgment according to the tenets of those in whom he confides; and whom he believes it right to follow. Should he not have a perfect recollection of decided Jaw-points, let him act upon expositions of the law, by Mvoftees of the orthodox doctrine ; or if — . AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 405 there be only one such Mooftee on the spot, his single exposition may be acted upon, without fear of imputed deficiency. Itis thus written in the Buddyid *,” “ Tue legal meaning of Jjtihéd is the diligent exer- cise of the mental faculties in search of the thine de- sired ; and the requisite qualification of a Moojtahid, is a discriminative knowledge of what is contained in the book of God, and in the traditions from the Prophet, Telative to legal rules and ordinances (ahkam.) It is not essential that he should also know the moral pre- cepts and admonitions included therein. It has been likewise declared that a person, whose general rectitude exceeds his deviations from right, may lawfully prac- tise Ijtzhad, or disquisition. But the definition above given is accurate: as stated in the Fosool ool Imadee- yah-. The most correct account given of a Moojta- hid is, that he have a comprehensive knowledge of the divine book, with the different interpretations thereof ; a full acquaintance with the traditions, their gradations, texts, and comments; aright understanding, or power . . SS SS A AT SS 5 NS me nS — eee * A commentary on the Tohfut ool Fokaha, of SuyKH OLA OODEEN Mouvummup, ot Sumurkund, by his pupi!, Asoo Buxr, prn-1 Mu- soood, of Kashan, in Persian Irak. The auihor of the Kushf oo” Zunoon states the death of the latter to have been A. H. 587; and adds tlie master was so well pleased with the comment of his scho- lar, that he gave in marriage to the latter his daughter Farrmaun, who was also learned in the science of jurisprudence. The entire name of the commentary is Budayia oo Sunayia fee turteeh 00 Shu» rayia. Both the text and comment are quoted us authorities; but neither is known to be now extant in India. + By Azoor ruts Moxummup ptin-1 Anoo Burr, of Murghceo nan. He is stated, in the Kushf 00 Zunoon, to have composed tire work quoted, A, H. 651, at the Colleze founded by Imap ooze Moork, in the suburbs of Sumurkund. It contains torty sections, on civil transactions (Moamu/lat) ouly ; and being left incomplete at his. death, was finished by his son, JuMAr 00’ DEEN. A copy is among the books of the Nizamut Ada/ut, and it is considered a work of ay« thority. ; Ag6 REMARKS UPON THE of just reasoning ; and experience in human affairs and: usages. This is quoted from the Kafee *.” Havine thus stated the authorities for the Mobum- mudan law, and the preference to be observed, or dis- cretion allowed, when they difter; it may be proper to add a short notice-of the books of jurisprudence which are esteemed by the Huneefeeyah sect of Suonee lawyers, for practical exposition of the tempordl law ; especially such as are extant and govern judicialdecisionsin India. Asoo Huneerau himself does not apppear to have’ left any work upon jurisprudence +. His legal doc- trines were recorded and illustrated by his disciples : particularly by Ina’ MonumMup ; whose most cele- brated. Jaw-tracts, entitled the Jama 1-sugheer, Jami-i kubeer, Mubsoot, Zecadat. and Siyur, levis been already noticed, as collectively quoted by the title of Zahir oo” ruwayat ¢. ‘These works are described in the kushf oo’ ————— - ——ttCi —— — —_— — * A commentary on the Wafee, and written by the same author Imam Apoon Burxat, ABDooLLA BIN-1 AHMOD, common ly cailed Hariz oo’ DEEN, of Nuswf, who diced A. H. 710. He als» wrote the Kunz oo Dukayik, a work of hich authority, and extant in India ; but eclipsed by its. comment the Bufr-i-Ravik, composed in the tenth century of the Hijrah by Zyn oor AazIDEEN IgN-1 Nuseem, of Egypt. Vid. Tit. Nagim of D’Hersexot, who appears however to have stated the year “of “bis death A. H. 670, instead of 970 which is mentioned more than once in the a“ 00” Zunoon. ¢ Mr. Hamittron mentions three trea ises, on rhecheatiad subjects, as written by Asoo Huneeran: viz. the Mained, Filk-al-elm, and Moallim. Of these the Moosnud is described in the Kush ea Zia. us a book of traditions. The work apparently intended as the se- cond, but misnamed Fi/k-al. elm, instead of Fil kulam ‘on theology,). is well known in India, by the name PkA-i-Akbur. The third is ~ e unknown. D'Herse.ct, who scems to have been Mr. Haminton’ principal authority, mentions the three woiks, under the utie ¢ Abou-Hanifah. Shafi ¢ Mr. Hamirtow (in bis peciiiiaey? pice p- 36.) has aa called also the Jama-i-sahech, YeEsoo Monummup e1n YE ‘ vertently stated the Jama-i-kubeer tc be a collection of tradi a . Baers t ; in te ; 5 \ : AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A407 Zunoon as being of the first authority for the opi- nions of Asoo Hungerau and Apoo Yoosur’*, as well asof Ima’m MouummMup. Various commentaries are also stated to have been written upon them during the early age of the Mohummudan era; and several are quoted inthe Putéwa-t Adlumgeeree, compiled in thereign of Au’runezez-f, But neither the texts, or ~_———- Termazr. The apparent origin of this mistake has been pointed out in a former note. He further remarks that the author of the Jama-i-sugheer is uncertain. But independently of numerous other authorities, Iuam Mouumuun is expressly cited in the Hidayah as the author of both works, and of the Mubsoot, (See Vol. I. of the translation, p.153.). Mr, Hamittrom has been led into another er- » ror, by supposing the AZubsoot, quoted in the Hidaya, to have been written by Fuxx-oo1 Jstam Buzpuvee; whereas, of the two Mub- soots cited by the author of the Hidayah, one is the composition of Imam MonummuD, above noticed; and the other was composed by _ SHums oot AIMMAH SURUKUHSEE, as observed in a preceding note. * The only work known to have been composed by Asoo Yoosur is an Adub ool Kazee; and the reputation of this has been superceded ‘ bythe celebrity of Kuusar's tract of the same title, already menti- oned. He is said, however, to have furnished his pupil, laram Mo- HUMMUD, with notes (ama/ee) for a considerable part of his compo- sitions ; particularly for the Jama-i-sugheer. ’ > + The priacipal commentators of the “ Jama-i-sugheer’’ are ‘Shums ool Aimmah Surukhsee ; Aboo Bukr Ahmud Razee, commonly - €alled Jussas, (the plasterer ;) Aboo Jafur Ahmud Tahavee ; Fukr ool Islam Alee Bazduvee; Aboo Nusur Ahmud aol Itabee of Bo- khatra; Aboo'l Lys Nusur, of Sumurkund; Aboo Nusur Ahmud, Isbeejabee ; Husun bia-i-Mansoor, of Ouzjund, better kaown by the appellation of Kazee Khan; Taj-oo’ deen Abd ool Ghufur _ Kurduree ; Zaheer 00 deen Ahmud Tumurtashee; and Kazee Mu- saood, of Yuzd; and Aboo aced Mootuhur, of the same city; whose commentary is quoted by the title of “* Tuhaeeb.” The Se- ven persons first mentioned have, also written comments on the * Ja- _ Ma-i-kubeer;” besides Kazee Aboo Zyd Abdoollah, of Duboos: he Boorhan’oo’ deen Mahmood, author of the “ Moheet-i-Boorhanee ae _ Boorhan oo’ deen Alee, author of the “ Hidayah ;’? Shums ool Aim- a Mobummud, called Hulwaee (the confectioner ;) Ibn-i ubduk _ Yoorjapee ; and Jumal oo’ deen Mahmud, of Bokhara, whose com- mon designation is Liuseeree (the imat-maker ;) and whose second commentary is often quoted by the name of “ Tukreer.” The *Tukreer’’ and ‘* Doorar’’ are also known comments on the work in question; the former by Abool Abbas Ahmud; the latter by Nasiroo’ deen Mohtummud, of Damascus. ‘VoL. X.- Kk 9 ¢ 498 REMARKS UPON THE © | comments, are now known to be in India, except an imperfect copy of the commencement of Ka‘zer Kuan, on the Jéméi-sugheer, which was obtained from the | library of the Nuwab of Oudh ; and is in the possession of the Nizamut Adalut. Nov is there a treatise on the Mosulman law, written during the four first centuries of the Hirah, at present, in the possession. of any per- son, from whom enquiry could be made upon the sub- ject at Calcutta *. Tux oldest work on jurisprudence in the possession of the law officers of the Nizémut Adalat, and other learned Mosuluian lawyers, in Calcutta, is the Mokhtu- sar ool Kudooree, a compendium, or general law-tract, composed by Ima’m Axsoot Hose’n Aumup, of Ku- door, a quarter of Bughdad, who died A.H. 428. It is often referred to in the Hidéyah, and described in the Kushfoo Zunoon as a book of authority in general use, and held in the highest estimation. It is said to con- tain twelve thousand cases ; and has been illustrated in * Tt does not appear that any work on jurisprudence was pub- lished during the first century of the Hijrah : or that any was writ- ten on the dectrines of Aboo Huneefah, during the second ¢entury, except the treatises, which have been noticed, of his two disciples Aboo Yoosuf, and Imam Mohummud. In the third and fourth centuries, besides commentaries on the works of the latter, (which as fundamental authorities, are denominated Osool or Original) the following law-tracts are stated to haye been composed; and are briefly described in the ‘* Kushi oo’ Zunoon.’’ ‘An’** Adub oel Ka- zee” and ‘ Nuwadir,” by Mohummud bin-i-Sumaah; who died A. H.233. Another treatise, of the former title, by Abeo Hazim Abd oo! Humeed, who diedin' 292. Several treaiises of the latter title, by Ibn-i-Roostum, Hishain, and others, Also books of both titles, and a compendium of the law, entitled ‘* Mokhtusur-i Tahavee,’” or Ss ee 4 sk by boo Jafur. Ahmud of Taba in Egypt who died A. H. 871; . and who seems to be the author erroneously cited by the name of” Aboo Faka, in Mr. Hamilton's Pre]. Dis, p.38, Another compen- dium, entiied ** Mokhtusur-i Kurkhee,” by Aboo’l Hosen Abdool- Jah of Kurkh (a ward in the city of Bughdad) who died A. H. 340. Anda “ Nuwadir,’’ with two ,other books, entitled ** Ouzoon” »: and * Nuwazil”, by Aboo’l Lys Nusur, of Sumurkund, vey ,° AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. AQQ numerous commentaries ; among which several are quo- ted inthe Fwutéwd-i Adlumgeeree; but are not now known to be extant in Hindostan *, Tue other books in actual use for expounding the Mohummudan law are of two descriptions, The first consists of texts and comments, which, in a scientific method, state the elements and principles of the law; establish them by proofs and reasoning ; and illustrate the applieation of them by select cases, real or sup- posed; suchas the Hidayah, Kunz 00 dukdyah, Vikdyah, Nikayah, and Ashbah o' Nuzxdyir, with their respective commentaries. ‘Lhe second description is commonly, but not always, distinguished by the title of Pusdwé ; and is, for the most part, a collection of law cases, ar- ranged under proper heads, with a short recital of facts and circumstances, without arguments, and with autho- rities only -for the cases as quoted; being intended chiefly for practical purposes ; whereas the elementary * The titles and authors of the principal commentaries are as fol- lows. The ‘Siraj-i Wuhbaj,” and ‘* Jouburah-i-nyyirah” (the latter abridged from the former) by Aboo Bukr bin-i-Alee, com- monly called Hudadee (the blacksmith). Ahmud bin-i-Mohummud also made an abridgement of the ‘¢ Siraj-i-Wuhhaj,” which is quoted by the title of “ Bu vur-i-Zakhir.””?’ The “ Mooltumus ool ikhwan” by Aboo'l Mazlee, of Ghuzpa. The “ Kifayah,” by Shums ool aimmah [smaee!, of Byhuk. ‘The ‘‘ Biyan,” by Mohummud bin-i-« rusool of Toukat. ‘J he “‘ Lobab’’ by Julal aboo Saeed Mootuhur, of Buzdah. The ‘‘ Yunabee” by Budr oo’ deen Mohummud, of Ushbeeleeah. The ‘* Kholasut 00’ dulaeel,’’ by Hosam oo’ deen Alee, of Mukkah, The last mentioned commentary is highly praised, for its utility, in the <* Kushf 00’ Zunoon,” and is stated-to have been further improved by the annotations of Ibn-i Subeeh oo’ deen Osman, awatiye of Tartary, Mr. Hamitton, (in his Prel. Disc. p. 36, 37,) has erroneously mentioned the commentary ‘of - Kudcoree, as quoted in the, “ Hidayah,” instead of his Mokbtusur.” . _ He appears to have made a further mistake in stating the commen- tary ot Kadooree to be about the “* Adub ool Kazee” of Aboo Yoo- ‘suf, whereas 00 comment of that work is noticed in the “ Kushf co’ Zuneoon ;” but Kudooree is specitied as one of the commentators of the ‘* Adub ov] Kazee’’ of Khusat, mpnOR as in a.preceding note 500 REMARKS UPON THE works first mentioned are more calculated for study and instruction. The Futawa i Kazee Khan by Fukr oo” DEEN Husun, of Ovvajund in Furghdnd, who was con temporary with the author of the Aiddyah, and whose collection is esteemed of equal authority with that ce- jebrated work, must, in some measure, be excepted from the above remark ; as it illustrates many cases by the proofs and reasoning upon which the decision of them is founded *. Tae other Futéwa extant in India, besides those al- ready mentioned in the preceding pages and notes, are the Khusénul ool Mooftieen, Futéwa-i- Buzdzivah, Futé- wa-i-Nukshbundivah, Mun’ hool ghufar, and Mokhtar ool Futéwa by unknown authors ; the Foosvol-i- Isturooshee, by Monummup Bin-1 Maumoop, who compiled it in the 625th year of the Aijrah-+; the Futdwé-i Ibra- heemshéhiyah, by Sia’HaB oo’ DEEN AHMUD, a native of Hindosostan, who composed it for SoonTa’n IrnpRa’- HEEM SHA4‘H, at Jounpoor, in the gth century of the ——— ee * A complete and accurate copy of the ‘‘ Futawa-i Kazee Khan,” sunposed ta have formerly belonged to the royal library, is among the books of the Wixzmué Adalut, obtained from Lukinow. The author of the “Kushf oo’ Zunoon”’ and the present Kazee ool Koozai, concur ta extolling this work, as replete with cases of com- mon eccurience, and consequent'y ef particular utility for practical reference. A.digest (“ Moruttub’) of the cases recited in it is al- go mentioned in the ** Kushf oo’ Zunoon,” as made in the seyenth century of the Hijrah, by a learned Syrian, named Mohummud bin- i- Moostufaafunder, and entitled ‘* Wubhajoo’ Shureeut.” + The court of Nizamut Adalut haye a complete copy of this com- pilation, presented to them, with six other law books purchased at Lukhnow, by the Kazce ov! Koozxat, Mohummud Nujm oo’ deen. It consists of thirty sections, upon ** Moamalat” only: like the ** Foosool col Imadeeyah,” beforementioned. The contents of _ both were arranged and incorporated in a collection, entitled ‘* Ja- ~ m-0o! Fossoolyn,’”” by Budr oo’ deea Mahmood; better kuown by the name of [bni-Kazgee-i-Sumawunah, who died A. H.823, The author of the ‘* Kushf oo’ Zunoon’’ states this work t> be in gre: t estimation with the learned, as a civil digest; but though often quoted as an authority, it is not Knowa to be at present in India. - AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 501 Aiijrah*; and the Fiitawé-i Adlumgeeree, compiled at Dehh, by order of the Emperor Aa’numcGeEER) in the !1th year of his reign, corresponding with A. H. 1067. Tue Aidayah is so well known, from the English version of it, made by Mr. Cuartes Hamitton, and publishedin the year 1791, that it will be unnecessary to. say much of it. The 4dzee ool koozdt, im his cata- logue of books already adverted to, describes it in the following terms. “The Aidayak is a commentary upon the Bidayut ool Mcobtudee, and both the text and comments were composed by Say’xu Boorna’n 00’ DEEN AEEE, son of Anoo Buxr, of Murgheenan, who lived to the -age of sixty-two; and, after employing thirteen years in the composition of the latter work, - departed from this world A. H. 598. The general arrangement, and division of it, are adopted from the Jama-i-Susheer of Ima’mM Moxwummup. It is cele- fo) brated amongst the learned for its selection of law cases, and connection of them with the proofs and arguments by which they have been determined. Wherefore ineye- ry age it has been esteemed by lawyers ; many of whom have written comments and annotations upon it.” It is spoken of in nearly the same language, by the author of the Kushf 00 Zuncon who adds, “ it is a rule observed by the composer of this work to state first the opinions and arguments of the two disciples (Azoo Yoosur and Ima’m ‘Mouummoup) ; afterwards the doctrine of the ~ @Jbraheem Shah reigned at Jounpeor (curing the confus'eu of the Empire of Dehly, consequent to the invaston of TLymoaor} for © forty years, and died A. H. 844. The court of Nizatmut Adalus possess an entire copy of the work-tecierred to: but it is a mixcd collection, aad not deemed authoritative. : a iy, See 502 REMARKS UPON THE great Ima’m (Asoo Hunerran); and then to expa- tiate on the proofs adduced by'the latter, in such manner as to refute any opposite reasoning on the part of the disciples. Whenever he deviates from this rule it may be inferred that he*inclines to the opinion of Avzoo Yoosur and Ima’m Monummop. It 1s also his practice to illustrate the cases specified in the Jama-z- Sugheer, and by Kupooree: intending the latter, whenever he uses the expression he has suid in the book. In praise of the, Hidayah, it has been declared, hike the koran, to have superseded all previous books on the law; that all persons should remember the rules prescribed in it; and that it should be followed as a guide through he * This eulogium on the Hidayah is confirmed in a paper wntten by Mou*Lavez Mo- HUMMUD Ra’snrp, one'of the Mooftees of the Supreme Court of yids and Courts of Sudr: Deewanee and Nigamut Adilut, as well as one of the most learned Mosulmans in Jzdia; who remarks on the text, and some of the principal comments, to the following effect. ‘““ No text or comme ntary, now extant, can be com- pared with the Afddyah as a digest of approved law cases ‘Videheeed by the proofs sell arguinents which es— para them. It istherefore, with its comments, fit to be the standard of legal aeGbn in the present times. Many commentaries have been written upon it: but four only, the Néhivah, Indéyah, Kifayah and Futh ool kudeer, are forthcoming in Bengal. The Nthayah was first composed: and has superior credit as being. the original from which the others have borrowed. But the author of the Inayah has merited esteem by his studious analysis; and interpretation of the letter and meaning of Hideyah. - The kifayah also deserves coinmendation, from its concise statement of the sub- stance of Oak commentaries, as well as from some additions to them. And the Futh ool kudeer is pre- ferable to the whole, as an n ample collection of CASES, AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 503 (rendering it equal in-this respect to a Futawa) expressed with suitable brevity of language *,” Ture Kunz oo dukayik has been already mentioned, as composed by Ha’riz 00 DHEN, author of the Kafec and Wajve. it is a short gereral treatise of law, used oO — * The “ Nihayali” was composed by Hosam oo’deen Hosen Ib- ni Alee, said to have been a pupil of Boorban oo ‘deen, author of the “ Hidayah.” ‘The latter having, from some unknown cause, omitted the law of inheritance, it has been added by the commen- tator. But this part of the “ Nihayah’’ does not appear to have obtained equal celebrity with the “ Fura, €cZ-i-sirajee-yah” men- tioned in a former note. The “ Kusbt 00’ Zunoon’”’ notices two commentaries of the title of ‘‘Inayah ;’’ the first of which was commenced by Abool Abas Ahmud, a Kazee in Egypt, who died A. H. 710; and was completed in the succeeding century of the Hijrah by Kazee Saeed oo deen, of Dubur. The second, which is that referred to as extant in India, was composed by Shykh Akmul oo’ deen Mohummud, who died A. H.786; [mam oo’ deen Ameer Katib Bin-i Ameer Omur, who had previously written anather com- mentary entitled ‘‘ Ghayutool biyan’’ after employing himself for twenty-seven years at Cairo, and other places, to render his second work more complete, finished the ‘‘ Kifayah,”’ at Damascus, in the 747th year of the Hijrah. The “ Futh ool Kudeer” is stated to have been commenced by its author Kumal 09’ deen Mohummuad of Seewas, commonly called lbn-i-Homam, in the 29th year of the Hijrah ; and to have occupicd a considerable part of the remaining ‘period of his life, which was terminated in 861. Other commen-~ taries upon the “‘ Hidayah’’ are mentioned in the ‘* Kushf 00’ Zn- noon 3” but as they are not procurable in Judia, it will be sudicient to notice the “Fuwaeed,’? by Humeed oo deen Alee, of Bokhara, who died AJH. 667 ; and is supposed hy some ‘to have been the first commentator; but his tract, being extremely brief, his been superseded by the subsequent comments: the “ Miarai oo dirayut,” by Kuwam oo’ deen Mohummud, also of Bokhara, who died A H. 747. and whose commentary is quoted in the “ Aalumgeeree :”” and the “Odah’? by Kumal oc’ deen Mohummud, also qu ted; though it is described as ratner en abstract, than a commen:; b:- ~ ing a methodical collection of the law. cases contained in the ** H:- dayah,”’ without the arguments stated in proof of them. The Ni- hayab oo! Kifayah,’’ by Tajoo’ Shureeyut Omur, is aisO Men’ o ved in the “ Kusbf oo’ Zunoon”’ as a comnentary oy the “* Hdavsn;”’ but the Kazee ool Koozgt, in describing an im serfect copy of «t, be- longing to the Nizamut Adalut, terins it a ‘* Hasheeah,” or m:rgi- nal note book. An incomplete copy of the ‘ Kifayah”’ is clso among the law books of that court. Kk4 504 REMARKS UPON THE in Mosulman colleges, as an elementary book of instruction ; but superseded, as a book of reference for legal exposition, by its commentaries; of which the - following are extant in Jndiad. The Tubieen ool hukayik, by Buxr oo’ DEENABoo MonumMup Asman of Zyl, who died A. H. 743. His comment is valued by the followers of Asoo Fiunrgran, as containing a com- plete refutation of the opposite doctrine of SHAFIIEE. The Buhr oo’ rayth, by the learned Zy’n ooL AABIDEEN- Ipn-1 Nusesm of Egypt, left incomplete, at his death, A. Hi. 970; and -unequally finished by his brother SIRAJ 00’ DEEN Omur, who also wrote a commentary entitled the Nuhrifayiz, but of inferior merit to that of Zy'n oot AA’BIDEEN; which is held in the utmost** \. estimation : and 18 spoken of tn the kushf 00° Zunoon — as equalled only by the Puth ool Kudeer; 1pn-1 Ho-= MA’m’s commentary onthe Hidayah. The Mutliii _ fayik or, as more generally called A zee by RupR oo’ DEEN Monum™MuD Ay NEE, of Dubur in Aradia. -This commentary is also esteemed, as containing an ample collection of law cases: and though surpassed, in this - respect, by the Brhr-irayik, it has the advantage of having been brought to a conclusion by the author; whose erudition obtained him the title of U/amah, in common with Zy’n oot AA’BIDEEN*, , es * Ansther commentary on the ‘‘ Kunz co dukayik,” entitled “‘Maadun,” is known in [ndia. But ihe name of the author hag. net been ascertained. The “Fezah’? by Shykh Yahya, and | ir’ « Rumz ool Hukayik” by Kazee Budr oo dcen Mahmeod, are alsof e noticed, with the names of some other: commentators, in th ‘3 “Kushifoeo’ Zuroon ;’’ but they are not celebrated, or quoted as authorities. The court of Maomut Adalut possess anincomplete copy of the ‘ Buhroo’ rayik ;’” en which the Kazee ool Koozat re= Be marks (in his catalogue) that ‘it comprises a compilation of cases Sa general and particular; with the useful result of tke author's : searches upon a variety of legal questions; and is received a hentic by ibe followers of Abeo Huneeiah in every city of Isl - | i] AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 508 Tue text of the Vikdyah, composed in the 7th cen- tury of the Hyrah by Boorwa’N 00” SHUREEUT Maumoop, son of the first Sudr 00 Shucett like that of the Kunz oo’ Dukayik, hasecbeen superseded, for legal consultation, by its more extensive commentaries ; especially by that of the second Sudr oo’ Shureett, Osy’p OOLLAH BIN-1-Musaoop, who died A, H. 750; distinguished by the title of Shurh-i-Vikayah ; and combining, with the original treatise, an ample comment in illufiration of it. But both are used in Mosulman Colleges, for instruction in the science of law, preparatory to the study of the Aidédyah ; upon which the Vikdaygh is founded ; being, as its title at Jenoth imports, (Vikdayut 00° riwayah, fee Musaeel i Fiidéyah ;\ the Custos, guardian, or preserver, of the reports of cases in the Hiddyah, Other commentaries are mentioned in the Kushf oo’ Zunoon; but they are not known to. be extant in India; or quoted as authorities. * * Numerous Ruwashee, or books of annotations, have also been written on the text and commentaries; of which the most cele- brated is the Hasheeah of Yoosur Bin-1 JonybD, commonly called . AKKeEE Cuyuuree. This work, entitled Zukheerut oof Okba is in the possession of the court of Nizemut Adalut, who have alsoa correct and complete copy of the Shurh-i-Vikeyas. It may be useful to add that a Persian translation of the latter has been made . a person named Agp cot Hux Susawat, of Surhind; who in _~his preface, states it to have been completed A. H. 1076; during _ , the reignofAurunezes. A copy of this yersion isin my possession. _ The language is not elegant; but it bears the character of accuracy ; _ and with a careful revision, it may deserve publication. In bulk it does not much exceed a fouith of the Persian version of the | Hiddyah; made by the former chief Kazee, Guotam Yuuya Kuan, _ and his learned associates, employed for that purpose under the pa- tronageof Mr. Hasrines; a reviséd edition of which, under the uperintendence of Mou’javee Mohumimud Rashid, is now printing, at my suggestion, by order of Government ; and besides facilitating the study of the drabic text, will tend to explain and correct the English translation; which, though on the whole deserving of praise, has been found in some parts inaccurate, and in many less intelligible than the Persian version. Jt may be proper to add in this 506 REMARKS UPON THE | i Tue Vikayah was abridged from the Vikdyah by the second Supr oo SuvureEvr, already mentioned as the principal commentator on the Vikévah. Vt is also called Mokhtusur 2 Vikayah, and used as a book of instruction, the rules and cases contained in it being committed to memory by the-studeat. But its utility, for legal reference, 1s superseded by its commentaries ; of which there are extant, composed by AxBoo’L Movxa’r1m BIN-t Aspoottan, A. H. 907; by AxspooLt ALEE,Bin-1-Mouummup BrrsinpDEkg, inthe year 937; and by SuuMms 00’ DEEN MoxnumMup, of Khoristan, in 941. The wholeof these comments are held in esteem; but the latter, entitled Jama oo’ rumooz, is the most copious. * | 4 Tue Ashbch 6 Nuzayir is an elementary treatises composed in the tenth century of the Hijrah, by Zys OoL AA’BIDEEN, already mentioned as the author cf the Buhr-i-dyik. It is stated inthe Kushf 00 Zunoon. to consist of seven sections, (denominated fun); the two first of which relate»to the general principles and rules of law; and the kdzee ool koozat. in describing a copy of it, which belongs to the Nizdmut Adélut, observes, that ‘* although a short tract, it contains legal principia, from which numerous cases may be deduced ; wherefore to able lawyers it is of the utmost advantage.” Thirteen commentaries upon it are noticed in the Kushf oo’ Zunoon, but none of them are known to be in India. + . place, that in noticing, for obvious reasons, what has appeared upon inquiry to be erroneous or deficient in tie late Mr. Hamilton's translation of the ‘* Hidayah,’’ no intention whatever is entertained of impeaching the personal merits or reputation of that gentleman ; who laboured under a material disadvantage in not haying completed his arduous and laudable undertaking in /idia. a * Complete copies of the three commentaries are among the books procured from Lukhnow, fordhe court of Madmut Adalut.” + Mou‘lavee Mobumud Rashid possesses two commentaries on the Ashba o Nuza’,yir, one of which, called the“ Ghumzool Oyoon, AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 507 BesiveEs the texts and commentaries above described, as in actual use for legal expositions, the Mujmdé oo buhryn, a text book composed by Mozurrer oo’ DEEN Aumup, of Bughdad, A. H. 690, 1s also in the possession of a learned Mosulman in Calcutta, * together with one of its commentaries, written by App oo’ Lurrerr Brn-1-Agp oan AZzEEz; but as no other copy of either the text or comment is known to be forthcoming; they cannot be in general use.'t ' . ee Was written by Sy,yid ahmud bin-i-Mohuminud Humayee. The author of the other is unknown. * Moitlavee Kureem oo deen, by whom (in concert with Moi- layee Mohummud Ra’shid) I have been materially assisted in preparing the short account given of books on the Mohummudan Jaw ; and who bas made for me a complete Peisian translation from the Arabic original of the “ Kushf 09 Zuncon.” He received the ‘* Majma-ool bubry’n,’’ and its commentary, from Shura‘iut Mohummud Khan, MeerMoonshee to the Nuwab Mozaffar Jung ; ‘who supported a Mudrusah at Moorshidabad, in which Kureem eo deen was Modurrir or Lecturer, T In addition to the books on jurisprudence, which have been noticed ; the following are described in the “ Kusbf 00 Zunoon ;” but none of them are known to be at present in Hindostan. The «© Ajnas’ and ‘* Akkam,” by Abodl Abas Ahmud Natiffe, who died A. H. 446; the ‘* Tujnees 0 Muzeed”’ by the auther of the “© Hidayah;” the ‘* Ha’vee ool Huseeree” by Mohummud-bin-i- Ibraheem, of Huseer, who died A. H. 565. The ‘‘ Futawa-i-koo- bra,” by Shaheed Hisam oo deen Omur, who suffered martyrdom in the 536th year of the Hijrah. ‘The ‘* Kholasut ool futawa,” by Tahir bin-i-Ahmud, of #okhara, who died A. H. 542, The Mooltukut,” by Nasiroo’ deen, Abool Kasim, of Sumurkund; finished A. H. 549. The “ Havee ool Koodsee,” by Kazee Jumal oo deen Ahmud ot Ghuzna, who lived in the latter part of the 6th century Oftbe Hijrah, A. ‘* Tulkhees” (abridgment) of the Jama- i-kubeer,” by Kumal 00’ deen Mohuinmud, of Khilat, who died A. H. 652. The “ Mokhtar,” and its commentary, the ‘* Ikhtiyar,’’ by Mujd oo’ deen Abdoollah of Muosul, supposed to have flou- rished in the 7th century of the Hijrah. The ‘ Ghoorur oo! Ah- kam,” and its comnyent, the * Doorur od] hookham,’’ by Mohum- mud bin-i Furamoorz, commonly calied Moolla Khoosre, who died A. H. 687; and the ‘* Mooltuca om} Abhoor,” by Ibraheem bin i- Mohummud Chulpee (a Syrian) finished A. H. 923. Of these ’ works the three last mentioned only ar: text books. The remain- der (excepting the abridgments of Imam Mobhummud’s great ee ee —— oe 508 ERMARKS UPON THE Or the books of Fuséwa which have been mentioned, none appear to. require further notice, except the Futdwas-i Aélumgeeree. Mr, Hamitron, by an ex- traordinary mistake, has stated_this work to have been © composed in the Persian language *, by the autho- rity -and under the inspection of the Emperor Av’RuNGzE'B;”’ whereas it is well known to-have been written in Arabic, the usual language of Mohummudan Jaw and science; and to have been translated info Persian, by order of the Etnperor’s daughter, the Princess ZEB 00’ Nisa’. Several coptes of the Arabic original arein Calcutta; and some imperfect copies of the Persian version ;. or rather of parts of it-’. In the se *s Jama,”’) are collections of cases, of the nature of “ Futawa.” A fur:her collection, entitled ‘* Kinuzanut ool futawa,’’ by Ahbmud bin-i-Mohummud, is among the books of the Nizamut Adalut, and supposed by the ‘‘Kazee ool Koozai” to have’been compiled to- wards the end of the 8th century of the Hijrah. Also a Persian - compilation, named ‘* Futawa-i-Kurakhanee,” the cases included in which were collected by Moolla Sudr oo’ deen bin-1 Yakood, and arranged, some years afier his death, by Kura Khan, in the reigy - of Sooltan ula oo’deen, The Kazee ool Koozat has likewise pre sented tothe Nizamut Adalut a sinatl Persian book, entitled Mokht: ool Ikhtiyar, written A. H, 271, by Ikhtiyar son of Ghyas ac een Husun ; containing, besides the duties of a kdzce and moltee, legal forms of various descriptions for practical use. * Preliminary Discourse, p. 44, + Mr. H. Colebrooke possesses a folio yolume, containing about half of the entire translation, from the commencement to the book vpon evidence. Ihave also a volume which contains from the book on marriage, to that upon endowments, or religious and cha- ritable appropriations. And, at my suggestion, the Goyernor Ge- neral in Council has been pleased to instruct the Resident at Dehly “to endeavour to procure two or more complete copies of the Persian version made by order of Zeboo Nisa, with a view to prepare a col- lated transcript, which may be hereafter printed and published, 1 have likewise a correct Persian translation of the book on “ Jinayat,” or offences against the petson, made for me, a few years since, hy Moulayee Saeed co deen, (now law officer of the Burely court of - circuit) under the-superintendence of bis father, the Kazee ool * Koozat, who has added notes of explanation where they appeared — requisite. This version will probably be printed and publisied, as it well deserycs to be: 2 AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 509 catalogue of books appertaining tothe Nisamut Adalut (among which is an incomplete copy of the Arabic Putavia-i Aalumgeeree) the kasee ool kooxat describes this work in’ the following terms :—‘* It was com- menced A. H. 1007, corresponding with the tith year of Aa’LuMG#ER’s reign, Credible persons have related, that when Merrza’ Ka’zim, author of the Adlumeeernamah, had finished, and presented to his Majesty, the history of the first ten years of the reign, it occurred to the King that there were many books of history inthe world, and that from the inclination which mankind have to read such books, they are composed without orders: from Kings and Nobles; that the foundation of good government is justice ; and that this depends upon a knowledge of the ordinances ‘of the law; that although the tearted a every age had compiled expositions of the law, yet. in some instances the examples were so dis- persed that they ‘could not readily be found, when required ; and in others, the cases of less weight were “not distinguished from those adjudged to be authorita~ tive ; whilst some decisions also had been unnecessarily | ‘repeated ; and’ others, though requisite, had been ‘Omitted ; wherefore it was proper that, in the present reign,'a new Futawa should be compiled, to be ar- ranged in the most approved manner ; and °t “contain the niost authoritative decisions of law, including every useful casey which had been adjudged, without t repeti— tion or omission. As soon as the King had formed this design, he ordered Merrza’ Kazi to discontinue ‘writing the Aalumgeernamah ; and not to'take in furtife the sum allotted for it from the royal treasury. “He “then assembled a'number of eminent lawyers froin the “Punjau, the-environs of Skahjahan abad, Akbur-abud. Vah-abad, and the Dukhun; and employed them in compiling ce us a which was aiterwards called the” 510 RAMARKS UPON THE Futawa-i Aalumgeeree. In truth no other Futawa is equal to it in excellence. It has become celebrated in every city, as well in Arabia as in other countries; and is termed at Mecca the Futawa-i Hind, or Indian expositions. It is.esteemed by the learned of every country, and is received as an authority for law deci- sions in this empire.”’ It is added, that lacks of rupees are said to have been disbursed instipendsto the learned — compilers, the purchase of books, and other expences attending the execution of the work. Tse Futewa-i Aalumgeeree being four times the size of the Hiddéyah, and containing little more than a recital of Jaw cases, without the arguments and proofs, which are diffusively stated in the Aidayah it must pos- sess an advantage over that work, for practical use, in its greater number of cases and examples. On the other hand, the full illustration of the law, its principles, and the different doctrines promnlgated by some of the most eminent expounders of it, which distinguish the fidayah, as an original composition by a celebra~ ted jurist, who, from his superior knowledge and qua- lifications, was esteemed a Mojtahid, is also above that of the Futawa-t-Aalumgeeree ; which, howevervaluable, as the latest and most comprehensive collection of cases, is held in less comparative estimation, from its being a modern compilation, made by several persons, of different judgment, and unequal ability. Without contrasting their respective merits, however, the one is universally admitted to be a most useful supplement to the other ; and a conversance in both, or an easy means of reference to them in cases of judicial occur- rence, must be of essential use towards the due admi- nistration of the Mohummudan law, as far as that law is a ATHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 511 declared to be the established rule and standard of decision *. * Mr. Hamitton’s translations of the ‘ Hidayah’’ renders it unnecessary to state the general contents of that work. The «« Futawa-i-Aalumaceree,” consists of 61 books (kitab) in the fol- lowing order :—1,'Taharut, purification. 2, Sulat, prayer. 3, Zukat, alms, 4, Som, fasting. 5, Hujj, pilgrimage. 6, Nikah, marriage. 7, Ruzaa, fosterage. 8, Tulak, divorce. 9, Utak, manumission. 10, Ayman, vows. 11, Hoodood, fixed penalties. 12, Surikah, larceny. 13, Seyur, institutes or regulations concerning infidels, apostates, apostates, and rebels. 14, Lukeet, foundlings. 15, Looktah,troves. 16, Ibak, absconding of slayes. 17, Mufkood, missing persons. 18, Shirkut, partnership. 19, Waukf, endow- ment; or religious and charitable appropriation. 20, Bya, sale. 21, Surf, exchange of coin or bullion. 22, Kufalut, bail. 23, Huwalut, transfer of debts» 24, Adub ool Kazee, the duty a Kazee. 25, Shahadut,eyidence. 26, Roojcoa un Shahadut, re- traction of evidence. 27, Vukalut,avency. 28, Dawa, claim. 29, Ikrar, acknowlegdment. 30, Sool, composition. 31, Mozarubut, copartnership in stock and labour, 32. Wudee, ut, deposit. 33, Adeeyut, lending without return. 34, Hibah, gift. 35, Harah, hire and fgrm. 36, Mokatub, covenanted slave. 37, Wala, con- nection of emancipator and freedman ; or of patron and client. 38, ikrab, compulsion. 39, Hujr, inhibition and disqualification, 40, Mazoon, licensed slave,and ward, 41, Ghusb, usurpation. 42, Shoofah, right of vicinity. 43, Kismut, partition. 44. Mozaraut, compact of cultivation. 45, Moa,amulut or Mosakat, compact of gardening. 46, Zubayith, animals slain by Zubh, or incision of the throat. 47, Oazheeyah, sacrifice. -48, Kurahiyut, abomination, disapprobation, or censure. 49, Tuhurre, presumptive preference. 50, Ibya ool muwat, cuitivation of waste land. 51, Shirb, right to water. §2, Ushrihab, intoxicating liquors. 53, Syd, game. 54, Ribn, pledge. 55, Jinayat, offences against the person. 56, Wosaya, testamentary bequests. 57, Mukazir o Sijillat, judicial proceedings and decrees. 58, Shooroot, legal forms, 50, Hiyu,} legal devices. 60, Khoonsa, hermaprodite, 61, Fura,eez, rules of inheritance. Of the sixty-one books enumerated, fifty-five correspond ~with similar titles in the Hidayah. Two other books in the latter work, - entitled ‘« Diyut,” (the fine of blood), and ** Mu,aakil” (exaction of the fine of blood), are included in the “ F.Aalumgeeree,” as chapters of the beok of Jinayat. The book of ‘“ Shirb,’’? in the go Names and & Mean Declina- | 4stances cor- 28 ! " ~ y o ‘ Characters | & | | Interval durin tion from rected for Ab-,|)& 5 S| 5 = | Corrected Ze- ae : ae - ber, Nut.and} 2% 3S} 8} = Latitudes. | Northern and | Mean Lati- of Stars mm] 8 when observed Greenw. Cat. j ; Ss 5] 8 3S | nith distances yd oo J S| 5 ; , Solar Equae |\& 5S 5) = = i Southern Stars tude. = ia for 1805. q = 5.8 Ss s * tion. Qo] NS me Inches. Arcturus, ++ | 1 | 20 |Feb. 6. Mar. 20. ° 19! 14” 426 17° 7 59” 6 o} 6” 0 mM! Rel 0 Al LRM 20° 12’ 14” 426 | 7° 7 52” .639 | 29.975 | 75°) 6.051 | 7° 7 58”.690 | 13° 4’ 15”.736 : Aldebaran, | 1 16 | Oct. 30. Dec. 9.] 16 6 23 .830|3 2 7 .548] 29.983 | 77 2.55713 2 9.905 13 .829 @ Leonis,--+- | 2 | 20} Jan. 2. Feb. 24.1 15 39 48 .544|2 35 51 .288| 30.019 | 74 | 2.197 | 2 35 33 .485 15 277 « Herculis, ++) 3 | 16 | Mar. 27. Apr. 24.| 14 37 27 .091 |1 33 10 .870} 29.942 | 81 | 1.988 | 1 33 12.158 14 .933 a Pegasi-+++ | 2 | 16 | Oct. 25. Nov. 14.| 14 9 38 .050/1 5 22 .312| 29.966 | 831 0.902 |1 5 23.214 14 .836 y Pegasi,---» | 2 | 12 | Oct. 25, Nov. 14.}:14 6 1 .906|1 1 47 .185| 29.966 | 81 | 0.856 |1 1 47.991 13 .915 | 13°4/ 14”.721 13° 4’ 13" .654 Regulus, «+ | 1 | 18 | Nov. 28. Jan. 12.] 12 54 58 .930}0 9 14 .326| 30.035} 71 | 0.131 |0 9 14.504] 13 4 13.494 # Ophiuchi,--] 2 | 10 | Mar. 15. Apr. 22.| 12 42 50.910} 0 21 22 .3621 29.993 | 84 | 0.293 | 0 21 22 .655 13 .565 Altair, +--+ | 2 | 16 | Apr. 28. Jan. 9.| 8 21 53 .530|4 42 15 .821| 29.862 | 85 | 3.874 | 4 42 19 .695 13 .225 w Orionis, «+ | 1 | 90 | Nov. rh Jan. 15.| 7 21 36 .670|5 42 29 .526| 30.035 | 74 | 4.855 | 5 42 34.381. 11 .051 # Serpentis,-- | 23/12 |Mar. 9. Apr. 9.| 7 259 .39016 1 8 .002| 29.993 | so | 5.043 |6 113.045| © 19.435 Procyon, -- | 1.2) 16 | Nov. 8 Jan. 23. 5 43 0010/7 21 5 .522| 30.035 | 73 | 6.280 |7 21 11 .802 11 .812| 13.4 12.587 i een | Se ee ee ee een Seen lain em ye TS } TABLE III. Shewing the Latitudes for the Madras Observatory such as deduced from 52 Stars near the Zenith by 500 Observations. i. Meta p ? AVE me VI. VIL. | VIII. [5:8 K, ct) i 5 . Names and charac E Period during which Mean Declinations Siar ae Aine S Corrected Zenith Tatitudes Corrected Declina- ters of Stars. & observed, Jamiary 1805. Retrac. & Distances, : tions for Jan. 1805. Ss € Gemiborum | 3 | Feb. 19. March 30. | 20° 50’ 43” 7° 40" 18".373 | 6.536 7° 46’ 24.909 | 13° 4/ 18".091.| 20°50! $8".343 y Leonis +.s}.3 Dee. | 21. Jan. 12. | 20 49 26 745 4.151 | 6.540 7 45 10.091 15 .309 | 20 49 24.125 | ° 1875 Arcturus «+{) 1 Feb. 6. March 20. | 20 12 14.42 7 7 52 .639:| 6.051 7 7 58.690 15 .736 |.20 12 12:.124 | —2 .296 OBootis .-%2h\-3° May 10. and 27.|19 55 6 6 50 42.566 | 5.731 6 50 48 .297 17.703 | 19 55 0.731 | —5.269 6 Arietis «---| 3 GOcti'®. 28. Nov. . 13: | 29 Sy *2Q 6 46 42.181 5 679 6 40 47 .800 14.140 | 19 51 1.294} —0.706 n Bootis --++| 3 Jan.-\. 24. Feb. 11. | £9 22 58 6 18 30.041 | 5.332 6 18 35.373 22 .627 | 19 22 48 .907'| —9.093 d Arietis’ «+. +) 4 Oct. 28. Nov. 14. | 18 58 50.95 5 §4 32.869 ‘5.010 5 54 37 879 13.071 | 18 58 51.313 | -+-0.363 & Gancri ----| 4 Nov. 30. April. 10.) 18 51 47 5 47 26.641 1 4.913 5 47 81.454 15.5460 | 18 51 44.888 | +2.112 5 -a@ Sagittee .-+-| 4 April «28. May 5. | 17 34 34 4 80 11.1644 3.720 | 4 30 14.884 19.116 | 17 34 28.318 | —5 .682 x Bootis +++-| 3.4 March -5. and 20,1] 17 15 46 4 11 25.58! | 3.506 4 11 29 .087 16.913 | 17 15 42.521 | —3.479 yy Geminorum | 2.3 Dec. 2. Feb. 12. |.16 33 18 3 28 59.806} 3.216 37.29) 93,.029 14.978 | 16:33 16.456 | —1.544 9 Leonis «--+| 3 Dec. 10. Jan. 2. | 16 29 40 3 25 26.001 | 2.994 3 25 28 .995 11.005 | 16 29 42.429 | +2.429 y Serpentis «-| 3 March 12. April 5. | 16 18 35 31411 83 | 2.705 3 14 14.188 20.612 | 16 18 27.702 | —7 .298 Aldebaran + «| 1 Oct. 30. Dec. 9. | 16 6 93 3 2°7.348 | 2.557 3 2 9.905 13.829 | 16 06 23.339 | +0.339 BLeonis --+-{) 2 an. 2. Feb. 24.) 15 30 45 .28 2 35 31.228 | 2.197 2 35 33 485 15.077 | 15 39 46.919 | +1.639 y Tauris. 4-61 3 Oct. — 28. Nov. (18. 4-15 '8 49 2 4 34.103 | 1.748 2 4 35.851 13.149 | 15 8 49.285 | -+-0.285 # Hercules) ++) 3 March 27. April 24. | 14 37 27 .09 1 33 10.870} 1 .228 1 33°42 158 14.933 | 14 87 25.592 | —1.498 w Pegasi- «-\44)).2 Oct... 25. Nov. 13.') 14 -9 38.05 1 5 22.3121 0.902 1 5) 93.214 14.836 | 14 9 30.648 | —1 .402 y Pegast ~-+-)).2 Oct. 25. Nov. 14. 14 “6 1.906: (1 1 47.135} 1.857 1 M74) O11 13.915 116 6 1.425 | —9.475 BiDelphini =) 3 Oct. 24. Nov. 6.1}:93 55 36 0 51 21.905 | 0.709 O 51 22.614 13.386 | 13 55 36.048 | +0.048 ® Orionis +-++))4.51'-6 | Juv 14, Feb. 7. | 13 54 54 0 50 44.213 } 0.713 0 50 44 .926 9.076 | 13 54.58.300 | +4 .360 @ Aquile --+-/ 34 \ April 28..May 2:1 13 35 «68 0 30 49.051 | 0.423 0 30 49.474 18.526 {13-35 2.905 | —5.095 02 Orionis “+)-4/5]° 4 Feb, 19. and 26. | 13 11. 48 0. 7 33.171 | 0.104 | 0 7 33.975 14.325 | 13 11 46.709 | —1.291 ell aoe Mean Latitude from the\whole, 13 4 18.293 Mean of Star's N. of Zen. 13 4 15.482 Mc neta —— Names of Stars. |Mag, Bibsat Period during which obs. | Mea. Dec. 1805. Cor. Z. Hise ietine, Refraction. Cor, Z. dist. Latitudes. Cor. Declin. Difference. | : ee —— ——————_—_—_|——_ | a | —_—— — — Regulus --| 1 | 18 | Nov. 28. Jan. 12. 12° 54/ 58”.93 0? 9° 14.326 | 0°.131 OY 9 1M .504 | 13° 4 13".434 | 12°54 £8°.930 | — 0".000 « Ophiuchi | 2 | 12 | March 15. April 22. | 12 42 50 gl 0 21 22.362 | 0.293 | 0.21 22.655 | 13.565 | 12 42 50.779 | — 0.131 « 2 Cancri--| 4 | 16 | Nov. 10. Jan. 10. | 12 36 18.0 0 27 55.057} 0.39 0 27 55.452 | 13.452 | 12 36 17.982 | — 0.018 a@ 1 Cancri-+| 4 6 | April 15. and 29. | 12 21 48 0 O 42 21.166 | 0.579 O 42 2b.745) 9.745 | 12 21 51.689 | + 3.689 5 &-Leonis-+++| 4 4,}>April 15. May 5. | 12 9 28.0 0 54 46 -352 | 0.791 O 54 47 143 15.143) 17 124 (9) 26.291.) — 4.709 e Virginis «| 3. | 18 | Jan. 12. March 4.) 12 0 40 1 3 31.500] 0.887 1 «3 32.387.) 12 387 | 12. 0 41.047 | + 1.047 Ah Herculis »+| 4 8 | March 26. April 7. | 11 55 5 1 9 8-678.) 0.958 1 ~G- 9 .636 14.636 | 11 55. 3.798.) — 1.202 + Leonis++++| 4 6 | May .12. and 30. | 11 36 12 1 27 57 806 | 1 .203 1.27 59.009 | 11.009 |,11 36 14.425.| + 2.425 x Cancri+ +++} 4 6 | April 10. May 1. {| J1 26 45 1 37 23.593 | 1 .333 s7 24, .926 9 926 | 11 26 48.508 | + 3.508 & Serpentis | 3 8 | March 11. April 6.| 11 12 4 1 52,9203 | 1.50194 52 40.7645) 14.764 ()11.12 2.670} — 1.330 o Leonis++++} 4 8 | Dec. 1. Jan. 8. | 10 46 25 217 435 .940 | 1.961 | 2 17 45 .901 10.901 | 10,46 27 .533 + 2.533 ¢ Delphini--| 4 6 | May 2. June 11. ] 10 39 6 2 Qh Si 22B| 91.984 | 2 24 53-212 | 3 58.212 | 10 39 20.222 | 415.222 25 e Opbiuchi | 2. | 18 | Mareh 11. April 15..| 10 29 54 2 34 18.886 | 2.147 | ~2 34 21.033) 4 15.033 | 10 29 52.401 | — 1.599 p Leonis:-++| 4 8 | Dec. 10. Jan. 8 10 18 28 2 45 42 .358 2 335 29 45 40 .053;) 8 .053 |. 10.18 33.381 | +, 5.581 15... Unicorn ++| 4 6 | Feb. 19. Mareh 20. | 10 3 57 3 0 10.875 | 2.510 | oS oO 3.385 | 10.385 | 10. 4 09 .049-| + 3.049 @ Caucri ++} 3.4} 12 | Nov, 19. Dec. 21.] 9 46 29 3.17 27 977 | 2.800 3 17 80.777 | 3 69.777 | 10 46 42.657} +13 .657 Grionis ++) 4 8 | Feb. 19. March 4..| 9 38 10 3 26. .0:693.| 2.870 | «3 26 13.563) oH 14.563. |) 9 38 9.871}. —.0.129 pe Cet — 4 | 10-| Jan. 12. and 28.) 917 6 3.46 59.187 | 3.209 | 3 47 2.390 “ 8.396 | 9 17 11.038} + 5.038 « Pegasi----| 2 | 14 | Oct. 28, Nov. 14. | 8 59 18 4 449.456 | 3.392 | 4 4 52.848 | 10.848 | 8 59 20.586 | +.2.586 mw Orionis ++) 4 | 12 | Nov, 8. Dec. 4.) 8 S307 4.30 44-501 | 3.791 4 30 48 .292 5.292 | 8 33 25.142 | + 8.142 x Leonis 4 6 | Dec. 21. June §2.} 8§ 23 20 4 40 48.397 | 4.018 4 40 52.415 12.415 |. 8 23 21.019 | — 1.019 « Aquile 1 | 16 | April 28. Jan. 9. | 8 2! 53 4 42 18.821 | 3.874 | 4 42 19.695 | 13 .225.| 82 : ‘ vy Virginis ++) 4 4| May 12. and 25.| 7 37 26 5 26 45.945 | 4.467 | 5 26 50.412 | 16.412 | 7 « Orionis ++| 1 | 20 | Nov, 7. Jan. 15 7 21 37 5 42 29-526 | 4.855 5 42 34.381 1k .O515IL. 7 « Leonis — 4.5 12-| Dec. 19. Jan. 21.] 7 5 48 5 58 15.794 | 5.089 | 5 58 20.883 8 .883.|- 7 aw Serpentis | 2.3)12 } March 9. April 9.) 7 2 59 39 6 1 8.002} 5.043 6 1.13 .045.) / 12.435-15 7 & Aquilze 4 |.12 | May 1. June ° 5. | 6 58 38. 6 5 32.359 | 5.024 | 6 5 37.383 | 15.383 |. 6 y Orionis --| 2 | 14 | Jan. 10. Feb. 18.| 6 9 43 6 54 22.193 | 5.865 | 6 54 28.158 11.158 | 6 Procyon ++} 1.2} 14 | Nov.» 8, Jan. 23. | 5 43 0.01 | 7-21 5-552 | 6.266 | 7 21-11 -.802 11.812 | 5 nl . : Mean of Stars South of Zenithe- 13 4 11.113 TABLE IV. Shewing the Latitudes given by Stars, as observed North or South of the Zenith. Name of Places where Names and Number of Stars observed by. observed, Coringa, in the Nor- thern Cirears. By 15 Stars North of Zenith, with Sextant AO Stars South of Zenith. Mr, TOPPING +++--+eee- e Bootis, } Leonis, 6 Leonis «+-.+. eeeesceccesecons Paughur, in the My- —— -——— sore. e Virginis, Regulus, 0 Leonis. Major LAMBTON +++ Paudree, in the Car- AT AT AMA!svcletels tolels rt tevs,/0.0 e¥aicls\ > bisis, sie bo fe tetehale aelaioierais natic. z Orionis, Regulus. Major LAMBTON +++++e+eeeoe es TABLE II. Arcturus, Aldebaran, 6 Leonis, « Herculis, « Pegasi, ++ y Pegasi, Regulus, « Ophiuchi, Atiair, « Orionis, a Serpentis, Procyon, TABLE III. By 23 Stars N. of Zenith, with the Zenith Sector-++++++- 29 Stars 8. of Zenith-.-- Seo ee er ere ess eee eee teeeee TABLE V. By 11 Observations of O N, of Zenith «++.+++seeeeeees 9 Observations of © S. of Zenith «-+-.++eeeveecees Observatory, near Fort St, George. Observations by Mr. GoupincuaM and Mr. TopPine. Arcturus, } Arietis, Aldebaran, Markab, 6 Delphini -- Regulus, « Ophiuchi, Attair, « Olrionis, « Serpentis, Z. S. 25 Stars, very near the Zenith N.+-seeeee ceevee cos 25 Stars South, and very near the Zenith, Circular Inst. By 30 Observations of © N. of Zenith 26 Observations of © §. of Zenith. Zen. Sector «+--+ 25 Stars N. of Zenith «+--+. +). cee 25 Stars S. of Zenith, with Sextant »--.++ cesses cere By By ape Arcturus, « Herculis, Markab, »y Pegasi+-+-+-++++++++ Ophiuchi, y Aquile, Attair, «/ ' -rpentis, B Aquile, -- y Herculis, « Sagittz, y Serpt. & 3 ootis, and 8 Delphini (second set by Major , MBTON) «+--+ eee ¢ Virginis, 3 Serpentis Dodagoonta, near Bangalore, inthe | « Mysore. were et eee see eee tee eee ee eeeer Aldebaran, Regulus «+++++e+ tee ceececceeeeeeeece a Orionis +--+... Trivandaporam, in the Carnatic. ee ee Latitudes by Stars North of the Zenith. 16° 48/49". 5 14 6 20.312 eee eesesenes 13 19 49.018 138 4 14.721 eeeesereeens 12. 4 15 482 13 4 4.449 134. 1162 13.4 6:10 134 6. 45 13412. 47 er 1. 04 13 O 12 59 54. 89 11 44 60. 55 eoeseese reece Latitudes by Stars South of the Zenith. 14 6 17 .919 13 19 40.370 13. 4 12.587 sere sees eeee 13 4 11.113 13.4 2.207 19 4 F6R 65 eoee vere sees 13\ 4 40 eoeorere 13 4 4. 87 13 4 6. 30 eeee eoeesese 12 59 59. 0 12 59 47. 26 — severe eoerene 11 44 41. 45 | ee ee ee em j j i 9. 50] 11 44 47. 78 Excess by North of Zenith, (Cen ot) 8 .648 2.134 4 . 369 2.242 Mean Latitudes. 16° 48’ 39” 25393 14 6 19.165 13 19 44. 69 13 4 13.654 es 12 59 55. 49 —— eee er ee ee ee ee TABLE V. Zenith Distances and Latitudes by the Sun, April and May, 1807. Days on which obseryed. April 15. 16. 18. 19. 20. 21. 23. 24, 25. Zenith dist. of ©’s centre, 3° 36 49” . 849 3 15 19 .065 2 32 35 .999 211 52 .124 151 0.725 1, 30 26 .776 0 49 45 . 564 0 29 41 .305 0 9 56 .739 © North. 9 39 .001 29 2 .604 48 11 .508 25 53 .806 20 39 .055 54 . 866 46 40 .172 3 5.912 35 0 .418 50 35 .340 5 48°.551 KP PRR OWDWNMWRKOCO on Gr Mean of Lat. by Northern and Southern Z. dis- tances. Corresponding Fs at ¢ Latitudes, wer A”, 949 . 265 . 619 . 324 . 525 . 276 . 564 . 004 - 339 wookob On Gr wwor tc CON OO 13° 4’ 3” .328 . 389 u . 406 . 692 . 389 «345 134 « 228 - 588 - 652 3 .560 6 .449 Ob Or An © % & MH Oo Go 13 4 4.449 * Diff. 2 .242 = VoLX. Plate 6. NEAR FORT ST. GEORGE. 517 chance; and it was this consideration which led me to examine whether I could. not discover some law by which it was governed. Q. For this purpose I gathered all the observations which I could collect, and from as many different places inthe Peninsula as I could, provided they were obtained in sufficient numbers at each place. These being arranged in the order of the declinations, and the mean results of northern and southern zenith distances being taken separately, I noticed invariably (though in une- qual degrees) a small excess in the northern, and defect in the southern sets. 10. An abstract of these deviations is given in Table IV. and the reader will do well to refer to it in order to judge of the consistency of the preceding remark, and of the solidity of what I have further to say on the sub- ject. | ~- 11. Tuts exposition being sufficient to shew the tendency of observations taken north of the zenith to give /oo great a latitude, and the contrary of the south~ ern ones, I shall now endeavour to account for this cir- cumstance as follows. & ie ' ‘ . 12. Ler Z (Plate V1. Fig. 1) be the true zenith of any place. & D, and EF d, the declinations of any two stars, one north, the other south, and nearly at equal distances from the said zenith. By the present experi- ments, if we use the declination of D, the latitude will fall somewhere in L: but if we use the declination of d, then it will fall on the opposite side, somewhere in ~ }. Therefore the sum of the zenith distances D L4/ 4, L13 Se eee - 518 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS will fall short of the differences of declinations E D, and £ d bythe small are LJ. 13. Let now the zenith be altered into ¢ (Fig 2) so that d be now north of it, and let 3 be the place of a third star, south of the zenith ¢. Then if we use the declination of d (which before gave us too low a lati- tude) it will now give it in a; and if we use that of dit will fallin 4 south of the true zenith: so that instead of having E D—E )—sum of the four zenith distances, we have it (Fig.2) — DL 4+L14ld4 dazany yaa That is, the four observed distances + the small arcs L142. Therefore, if we suppose the declination E D to have been well determined, that of dis too low by the arc Z/, and that of ¢, by L/ +a Ae 14. Por example ; let the true place of Aldebaran be at #, and its apparent place (affected by the error in the declination) be at D, Regulus at d and « Orionis at d; then at the observations at Paudree and Thivanda- poran: we have DL 2046’ 33” .682 N-) fd 0 24 43 .040 S. >of the respective zeniths, da 110 9g .920 N.{ } AY aes PET 3 a Sum, 8 44 31 .452 Now the mean declination of A/debaran being Equal . . . 16° 6’ 23” .73 And « Orionis = 7 21 36 .61 Wehave E D—E 48 4A AZ .12 . 8 AA 831 ADB Diff L144 aya - . 15.55 NEAR FORT ST. GEORGE. 519 and in order to have separately the values of these quan- tities, we have at Paudree Latitude E £ by Aldebaran 130 19’ 49” .018 E‘l by Regulus... «++> Al .3A40 Difference Z7.....-.+. 7 -.678 At Trivandapo ram, Latitude Ea by Regulus . 110 44° AQ” .329 E aby a Orioms .....- Al .07 eee Wee ee nee Sf eg! YO Hence L/ +2 , = 7.678 + 7-879 = 15.557 as before. 15. It is therefore evident that, taking the decli- nation of A/debaran to be cotrected, and the observa- tion good, then the declination of « Orionis should be increased by 15”.557. Again, if we reyert to what I have said higher up (Para. 7 *) it may be inferred, tnat these errors proceed from assigning originally too great a difference of polar distance between the extreme stars from which the mean latitude is deduced (as for ex- ample between Arcturus, and Procyon:) hence the mean latitude, which is derived from both, will fall somewhat foo ow; both on account of the excess of this arc, and also of the error of polar distance of P D c —Pp We 1 16. Ir follows from this, that the successive small arcs of declination Dy, yv, v d, dé (Fig.3) will severally be too great, and this seems to be the case with the de- - ¢linations of the twelve stars registered in Table II. 17. Ir is true that in the foregoing example, where’ I have compared the results given by 4/debaran, Regu- lus and « Orionis, 1 have selected an extreme case ; but —_——--_—— —_——— = ee * See also infra, Pa. 17. 14 520 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS it is likewise evident, from what appears in Table IV. that were the mean of any number of northern and south- ern stars, to be taken separately at any two places of different latitudes, and in the order here described, the deviation would tend the same way as in the above exposition ; and this, it may be supposed, by a certain quantity, ‘hrown in from a distant zenith, on account of refraction, which cannot be corrected here for the quan- tity P «, nor done away by that due to the small arcs ) y near the zeniths. Also that the latitude of ¢ will fall too low by a certain quantity (P D—P x) Dx + PEt AA where D «is the whole error affecting the de- clination of D; and the divisor 7, will be in some pro- portion of the error affecting the whole arc D @ (always in @xcess) from the extremities of which the mean la- titudes of Z and ¢ were deduced. 18. Wrru the mean latitude given in Table II, we can therefore be no otherwise satisfied than from the fol- lowing consideration, which as far as it affects our lati- Lita tude seems to reduce the error D #4 ——_—A to a mere nothing. 1g. Regulus, a star of the first magnitude, no doubt attentively observed from every part of Europe, owing to its being very near the ecliptic, and situated only 9 minutes and 14 seconds from the zenith of the Madras Observatory, gives a latitude differing only from the mean resultsin Table II. by 20.22. This, no doubt, will be admitted to be a strong indication, that its decli- nation, such as laid down in the tables, is very accu- rate. Regulus may therefore, without inconveniency, be taken as a-visible point in the heavens, from which ta lay down the position of the other stars; by this NEAR FORT 8ST. GEORGE. 521 means the zenith distances applied to it will give results consistent both with the observations at Greenwich, and at Madras, and thus form a link by which the two ze- niths may hereafter be connected. 20. For this reason, in computing the Xth column in Table II. I have adopted the following process ; Ff Declination of Regulus, » de Wth2e 54’ 58%! 930 Zenith distance of do. . . . O Q 1A .504 BD, OF Arcturus Ney oo 617) FP 580.690 — oe Corrected declin. of Arcturus, 20°12 12 .194 N. TH, Zenith distance of Regu/us, . .O Q 14 .504 Zenith distance of Procyon, . ° ..7 21 11 .302 , Difference 2: 27), 1095522298 Declination of Regulus, . . +» 12 54 58 .930 . Corrected declin. of Procyon, . 5 43 1 .032 21. Iris greatly to be regretted that there are no instruments in the Madras Observatory, wherewith to take accurately great zenith distances ; for correspond- ing observations of stars near the zenith of Greenwich and of Paris, would have afforded powerful means for correcting, after the same manner, the declinations of all stars in that extensive space of the heavens which divides the two Observatories. On THE Sun’s DECLINATION. 29. Ir isa fact deserving of notice, that the medium ef 20 observations of the sun, taken with the zenith r 522 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS seetor, (Table V.) gives the latitude of the Observa- tory only 13° 4’ 3.328 which is less by 10”.326 than that brought out by the stars in Table II. _ 23. Tue great difficulty of observing the sun, when in the meredian in tropical climatés, owing to the great tremor of the atmosphere ar noon time, induced me not to consult it in laying down the latitude of this Obser- vatory. 24. Howrver, on comparing the mean latitude in Table V. with the result of similar observations, for- merly taken with the same instrument by Mr. Goup- INGHAM, (56 in number) I found that his latitude by the sun, namely, 13° 4’ 5”.66, differed only by 2”.332 from mine. ‘There could therefore remain no doubt that the sun gave a lower latitude than the stars; and 1 was further confirmed in this opinion, on Major LamsBtTon communicating to me his remark, that when observing the sun, in various parts of the Peninsula, his results were likewise in defect. 25. In order to make a further trial of this, let us compute the exact time when the sun was precisely in the parallel of the Mad7as Observatory, and then (taking the difference of longitude between Greenwich and this place to be well known) determine the sun’s declination for that moment, from what it is given in the nautical almanac for two preceding, and two succeeding moons. 26. For this, taking the four zenith distances ob- served nearest and on each side of the zenith, and in- terpolating in the usual way *, we have is — * The formula of which is y = a+ P #Q x——+ Re — cea, &c. where xis to be found by resolying the equation. NEAR FORT ST. GEORGE. 523 Apri] 24, 0 20 41” S, = 1781 + —@ 25, °0. 9-50 /8, =< 596 4 "= BF 26, 0. 9°39 N. = 579 — —¢ 27, - 0 29°"°3 *N22"-4743 — 2 @ Hence: a b c a 1781; 596; — 570; — I7AL — 1185; — 1175; — 1164 +, 1Q; + 11 iy Soil Therefore 2=11781; P=— 1158; Q = 10; —3- = Z fa7: (Hence X = 4- +. bY Za. te < Blake = 1.50617 or 1 day 12h 8’ 52”.84. Therefore the sun was exactly in the parallel of the Observatory on the 25th of April at 125 8’ 52”84 P. M. Madras time, and taking the difference of longitude to be 80° 18” 30” E. which gives in time 55 2i™ 4s, then the sun was in the said parallel on the 25th of April at 6h 47m 3g”, Greenwich time. 27. Now by interpolating again for the sun’s declina- tion at that instant, we have by the ephemerides April-24, 12° 38 44 — 45524 — a 25,12 58 3=—46710=6 96, 13 18 4—A7884 ~¢ 27,13 37°25 — 49045 =d Hence: a Be. ‘3 d 45524; 46710; 47884; 49045 1186; -1174; 1161 7 AZ5-— 13; / Beal fe >. 524 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS Therefore a = 45524; P—11860;.Q. — —12, anda = pede and y—a 4. Px4Qu. 7} — 13° 4’ 3.159, which differs only from the mean latitude by the sun (Table V.) by 0”.169. 28. It is, own, no easy matter to give a reason for so great adeviation. The difference between this posi- tion of the sun when in the parallel of the Observatory, and the latitude of that place as given by the stars, being 10”.326, no error in the difference of longitude assumed between the Greenwich and Madras Observatories can accouut for it. For if we take y — 13° 4’ 13”.654 or A7053”.654 (Table If.) then resolving the equation we have, « — —2—1+ W2—1)* 4 2y7—4 = 1,day 28912 2 2 2 or] day 65 -56™ 193.9, which gives a difference of 8 minutes and 43 seconds of time for moving through 10”.226 of a degree in declination. So that if we suppose the sun to be in the parallel given by the stars, the interval of time allowed for the difference of longi-. tude. between Madras and Greenwich must be dimi- nished by that quantity, which is far beyond any un- ‘certainty that may still subsist on that head. - 2g. AGAIN; as to the time of apparent noon at Madras, the sun’s transit was always observed with the fixed transit instiument, whilst I was observing it with the zenith sector ; and these contemporary observations agreed always toa second of time. There can there- fore be but little irregularity to apprehend from this element, and we are compelled, though under equal objections and difficulties, to ascribe the error to the declination either as assigned to the sun in the ephe- merides, or to the stars in the catalogue for 1802 ; and and I believe the former are the most likely to create suspicion. : NEAR FORT ST. GEOBGE. §25 ‘30. Wuere great talents are combined with the most perfect instruments and assiduous practice, the cause can only be ascribed to that important correction on which we are still so yery uncertain : and on this I shall venture an opinion, not altogether unsupported by experiments *; which is, that the declination of the sun being deduced from observations taken at noon, and that of the stars at ight time, the effects of refraction at these different periods may possibly vary materially, and what is allowed for zenith distances of the stars, be too much for zenith distances of the sun; a surmise which explains at once why the sun, in the present in- stance, gives a lower latitude than the stars. This strongly suggests the expediency of further experiments ‘for ascertaining a point, which, if established, would be highly conductive to important discoveries, in an inte- resting but imperfectly known branch of natural philo- sophy. JOHN WARREN, OsservaTory, zear Fort St. George, 1ft of March, 1808. == * See Asiatic Researches Volume IX. Article 1st, Page 13, the experiments on terrestrial refraction, where the refraction at night was something more than double what it was in the day-time, ewing (it is supposed) to the increased moisture of the atmosphere. IX. TRANSLATIONS of two Letters of Napir Suan, with INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS in a LETTER to the PRESIDENT. BY BRIGADIER GENERAL JOHN MALCOLM. TO HENRY COLEBROQE, Es@. ; President of the Asiatic Society. | MY DEAR SIR, Ty the course of researches into the history of Persia, my attention was particularly drawn to a collection of letters, and original state papers, of Napir Suan, pub- lished after his decease by his favourite secretary Mir- za Menepi. This collection is held in the highest estimation in Persia, not only from the light it throws upon the history of that nation, but from the stile in which it is written, and which 1s considered to be the best model for those who desire to attain excellence in this branch of writing. I nave the pleasure to transmit, for the considera _ tion of the Asiatic Society, translations .of two of these letters which appear to be strongly illustrative of the character of NApir Suan, and the history of the pe- tiod at which they were written, and which may per- haps be deemed on that account not unworthy of a place in the Society’s Researches. ’ Tue first is addressed to MuHAMmup Att Kuan, Beglerbeg* of Fars, and must from its tenor have been a et ea ee ee ee Cen eee * Goyernor of Persia proy er: hl td nas TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS, &c. 527 written early in the year 1731, a few months previous to the dethronement of SHan Tamasy, which took place in the month of August of that year. Naprr Suan published, at the period at which he wrote this letter, a proclamation or manifesto addressed to the inhabitants of Persia, in which, after stating his own successes against the dfghans and the other enemies of his coun- try, and the evils which appeared likely to arise from the shameful peace which had been concluded with the Turks, heannounces his intention of marching after the feast of Naw Rox (which occurred that year on the 223d of Ramzon or 10th of March) and of not only obliging tbe Turks to consent to more just terms, but of de- Priving of dignity and power, and considering as infi- dels, all those who should oppose his intentions. This manifesto, as well as his letter to the Feglerbeg of Fars, sufficiently prove, that his designs were at that moment more directed against his own sovereign than that of Constantinople. Tuere is no epoch in the life of Naprr Suan at which he acted with more consummate art and policy, than upon this occasion. The crown of Persia was completely within his grasp. But he appears to have considered it as indispensable to have his right univer- sally acknowledged by his countrymen before he seized it- He had within a period of thirteen years risen from obscurity to unrivalled pre-eminence in the service of his weak monarch; and, by his wonderful valour and conduct, had not only rescued his country from the Afghans, the Turks andthe Russians, who taking advan- ‘tage of the decline of the Sofaviyah dynasty and conse- quent dissentions of the nobles of the empire, had made themselves. masters of its richest cities and finest pro~ 528 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS vinces; but he had received the military spirit of the Persians, and roused a nation sunk in sloth and luxury, to great-and successful exertion. But neither this success, the imbecility of Suan Famasp, nor a reli- ance upon his own fame and strength, could induce him to take the last step of usurpation, until he had by his arts excited a complete contempt in the minds of his countrymen for their reigning sovereign, and a pride in his glory, that was likely to make his elevation seem more the accomplishment of their wishes than of their ambition. The great ability with which he laboured to effect this object, is admirably shown in his letter to Munammep Att Kuan. He commences by stating his victories over the Afghans, whom he had not only completely expelled from the empire, but pursued into their own territories. He next exposes the impoliti¢ and humiliating conditions of the treaty which the king had concluded with the Zwrkish government; and, on the ground of its bringing disgrace on Persia, asserts his right and intention, as the successful champion of . the independence of his country, to abrogate the igno- minious engagement; and while he flatters the na- tional spirit of the Persians by anticipating success against their ancient rivals the Turks, he endeavours to enflame all their bigotry by giving the colour of reli- gion to the cause which he has undertaken ; and calls upon them, with the well feigned zeal of an enthusiast, to fight for the preservation and existence of the holy © sect of Shiak, a schism which, as appears from his whole life, he always considered to be a heresy, and which it - was the first and last object of his reign to eradicate and destroy ; and, to make the effect of this letter complete, he concludes it with the usual declaration of all Muham- medan leaders who have made religion the pretext of OF NADIR SHAH, &c , 529 war, that he should consider and panish as infidels all those that refused their concurrence and aid in the sacred cause te which he professed himself devoted. Tuer second letter is from De/hi, and must have been written immediately after the arrival of Napria Suan in that city, in the month of February 1738. It com- mences with a clear statement of the causes of his in- vasion of Hindustan; which is followed by a concise relation of his military operations, and a particular ac- count of the celebrated battle of Karnal, in which he defeated the emperor of IJndid. The account of oc- currences before the action, the action itself, the sub- sequent visit which Naprr received from MunamMep Suan, and his resolution to replace that monarch upon the throne of his ancestors, are stated with equal perspicuity and force, and the whole of this letter is written in a Jess inflated stile than any oriental compo- sition of a similar nature which has fallen under my observation. It records events of almost unparalleled magnitude, and the expression is (as far as I can judge) never more warm than what the subject justifies, and indeed requires. Tuese lettets are perhaps calculated to give the reader a more favourable impression of the character of Napir Suan, than any thing before published relating to that great and successful conqueror ; who is- chiefly known in Europe by the report of his tyranny and cruelties, and above all by the massacre of Delhi, which reached European narrators through the exaggerated statements of the surviving inhabitants of that unfor- tunate city. It is far from my intention to trouble you with what the Persian advocates of NADIR SHAH state in vindication of his conduct upon that memorable occasion ; nor do I mean to enter in this place into Vou. A, Mm 530 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS any inquiry fegarding the character and actions of this extraordinary man ; but you will, Iam assured, forgive me, if I offer some observations on the manner in which the history of Napier Suan and of several other Asiatic princes of eminence have been given by I Luropean writers, ‘In describing eastern despots, there has often ap- peared to me astronger desire to satisfy the public of the author’s attachment to freedom and his abhorrence to tyranny, and despotic power, under every shape, than to givea clear and just view of those characters whose history was the immediate object of his labours. This usage may no doubt, in some points of view, appear laudable. It may have a tendency to impress those who peruse the work with a still greater love of the first of all human blessings, rational liberty. But others, who look to a volume of Asiatic history with no other desire but that of obtaining historical trath, and a correct knowledge of the so- cial and political state of the nation that is described, will be disposed to regret that there was any prejudice on the mind of an author or translator, that gave him a bias unfavourable to the gratification of their hopes. They will wish, that he had looked upon the political world with more toleration; and though they may not censure his warm admiration of the government of his own country, they will lament the existence of a feeling which was adverse to an impartial consideration of events illustrative of the general history of the human mind, and which has led him to stamp with general and un- guahified reprobation rulers, who, however low their pre- tentions may be rated, if tried by the standard of countries towards whom that over which they reigned had no one point of affinity, must have stood high in the scale, if measured by that more applicable principle, < OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 531 which takes as its foundation, the actual state of the community in which such characters were born, the means which they possessed, and the actions which they achieved ; and, on this fair and just ground, pro- nounces with truth and discernment, on the right they had, from their qualities and achievements, to that pre- eminence which they attained. Tr such an author were to write the histcry of Napir Suan, he would probably see something more than a mere usurper and tyrant in the man, who, born in a low rank of life, at a period when his country was overrun by foreign invaders, raised himself by the force of his own genius and courage to the highest military rank; attacked, defeated, and expelled every enemy from Persia; and afterwards, with the universal con- sent of his countrymen, seized the sceptre which his valor had saved, and whicha weaker hand could not have wielded. Such an historian, after dwelling with pleasure if not enthusiasm, on the early events of his life, would accompany Naprr with satisfaction in his war upon those barbarous 4fghan tribes, who fora series of years had committed the most horrid ravages in Persia; and though it would be impossible to com- mend the motives that led that monarch to attack the Emperor: of India, the extraordinary valour and conduct which he displays in that enterprise, the exercise he gave by it to that military spirit which he had with such difficulty rekindled among his countrymen, and the magnanimity with which he restored the crown (which he had conquered) to the weak representative of the illustrious house of Zzmur, might, without offence to truth, be stated by such a writer in mitigation of that insatiable desire of glory which prompted the enter- prise, and of those excesses by which it was attended. M m 2 482 TEANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS Tue actions of Napir Suan, until the period of his return from Judia, are a theme of constant praise among his conntrymen. Of the remainder of his life they say, that, though it was not unmarked by great deeds, it was too evident that he had become intoxicated with success, and no longer acted under the guidance of reason ; and all Persian authorities agree, that, after he had in a paroxysm of rage, or rather mad= ness, put out the eyes of his eldest son Reza Kuut Mirza, he became altogether insane. But neither this act of attrocity, nor the other cruelties which Naprr cominitted towatds the close of his re gn, have eradicated from the minds of his countrymen the sentiments of veneration which they entertain for his memory, as the deliverer of his country from its numerous, cruel, and insolent enemies. I must trust to your indulgence to excuse the tength of this letter. If the accompanying translations are deemed worthy of being inserted in the transac- tions of the Asiatic Society, I hope to be able to for- ward hereafter others of a similar kind. Tam, My Dear Sir, vrih sincere respect and esteem Yours faithfully, ; JOHN MALCOLM. gist October, 1808. : OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 533 Lj EcDeB ok Red: {Written before Navin Suau ascended the throne,) addressed to MunamMeDd Axi Kuan, Beglerbeg of Fars ; and giving an account of the conquest of Heraq. r . To the highest of the exalted in station, tne Chief of the great Nobles Munammep Ati Kuay, these happy tidings be conveyed. Aipep by the bounty of an all powerful Creator, and the happy auspices of the house of HaipeEr * and the twelve holy Dams (on whom be eternal mercy,) with my crescent formed and all subduing scimitar, which in glory resembles the recent moon, and with my powerful and victorious army, and soldiers of pro- pitious destiny, who are those sent from heaven, | have, under the influence of good fortune, surpassed | ~ all others in the capture of fortresses and cities. ‘Av this happy and auspicious period, the host of Afghans of the tribe of AgpALut, who fled from the edge of the conquering swords of my dragon-like warriors, retired, as a spider within its web {, into the fort of Herat. Their hearts were distracted with fear, and the pillars of patience and fortitude, that had sup- ported their resolution, were cast down. Reduced to —_— P= > * Art. Here the tribe of Shiahs are meant, who are supposed to be under Ax1’s protection, and in fact part of his family. + Sentences marked in italics, are passages from the Koran, of which [ have concisely rendered the meaning. { From the Koran. The passage literally signifies “ like unto the spider that maketh bimself a house.’ But the weakest of houses surely is the spider's. : Mm 3 534 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS distress by the complicated evils of famine and of the sword, they implored mercy; and “ as clemency is enjoined to the powerful,” I permitted them to eva- cuate the fort ; and have sent (with a view to disperse them) sixty thousand of this tribe with their families, who were reduced to great misery, to the city of i i Shahyar in the province of Khorasan. By the favour and blessing of that omnipotent being, by whom I have been protected, the fort of Herat isin my possession ; and the vat of the tribe of Afghans, as also of the Ghelyahs * of Candahar, who were in the bounds of alliance with them, have submitted’; and have placed upon their necks the collar of obedience. In the midst of these actions, by which the whole country from Herat to Candahar has been completely subdued, and the disturbers of tranquillity on the borders of Kforasan exemplarily punished, I learn by a letter from MUHAMMED Keza Kuan, who was sent ambassador to the court of Rrm-+, that he has con- cluded a treaty with the king, by which itis agreed that the Turkish empire shall possess the territory on the other bank of the river Aras; and the Persian, all upon this: but no arrangement appears to have been made for the liberation of the prisoners of the sect of Axi who are confined in the ¥urkizsh dominions. Is is an incontestible truth, that the existence of humble persons, like us, who, from the favour of a divine providence, have obtained rank and pre-emi- nence over others, is for no other purpose than that we should be the friends of the sect of Shiaht, that we ——— damien ial * A particular tribe of Afghans. | Constantinople. OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 535 should relieve the distress and dispel the grief of the poor and afflicted; (‘for to protect the rnled is the duty of the ruler.”) That we should combat the enemies of the weak, and eradicate the distemper of sedition from the body of the state: not deaf : deaf to the voice of the helpless and unmindful of those that are prisoners) we should break such sacred engage- ments, to conciliate the approbation and yield to the power of a proud enemy. By the great and powerful God, this day is big with ruin to their enemies and with joy to thesect of Shzahs, the discomfiture of the evil-minded is the glory and exaltation of the followers of Atr. When the avenger is at hand the wicked tremble and are appalled. Their eyes roll wildly like one in the agonies of death. Let the danger pass over, and it is forgotten. They revile and mock with their tongues. _ Tuts is a just description of the Turkish tribe. Why should we listen to more prevarications? Or why confine ourselyes to the bank of the ras *; when it is manifest, that the peace, which has been concluded, is contrary to the will of God and irrecon- cileable to the wisdom or dignity of imperial greatness. I HAVE stated to the minister of the exalted prince, that such a peace cannot be permanent, and that Icon- clude the mission of an ambassador to have been an act of compulsion, as I cannot believe that the prince would, under other circumstances, have consented to such a degradation of his dignity. But at all events, as offerings are continually made in the palaces of the lords of the faithful, and the holy men with broken ee a mes ee * Araxes. Mm 4 530 _ TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS hearts are praying to their divine creator for the re- lease of the Musu/manprisoners; it wasmy determination, after receiving leave from the holy prince of regions * Aui Ign Mausa Reza (on whom be eternal blessings) to march on the second day after the feast of Feter + towards the disputed quarter, aided by the divine power, and accompanied by an army raging like the troubled ocean. VERSES. {shall overflow my banks, and fly like an impatient lover to his mistress ; Like a torrent, will I rush, with my breast eyer on the earth. Hariz! if thy footsteps desire to gain, by the true path, the holy house, Carry along with thee the virtue of the exalted of Nejef. I HAVE represented also, that I have sent the high in dignity, Mansum Aur Bea Gerarrt, ambassador to the court of Rem, and that he is attended by a re- spectable escort; and that heis-fully acquainted with my wishes and sentiments. You will nodoubt be rejoiced to hear, that, as it was io be hoped from the goodness of God, this peace with the Turks is not likely toendure; and you. may rest in expectation of my approach. For, by the blessing of the most high, I will advance immediately, with an army elated-with success, skilled in siéges, numerous as emmets, valiant as lions ; and combining with the vigor of youth the prudence of age. I will attend on the exalted prince, and then proceed towards the Turkish frontier. mea ee nn ee en ee ee ee er * Onc of the twelve Imams, who died at Meshed in Khorasan, where he is buried + This feast happens at the conclusion of the month of Ramzan, OF NADIR SHAH, &C. a7 VERSE. Let the cup-bearer tell our enemy, the worshipper of fire, To cover his head with dust ; For the water, that had departed, is returned into its channel. Sucu of the tribe of S/zazhs, as are backward on this great occasion, and are reconciled to this shameful peace, should be expelled from the faithful seat; and for ever counted among its enemies. To slaughter them will be meritorious; to’ permit their existence, impious. a n I have heard, that, during the reign of Murasim, A woman of Ajim was taken by the foe: Her eyes became channels for torrents of blood. She thus complained of her wretched state. “© Oh Mutasim ! why art thou supine ? I caii for justice! «Thy subject is a prisoner in the hands of thine enemy, «* Thou art the flame in the lamp of the country. “© On thee depends the shame and glory of the nation. “© Thou art the protector of the poor and wretched : All their children are the children of their sovereign ! Her masters, astonished at these exclamations, In rage struck her on the face ; And said, “ now let your monarch Murasim, With all the renowned heroes of Persia, Collect an innumerable army, And come, if they chose, to thy rescue.” This speech soon reached the great Murtasim, Who immediately published throughout Persia, That all, who pretended to the name of men, A Should instantly assemble in arms. x When the monarch had completed his mighty preparations. He soo heaped destruction on the heads of his enemies *. “* To release one prisoner from the hand of the foe, a n ry “ * -This story is related by historians, of Mura’sim, the son of Ha’run’avt Ra’syrp, and eighth KfAalif of the house. of Asas. * D’ Herbelot Bibl. Or. 630. 538 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS «¢ If an incomparable army were assembled, «¢ At this moment, when numbers of the Shiahs of Persia « Are prisoners in the hand of cruel men, << And, with their lamentable cries uttered morn and eve, «¢ Have rendered dark and gloomy the azure sky ; « It is acknowledged by the tribe of Shiahs, «© That the king + of KAorasan, the Imam of theage, << Is not considered by the men of Persia <* As less honourable, nor of Jesser fame, than Murasim! ‘«¢ Then, by the mercy and greatness of the creator, “© Vietory is still declared to these soldiers. « Under the auspices of the most merciful of the world, «¢ J have taken ample vengeance on the Afghans. “¢ Aided by the fortune of the Jord of Khorasan, ‘© | have been revenged on the whole tribe of the Afghans. « There remains not in this quarter, at this period, « Aucht of that tribe but their name. “ In this war great actions have been fought, «© The Kezel-bashes * became each a sharp pointed thorn. ., «© From the slaughter that has been made, and the blood that has been shed, «€ Our high polished scimitars have received a purple stain. «© } have taken from the worthless foe, « With my sword, the region from Herat to Candahar t “* By the sacred temple of the lord + of Nejef, «© We will turn with vehemence to that quarter : « Wewill perform a pilgrimage to that threshold : «© And we will afford protection to our prisoners ; se We will take ample vengeance of the Turks. © We will punish { all our foes. ‘© Andin this war, whoever continues inactive, “« Or from baseness remains in pretended ignorance, — «© Both his property and his blood are lawful prize, s¢ He is to be considered out of the pale of the true faith.” —=—= + Att Mausa Reza, the seventh Imam, buried at Meshed. * Persians; literally Redheads, a name given to them, from the circumstance of SHau Ismarz having directed all true followers of the sect of Shiah to wear red caps. + Axi, the son in law of the prophet, whois buried at Neje/. $ Literally, furbish the garments. — —: = OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 5390 Most Noble Lord, if the state of the province of Fars will permit, lose not a moment in repairing to the court of the most exalted prince at Jspahwun; and re- present to him that, as the peace which has been con- cluded will benefit no person whosoever, and canin no light be Viewed as proper or reputable, it neither meets the approbation of the nobles nor the commonalty of the enipire. Bur, if youshould be prevented from moving to the capital, owing to the dispute with the 4rads not being adjusted, let me be instantly informed. If you are able to quell these troubles, it is well. But, if you require aid, make me acquainted; and a detachment of my victorious army shall march to your support. Keep me regularly informed of the news of your quarter. LE:TTE RIL From Navin Suan, to his son Reza Kuri Mirza, giving an account of the conquest of Delhi. r To the exalted and glorious son of our wishes the valiant Reza Kuxr Mi‘rza, who is our vicegerent in fran, the seat of our empire; our most beloved, the pre-eminent in royal rank, allied to us in dignity :—be these glorious commands known. AGREEABLY to our former communications, after the defeat of Afghan prince, Asurer Ati’ Merpan KHAN was appointed our ambassador to the court of Aiindustan for the purpose of rcpresenting to that court, 5 540 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS that as the turbulent Afghans of Candahar and its neigh- bouring provinces were to be considered equal enemies to both states, it would be advisable to appoint an army from Hindustan, to occupy the passes and prevent the retreat of the marauders. The emperor Munam- MED SHAH gave a ready assent, and concluded a treaty to the proposed effect. After the return of our am- bassador, we sent MunammMep Atri Kuan to the court of the Jndian emperor to repeat our instances on this subject, and MunamMep Suan confirmed his former engagement. AFTER our glorious and victorious standards returned to. Candahav, we understood from our conqnering generals employed with a part of our force in the re- duction of the Afghans of Kallat and Ghizni, that Mvwammep Suan had in norespect fulfilled his en- gagements ; and that no appearance of an /mdian army had been seen in that quarter, This intelligence in- duced us to send with the utmost expedition, Mu- HAMMED Kuan TurKomAN tothe court of Delhi to remind the Emperor of /his.promises ; but that sove- reign and his ministers, in dereliction of their former _engageiments, treated the subject with neglect omitted | answering our letters, and even put restraint on the person of our ambassador. In this situation we were impelled to march against. the dfehans of Ghizni and Cabul, and after punishing the refractory mountaineers in that quarter, as we con- sidered the neglect and contempt with which Mv- HAMMED SHAu_ had tehaved, and his conduct to our ambassador irreconcileable with friendship, we marched towards Shihjehinibad. ‘ . é OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 5A1 Or our success in reducing the provinces of Peshavir and taking possession of Lahore, the former seat of empire, our beloved son has already been in- formed. We marched from that city the last day of Shaval, and on Friday the 10th of Zelkdd reached Ambala, forty farfakhs from Shdhjehdnabad. We here learnt, that Mun’ammep Sau had collected from Hindustién and the Dec’ hin a numerous force, and ac- companied by all his nobles, by an army of three hundred thousand men, three hundred pieces of can- non, three or four hundred elephants, and other equip- ments in proportion, had marched from De/hi and ar- rived at Pdnipet, a village twenty farsakhs from Ambala. We immediately directed the superfluous and heavy baggage of our conquering army to be left at Ambala, and advanced to meet the enemy. Mu- HAMMED SHAH also left Pdmipet and marched to Carnél, which is twenty-five farsakhs from Delhi. Iw the course of our march we detached a force of five or six thousand men in advance, who had orders to observe the appearance, numbers and order of MuittammMep Snan’s army. ‘This body, when about two farsakhs from Carnd/, fell in with the advance of the Hindustani army, ‘which amounted to twelve thousand men: these they attacked and _ totally routed ; presenting us with their general and many others, whom they made prisoners. | Tuis signal defeat put a stop to MuHAmMep Suaun’s further advance. He halted at Carnd/ and surrounded his army with a trench: he also con- structed ramparts and batteries on which he placed his cannon. We had: sent a detachment to march to the east 5A2 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS of Mun’amMMeEpD SuHan’s camp and post themselve on the road that led to Delhi: this party received accounts on the night of Tuesday the 15th, that Saaper Kuan, known by his ttle of Burhan ul Mulk, and one of the chief nobles of the empire had reached Ma/abat accompanied by an army of -30,000 men, atrain of artillery, and a number of elephants, and intended forcing a junction with Mu- H'AMMED SHAH. Witsn a view of intercepting this force, we marched our army, two hours before day break, to the east of Carnal, and occupied the road between that village and Panipet. ‘This movement, we hoped, would force Mun’saMMrED SHAH from his entrenchments. About an hour and a half after day light we had passed Carndl, and gained the east side of the Hindustini camp, when the advance guard made prisoners some stragglers of SaapET Kuan’s party, from whose information we learnt, that that general had succeeded in his design of forming a junction with the emperor; in whose camp he had arrived at ten o'clock the preceding night. . On this intelligence we were pleased to order our royal tents to be pitched on the ground which we then occupied, opposite to the camp of MunamMep Suan, from whom we were distant about one farsakh. As the junction of Saaper Kuan had been the cause of MuHAMMED SuAn’s delays, he conceived on that event his appointments to be complete; and, leaving two thirds of his cannon for the protection of his camp, he advanced with a great part of his army, a third of his artillery, and a number of his elephants, at twelve o'clock the same day, half a farsakh in the OF NADIR SHAH, &c., 5A3 direction of our royal army; and drew up _his troops in order of battle. Placing himself in the centre of the advanced lines, he stationed the remainder of his troops in therear as a support. ‘Their numbers were incredible. They occupied, as close as they could be drawn up in depth, from the front line to the entrenched camp, a distance of half a farsakh ; and their front was of equal extent. The ground was every where dark with their numbers, and to judge from appearance, we should suppose they were ten or twelve times more numerous than the army of the Abdal Gardoghly. We, whose only wishes were for such a day, after appointing guards for our camp and invoking the support of a bouutiful creator, mounted and advanced to give battle. For two complete hours the battle raged with violence, and a heavy fire from cannon and musquetry was kept up. After that, by the aid of the Almighty, our lion-hunting heroes broke the enemy’s line, and chaced them from the field of action, dispersing them in every direction. SaapetT Kuan mounted on his state elephant, his Nisua Mun’amMep. Kuan and other relations, fell prisoners into our hands. Samsa’m Axti Kuaw Davran Amir uL Omra Bana’per, the first minister of the empire, was wounded. One of his sons, with his brother Muzerer KuAn, was slain; and another . of his sons, Mix Aa’sH’ve, was taken prisoner. He _ himself died the following day of his wounds. Wastt1 Kuan, the commander of the emperor’s body guard, Swap’ar Kaan, Amrr Kutt Kaan, Air Munammes Kuan, Mir Husen Kiran, 544A TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS Kua’sa AsHrer Kuan, Ati-yAr Kuan, A’AKIL Bec Kuan, Suanp’ap Kuan Afghan, AnMED ALI Kuan, Razin Rar Kuan, commander of the artil- lery, as also Suir Kuat’v, with about three hundred other nobles and leaders, of whom fifteen were com- manders of seven thousand, of four and of three thou- sand, were slain. Mvuw’amMep Suan, with Nizam ut Mork, ruler of the seven provinces of the Dee hin, and a chief noble of the empire, Kamer vt Din Kuan, chief vizier, and some other nobles of less note, protected by a covering party which had been left, made good their retreat within the entrenchments, and escaped the shock of our victorious swords Tuts action lasted two hours; and for two hours and a half more were our conquering soldiers engaged in pursuit. When one hour of the day remained, the field was entirely cleared of the enemy; and as the entrenchments of their camp were strong, and the fortifications formidable, we would not permit our army to assault it. An immense treasure, a numberof grand elephants, the artillery of the emperor, and great spoils of every description, were the reward of our victory. Upwards of twenty thousand of the enemy were slain on the field of battle, and a much greater number were made prisoners. IMMEDIATELY after this action, we surrounded the emperor’s camp, and took measures to prevent all com- munication with the adjacent country, preparing at the same time our cannon and mortars to level with the ground the fortification which had been erected. VR val - ee : OF NADIR SHAH, &c, 545 As the utmost confusion reigned in the imperial camp, and all discipline was abandoned, the emperor, ‘compelled by irresistible necessity, after the lapse of one day, sent NizAn vuxi-Muxx, on Thursday the 17th, to our royal camp; and the day following Mun’AMMeD Sau himself, attended by his nobles, came to our heaven-like presence, in an afflicted state. WHEN the emperor was approaching, as we are our- selves of a Turkoman family, and Mun’ammMep SHaw is a Trkoman, and the lineal descendant of the noble house of GaurGa’n’1; we sent our dear son Nasir “Aur Kian beyond the bounds of our camp to meet him. Theemperor entered our tents, and delivered over to him the signet of our empire. He remained that day a cuestin our royal tent. ConsIDERING our affinity as Turkomans, and also teflecting on the favors and honors that befitred the dignity and majesty of a king of kings; we bestowed such upon the emperor, and ordered his royal pavilions, his family and his nobles, to be preserved; and we have established him in a manner equal to his great dignity. At this time, the Emperor with his family and alli the lords of Hindustan who marched from camp, are arrived at De/hi : and on Thursday the 29th of Z/kdd, we moved our glorious standard towards that capital. Ir is our royal intention, from the consideration of the high birth of Mun’amMep Suan, of his descent from the house of Gaurea’n’r, and of his affinity, to us _ a Turkoman, to fix him on the throne of empire, and » _ to place the crown of royalty upon his head, » Worm. Na 5A6 TRANSLATIONS OF: TWO LETTERS Praise be to God, glory to the most high, who ha: granted us the power to perform such action ! For thi great grace which we have received from the Almighty, we must ever remain grateful. Gop has made the seven great seas like unto the vapour of the desart, beneath our glorious and con queringe footstepsand those of our faithful and victoriou heroes. He has made, in our victorious mind, thi thrones of kings, and the deep ocean of earthly glon more despicable than the light bubble that floats or the surface of the wave ; and no doubt his extraordinary mercy, which he bas now shown, will be evident to al mankind. As we have taken possession of a great number o cannon, we send 26,000 Moghals of Iran and Turan with a detachment from our own conquering army, anc a body of artillery with some large elephants, whon we have directed to march to Cabu/. No doubt ou sons will inform us of the affairs of that quarter. ArTER the arrival of your letter, we will either orde the detachment which we have sent, to proceed te Balkh or to go to Herat. We have appointed the high in dignity Aa‘’suun Kuan to march to Ba/kh, after the Nau rox, (22d March) which he no doubt will do. ConsIDER our glorious victory as derived from the bounty of the creator of fortune beyond all calculation. Make copies of this our royal mandate and disperse them over our empire, that the well wishers of our throne may be happy and rejoice, and our secret enemies be dejected, and confounded. Be you con- CF NADIR SHAH, &c. . 547 stantly employed in adorning and arranging your go- vernment ; placing your hopes in the favor of the most high, so that by the blessing of God, all those, whether near or distant, that are not reconciled to our glorious state, and are brooding mischief, may be caught in their own snares; and all real friends, who are under our dominion, may attain their wishes, and prosper under the auspices of our munificent goyern- ment. Dated 20th Zilkéd, 1115 Hejira, Shahjehanabad or Dehli. END OF THE TENTH VOLUME. DIRECTIONS TO THE BINDER. - Plate 1. to front — Af. —. 2M. = See WV, Seer A, — B. oi en ee Table I. — 4]. If. IV. and Plate (VI. — Printed by S. Rovusszau, Wood Street, Spa Fields. Ve — Pag 226 124 141 209 385 393: - . aly 9 A333 AAD 515. & 517 517 tL. - SS VN VANAN e< e \ x Ex % ‘X \ x ay \ Ni < Ce UNL ' NaN AN A YY BENS ar SOON ROAM